100% found this document useful (1 vote)

2K views

Manual F5 Keb

Manual inversor de frequência Keb

Uploaded by

Hill Silva

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (1 vote)

2K views

Manual F5 Keb

Manual inversor de frequência Keb

Uploaded by

Hill Silva

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 372

APPLICATION MANUAL

KEB COMBIVERT F5-MULTI / SERVO 2.6

Charge 40,- EURO

Part.No.: 00.F5.MEA-K260 02/2003

Introduction General

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction This chapter shall allow a fast access to the wanted information. It consists of contents,
index and search criterion.
1

Here the inverter and its features as well as the operating conditions and application
2. Summary purpose are described.

3. Hardware Description of hardware, technical data of the inverter as well as connection of power
and control terminals.

4. Operation The basic operation of the KEB COMBIVERT like password input, parameter and set
selection.

5. Parameter A list of all parameters classified according to parameter groups. The parameter
description comprises addresses, value ranges and references with regard to the
functions for which they are used.

6. Functions To make the programming easier all inverter functions and the parameters belonging
to it are comprised in this chapter.

7. Start-up Gives support with regard to the initial start-up and shows possibilities and techniques
for the optimization of the drive.

8. Special Operation Describes special operating modes, like e.g. DC-coupling.

9. Error Assistance Avoidance of errors, evaluation of error messages and elimination of the causes.

10. Project Planning Serves as aid for the lay out design during the planning stage.

11. Networks Survey of the possible interconnection of the KEB COMBIVERT in existing networks.

12. Annex Everything that didn’t fit anywhere else or what we didn’t think of earlier.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S 14.01.03 1 1 3

Introduction

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1.1.1 Table of Contents ................... 7

1. Introduction 1.1 General
1.1.2 Preface ................................. 13

2. Summary

3. Hardware

4. Operation

5. Parameter

6. Functions

7. Start-up

8. Special Operation

9. Error Assistance

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S 14.01.03 1 1 5

Introduction General

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction
1.1 General 1
1.1.1 Table of Contents

1. Introduction ............................................................................................ 1.1.7

1.1 General ................................................................................................ 1.1.7
1.1.1 Table of Contents ................................................................ 1.1.7
1.1.2 Preface .............................................................................. 1.1.13
2. Overview ................................................................................................. 2.1.3
2.1 Product Description ........................................................................... 2.1.3
2.1.1 Features of KEB COMBIVERT ............................................ 2.1.3
2.1.2 Function Principle ............................................................... 2.1.3
2.1.3 Application as directed ........................................................ 2.1.4
2.1.4 Type Code ........................................................................... 2.1.5
2.1.5 Validity of Specifications ..................................................... 2.1.6
2.1.6 Unit Sizes 230V-Class ........................................................ 2.1.6
2.1.7 Unit Sizes 400V-Class ........................................................ 2.1.8
2.1.8 Overload curve .................................................................. 2.1.13
2.1.9 Overload protection in the lower speed range ................... 2.1.13
3. Hardware ................................................................................................ 3.1.3
3.1 Control Units....................................................................................... 3.1.3
3.1.1 Survey ................................................................................. 3.1.3
3.1.2 Housing Size D - E .............................................................. 3.1.4
3.1.3 Housing Size >= G .............................................................. 3.1.4
3.1.4 Terminal strip X2A ............................................................... 3.1.5
3.1.5 Connection of the control ..................................................... 3.1.6
3.1.6 Digital inputs ...................................................................... 3.1.6
3.1.7 Analog inputs ...................................................................... 3.1.6
3.1.8 Voltage Input / External Power Supply ................................ 3.1.7
3.1.9 Digital Outputs ..................................................................... 3.1.7
3.1.10 Relay Outputs ...................................................................... 3.1.7
3.1.11 Analog Outputs .................................................................... 3.1.8
3.1.12 Voltage Output ..................................................................... 3.1.8
4. Operation ................................................................................................ 4.1.3
4.1 Fundamentals ..................................................................................... 4.1.3
4.1.1 Parameters, ......................................................................... 4.1.3
4.1.2 Selection of a Parameter ..................................................... 4.1.4
4.1.3 Adjustment of Parameter Values .......................................... 4.1.4
4.1.4 ENTER-Parameter .............................................................. 4.1.4
4.1.5 Non-programmable Parameters .......................................... 4.1.5
4.1.6 Resetting of Error Messages ............................................... 4.1.5
4.1.8 Acknowledgement of Status Signals ................................... 4.1.5
4.1.7 Resetting of Peak Values ..................................................... 4.1.5
4.2 Password Structure ........................................................................... 4.2.3
4.2.1 Password Levels ................................................................. 4.2.3

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S 14.01.03 1 1 7

Introduction General

4.2.2 Passwords ........................................................................... 4.2.4

4.2.3 Changing of Password Level ............................................... 4.2.4
4.3 CP-Parameter ..................................................................................... 4.3.3
4.3.1 Operation in CP-Mode ......................................................... 4.3.3
4.3.2 Factory Setting .................................................................... 4.3.4
4.3.3 Password Input .................................................................... 4.3.6
4.3.4 Operating Display................................................................ 4.3.6
4.3.5 Basic Adjustment of the Drive ............................................. 4.3.8
4.3.6 Special Adjustments.......................................................... 4.3.14
4.3.7 Factory Settings ................................................................. 4.3.22
4.4 Drive-Mode .......................................................................................... 4.4.3
4.4.1 Adjustment Possibilities ...................................................... 4.4.3
4.4.2 Display and Keyboard ......................................................... 4.4.3
4.4.3 Setpoint Display /Setpoint Input .......................................... 4.4.3
4.4.4 Rotation Setting ................................................................... 4.4.4
4.4.5 Start / Stop / Run ................................................................. 4.4.4
4.4.6 Leaving the Drive-Mode ...................................................... 4.4.5
4.4.7 Further Settings ................................................................... 4.4.5
5. Parameter ............................................................................................... 5.1.3
5.1 Parameter ............................................................................................ 5.1.3
5.1.1 Parameter Groups ............................................................... 5.1.3
5.1.2 F5-MULTI Control ................................................................ 5.1.4
5.1.3 F5-SERVO Control .............................................................. 5.1.4
5.1.4 F5-A-SERVO Control .......................................................... 5.1.4
5.1.5 Parameter Listing ................................................................ 5.1.5
6. Functional Description ......................................................................... 6.1.3
6.1 Operating and Unit Data .................................................................... 6.1.3
6.1.1 Summary of ru-Parameter .................................................... 6.1.3
6.1.2 Summary of In-Parameter .................................................... 6.1.4
6.1.3 Summary of Sy-Parameter................................................... 6.1.4
6.1.4 Explanation to Parameter Description ................................. 6.1.5
6.1.5 Description of ru-Parameter ................................................. 6.1.6
6.1.6 Description of In-Parameter ............................................... 6.1.21
6.1.7 Description of Sy (System) - Parameter ............................. 6.1.25
6.2 Analog In- and Outputs ...................................................................... 6.2.3
6.2.1 Summary Description Analog Inputs ................................... 6.2.3
6.2.2 Interface Selection (An.0; An.10) ......................................... 6.2.4
6.2.4 Save Mode (An.2; An.12; An.22) .......................................... 6.2.5
6.2.5 Input Selection (An.3; An.13; An.23) .................................... 6.2.5
6.2.3 Interference Suppression Filter (An.1; An.11; An.21) ........... 6.2.5
6.2.6 Zero Point Hysteresis (An.4; An.14; An.24) .......................... 6.2.6
6.2.7 Amplifier of the Input Characterstic ...................................... 6.2.7
6.2.8 Lower and Upper Limit ........................................................ 6.2.8
6.2.9 Selection Set Point-/Auxiliary Input (An.30) ......................... 6.2.9
6.2.10 Brief Description Analog Outputs ...................................... 6.2.10
6.2.11 Output signals ................................................................... 6.2.11
Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis
© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
1 1 8 14.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
General Introduction

6.2.12 Analog Output / Functions (An.31/An.36/An.41) ............... 6.2.11

6.2.13 Analog Output / Display..................................................... 6.2.12 1
6.2.14 Gain of Output Characteristic............................................. 6.2.12
6.2.15 Period ANOUT3 (An.46) .................................................... 6.2.13
6.2.16 ANOUT 1...4 Digital Settings (An.32/37/42/48) ................. 6.2.13
6.2.17 Used Parameters .............................................................. 6.2.14
6.3 Digital In- and Outputs .......................................................................... 6.3.3
6.3.1 Summary Description Digital Inputs .................................... 6.3.3
6.3.2 Input Signals PNP / NPN (di.0) ........................................... 6.3.3
6.3.3 Setting of Digital Inputs by Software (di.1, di.2) ................... 6.3.4
6.3.4 Terminal Status (ru.21) ........................................................ 6.3.5
6.3.5 Digital Filter (di.3) ................................................................ 6.3.5
6.3.6 Inversion of Inputs (di.4) ...................................................... 6.3.5
6.3.7 Edge-triggering (di.5) ........................................................... 6.3.5
6.3.8 Strobe-dependent Inputs (di.6, di.7, di.8) ............................. 6.3.6
6.3.9 Input Status (ru.22) .............................................................. 6.3.8
6.3.10 Reset/Input Selection and Edge Evaluation (di.9 / di.10) .... 6.3.8
6.3.11 Assignment of the Inputs ..................................................... 6.3.8
6.3.12 Summary Description - Digital Outputs.............................. 6.3.11
6.3.13 Output Signals ................................................................... 6.3.12
6.3.14 Output filter (do.43, do.44) .................................................. 6.3.12
6.3.15 Switching Conditions (do.0...do.7) ..................................... 6.3.13
6.3.16 Inverting of Switching Conditions for Flags (do.8...do.15) .. 6.3.16
6.3.17 Selection of Switching Conditions for Flags (do.16...do.23)6.3.16
6.3.18 Linking the Switching Conditions for Flags (do.24) ........... 6.3.16
6.3.19 Inverting of Flags (do.25...do.32) ....................................... 6.3.17
6.3.20 Selection of Flags (do.33...do.40) ...................................... 6.3.17
6.3.21 Linking the Flags (do.41) ................................................... 6.3.17
6.3.22 Inversion of Outputs (do.42) ............................................... 6.3.18
6.3.23 Output Terminal Status (ru.25) ........................................... 6.3.18
6.3.24 Hardware output allocation (do.51) .................................... 6.3.18
6.3.25 Programming Example ...................................................... 6.3.19
6.3.26 Used Parameters ............................................................... 6.3.20
6.4 Setpoint-, Rotation- and Ramp Adjustment ..................................... 6.4.3
6.4.1 Brief Description .................................................................. 6.4.3
6.4.2 Reference source oP.0 ........................................................ 6.4.4
6.4.3 Rotation Source oP.1 ........................................................... 6.4.6
6.4.4 Fixed values (oP.18...23) ..................................................... 6.4.9
6.4.5 Setpoint Limits ................................................................... 6.4.11
6.4.6 Setpoint Calculation .......................................................... 6.4.12
6.4.7 Ramp generator ................................................................ 6.4.13
6.4.8 Limiter (oP.40 / oP.41) ........................................................ 6.4.15
6.4.9 Ramp with constant time ................................................... 6.4.15
6.4.9 Used Parameters ............................................................... 6.4.18
6.5 Voltage-/Frequency Characteristic Adjustment ............................... 6.5.3
6.5.1 Control Type (ud.2) and Max Frequency Mode (only F5-B).. 6.5.3

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S 14.01.03 1 1 9

Introduction General

6.5.2 Rated frequency (uF.0) and Boost (uF.1) ............................. 6.5.4

6.5.3 Additional Rated Point (uF.2/uF.3) ....................................... 6.5.4
6.5.4 Delta Boost (uF.4/uF.5) ........................................................ 6.5.4
6.5.5 Voltage Stabilization (uF.9) .................................................. 6.5.5
6.5.6 Maximal voltage mode (uF.10)............................................. 6.5.6
6.5.7 Switching Frequency (uF.11) ............................................... 6.5.6
6.5.8 Used Parameters ................................................................. 6.5.7
6.6 Motor Data and Controller ................................................................. 6.6.3
6.6.1 Motor Name Plate................................................................ 6.6.3
6.6.2 Motor Data DASM................................................................ 6.6.3
6.6.3 Motor Adaption (Fr.10) ......................................................... 6.6.6
6.6.4 Torque Limitation ................................................................. 6.6.7
6.6.5 Flux Lowering Calculation ................................................... 6.6.8
6.6.6 Motor Data DSM .................................................................. 6.6.9
6.6.7 Motor Data Parameter ....................................................... 6.6.10
6.6.8 Controller Structure ........................................................... 6.6.11
6.6.9 Current Control (Torque Control) ....................................... 6.6.12
6.6.10 Flux / Rotor Adaption ......................................................... 6.6.13
6.6.11 Speed Control ................................................................... 6.6.14
6.6.12 Torque Control ................................................................... 6.6.15
6.6.13 Used Parameters ............................................................... 6.6.16
6.7 Protective Functions .......................................................................... 6.7.3
6.7.1 Ramp Stop and Hardware Current Limit.............................. 6.7.3
6.7.2 Current Limit Constant Run (Stall-Function) ........................ 6.7.5
6.7.3 Automatic Restart and Speed Search ................................. 6.7.7
6.7.4 Dead Time Compensation uF.18 ......................................... 6.7.9
6.7.5 Base-Block Time (uF.12) and Voltage Level (uF.13) ............ 6.7.9
6.7.6 Response to Errors or Warning Signals ............................... 6.7.9
6.7.7 Quick Stop (Pn.58...60) ..................................................... 6.7.13
6.7.8 Motor Protection Mode ...................................................... 6.7.15
6.7.9 GTR7-Control .................................................................... 6.7.19
6.7.10 Special Functions.............................................................. 6.7.20
6.8 Parameter Sets ................................................................................... 6.8.3
6.8.1 Not Programmable Parameters ........................................... 6.8.3
6.8.2 Security-Parameters ............................................................ 6.8.3
6.8.3 System-Parameters ............................................................. 6.8.3
6.8.4 Indirect and Direct Set Addressing ...................................... 6.8.3
6.8.5 Copying of Parameter Sets via Keyboard (Fr.1) ................... 6.8.4
6.8.6 Copying of Parameter Sets via Bus (Fr.1, Fr.9) .................... 6.8.4
6.8.7 Parameter Set Selection ...................................................... 6.8.5
6.8.8 Locking of Parameter Sets................................................... 6.8.8
6.8.9 Parameter Set ON/Off Delay (Fr.5, Fr.6) ............................... 6.8.8
6.8.10 Used Parameters ................................................................. 6.8.9
6.9 Special Functions .............................................................................. 6.9.3
6.9.1 DC-Braking ......................................................................... 6.9.3
6.9.2 Energy Saving Function ...................................................... 6.9.5
Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis
© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
1 1 10 14.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
General Introduction

6.9.3 Motor Potentiometer Function .............................................. 6.9.7

6.9.4 Timer and Counter ............................................................ 6.9.11 1
6.9.5 Brake Control .................................................................... 6.9.15
6.9.6 Power-Off Function ............................................................ 6.9.19
6.9.7 Wobbel Function ............................................................... 6.9.27
6.9.8 Diameter Correction .......................................................... 6.9.29
6.9.9 Positioning Function .......................................................... 6.9.31
6.9.10 Analog setting of parameter values ................................... 6.9.34
6.10 Encoder Interface ............................................................................. 6.10.3
6.10.1 Designs ............................................................................. 6.10.3
6.10.2 Encoder Interface Channel 1 (X3A) ................................... 6.10.4
6.10.3 Encoder Inteface Channel 2 (X3B) .................................... 6.10.5
6.10.4 Power Supply of Encoder .................................................. 6.10.7
6.10.5 Selection of Encoder ......................................................... 6.10.8
6.10.6 Basic Setting ................................................................... 6.10.10
6.10.7 Additional Parameters ..................................................... 6.10.13
6.10.8 Used Parameters ............................................................. 6.10.14
6.11 Positioning and Synchronous Control ........................................... 6.11.3
6.11.1 Synchronous Control ......................................................... 6.11.3
6.11.2 Slave Correction................................................................ 6.11.4
6.11.3 Position Controller ............................................................. 6.11.5
6.11.4 Position Display ................................................................ 6.11.5
6.11.5 Reference Point Approach ................................................ 6.11.6
6.11.6 Reference Point Approach - Examples.............................. 6.11.9
6.11.7 Posi Control ..................................................................... 6.11.12
6.11.8 Position scan ................................................................... 6.11.17
6.11.9 Teach Mode ..................................................................... 6.11.18
6.11.10 Contouring Mode ........................................................... 6.11.19
6.11.11 Used Parameters ............................................................. 6.11.20
6.12 Technology Controller ..................................................................... 6.12.3
6.12.1 The PID Controller ............................................................ 6.12.3
6.12.2 PID Setpoint Value ............................................................ 6.12.5
6.12.3 PID Actual Value ............................................................... 6.12.6
6.12.4 Sample Applications ......................................................... 6.12.7
6.12.5 Used Parameters ............................................................. 6.12.10
6.13 CP-Parameter Definition .................................................................. 6.13.3
6.13.1 Survey ............................................................................... 6.13.3
6.13.2 Assignment of CP-Parameters .......................................... 6.13.4
6.13.3 Example ............................................................................ 6.13.5
6.13.4 Display Standardization .................................................... 6.13.6
6.13.5 Used Parameters ............................................................... 6.13.8
7. Start-up .......................................................................................................... 7.1.3
7.1 Preparatory Measures........................................................................ 7.1.3
7.1.1 After unpacking the Goods .................................................. 7.1.3
7.1.2 Installation and Connection ................................................. 7.1.3
7.1.3 Checklist prior to Start-up .................................................... 7.1.4

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S 14.01.03 1 1 11

Introduction General

7.2 Initial Start-up ...................................................................................... 7.2.3

7.2.1 Start-up F5-MULTI ............................................................... 7.2.3
7.2.2 Start-up F5-SERVO ............................................................. 7.2.4
7.2.3 Adjustment Assistance Speed Controller ............................ 7.2.5
8. Special Operations ................................................................................ 8.1.3
8.1 Temperature Control .......................................................................... 8.1.3
8.1.1 Parameter Description ......................................................... 8.1.3
8.1.2 Possibilities for a Temperature Control ................................ 8.1.4
8.1.3 Connection to the Cooling System ...................................... 8.1.5
8.1.4 Inverter Protection Function „Overheat“ ............................... 8.1.6
8.1.5 Information about Water Cooling ......................................... 8.1.7
8.1.6 Operation Example.............................................................. 8.1.8
9. Error Assistance .................................................................................... 9.1.3
9.1 Troubleshooting ................................................................................. 9.1.3
9.1.1 General ............................................................................... 9.1.3
9.1.2 Error Messages and their Cause ......................................... 9.1.3
10. Project Planning .................................................................................. 10.1.3
10.1 General Design ................................................................................. 10.1.3
10.1.1 Control Cabinet Design Calculation .................................. 10.1.3
10.1.2 Design of Braking Resistors .............................................. 10.1.4
10.1.3 Cable and Fuses ............................................................... 10.1.6
11. Networks ............................................................................................... 11.1.3
11.1 Network Components ...................................................................... 11.1.3
11.1.1 Available Hardware ........................................................... 11.1.3
11.1.2 RS232-Cable PC /Operator 00.58.025-001D .................... 11.1.3
11.1.3 HSP5-Cable PC / Control Board 00.F5.0C0-0001 ........... 11.1.3
11.1.4 Interface-Operator 00.F5.060-2000 ................................... 11.1.4
11.1.5 Profibus-DP-Operator 00.F5.060-3000.............................. 11.1.5
11.1.6 InterBus Operator 00.F5.060-4000 .................................... 11.1.6
11.1.7 CanOpen Operator 00.F5.060-5000 .................................. 11.1.7
11.1.8 Sercos Operator 00.F5.060-6000 ...................................... 11.1.8
11.2. Bus Parameters ................................................................................ 11.2.3
11.2.1 Adjustment of Inverter Address (Sy.6)................................ 11.2.3
11.2.2 Baud Rate ext. Bus (Sy.7) .................................................. 11.2.3
11.2.3 Baud Rate int. Bus (Sy.11) ................................................. 11.2.3
11.2.4 Watchdog-Time (Pn.6) ....................................................... 11.2.3
11.2.5 Response to E.bus (Pn.5) ................................................. 11.2.3
11.2.6 HSP5 Watchdog Time (sY.9) ............................................. 11.2.3
11.2.7 Control and Status Word ................................................... 11.2.4
11.2.8 Speed Setting via Bus ....................................................... 11.2.5
11.2.9 Used Parameters ............................................................... 11.2.6
12. Annex .................................................................................................... 12.1.3
12.1 Search and Find ............................................................................... 12.1.3
12.1.1 Index ................................................................................. 12.1.3
12.1.2 KEB- Worldwide ................................................................ 12.1.7
12.1.3 Domestic Representations ................................................ 12.1.9
Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis
© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
1 1 12 14.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
General Introduction

1.1.2 Preface Who shall read all this?

Everybody who is entrusted with the development and construction of applications.
He who knows the extensive programming possibilities of the COMBIVERT, can 1
save external controls and expensive cabling already in the planning stage of a
machine simply by using the unit as active control element. This manual is not a
replacement of the documentation accompanying the unit, it serves only as
completion.

1000 and one application...

and if possible with one unit. Who does not know this demand from purchasing
departments, production or service. We have taken this request very seriously
and developed a series with open programming, which can be adapted to the
different applications with PC or manually.

Nobody can handle this...

some sceptics may say. But we have found a solution to this too. Once the
development stage of a machine is completed only a few adjustment possibilities
are needed on the inverter and in some cases even none at all. So why should all
parameters still be visible? Said and done, by defining an own menu only selected
parameters are visible. This makes the handling much easier, simplifies the user
documentation and improves the safety of operation against unauthorized access
(see picture 1.1.2).

Picture 1.1.2

Entire parameter pool

User menu
(CP-Parameters)

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S 14.01.03 1 1 13

Introduction

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction

2.1.1 Features of
2. Summary 2.1 Product Description KEB COMBIVERT .................. 3
2.1.2 Function Principle ................... 3
2.1.3 Application as directed ........... 4
2.1.4 Type Code .............................. 5
3. Hardware 2.1.5 Validity of Specifications ......... 6
2.1.6 Unit Sizes 230V-Class ............ 6
2.1.7 Unit Sizes 400V-Class ............ 8
2.1.8 Overload curve ..................... 13
4. Operation 2.1.9 Overload protection in the lower
speed range ......................... 13

5. Parameter

6. Functions

7. Start-up

8. Special Operation

9. Error Assistance

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

1
All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 15.01.03 2 1 1
Summary Product Description

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Autoboost
2. Overview
Prog. Operator menu
2.1 Product Description DC-braking 8 parameter sets
PID-controller 14 parameter groups
2.1.1 Features of KEB Speed search
COMBIVERT Software In-/Outputs 2
Encoder interface
Jogging-function (prog.) KEB 2 prog. relay outputs
Electr. motor protection COMBIVERT 8 prog. digital inputs
Slip compensation 2 prog. analog inputs
HSP5 interface 2 prog. digital output
Energy saving function
2 prog. analog output
Power-Off function
Protective equipment Hardware current limit
Prog. filter for analog and digital inputs
Adjustable balancing of the ramps
Hour meter

2.1.2 Function The power circuit of a frequency inverter consists basically of a mains rectifier, the
DC-link and an inverter at the output. The mains rectifier consists of an uncontrolled
Principle
single or three-phase bridge connection, the single-phase design is restricted to small
powers. It converts the AC-voltage of the mains into a DC-voltage, which is smoothed
by the DC-link capacitor, thus in the ideal case (inverter unloaded) the DC-link is
charged with a voltage of UZK = √2 . UN.
Since during the charging of the DC-link capacitor very high currents flow for a short
time which would lead to the tripping of the input fuses or even to the destruction of
the mains rectifier, the charging current must be limited to a permissible level. This is
achieved by using an inrush current limiting resistor in series to the capacitor. After
the charging of the capacitor is completed the limiting resistor is bridged, for example,
by a relay and is therefore only active at the switch-on of the inverter.
As the smoothing of the DC-link voltage requires a large capacity, the capacitor still
has a high voltage for some time after the disconnection of the inverter from the
mains.
The actual task of the frequency inverter, to produce an output voltage variable in
frequency and amplitude for the control of the three-phase AC motor, is taken over by
the converter at the output. It makes available a 3-phase output voltage according to
the principle of the pulse-width modulation, which generates a sinusoidal current at
the three-phase asynchronous motor

Picture 2.1.2 Block diagram of an inverter power circuit

U
L1
UN ~ R UZK
=
V
L2 C
(L3)
= ~ W

Mains rectifier DC-link Converter Motor

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

3
All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 15.01.03 2 1 3
Summary Product Description

2.1.3 Application as directed

The KEB COMBIVERT is a frequency inverter with DC-voltage

link. It works according to the principle of the pulse-width
modulation and serves exclusively for the stepless speed
control of three-phase AC motors.
The unit has been developed subject to the relevant safety
standards and is manufactured with the highest demands on
quality. Condition for an unobjectionable operation is the
function-conform configuring of the drive and correct transport
and storage as well as careful installation and connection.

The operation of other electric consumers is prohibited and

can lead to the destruction of the units as well as consequential
damages as a result from it.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

2.1.4 Type Code

10.F5.G1B–3200

at FI: Cooling at Servos: motor cooling

0: Standard 0: Self-cooling 2
1: Flat rear 1: External cooling
2: Water-cooled
3: Convection

Encoder interface type see control part

0: no interface 5: Resolver a. SSI A: Ink.-Input a. Initiator F: Hiperface a. Ink.-Outp.
1: Ink.-Input a. Ink.-I/O 6: Hiperface a. SSI B: Resolver a. Initiator G: Ink.-Input a. Ink.-Inp.
2: Resolver a. Ink.-I/O 7: Ink.-Input a. Tacho C: Hiperface a. Initiator H: Resolver a. Ink.-Inp.
3: Hiperface a. Ink.-I/O 8: Resolver a. Tacho D: Ink.-Input a. Ink.-Outp. I: Hiperface a. Ink.-Inp.
4: Ink.-Input a. SSI 9: Hiperface a. Tacho E: Resolver a. Ink.-Outp.

at FI: Switching frequency / max. short time current / OC-tripping current

0: 2 kHz/125%/150% 5: 4 kHz/150%/180% A: 8 kHz/180%/216% F: 16 kHz/200%/240%
1: 4 kHz/125%/150% 6: 8 kHz/150%/180% B: 16 kHz/180%/216% G: 2 kHz/400%/480%
2: 8 kHz/125%/150% 7: 16 kHz/150%/180% C: 2 kHz/200%/240% H: 4 kHz/400%/480%
3: 16 kHz/125%/150% 8: 2 kHz/180%/216% D: 4 kHz/200%/240% I: 8 kHz/400%/480%
4: 2 kHz/150%/180% 9: 4 kHz/180%/216% E: 8 kHz/200%/240% K: 16 kHz/400%/480%

at Servos: motor speed

1: 1500 rpm 2: 2000 rpm 3: 3000 rpm 4: 4000 rpm 6: 6000 rpm

Input identification
0: 1ph 230V AC/DC 5: 400V DC A: 6ph 400V AC
1: 3ph 230V AC/DC 6: 1ph 230V AC Z: 230V AC or AC/DC
2: 1/3ph 230V AC/DC 7: 3ph 230V AC Y: 400V AC or AC/DC
3: 3ph 400V AC/DC 8: 1/3ph 230V AC W: 230V DC
4: 230V DC 9: 3ph 400V AC V: 400V DC

Housing type A, B, D, E, G, H, R, U, W

Accessory
0: without 4: integrated PFC 2)
1: GTR 7 1) 5: GTR 7 1), integrated PFC 2)
2: integrated filter 6: integrated filter , integrated PFC 2)
3: GTR 7 1), integrated filter 7: GTR 7 1), integrated filter, integrated PFC 2)

Control type
B: BASIC (controlled frequency inverter with standard function)
G: GENERAL (controlled frequency inverter with enhanced function)
M: MULTI (regulated, field-oriented frequency inverter for three-phase asynchronous motors)
S: SERVO (regulated frequency inverter for synchronous motors)

Series F5

at FI in the 1. and 2. place: unit size

at Servos: motor identification / motor dimension wide

1) GTR 7: brake transistor

2) PFC: Power Factor Control

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

5
All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 15.01.03 2 1 5
Summary Product Description

2.1.5 Validity of The following technical specifications refer to 2-/4-pole standard motors. In case of
Specifications different pole numbers the frequency inverter must be dimensioned for the rated
motor current. With regard to special or medium frequency motors, please contact
KEB.
Site altitude max. 2000 m. For altitudes of 1000 m or more above N.N. a power reduction
of 1 % per 100m must be taken into account.
2.1.6 Unit Sizes 230V-Class
Inverter Size 05 07 09 10 12 13
Housing size A B A B B D B D D E
Phases 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 3 3
Output nominal power [kVA] 0,9 1,6 2,8 4,0 6,6 9,5
Max. rated motor power [kW] 0,37 0,75 1,5 2,2 4,0 5,5
Output nominal current [A] 2,3 4 7 10 16,5 24
Max. short time current 1) [A] 4,1 7,2 12,6 18 29,7 36
OC-tripping current [A] 5,0 8,6 15,1 21,6 35,6 43
Nominal input current [A] 4,6 4,6 3,2 8,0 8,0 5,6 14 9,8 14 9,8 20 14 20 14 23 31
Nominal input current 2) [A] – 3,7 – – 6,4 – – – – –
Real input rated power 2) [kW] – 0,85 – – 1,5 – – – – –
Max. permissible mains fuse (inert) [A] 10 16 10 20 16 20 16 20 16 25 20 25 20 25 35
Rated switching frequency [kHz] 4 16 8 16 16 8 16 8 8
Max. switching frequency [kHz] 4 16 8 16 16 16 16 16
Power loss at nominal operating [W] 30 50 55 65 90 130 105 170 210 290
Power loss at rated operation 2) [W] – 85 – – 130 – – – – –
Stall current at 4kHz 3) [A] 2,3 4 7 10 16,5 24
Stall current at 8kHz 3) [A] 2,3 4 7 10 16,5 24
Stall current at 16kHz 3) [A] – 2,3 – 4 7 8,5 10 10 16,8
Max. heat sink temperature TOH [°C] 90
Motor line cross section 4) [mm²] 1,5 1,5 2,5 1,5 2,5 1,5 2,5 1,5 4 2,5 4 2,5 4 6
Min. braking resistor 5) [Ohm] 100 56 100 56 47 33 27 16
Typ. braking resistor 5) [Ohm] 180 180 100 68 33 27
Max. braking current [A] 4,5 7,5 4,5 7,5 9,5 12 15 25
Overload curve (page appendex) 1
Tightening torque for terminals [Nm] 0,5 1,2
Mains voltage [V] 180...260 ±0 (230 V Nominal voltage)
Mains frequency [Hz] 50 / 60 +/- 2
Output voltage [V] 3 x 0...U Mains (3 x 0...255V 2))
Output frequency [Hz] see Control board
Max.shielded motor line length at 4 kHz 6) [m] 10 30 10 100 100
Max.shielded motor line length at 8 kHz 6) [m] 10 20 10 50 100
Max.shielded motor line length at 16 kHz 6) [m] - 10 - 20 40 100
Storage temperature [°C] -25...70 °C
Operating temperature [°C] -10...45 °C
Model / protective system IP20
Relative humidity max. 95% without condensation
EMC tested according to EN 61800-3
Climatic category 3K3 in accordance with EN 50178
1) With the regulated systems F5-M as well as F5-S 5% are to be subtracted as control reserve
2) This data is only valid for units with integrated PFC (see "unit identification")
3) Max. current before the responding of the OL2-function (only F5-M; F5-S; F5-A)
4) Recommended minimum cross section for rated power and a cable length of upto 100m (copper)
5) This data is only valid for units with internal brake transistor GTR 7 (see "unit identification")
6) At units with integrated filter (see "unit identification"):
up to max. 5m line length and 4kHz operating frequency = Limit Value B (EN 55011)
up to max. 10m line length and 16kHz operating frequency = Limit Value A (EN 55022)
Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis
© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
2 1 6 15.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All Rights reserved
Product Description Summary

Inverter Size 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Housing size E G G H H R R R R R
Phases 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Output nominal power [kVA] 13 19 26 33 40 46 59 71
Max. rated motor power [kW] 7,5 11 15 18,5 22 30 37 45
Output nominal current [A] 33 48 66 84 100 115 145 180 2
Max. short time current 1) [A] 49,5 72 99 126 150 172 217 270
OC-tripping current [A] 59 86 119 151 180 206 261 324
Nominal input current [A] 43 63 86 92 116 126 165 198
Max. permissible mains fuse (inert) [A] 50 80 80 100 160 160 200 315
Rated switching frequency [kHz] 4 16 4 16 16 8 8 8 8 8
Max. switching frequency [kHz] 16 4 16 16 16 8 8 8 8
Power loss at nominal operating [W] 350 330 330 430 550 850 1020 1200 1350 1620
Stall current at 4kHz 2) [A] 33 33 48 53 72,5 92 100 115 145 180
Stall current at 8kHz 2) [A] 24 33 - 53 72,5 84 100 115 145 180
Stall current at 16kHz 2) [A] 16,8 33 - 53 66 50 - - - -
Max. heat sink temperature TOH [°C] 90
Motor line cross section 3) [mm²] 10 25 25 35 50 50 95 95
Min. braking resistor 4) [Ohm] 16 8 8 5,6 5,6 4,7 4,7 3,9 2 2
Typ. braking resistor 4) [Ohm] 20 13 10 7 5,6 4,7 3,9 3,0
Max. braking current [A] 25 50 50 70 70 85 85 102 160 160
Overload curve (page appendex) 1
Tightening torque for terminals [Nm] 1,2 2,5 2,5 6
Mains voltage 5) [V] 180...260 ±0 (230 V Nominal voltage)
Mains frequency [Hz] 50 / 60 +/- 2
Output voltage [V] 3 x 0...U Mains
Output frequency [Hz] see Control board
Max.shielded motor line length [m] 100 50
Storage temperature [°C] -25...70 °C
Operating temperature [°C] -10...45 °C
Model / protective system IP20
Relative humidity max. 95% without condensation
EMC tested according to EN 61800-3
Climatic category 3K3 in accordance with EN 50178

1) With the regulated systems F5-M as well as F5-S 5% are to be subtracted as control reserve
2) This data is only valid for units with integrated PFC (see "unit identification")
3) Max. current before the responding of the OL2-function (only F5-M; F5-S; F5-A)
4) Recommended minimum cross section of the motor wire for rated power and a cable length of upto 100m (copper)
5) This data is only valid for units with internal brake transistor GTR 7 (see "unit identification")

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

7
All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 15.01.03 2 1 7
Summary Product Description

2.1.7 Unit Sizes 400V-Class

Inverter Size 05 07 09 10 12 13 14
Housing size B B B D B D D B D E D E G D E G
Phases 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Output nominal power [kVA] 0,9 1,8 2,8 4,0 6,6 8,3 11
Max. rated motor power [kW] 0,37 0,75 1,5 2,2 4,0 5,5 7,5
Output nominal current [A] 1,3 2,6 4,1 5,8 9,5 12 16,5
Max. short time current 1) [A] 2,3 4,7 7,4 10,4 17 21,6 18 29,7 24,8
OC-tripping current [A] 2,8 5,6 8,9 12,5 21 25,9 21,6 35,6 29,7
Nominal input current [A] 1,8 3,6 6 8 13 17 23
Max. permissible mains fuse (inert) [A] 16 16 16 16 20 25 25
Rated switching frequency [kHz] 16 16 8 8 4 16 4 8 16 4 16 2 8 16
Max. switching frequency [kHz] 16 16 16 16 4 16 16 4 16
Power loss at nominal operating [W] 60 90 80 105 120 140 170 150 185 300 185 250 200 185 320 260
2)
Stall current at 4kHz [A] 1,3 2,6 4,1 5,8 9,5 12 14 16,5
Stall current at 8kHz 2) [A] 1,3 2,6 4,1 5,8 5,2 5,8 - 9,5 9,5 12 - 16,5
2)
Stall current at 16kHz [A] 1,3 2,6 3,5 4,9 3,5 5,8 - 5,8 9,5 5,8 12 - 10 12
Max. heat sink temperature TOH [°C] 90
Motor line cross section 3) [mm²] 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 2,5 4 4
4)
Min. braking resistor [Ohm] 390 120 120 82 82 56 39 50 56 39
Typ. braking resistor 4) [Ohm] 620 620 390 270 150 110 85
Max. braking current [A] 2,2 7,5 7,5 10 10 15 21 15 15 21
Overload curve (page appendex) 1
Tightening torque for terminals [Nm] 0,5 1,2 0,5 1,2
Mains voltage 5) [V] 305...500 ±0 (400 V Nominal voltage)
Mains frequency [Hz] 50 / 60 +/- 2
Output voltage [V] 3 x 0...U Mains
Output frequency [Hz] see Control board
Max.shielded motor line length at 4 kHz [m] 10 10 100 100 50 100 100 100
Max.shielded motor line length at 8 kHz [m] 8 8 30 50 100 - 100 100 - 100
Max.shielded motor line length at 16 kHz [m] 4 5 10 10 20 - 100 100 - 100
Storage temperature [°C] -25...70 °C
Operating temperature [°C] -10...45 °C
Model / protective system IP20
Relative humidity max. 95% without condensation
EMC tested according to EN 61800-3
Climatic category 3K3 in accordance with EN 50178

1) With the regulated systems F5-M as well as F5-S 5% are to be subtracted as control reserve.
2) Max. current before the responding of the OL2-function (only F5-M; F5-S; F5-A)
3) Recommended minimum cross section for rated power and a cable length of upto 100m (copper)
4) This data is only valid for units with internal brake transistor GTR 7 (see "unit identification")
5) At mains voltage ≥ 460V multiply the nominal current with factor 0,86.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Inverter Size 15 16 17 18 19
Housing size E G H E G H G H H R H R
Phases 3 3 3 3 3
Output nominal power [kVA] 17 23 29 35 42
Max. rated motor power [kW] 11 15 18,5 22 30
Output nominal current [A] 24 33 42 50 60 2
Max. short time current 1) [A] 36 49,5 63 75 90
OC-tripping current [A] 43 59 75 90 108
Nominal input current [A] 31 43 55 65 66
Max. permissible mains fuse (inert) [A] 35 50 50 63 80 80
Rated switching frequency [kHz] 4 8 16 2 8 16 4 8 8 16 4 8
Max. switching frequency [kHz] 16 4 16 16 16 16
Power loss at nominal operating [W] 350 290 360 330 310 490 360 470 610 850 540 750
Stall current at 4kHz 2) [A] 24 27 33 42 50 60
Stall current at 8kHz 2) [A] 16 19 24 - 21,5 33 21,4 30 45 50 39 60
Stall current at 16kHz 2) [A] 10 8,4 15 - 9,5 20 - 13,5 20 40 18 27
Max. heat sink temperature TOH [°C] 90
Motor line cross section 3) [mm²] 6 10 10 16 25 25
Min. braking resistor 4) [Ohm] 39 22 25 22 25 22 13 9 13 9
Typ. braking resistor 4) [Ohm] 56 42 30 20 15
Max. braking current [A] 21 37 32 30 37 30 37 63 88 63 88
Overload curve (page appendex) 1
Tightening torque for terminals [Nm] 1,2 2,5 1,2 2,5 1,2 2,5 2,5 6 2,5 6
Mains voltage 5) [V] 305...500 ±0 (400 V Nominal voltage)
Mains frequency [Hz] 50 / 60 +/- 2
Output voltage [V] 3 x 0...U Mains
Output frequency [Hz] see Control board
Max. shielded motor line length [m] 100
Storage temperature [°C] -25...70 °C
Operating temperature [°C] -10...45 °C
Model / protective system IP20
Relative humidity max. 95% without condensation
EMC tested according to EN 61800-3
Climatic category 3K3 in accordance with EN 50178

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

9
All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 15.01.03 2 1 9
Summary Product Description

Inverter Size 20 21 22 23 24
Housing size R R R R U R U
Phases 3 3 3 3 3
Output nominal power [kVA] 52 62 80 104 125
Max. rated motor power [kW] 37 45 55 75 90
Output nominal current [A] 75 90 115 150 180
Max. short time current 1) [A] 112 135 172 225 270
OC-tripping current [A] 135 162 207 270 324
Nominal input current [A] 83 100 127 165 198
Max. permissible mains fuse (inert) [A] 100 160 160 200 315
Rated switching frequency [kHz] 8 4 8 4 8 2 8 2 4 8
Max. switching frequency [kHz] 16 16 16 12 8 8
Power loss at nominal operating [W] 900 1000 1100 1200 1500 1300 1900 1700 2000 2400
Stall current at 4kHz 2) [A] 75 90 115 115 127,5 150 144 180
Stall current at 8kHz 2) [A] 75 63 90 80 115 90 150 108 180
Stall current at 16kHz 2) [A] 34 45 54 46 51 - - - -
Max. heat sink temperature TOH [°C] 90
Motor line cross section 3) [mm²] 35 50 50 95 95
Min. braking resistor 4) [Ohm] 9 6 5 4
Typ. braking resistor 4) [Ohm] 12 10 8,6 6,7 5
Max. braking current [A] 88 133 160 200
Overload curve (page appendex) 1
Tightening torque for terminals [Nm] 6 15
5) [V] 305...500 ±0 (400 V Nominal voltage)
Mains voltage
Mains frequency [Hz] 50 / 60 +/- 2
Output voltage [V] 3 x 0...U Mains
Output frequency [Hz] see Control board
Max. shielded motor line length [m] 50
Storage temperature [°C] -25...70 °C
Operating temperature [°C] -10...45 °C -10...40 °C
Model / protective system IP20
Relative humidity max. 95% without condensation
EMC tested according to EN 61800-3
Climatic category 3K3 in accordance with EN 50178

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Inverter Size 25 26 27
Housing size U U U
Phases 3 3 3
Output nominal power [kVA] 145 173 208
Max. rated motor power [kW] 110 132 160
Output nominal current [A] 210 250 300 2
Max. short time current 1) [A] 263 313 375
OC-tripping current [A] 315 375 450
Nominal input current [A] 231 275 330
Max. permissible mains fuse (inert) [A] 315 400 450
Rated switching frequency [kHz] 4 4 2
Max. switching frequency [kHz] 8 8 8
Power loss at nominal operating [W] 2300 2800 3100
Stall current at 4kHz 2) [A] 210 250 240
Stall current at 8kHz 2)
Stall current at 16kHz 2) -
Max. heat sink temperature TOH [°C] 90
Motor line cross section 3) [mm²] 95 120 150
Min. braking resistor 4) [Ohm] 4 4 4
Typ. braking resistor 4) [Ohm] 4,3 4,3 4,3
Max. braking current [A] 200 200 200
Overload curve (page appendex) 2
Tightening torque for terminals [Nm] 25
Mains voltage 5) [V] 305...500 ±0 (400 V Nominal voltage)
Mains frequency [Hz] 50 / 60 +/- 2
Output voltage [V] 3 x 0...U Mains
Output frequency [Hz] see Control board
Max. shielded motor line length [m] 50
Storage temperature [°C] -25...70 °C
Operating temperature [°C] -10...40 °C
Model / protective system IP20
Relative humidity max. 95% without condensation
EMC tested according to EN 61800-3
Climatic category 3K3 in accordance with EN 50178

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

11
All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 15.01.03 2 1 11
Summary Product Description

Inverter Size 28 29 30 31
Housing Size W
Phases 3 2x3 3 2x3 2x3 2x3
Output nominal power [kVA] 256 319 395 436
Max. rated motor power [kW] 200 250 315 355
Output nominal current [A] 370 460 570 630
1)
Max. short time current [A] 463 575 713 787
OC-tripping current [A] 555 690 855 945
Nominal input current [A] 410 2x205 510 2x255 2x315 2x350
Max. permissible mains fuse (inert) 2) [A] 550 315 700 400 450 550
Rated operating frequency [kHz] 2 2 2 2
Max. operating frequency [kHz] 4 2 2 2
Power loss at nominal operating [W] 3500 4200 5100 5600
Stall current at 4kHz 3) [A] 370 – –
Max. heat sink temperature TOH [°C] 90 90 90 60
4)
Motor line cross section [mm²] 2x95 2x150 2x185 2x185
Min. braking resistor 5) [Ohm] 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2
5)
Typ. braking resistor [Ohm] 2,2 1,7 1,3 –
Max. braking current [A] 660 660 660 660
Overload curve 2
Tightening torque for terminals [Nm] 25...30
Mains voltage 6) [V] 305...500 ±0
Mains frequency [Hz] 50 / 60 +/- 2
Output voltage [V] 3 x 0...U mains
Output frequency [Hz] see control card
Max. shielded motor line length [m] 50
Storage temperature [°C] -25...70 °C
Operating temperature [°C] -10...45 °C -10...45 °C 7)
Model / protective system IP20
Relative humidity max. 95% without condensation
EMC tested in accordance with ... EN 61800-3
Climatic category 3K3 according EN 50178

1) With the regulated systems F5-M as well as F5-S 5% are to be subtracted as control reserve.
2) Fuses of type Ferraz Shawmut 6,6 UD Type 31
3) Max. current before the responding of the OL2-function (only F5-M; F5-S; F5-A)
4) Recommended minimum cross section for rated power and a cable length of upto 100m (copper)
5) This data is only valid for units with internal brake transistor (see "unit identification")
6) Rated voltage 400V; at mains voltage ≥ 460V multiply the rated current with factor 0.86.
7) The temperature range is only valid for the control circuit. For the power circuit the temperature range is depending on
the control cabinet installation and the cooling system.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

2.1.8 Overload curve

Curve 1 Curve 2
Time [s] Time [s]

300 300 2
270 270

240 240

210 210

180 180

150 150

120 120

90 90

60 60

30 30

Load [%] Load [%]

0 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 0 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150

The characteristic declines device-dependently in this range (see technical data)

On exceeding a load of 105 % the counter starts. When falling below the counter counts backwards. If the counter
achieves the overload characteristic that corresponds to the inverter the error E.OL is triggered.

2.1.9 Overload protection in the lower speed range

(only valid for F5-M and F5-S, stall current see technical data)

Load [%]

OC-tripping current

Short-time limit current E.OL2 E.OL

Start of overload
integrator at 105%

Stall current

f [Hz]
Min. frequency at
continuous full load

If the permissible current is exceeded a PT1-element (τ =280ms) starts, after its sequence of operation the error E.OL2 is
triggered.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

13
All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 15.01.03 2 1 13
Summary Product Description

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3.1.1 Survey .................................... 3

3. Hardware 3.1 Control Units 3.1.2 Housing Size D - E ................. 4
3.1.3 Housing Size >= G ................. 4
3.1.4 Terminal strip X2A .................. 5
3.1.5 Connection of the control ........ 6
4. Operation 3.1.6 Digital inputs ........................... 6
3.1.7 Analog inputs .......................... 6
3.1.8 Voltage input / external power
supply ..................................... 7
5. Parameter 3.1.9 Digital outputs ........................ 7
3.1.10 Relay outputs ......................... 7
3.1.11 Analog outputs ....................... 8
3.1.12 Voltage output ........................ 8
6. Functions

7. Start-up

8. Special Operation

9. Error Assistance

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

3 1 2 15.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Control Cards Hardware

In this application manual the control cards F5-MULTI and F5-SERVO are described.
3. Hardware The control cards have different functional ranges.
3.1 Control Units
3.1.1 Survey The following section is to get an overview of the F5 control cards.

Contol card MULTI SERVO

Inputs
Set value input ±10 V / 0(4)...20 mA 2 2 3
Digital inputs (programmable) 8 8
Internal inputs 4 4
External supply of the control card X X
Encoder interface X X
Scan time of the in- and outputs 1 ms 1 ms
Outputs
Analog outputs 2 2
Digital outputs 2 2
Relay outputs 2 2
Internal outputs 4 4
Potential-free operator output X X
Functions
Parameter sets 8 8
Aux function X X
Brake control X X
DC braking X 1) -
Energy saving function X 1) -
Speed search X -
Fixed values X X
Electronic motor protection X X
Power on counter X X
Power off function X 2) X
PI controller X X
Jerk lever starting by s-curves X X
Bus response time 1 ms 1 ms
Suitable for
Housing size >= D X X
1) only for open loop control operation
2) only for closed loop control operation

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

3.1.2 Housing Size D - E

Optional Operator
with 9-pole Sub-D Socket
ma
x. Parameter Interface
34
observe the ma-

EN /R
TE
R
F

ST
AR
T
ST
OP

FU EED
ximal width of

NC
SP

.
connectors for
X3A and X3B.

C
O
M
B
IV
E
R
T
X2A

N o r PC
t
fo
Connection
Control Terminal

X3B
9-pole Sub-D Socket
OPTION

X3A
15-pole Sub-D Socket
Connection Incremental Encoder

3.1.3 Housing Size >= G

Optional Operator
with 9-pole Sub-D Socket
EN /R
TE
R
F

Parameter Interface
ST
AR
T
ST
OP

FU ED
NC
SP

.
E

ma
x.
34
C
O

observe the ma-

M
B
IV
E
R
T

ximal width of
connectors for
X3A and X3B.
W
ar
nu
ng
:
Di it b erst als a me
e K etr rom l e ni
ze ehl ist nah

on Ìgt
de 5 m schu
Ein halt tzm

ns in
sc chu sig!

ato .!
F er aB
S lÌs

ren
tl
zu

X3B
9-pole Sub-D Socket
OPTION

X3A
15-pole Sub-D Socket
Connection Incremental
Encoder

X2A
Connection
Control Terminal

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

3 1 4 15.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Control Cards Hardware

3.1.4 Terminal strip X2A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

PIN Function Name Description

1 + Set Value input 1 AN1+ The input signal (0...±10 V; 0...±20 mA and 4...20 md is determined
2 - Set Value input 1 AN1- with An.0 / 10. Specification and control see chap. 6.2.2. 3
3 + Set Value input 2 AN2+ Resolution: 12 Bit, Ri = 30 kΩ, Scan time: 1 ms /
4 - Set Value input 2 AN2- at fast setpoint input: 250 µs (see chapter 6.4.2)
5 Analog Output 1 ANOUT1 The variable for outputting at analog output 2 is determined with
An.31 / 36. Specification and control see chap. 6.2.8.
6 Analog Output 2 ANOUT2 Voltage range: 0...±10V, Ri = 100 Ω , Resolution: 12 Bit
PWM frequency: 3,4 kHz, filter response 1. order: 178 Hz
7 +10 V Output CRF Reference voltage output +10 VDC +5% / max. 4 mA for set value
potentiometer.
8 Analog Mass COM Mass for analog in- and outputs
9 Analog Mass COM Mass for analog in- and outputs
10 Progr. Input 1 I1 Specifications, control und programming of the digital
11 Progr. Input 2 I2 inputs see chapter 6.3
12 Progr. Input 3 I3 All digital inputs are free programmable.
13 Progr. Input 4 I4 The control release is firmly linked with the input ST, but can be
14 Progr. Input Forward F additional occupied with other functions.
15 Progr. Input Reverse R Ri = 2,1 kΩ
16 Progr. Input Control Rel. ST Scan time: 1 ms
17 Progr. Input Reset RST
18 Transistor Output 1 O1 Specifications, control und programming of the digital
19 Transistor Output 2 O2 transistor outputs see chap. 6.3.12...6.3.22,
a total of max. 50 mADC for both outputs
20 +24 V Output Uout approx. 24V DC output (max.100 mA)
21 20...30 V Input Uin Ext. supply voltage for digital in-/outputs, potential 0V (X2A.22/23)
22 Digital Mass 0V Potential for digital in-/outputs
23 Digital Mass 0V Potential for digital in-/outputs
24 Relay 1 /NO contact RLA Programmable relay output 1 (Terminal X2A.24...26);
25 Relay 1 /NC contact RLB Programmable relay output 2 ( Terminal X2A.27...29)
26 Relay 1 /switching contact RLC Specifications, control und programming of the relay outputs
27 Relay 2 /NO contact FLA see chapter 6.3.11...6.3.17
28 Relay 2 /NC contact FLB max. 30 V DC, 1 A
29 Relay 2 /switching contact FLC

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

3.1.5 Connection of In order to prevent a malfunction caused by interference voltage supply on the control
the control inputs, the following directions should be observed:

• Use shielded/drilled cables

• Lay shield on one side of the inverter onto earth potential
• Lay control and power cable separately (about 10...20 cm apart)
EMC • Lay crossings in a right angle (in case it cannot be prevented)

3.1.6 Digital inputs Use of internal voltage supply

X2A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 PE

Use of external voltage supply

X2A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 23 PE
13...30V DC ±0%
smoothed
Ri =2,1 kΩ +
20...30 VDC

3.1.7 Analog inputs Connect unused analog inputs to common, to prevent set value fluctuations!

External analog Internal analog

set-point setting set-point setting
Ri = 55 kW
X2A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PE X2A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PE

*
+
0...±10 VDC
R = 3...10 kW

*) Connect potential equalizing line only

if a potential difference of > 30 V exists
between the controls. The internal
resistance is reduced to 30 kΩ.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

3 1 6 15.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Control Cards Hardware

3.1.8 Voltage Input / The supply of the control circuit through an external voltage source keeps the control
External Power in operational condition even if the power stage is switched off. To prevent undefined
conditions at external power supply the basic procedure is to first switch on the power
Supply supply and after that the inverter.

X2A 10 11 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PE

3
+
20...30 V ±0% / 1 A DC
smoothed

3.1.9 Digital Outputs X2A 10 18 19 20 21 22 23 PE

A total of max.
50 mA DC for
both outputs

3.1.10 Relay Outputs In case of inductive load on the relay outputs a protective wiring must be provided
(e.g. free-wheeling diode)!

X2A 24 25 26 27 28 29 PE

max.30VDC/1A
+
-

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

3.1.11 Analog Outputs U0: 0...±11,5 VDC

Ri: 100 Ω
X2A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PE

Uout: 0...±10 VDC

Imax: 10 mA

3.1.12 Voltage Output The voltage output serves for the setting of the digital inputs as well as for the supply
of external control elements. Do no exceed the maximum output current of 100 mA.

X2A 10 18 19 20 21 22 23 PE

+ -
ca. 24 VDC / max. 100 mA
approx

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

3 1 8 15.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Fundamentals

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

4.1.1 Parameters, Parameter

4. Operation 4.1 Fundamentals Groups, Parameter Sets ........ 3
4.2 Password Structure 4.1.2 Selection of a Parameter ....... 4
4.1.3 Adjustment of Parameter
4.3 CP-Parameter
Values .................................... 4
5. Parameter 4.4 Drive-Mode 4.1.4 ENTER-Parameter ................. 4
4.1.5 Non-programmable
Parameters ............................ 5
4.1.6 Resetting of Error Messages . 5
6. Functions 4.1.7 Resetting of Peak Values ....... 5
4.1.8 Acknowledgement of Status
Signals ................................... 5
7. Start-up

8. Special Operation

9. Error Assistance

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

The following chapter describes the fundumentals of the software structure as well
4. Operation as the operation of the unit.
4.1 Fundamentals
The control boards F5-BASIC anf F5-GENERAL incorporates 3 operating modes:

Operating Modes of
Control Board

Customer Mode Drive Mode

Application Mode 4
- is a list of parameters - with this special mode,
(CP-Parameter), freely the unit can be put into
- all parameter groups
definable, which are operation via operator
(exception: CP-
necessary or important - with the exception of the
parameter) and
for the user. control release no termi-
parameter sets can be
- suppllied with a para- nal wiring is needed
selected and, if
meter list defined by
necessary, changed
KEB
- usually it is activated
only for the adaption to
the application

4.1.1 Parameters, What are parameters, parameter groups and parameter sets?
Parameter Groups,
Parameters are values changeable by the operator in a program, which have an
Parameter Sets
influence on the program flow. A parameter consists of

Parameter designation and Parameter value

is
m e ter The parameter value shows the
ra d!
a c h pa specifie actual setting.
E rly
clea The parameter number specifies the parameters
within a group.
To maintain a cleary-to-survey operation inspite of the great
number of parameters, we have combined function-related
parameters into parameter groups (e.g. all motor-related
parameters are combined in the Drive(dr)-group).
8 parameter sets (0...7) exist to adjust several values for one
parameter. If the active values shall be displayed for a running unit
the digit is set to „A“. The digit is not-applicable for non-
programmable parameters (see chapter 6.8).
Example: A conveyor belt shall be used with 3 different speeds. A parameter set is programmed
for each „speed“ ... acceleration, deceleration etc. can be adjusted individually.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

4.1.2 Selection of a The blinking point indicates the changeable area. By pressing the ENTER-key the
Parameter blinking point is shifted.

ENTER ENTER
F/R F/R
✻ ✻ ✻
▲ STOP ▲ STOP ▲ STOP
START ▼ START ▼ START ▼

✻ ✻ ✻
Select Select Select
parameter number parameter group parameter set

A parameter set number is not displayed

for non-programmable parameters (see 4.1.5)!

FUNCT
Changes between parameter value SPEED and parameter designation

4.1.3 Adjustment of Changing of

Parameter Values
Standard-Parameters ENTER-Parameters

- Values are - During changing a point is

immediately indicated behind the last
▲ STOP accepted and ▲ STOP digit
START ▼ stored non- START ▼ - The value is accepted with
volatile! ENTER and stored non-
volatile (point disappears)
▲ STOP ▲ STOP
START ▼ START ▼ ENTER
F/R

Parameter values can be changed only, when the parameter set

is not adjusted to „Active parameter set“ (A) ! (see 4.1.6)

4.1.4 ENTER-Parameter For some parameters it is not sensible that the selected values become active
immediately. For that reason they are called ENTER-parameters, they do not become
active until the ENTER-key is pressed.
Example: At digital setting of rotation direction the rotation reverse (r) shall be selected
from standstill (LS). As shown above, the actuation must be done via rotation
forward (F). However, the drive must not start yet, first the rotation direction
reverse has to be selected and confirmed with ENTER (point disappears).

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

4.1.5 Non- Certain parameters are not programmable, as their value must be the same in all
programmable sets (e.g. bus address or baud rate). For an easy identification of these parameters
the parameter set number is missing in the parameter identification. For all non-
Parameters programmable parameters the same value is valid independent of the selected
parameter set!

4.1.6 Resetting of Error If a malfunction occurs during operation, the actual display is overwritten by a blinking
error message. The error message can be cancelled by pressing the ENTER-key,
Messages
so that the original value is again shown in the display.
ATTENTION! The resetting of the error message with ENTER is no error reset, i.e.
the error status in the inverter is not reset. Thus it is possible to correct adjustments
before the error reset. An error reset is only possible through the reset terminal or 4
control release.

4.1.7 Resetting of Peak To permit conclusions on the operational performance of the drive, parameters are
Values provided that indicate the peak values. Peak value means that the highest measured
value is stored for the ON-time of the inverter (slave pointer principle). The peak
value is cancelled by ▲ or ▼ and the actual measured value is shown in the display.

4.1.8 Acknowledgement To monitor the correct execution of an action some parameters send a status signal.
of Status Signals For example, after copying a set the display shows „PASS“ to indicate that the action
was carried out without error. These status signals must be acknowledged with
ENTER.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

4. Operation 4.1 Fundamentals

4.2 Password Structure 4.2.1 Password Levels .................... 3
4.2.2 Passwords ............................. 4
4.3 CP-Parameter
4.2.3 Changing of Password Level . 4
5. Parameter 4.4 Drive-Mode

6. Functions

7. Start-up

8. Special Operation

9. Error Assistance

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

1
All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 10.04.02 4 2 1
Operation Password Structure

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

4.2 Password The KEB COMBIVERT is provided with extensive password protection. The diffe-
rent passwords are used to
Structure
- change the operating mode
- set a write protection
- activate the Service-Mode
- switch to the Drive-Mode
Depending on the actual operating mode the password can be entered in following
parameters

when the CP-Mode is active

when the applicatioan mode is active

4.2.1 Password Levels The parameter value of the above parameters shows the actual password level.
Following indications are possible:

Only the Customer-parameter

CP - read only group is visible, exept for CP.0 all
parameters are in the read-only
status (see chapter 4.3).
Only the Customer-parameter
CP - on group is visible. All parameters can
be changed.

Like CP-on, but the parameter

CP - Service identification is indicated according
to the original parameter (see
chapter 4.3).

All application parameters are vi-

Application sible and can be changed. The CP-
parameters are not visible.

The Drive-Mode is a special

Drive-Mode operating mode, here the unit can
be put into operation via the
operator (see chapter 4.4).

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

3
All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 10.04.02 4 2 3
Operation Password Structure

4.2.2 Passwords By selecting one of the following passwords you can switch to the respective password
level:

Passwords Password level

DRIVE-Mode

To finish the Drive-Mode press ENTER + FUNCT key for approx. 3 sec. (see chapter
4.4).

4.2.3 Changing of FUNCT

SPEED
Password Level
▲
START

Example 1:
▲
Switching from CP-Mode to START ENTER
the application mode F/R

FUNCT
With the exception of SPEED
the service password
all entered password
levels are generally
stored non-volatile!

FUNCT
SPEED

▲
START

Example 1:
▲
Switching from application START ENTER
mode to the CP-read-only F/R
mode

FUNCT
SPEED

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

4. Operation 4.1 Fundamentals

4.2 Password Structure
4.3 CP-Parameter
4.3.1 Operation in CP-Mode ............ 3
5. Parameter 4.4 Drive-Mode 4.3.2 Factory Setting ....................... 4
4.3.3 Password input ....................... 6
4.3.4 Status Display ........................ 6
4.3.5 Basic Adjustment of the Drive 8
6. Functions 4.3.6 Special Adjustments ............. 13
4.3.7 Factory Settings ................... 22

7. Start-up

8. Special Operation

9. Error Assistance

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

4 3 2 20.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
CP - Parameter Operation

4.3 CP-Parameter The Customer-Parameters (CP) are a special group of parameter. With the exception
of CP.0 (Password input), they can be defined by the user. The following Parameters
are preset at delivery.

Advantages from it: - operator-friendly for the customer

- critical parameters are protected against maloperation
- low documentation cost for the machine builder

4.3.1 Operation in Compared to the Application-Mode the operation in the CP-Mode is easier because
parameter set selection and parameter group selection are unnecessary.
CP-Mode

4
Adjustment of FUNCT Adjustment of
parameter number SPEED parameter value

▲ STOP ▲ STOP
START ▼ START ▼

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

4.3.2 Factory Setting The following lists shows the CP-parameter groups of F5-MULTI and F5-SERVO
predefined by us. The definition of the CP-parameters is done in the User-Definition-
Parameters (ud). How you can define your own parameters is described in Chapter
6.12.

F5-MULTI:

CP.0 password 0...9999 1 - - - ud.1

CP.1 encoder 1 speed ±4000 0,125 0 rpm - ru.9
CP.2 set value display ±4000 0,125 0 rpm - ru.1
CP.3 inverter state 0...255 1 0 - - ru.0
CP.4 apparent current 0...6553,5 0,1 0 A - ru.15
CP.5 peak apparent current 0...6553,5 0,1 0 A - ru.16
CP.6 actual torque display ±10000,00 0,01 0 Nm - ru.12
CP.7 actual DC voltage 0...1000 1 0 V - ru.18
CP.8 peak DC voltage 0...1000 1 0 V - ru.19
CP.9 output voltage 0...778 1 0 V - ru.20
CP.10 speed control config. 0...5 1 0 - - cs.0
CP.11 DASM rated speed 0...64000 1 LTK rpm - dr.1
CP.12 DASM rated frequency 0,0...1600,0 0,1 LTK Hz - dr.5
CP.13 DASM rated current 0,0...710 0,1 LTK A - dr.0
CP.14 DASM rated voltage 120...500 1 LTK V - dr.2
CP.15 DASM rated cos(phi) 0,50...1,00 0,01 LTK - - dr.4
CP.16 DASM rated power 0,35...400,00 0,01 LTK kW - dr.3
CP.17 load mot.dependent parameter 1...2 1 1 - E fr.10
CP.18 boost 0,0...25,5 0,1 LTK % - uf.1
CP.19 rated frequency 0...400 0,0125 50 Hz - uf.0
CP.20 encoder 1 (inc/r) GBK...GBK 1 GBK inc - ec.1
CP.21 enc.1 rotation 0...19 1 0 - - ec.6
CP.22 max. reference forward 0...4000 0,125 2100 rpm - op.10
CP.23 step value 1 ±4000 0,125 100 rpm - op.21
CP.24 step value 2 ±4000 0,125 -100 rpm - op.22
CP.25 acc. time forward 0,00...300,00 0,01 5,00 s - op.28
CP.26 dec. time forward -0,01...300,00 0,01 5,00 s - op.30
CP.27 s-curve time acc. for. 0,00...5,00 0,01 0,00 s - op.32
CP.28 torque reference source 0...5 1 2 - E cs.15
CP.29 absolute torque ref ±10000,00 0,01 LTK Nm - cs.19
CP.30 KP speed 0...32767 1 300 - - cs.6
CP.31 KI speed 0...32767 1 100 - - cs.9
CP.32 switching frequency 2/4/8/12/16 - LTK kHz E uf.11
CP.33 Relais output 1 condition 0...74 1 4 - E do.2
CP.34 Relais output 2 condition 0...74 1 2 - E do.3
CP.35 proh. rot. stopping mode 0...6 1 6 - - pn.7
CP.36 E. EF stopping mode 0...6 1 0 - - pn.3
LTK: depending on power circuit

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

4 3 4 20.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
CP - Parameter Operation

F5-SERVO:

Display Parameter Adjustment range Step Default Unit Enter Source

CP.0 password 0...9999 1 - - - ud.1
CP.1 encoder 1 speed ±4000 0,125 0 rpm - ru.9
CP.2 set value display ±4000 0,125 0 rpm - ru.1
CP.3 inverter state 0...255 1 0 - - ru.0
CP.4 apparent current 0...6553,5 0,1 0 A - ru.15
CP.5 peak apparent current 0...6553,5 0,1 0 A - ru.16
CP.6 actual torque display ±10000,00 0,01 0 Nm - ru.12
CP.7 actual DC voltage 0...1000 1 0 V - ru.18
CP.8 peak DC voltage 0...1000 1 0 V - ru.19
CP.9 output voltage 0...778 1 0 V - ru.20
CP.10 speed control configuration 4...5 1 0 - - cs.0
4
CP.11 DSM rated torque 0,1...6553,5 0,1 LTK Nm - dr.27
CP.12 DSM rated speed 0...32000 1 LTK rpm - dr.24
CP.13 DSM rated frequency 0,0...1600,0 0,1 LTK Hz - dr.25
CP.14 DSM rated current 0,0...710,0 0,1 LTK A - dr.23
CP.15 DSM EMK voltage const. 0...1000 1 LTK V - dr.26
CP.16 DSM winding inductance 0,01...500,00 0,01 LTK mH - dr.31
CP.17 DSM winding resistance 0,000...50,000 0,001 LTK Ohm - dr.30
CP.18 DSM curr. f. zero speed 0,0...700,0 0,1 LTK A - dr.28
CP.19 load mot.dependent para. 1...2 1 1 - E fr.10
CP.20 absolute pos. enc.1 0...65535 1 57057 - - ec.2
CP.21 encoder 1 rotation 0...19 1 0 - - ec.6
CP.22 max. reference forward 0...4000 0,125 0 rpm - op.10
CP.23 step value 1 ±4000 0,125 100 rpm - op.21
CP.24 step value 2 ±4000 0,125 -100 rpm - op.22
CP.25 acc. time forward 0,00...300,00 0,01 5,00 s - op.28
CP.26 dec. time forward -0,01...300,00 0,01 5,00 s - op.30
CP.27 s-curve time acc. for. 0,00...5,00 0,01 0,00 s - op.32
CP.28 torque reference source 0...5 1 2 - E cs.15
CP.29 absolute torque ref ±10000,00 0,01 LTK Nm - cs.19
CP.30 KP speed 0...32767 1 300 - - cs.6
CP.31 KI speed 0...32767 1 100 - - cs.9
CP.32 switching frequency 2/4/8/12/16 - LTK kHz E uf.11
CP.33 relay output 1 / function 0...74 1 4 - E do.2
CP.34 relay output 2 / function 0...74 1 2 - E do.3
CP.35 proh. rot. stopping mode 0...6 1 6 - - pn.7
CP.36 E. EF stopping mode 0...6 1 0 - - pn.3
LTK: depending on power circuit

Due to the calculation / measuring accuracies, tolerances with the current and torque displays as well as with
the switching levels and limitations, must be taken into consideration. The given tolerances (see parameter
description) refer to the respective maximum values with the dimensioning
KEB COMBIVERT: Motor = 1:1.
Dependent on the data from the motor manufacturer, larger tolerances at the torque displays are
possible, due to the usual variations in the machine parameters and temperature drifts.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

4.3.3 Password Input Ex works the frequency inverter is supplied without password protection, this means
that all changeable parameters can be adjusted. After parameterizing the unit can be
barred against unauthorized access (see 4.4.2 „Passwords“). The adjusted mode is
stored.

ENTER

Barring the Password

CP-Parameter

FUNC

ENTER

Password
Enabling the
CP-Parameter
UP

FUNC

4.3.4 Operating The parameters below serve for thecontrolling of the frequency inverter during operation.
Display

Actual speed Display of actual motor speed (incremental encoder 1). For check reasons the actual
speed is also displayed, if the control release or the direction of rotation are not switched.
A counter-clockwise rotating field (reverse) is represented by a negative sign.
Precondition for the correct display value is the in-phase connection of the motor and
the correct setting of the encoder line number (CP.20; only F5-MULTI) as well as the
directionof of rotation (CP.21).

Set speed Display of actually set value. For control reasons the set speed is displayed even if
control release or direction of rotation are not switched. If no direction of rotation is
set, the set speed for clockwise rotation (forward) is displayed.

Inverter status The status display shows the actual working conditions of the inverter. Possible displays
and their meanings are:
"no Operation" control release not bridged, modulation switched off,
output voltage = 0 V, drive is not controlled.

"Low Speed" no rotation preset, modulation switched off, output

voltage = 0 V, drive is not controlled.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

4 3 6 20.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
CP - Parameter Operation

"Forward Acceleration" drive accelerates with direction of rotation

forward .

"Forward Deceleration" drive decelerates with direction of rotation

forward.

"Reverse Acceleration" drive accelerates with direction of rotation

reverse.

"Reverse Deceleration" drive decelerates with direction of rotation

reverse.

"Forward Constant" drive runs with a constant speed and direction 4

of rotation forward.

"Reverse Constant" drive runs with constant speed and direction of

rotation reverse.

Other status messages are described at the parameters, where they occur (see chapter
9. "Error diagnosis").

Apparent current Display of the actual apparent current in ampere.

Apparent current / CP.5 makes it possible to recognize the max. apparent current. For that the highest
Peak value value of CP.4 is stored in CP.5. The peak value memory can be cleared by pressing
the UP, DOWN or ENTER key or over bus by writing any value you like to the address
of CP.5. The switch off of the inverter also clears the memory.

Actual torque The displayed value corresponds to the actual motor torque in Nm. The value is calculated
from the active current.
Requirement for the torque display is the adjustment of the motor data (F5-MULTI:
CP.11...CP.16, F5-SERVO: CP.11...CP.18). If the real motor data deviate strongly from
the data on the name plate the operating performance can be optimized by entering
the real data. The adjustment of the name plata data is sufficient for a start-up.

F5-MULTI:
Because of normal type differences and temperature deviations of the motors,
tolerances of up to 30% are possible in the base speed range (see reference on page
4.3.4).

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Intermediate circuit voltage Display of actual DC-link voltage in volt.

Typical calues:

V-class normal operation over voltage (E.OP) under voltage (E.UP)

230 V 300…330 V DC ca. 400 V DC ca. 216 V DC
400 V 530…620 V DC ca. 800 V DC ca. 240 V DC

Intermediate circuit voltage / CP.8 makes it possible to recognize short-time voltage rises within an operating cycle.
Peak value For that the highest value of CP.7 is stored in CP.8. The peak value memory can be
cleared by pressing the UP, DOWN or ENTER key or over bus by writing any value
you like to the address of CP.8. The switch off of the inverter also clears the memory.

Output voltage Display of the actual output voltage in volt.

4.3.5 Basic Adjustment The following parameters determine the fundamental operating data of the drive and
of the Drive must be adjusted for the initial commissioning (see chapter 4 „Start-up“). They should
be checked and/or adapted to the application.

Speed control / Configuration With this parameter the basic setting of the speed controller is determined.

Value Function
0 off (controlled operation)
1 -reserved-
2 -reserved-
3 off (controlled operation)
4 Speed control (regulated operation)
5 Torque control (regulated operation)

Adjustment range: F5-M: 0(off)...63 / F5-S: 4...5

Resolution: 1
Factory setting: F5-M: 0 (off) / F5-S: 4

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

4 3 8 20.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
CP - Parameter Operation

F5-MULTI: Adjustment of rated motor speed according to the name plate. The factory setting
Rated motor speed depends on the unit size. (see 4.3.7 „Factory Settings“).

Adjustment range: 0...64000 rpm

Resolution: 1 rpm
Factory setting: LTK

F5-SERVO: Adjustment of rated motor torque according to the name plate. The factory setting
Rated motor torque depends on the motor.

Adjustment range: 0,1...6553,5 Nm

Resolution: 0,1 Nm
4
Factory setting: LTK

F5-MULTI: Adjustment of the rated motor frequency according to the name plate. The factory
Rated motor frequency setting depends on the unit size (see 4.3.7 „Factory Settings“).

Adjustment range: 0,0...1600,0 Hz

Resolution: 0,1 Hz
Factory setting: LTK

F5-SERVO: Adjustment of the motor rated speed according to the name plate. The factory setting
Rated motor speed depends on the motor.

Adjustment range: 0...32000 rpm

Resolution: 1 rpm
Factory setting: LTK

F5-MULTI: Adjustment of the rated motor current according to the name plate and the connection
Rated motor current (Y / ∆). The factory setting depends on the unit size (see 4.3.7 „Factory Settings“).

Adjustment range: 0,0...710,0 A

Resolution: 0,1 A
Factory setting: LTK

F5-SERVO: Adjustment of the rated motor frequency according to the name plate. The factory
Rated motor frequency setting depends on the motor.

Adjustment range: 0,0...1600,0 Hz

Resolution: 0,1 Hz
Factory setting: LTK

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

F5-MULTI: Adjustment of the rated motor voltage according to the name plate and the connection
Rated motor voltage (Y / ∆). The factory setting depends on the unit size (see 4.3.7 „Factory Settings“).

Adjustment range: 120...500 V

Resolution: 1V
Factory setting: LTK

F5-SERVO: Adjustment of the rated motor current according to the name plate. The factory setting
Rated motor current depends on the motor.

Adjustment range: 0,0...710,0 A

Resolution: 0,1 A
Factory setting: LTK

F5-MULTI: Adjustment of the motor cos(phi) according to the name plate. The factory setting
Motor cos (phi) depends on the unit size (see 4.3.7 „Factory Settings“).

Adjustment range: 0,50...1,00

Resolution: 0,01
Factory setting: LTK

F5-SERVO: Adjustment of the motor voltage constant according to the data sheet. The motor
Motor voltage constant voltage constant is the peak value of the voltage between the phases at a speed of
1000 rpm (unit: V / 1000 rpm). The factory setting depends on the motor.

Adjustment range: 0...1000

Resolution: 1
Factory setting: LTK

F5-MULTI: Adjustment of the rated motor power according to the name plate. The factory setting
Rated motor power depends on the unit size (see 4.3.7 „Factory Settings“).

Adjustment range: 0,35...400,00 kW

Resolution: 0,01 kW
Factory setting: LTK

F5-SERVO: Adjustment of the motor winding inductance according to the data sheet. The factory
Motor winding inductance setting depends on the motor.

Adjustment range: 0,01...500,00 mH

Resolution: 0,01 mH
Factory setting: LTK

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

4 3 10 20.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
CP - Parameter Operation

F5-MULTI: The basic settings of the inverter correspond to the size of the unit and the respective
Load motor dependent motor (see 4.3.7 "Factory Settings"). If the motor data in CP.11...16 are changed, then
parameter CP.17 must be activated once. This re-adjusts the current controller, torque curve and
torque limit. With this, the torque limit is set at the value, that is maximally possible in
the speed range (depending on inverter rated current), but not above the rated motor
torque x 3.

CP.17 = 1 : • Pre-adjustment of the motor-dependent control-parameters.

• The voltage class of the inverter is taken as input voltage.

CP.17 = 2 : • Pre-adjustment of the motor-dependent control-parameters.

• The DC-link voltage / √2 measured at switch on is taken as input
voltage. Thus the frequency inverter can be adapted to the actually 4
available mains voltage (e.g. USA with 460 V).

Adjustment range: 0…2

Resolution: 1
Factory setting: 0

When control release is active the adjustment was not completed.

"nco" appears in the display!

F5-SERVO: Adjustment of the motor winding resistance according to the data sheet. The factory
Motor winding resistance setting depends on motor.

Adjustment range: 0,000...50,000 Ohm

Resolution: 0,001 Ohm
Factory setting: LTK

F5-MULTI: In the lower speed range a large part of the motor voltage decreases on the stator
Boost resistance. So that the breakdown torque of the motor remains nearly constant in the
controlled operation over the entire speed range, the voltage drop can be compensated
by the Boost. During regulated operation (CP.10 = 4 or 5) this parameter has no
function.

Adjustment range: 0,0...25,5 %

Resolution: 0,1 %
Factory setting: LTK

Adjustment: • Determine the rate of utilzation in no-load operation with rated speed
• Preset about 300 rpm and adjust the boost, so that about the same
rate of utilization is reached as with the rated speed.

When the motor, during continuous operation, drives with low speed and too
high voltage it can lead to an overheating of the motor.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

F5-SERVO: Adjustment of the motor current for zero speed according to the data sheet. The
Motor current for zero speed factory setting depends on the motor.

Adjustment range: 0,0...700,0 A

Resolution: 0,1 A
Factory setting: LTK

F5-MULTI: With the adjusted frequency the inverter reaches in controlled operation a maximal
Rated Frequency output voltage. The adjustment of the rated motor frequency is typical in this case.
Note: Motors can overheat when the rated frequency is incorrectly adjusted.
During regulated operation (CP.10 = 4 or 5) this parameter has no function.

Adjustment range: 0...400 Hz UA

Resolution: 0,0125 Hz 100%
Factory setting: 50 Hz
CP.18
f
CP.19

F5-SERVO: The basic settings of the inverter correspond to the size of the unit and the respective
Load motor dependent motor (see 4.3.7 "Factory Settings"). If the motor data in CP.11...18 are changed, then
parameter CP.19 must be activated once. This re-adjusts the current controller, torque curve and
torque limit. With this, the torque limit is set at the value, that is maximally possible in
the speed range (depending on inverter rated current), but not above the rated motor
torque x 3.

CP.19 = 1 : • Pre-adjustment of the motor-dependent control-parameters.

• The voltage class of the inverter is taken as input voltage.

CP.19 = 2 : • Pre-adjustment of the motor-dependent control-parameters.

• The DC-link voltage / √2 measured at switch on is taken as input
voltage. Thus the frequency inverter can be adapted to the actually
available mains voltage (e.g. USA with 460 V).

Adjustment range: 0…2

Resolution: 1
Factory setting: 0

When control release is active the adjustment was not completed.

"nco" appears in the display!

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

4 3 12 20.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
CP - Parameter Operation

F5-MULTI: With this parameter the encoder line number is adjusted to the encoder that is connected
Encoder line number to channel 1 (see 6.10 „Encoder interface“).
Check the set and actual speed displays during controlled operation and compare.
The correct setting is: actual speed = set speed - slip

Adjustment range *: 1...16383 inc

Resolution: 1 inc
Factory setting: 2500 inc

*) The range of adjustment can vary due to different encoder identifiers.

F5-SERVO: The system position of the attached resolver system is adjusted at EC.07. With this 4
Absolute position (encoder 1) parameter it is possible to adjust the controller to a not aligned motor. If the ystem
position of the motor is unknown an automatic trimming can be done.
Before starting with the adjustment, the direction of rotation must be checked. The
speed display in CP.1 must be positive when the motor runs manual in clockwise
direction. If that is not the case, the direction of rotation can be exchanged as described
with CP.21. If the correct direction of rotation is displayed, it can be started with the
adjustment.

• the connected motor must be able to rotate freely

• open control release (terminal X2A.16)
• CP.20 = 2206 eingeben
• close control release (terminal X2A.16)

Now the motor is excited with its rated current and aligned to its zero position. The
adjustment is finished when the displayed system position at CP.20 does not change
for approx. 5 s. In this case open control release and switch off the unit.
If the error message E.EnC is displayed during trimming the direction of rotation must
be checked (CP.21). In this case the position trimming must be repeated.

In case that motors with aligned encoder system are used, the value which has been
established by the automatic trimming, can be entered under CP.20 as well.
The adjustment values of known motors of the KEB COMBIVERT S4 series must be
multiplied by the pole-pair number of the motor. The lower 16 bits of the result must be
entered in CP.20.

Adjustment range: 0...65535

Resolution: 1
Factory setting: 0

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Change rotation F5-MULTI:

If you find that during start-up in controlled operation the actual and setpoint speed
have different signs it can be an indication for a wrong connection of the incremental
encoder. If possible the wiring should be corrected.
Should this involve too much effort then you can achieve a rotation reversal of encoder 1
by means of this parameter. The effect corresponds to a change of the A and B tracks
of the incremental encoder.

F5-SERVO:
The speed display at CP.1 must be positive when the engine runs manual in clockwise
direction. The signals SIN+ and SIN- of the resolver have to be changed, if the sign is
wrong. Please ensure that the signals are not short-circuited with the internal shield
(see connection resolver). The signals A(+) and A(-) must be changed for units with
SIN/COS encoder.
Should this involve too much effort then you can achieve a rotation reversal of encoder 1
by means of this parameter.

Value Function
0 track not exchanged
1 track exchanged
2/3 reserved for initiator input

Adjustment range: 0...19

Resolution: 1
Factory setting: 0

4.3.6 Special The following parameters serve for the optimization of the drive and the adaption to
Adjustments certain applications. These adjustments can be ignored at the initial start-up.

Maximum speed In order to limit the setpoint value a maximum speed must be preset. This limit value
is the basis for further setpoint calculations and for the determination of setpoint
characteristics. The maximum speed limits the setpoint speed only. Because of speed
ripples, speed overshoot or hardware defects (e.g. defective encoder) the actual speed
may exceed these limits.

Adjustment range: 0...4000 rpm

Resolution: 0,125 rpm
Factory setting: 2100 rpm

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

4 3 14 20.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
CP - Parameter Operation

Step speed 1 and 2 Two fixed speeds can be adjusted. The selection is made by the inputs I1 and I2.
Input I1 If adjustments are made that are outside the fixed limit of CP.22, then the speed is
internally limited. Rotation source oP.18 = 7.

Adjustment range: -4000...4000 rpm

Resolution: 0,125 rpm
Input I2 Factory setting CP.23: 100 rpm
Factory setting CP.24: -100 rpm

Input I1 + input I2 = Step speed 3

(factory setting = 0 rpm)
The Step speed 3 cannot adjusted in the CP mode.
4

Acceleration time Defines the time needed to accelerate from 0 to 1000 rpm. The actual acceleration
time is proportional to the speed change (∆ n).

Adjustment range: 0,00...300,00 s

Resolution: 0,01 s
Factory setting: 5,00 s

n [rpm]
∆n speed change
1000 ∆t acceleration time for ∆ n
800

∆n

300
∆t
0 t [s]
0,5 1 1,5 2

CP.25
Example:
The drive should accelerate from 300 rpm to 800 rpm in 1 s.

∆ n = 800 rpm - 300 rpm = 500 rpm

∆ t = 1s

∆t 1s
CP.25 = –––– x 1000 rpm = ––––––––– x 1000 rpm = 2 s
∆n 500 rpm

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Deceleration time Defines the time needed to decelerate from 1000 to 0 rpm. The actual deceleration
time is proportional to the speed change (∆ n). At a deceleration time of -0,01 the
value from CP.25 is used (Display: „=Acc“)!

Adjustment range: -1; 0,00...300,00 s

Resolution: 0,01 s
Factory setting: 5,00 s

n [rpm] ∆n speed change

∆t deceleration for ∆ n
1000 ∆t
800

∆n

300

0 t [s]
0,5 1 1,5 2

CP.26

Example:
The drive should decelerate from 800 rpm to 300 rpm in 1 s.

∆ n = 800 rpm - 300 rpm = 500 rpm

∆ t = 1s

∆t 1s
CP.26 = –––– x 1000 rpm = –––––––– x 1000 rpm = 2 s
∆n 500 rpm

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

4 3 16 20.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
CP - Parameter Operation

S-curve time For some applications it is of advantage when the drive starts and stops jerk-free.
This is achieved through a straightening of the acceleration and deceleration ramps.
The straightening time, also called S-curve time, can be adjusted with CP.27.

Adjustment range: 0,00 (off)...5,00 s

Resolution: 0,01 s
Factory setting: 0,00 s (off)

In order to drive defined ramps with activated S-curve time, the

acceleration and deceleration times (CP.25 and CP.26) must be adjusted
higher than the S-curve time (CP.27).
4
Ramp adjustment with S-curves
+n [rpm] t1 = S-curve time (CP.27)
t2 = Acceleration time (CP.25)
t3 = Deceleration time (CP.26)

t2 t3

t1 t1 t1 t1

t [s]
t1 t1 t1 t1

t2 t3

-n [rpm]

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Torque reference source With this parameter the required setpoint source for torque control can be adjusted.

Value Meaning
0 AN1+ / AN1- 0%...±100% = 0...±CP.29
1 AN2+ / AN2- 0%...±100% = 0...±CP.29
2 digital absolute (CP.29) CP.29
3 only application mode

Adjustment range: 0...5

Resolution: 1
Factory setting: 2
Note: Enter-Parameter

Torque limit The absolute torque reference of the drive is adjusted with parameter CP.29 in torque-
controlled operation (CP.10 = 5) and with digital setpoint setting (CP.28 = 2). The sign
stands for direction of rotation to be active.
In speed-controlled operation (CP.10 = 4) the parameter works as torque limit in all
quadrants.The sign has no effect at that.
The factory setting depends on the unit size (see 3.7 „Factory Settings“).

Adjustment range: -10000,00...10000,00 Nm

Resolution: 0,01 Nm
Factory setting: LTK

F5-MULTI:
During controlled operation (CP.10 = 0...3) this parameter has no function.
Because of normal type differences and temperature deviations of the motors,
tolerances of up to 30% are possible in the base speed range (see reference on page
4.3.5).

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

4 3 18 20.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
CP - Parameter Operation

KP speed The proportional factor of the speed controller is adjusted in these parameters (see
chapter 7.2 „Start-up“).

Adjustment range: 0...32767

Resolution: 1
Factory setting: 300

KI speed The integral factor of the speed controller is adjusted in these parameters (see chapter
7.2 „Start-up“).
4
Adjustment range: 0...32767
Resolution: 1
Factory setting: 100

Switching frequency The switching frequency with which the power modules are clocked can be changed
depending on the application. The employed power stage determines the maximum
switching frequency as well as the factory setting (see manual: part2). Refer to following
list to learn about influences and effects of the switching frequency.

low switching frequency high switching frequency

• less inverter heating • less noise development
• less discharge current • improved sine-wave simulation
• less switching losses • less motor losses
• less radio interferences • improved controller characteristics
• improved concentricity with low speed
(only controlled!)

Adjustment range (dep. on power circuit): 2 / 4 / 8 / 12 / 16 kHz

Factory setting: depending on power circuit
Note: ENTER-Parameter

At switching frequencies above 4 kHz pay absolute attention to the max.

motor line length in the technical data of the chapter 2.1.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Relay output 1 / Function CP.33 and CP.34 determine the function of the two outputs.
(terminal X2A.24...X2A.26 and X2A.27...X2A.29)
Value Function
0 No function (generelly off)
1 Generelly on
Relay output 2 / Function
2 Run signal; also by DC-braking
3 Ready signal (no error)
4 Fault relay
5 Fault relay (not at under voltage error)
6 Warning or error message at abnormal stopping
7 Overload alert signal
8 Overtemperature alert signal power modules
9 External Overtemperature alert signal motor
10 Only application-mode
11 Overtemperature alert signal interior OHI
12-19 Only application-mode
20 Actual value = set value (CP.3 = Fcon, rcon; not at noP, LS error, SSF)
21 Accelerate (CP.3 = FAcc, rAcc, LAS)
22 Decelerate (CP.3 = FdEc, rdEc, LdS)
23 Real direction of rotation = set direction of rotation
24 Utilization > switching level 1)
25 Active current > switching level 1)
26 Only application-mode
27 Real value (CP.1) > switching level 1)
28 Set value (CP.2) > switching level 1)
29-30 Only application-mode
31 Absolut set value on AN1 > switching level 1)
32 Absolut set value on AN2 > switching level 1)
33 Only application-mode
34 Set value on AN1 > switching level 1)
35 Set value on AN2 > switching level 1)
36-39 Only application-mode
40 Hardware current limit activated
41 Modulation on-signal
42-46 Only application-mode
47 Ramp output value > switching level 1)
48 Apparent current (CP.4) > switching level 1)
49 Forward running (not at nOP, LS, abnormal stopping or error)
50 Reverse running (not at nOP, LS, abnormal stopping or error)
51 Warning E.OL2
52 Current regulator limit reached
53 Speed regulator limit reached
54-62 Only application-mode
63 Absolut value ANOUT1 > switching level 1)
64 Absolut value ANOUT2 > switching level 1)
65 ANOUT1 > switching level 1)
66 ANOUT2 > switching level 1)
67-69 Only application-mode
70 Driver voltage active (safety-relay)
71-74 Only application-mode
1)
Switching level of CP.33 = 100; Switching level of CP.34 = 4
Factory setting CP.33: 4
Factory setting CP.34: 2
Note: Enter-Parameter

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

4 3 20 20.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
CP - Parameter Operation

Reaction to limit switch This parameter determines the reaction of the drive, to terminal X2A.14 (F) and/or
X2A.15 (R). These terminals are programmed as limit switches. The reaction of the
drive is shown in the table below.

CP.35 Display Reaction Restart

0 E.PRx Immediate disabling of modulation
1 A.PRx Quick stopping / disabling of Remove fault;
modulation after reaching speed 0 Actuate reset
2 A.PRx Quick stopping/holding toruqe at speed 0
3 A.PRx Immediate disabling of modulation Automatic reset,
4 A.PRx Quick stopping / disabling of if the fault is no
modulation after reaching speed 0 longer 4
5 A.PRx Quick stopping/holding toruqe at speed 0 present
6 no No effect on the drive; - inapplicable -
! Fault is ignored !

Adjustment range: 0...6

Resolution: 1
Factory setting: 6

Reaction to external fault With the external error monitoring external units can take direct influence on the drive.
This parameter determines the response of the drive to a signal at terminal X2A.12
(I3) according to following table.

CP.36 Display Reaction Restart

0 E. EF Immediate disabling of modulation
1 A. EF Quick stopping / disabling of Remove fault;
modulation after reaching speed 0 Actuate reset
2 A. EF Quick stopping/holding toruqe at speed 0
3 A. EF Immediate disabling of modulation Automatic reset,
4 A. EF Quick stopping / disabling of if the fault is no
modulation after reaching speed 0 longer
5 A. EF Quick stopping/holding toruqe at speed 0 present
6 no No effect on the drive; - inapplicable -
! Fault is ignored !

Adjustment range: 0...6

Resolution: 1
Factory setting: 0

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

4.3.7 Factory Settings

F5-MULTI: In the table below the factory settings for the size-dependent parameter values are
listed.

Housing CP.11 CP.12 CP.13 CP.14 CP.15 CP.16 CP.29

size [rpm] [Hz] [A] [V] cos Phi [kW] [Nm] [Nm]

Rated motor Rated motor Rated motor Rated motor Rated motor Rated motor Rated motor Maximum
speed frequency current voltage cos (Phi) power torque torque

09/200V 1400 50 5,9 230 0,83 1,5 10,23 22,09

10/200V 1420 50 9,0 230 0,78 2,2 14,79 30,68
12/200V 1435 50 15,2 230 0,79 4,0 26,61 53,53
13/200V 1440 50 18,2 230 0,89 5,5 36,47 69,92
14/200V 1450 50 26,0 230 0,84 7,5 49,39 93,40
15/200V 1450 50 37,5 230 0,85 11,0 72,43 137,48
16/200V 1465 50 50,0 230 0,86 15,0 97,76 190,64
17/200V 1460 50 60,5 230 0,86 18,5 120,99 248,74

09/400V 1400 50 3,4 400 0,83 1,5 10,23 22,47

10/400V 1420 50 5,2 400 0,78 2,2 14,79 30,81
12/400V 1435 50 8,8 400 0,79 4,0 26,61 53,21
13/400V 1440 50 10,5 400 0,89 5,5 36,47 73,26
14/400V 1450 50 15,0 400 0,84 7,5 49,39 80,12
15/400V 1450 50 21,5 400 0,85 11,0 72,43 118,83
16/400V 1465 50 28,5 400 0,86 15,0 97,76 165,88
17/400V 1460 50 35,0 400 0,86 18,5 120,99 213,37
18/400V 1465 50 42,0 400 0,84 22,0 143,83 253,27
19/400V 1465 50 55,5 400 0,85 30,0 195,52 309,88
20/400V 1470 50 67,0 400 0,86 37,0 240,33 393,60
21/400V 1470 50 81,0 400 0,86 45,0 292,29 474,91
22/400V 1475 50 98,5 400 0,86 55,0 356,03 609,86
23/400V 1480 50 140,0 400 0,87 75,0 483,85 752,75
24/400V 1480 50 168,0 400 0,86 90,0 580,63 907,29
25/400V 1485 50 210,0 400 0,85 110,0 707,26 833,38
26/400V 1485 50 240,0 400 0,87 132,0 848,72 1.041,70
27/400V 1485 50 287,0 400 0,88 160,0 1028,75 1.264,01
28/400V 1485 50 370,0 400 0,88 200,0 1285,93 1.413,37
29/400V 1485 50 420,0 400 0,88 250,0 1607,42 1.780,29
30/400V 1490 50 535,0 400 0,88 315,0 2018,55 1.938,63
31/400V 1490 50 623,0 400 0,85 355,0 2274,87 2.566,84
32/400V 1490 50 710,0 400 0,84 400,0 2563,24 3.012,88

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

4 3 22 20.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
CP - Parameter Operation

F5-SERVO: The following table contains the motor data of standard motors.

Current f. zero speed

Winding inductance
Back-EMF constant

Winding resistance
Rated frequency

[V / 1000 rpm]
Rated current
Rated torque

Rated speed

Torque limit
[Ohm]
[rpm]
[Nm]

[mH]

[Nm]
[Hz]

[A]

[A]
4
Housing size Default Motor CP.11 CP.12 CP.13 CP.14 CP.15 CP.16 CP.17 CP.18 CP.28

09/200V C3.SM.000-3200 3,9 3000 150 4,20 69 6,90 2,00 5,10 22,09
10/200V C4.SM.000-3200 5,0 3000 150 5,70 68 4,50 1,20 7,10 30,68
12/200V D2.SM.000-3200 6,1 3000 150 8,10 67 4,00 1,00 8,50 53,53
13/200V D3.SM.000-3200 8,4 3000 150 10,90 69 2,80 0,60 12,40 69,92
14/200V E4.SM.000-3200 15,5 3000 150 16,00 89 1,30 0,29 27,80 93,40

09/400V C3.SM.000-3400 3,9 3000 150 2,40 118 20,60 5,90 2,90 22,47
10/400V C4.SM.000-3400 5,0 3000 150 3,40 113 13,10 3,40 4,20 30,81
12/400V D2.SM.000-3400 6,1 3000 150 4,50 119 12,80 3,20 4,80 53,21
13/400V D4.SM.000.3400 9,9 3000 150 7,30 121 1,50 1,40 8,50 73,26
14/400V E2.SM.000-3400 11,0 3000 150 7,00 136 8,20 2,00 9,00 80,12
15/400V E4.SM.000-3400 15,5 3000 150 9,90 143 3,40 0,81 17,30 118,83
16/400V F1.SM.000-3400 20,0 3000 150 13,80 130 7,00 0,58 17,00 165,99
17/400V F2.SM.000-3400 31,0 3000 150 20,60 135 3,60 0,23 32,20 213,37
18/400V F3.SM.000-3400 3,3 3000 150 22,90 131 1,70 0,13 46,20 253,27

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

4 3 24 20.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Operation

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

4. Operation 4.1 Fundamentals

4.2 Password Structure

5. Parameter 4.3 CP-Parameter

4.4 Drive-Mode 4.4.1 Adjustment Possibilities .......... 3

4.4.2 Display and Keyboard ............ 3
6. Functions 4.4.3 Setpoint Display /
Setpoint Input ......................... 3
4.4.4 Rotation Setting ...................... 4
4.4.5 Start / Stop / Run ................... 4
7. Start-up 4.4.6 Leaving the Drive-Mode ......... 5
4.4.7 Further Settings ..................... 5

8. Special Operation

9. Error Assistance

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

4 4 2 15.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Drive-Mode Operation

4.4 Drive-Mode The Drive-Mode is a special operating mode of the KEB COMBIVERT. It allows an
easy manual start-up. To activate the Drive-Mode enter the password „500“ in
‘CP.0’ or ‘ud.0’. Following settings are possible:

4.4.1 Adjustment – Stop / Start / Run

– Setpoint value
Possibilities
– Direction of rotation

All other settings like setpoint limitation, acceleration time, deceleration time etc.
correspond to the preselection in the parameter sets.

Hardware condition: The control release must be bridged!

Display operating status /

4.4.2 Display and Rotation display actual speed / setpoint
Keyboard speed
Interface check START

Transmission "LED on" ENTER FUNC.

Status-/ Error display
F/R SPEED
STOP
Normal "LED on"
Error "LED blinking"

Operator panel

The adjusted setpoint value is

4.4.3 Setpoint Display / displayed for as long as the
Setpoint Input SPEED-key is pressed.

reduce START
increase
set value ENTER FUNC.
set value
F/R SPEED
STOP

The actual set value could be

read by bus at Sy.45.

START START

ENTER FUNC. ENTER FUNC.

F/R SPEED F/R SPEED
STOP STOP

Press the SPEED-key and Press the SPEED-key and

reduce the displayed setpoint increase the displayed setpoint
value with the DOWN-key. value with the UP-key.

The setpoint entry via keyboard is possible only for parameter ud.9 = 0 (see
4.4.7).

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

4.4.4 Rotation Setting Setting possibilities: F = forward (clockwise rotation)

r = reverse (counter-clockwise rotation)

Each actuatin of the key

F/R causes a change in
rotational direction
START START
ENTER
ENTER FUNC. F/R ENTER FUNC.
F/R SPEED F/R SPEED
STOP STOP

4.4.5 Start / Stop / Run 3 operating states exist in the Drive-Mode:

Status „Stop“ Status „Start“ Status „Run“

Power module Power module is controlled The drive runs with
disconnected, drive with 0 rpm, drive stands preselected speed
is freewheeling with holding torque
(e.g. „F LS“) (e.g. „F 0“) (e.g. „F 500“)

Among other things the parameter ud.9 determines in what way the keys START and
STOP approach the individual operating states:

Stop Run

ud. 9 = 0 or 1 START START START

(standard) ENTER FUNC. ENTER FUNC.
F/R SPEED F/R SPEED
STOP STOP STOP

Start Run

ud. 9 = 2 or 3 START START START

ENTER FUNC. ENTER FUNC.

F/R SPEED F/R SPEED
STOP STOP STOP

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

4 4 4 15.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Drive-Mode Operation

Stop Start Run

ud. 9 = 4 or 5 START START START START START

ENTER FUNC. ENTER FUNC. ENTER FUNC.

F/R SPEED F/R SPEED F/R SPEED
STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP

4
4.4.6 Leaving the Drive- To leave the Drive-Mode, the keys „FUNC“ and „ENTER“ must be pressed
Mode simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds while being in status „Stop“! The unit jumps
back into the mode from where the Drive-Mode was started.

Stop

Leaving
Drive-Mode
START START

ENTER FUNC. ENTER FUNC.

F/R SPEED F/R SPEED
STOP STOP

approx. 3 sec.

4.4.7 Further Settings With the Drive-Mode operating mode (ud.9) the setpoint sources and the conditions at
starting/stopping can be specified. As setpoint source serves either the keyboard in
the Drive-Mode as described under 4.4.3 or the setpoint source selected under
parameter oP.0. Refer to 4.4.5 to learn about the different operating conditions at
starting / stopping.
The status at starting / stopping (Bit 2 and 3) are only accepted after a restart the
drive mode !

Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Funktion ud.9

x x x 0 Set value setting by keyboard
x x x 1 Set value setting by set value source oP.0
x x 0 x set value is 0-limited (negativ values = 0)
x x 1 x absolut set value settings
0 0 x x LS => run
0 1 x x 0 rpm => run
1 0 x x LS => 0 rpm => run
1 1 x x reserved

To avoid undefined conditions, it must be ensured that the minimum speeds (oP.6,
oP.7) is set to 0 rpm at the values ud.9 bit 2, 3 = 1 or 2 .

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

4 4 6 15.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Parameter

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

4. Operation

5
5.1.1 Parameter Groups ................... 3
5. Parameter 5.1 Parameter
5.1.2 F5-MULTI Control ................... 4
5.1.3 F5-SERVO Control .................. 4
5.1.4 F5-A-Servo Control ................. 4
5.1.5 Parameter Listing F5-MULTI
6. Functions and F5-SERVO ....................... 5

7. Start-up

8. Special Operation

9. Error Assistance

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

The frequency inverter KEB COMBIVERT F5-MULTI and F5-SERVO contains 19 fixed,
5. Parameter one free-to-define parameter group. We have already learned about the free-to-define
group (CP). In the fixed parameter groups the parameters are combined function-
5.1 Parameter related.

5.1.1 Parameter Groups

Picture 5.1.1

Adjustment System Status Inverter Programming Bus Interface User-defined

Assistant Parameter Display Information Parameter and Keyboard Parameters
Parameter Sets Configuration
AA-Parameter Sy-Parameter ru-Parameter In-Parameter Fr-Parameter ud-Parameter CP-Parameter

Master
Synchronous Control Drive
Positioning Module
Encoder PG
PS,-Parameter Parameter
PS-Parameter Ec-
Motor Modell
Parameter
dr-Parameter
Protective and ru-Parameter
Special Functions
Speed Control and PG
Pn-Parameter Torque Limition
Current Control
Modulator M
Ramp Generator cS/cn-Parameter dS-Parameter 3~
and S-curves

oP-Parameter

Setpoint Calculation
U/f-Characteristic
uF-Parameter
oP-Parameter

Analog Inputs Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Switching Level

An-Parameter di-Parameter do-Parameter LE-Parameter

Control Terminal Strip

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

5.1.2 F5-MULTI Following parameters are not available with the control F5-MULTI, so they do not need
Control to be considered in the parameter description:
dr.23 DSM rated current dr.32 DSM rated power
dr.24 DSM rated speed dr.33 DSM max. torque
dr.25 DSM rated frequency ec.2 absolute pos. enc.1
dr.26 DSM EMK voltage const. ec.12 absolute pos. enc.2
dr.27 DSM rated torque pn.15 OH2 warning level
dr.28 DSM curr. f. zero speed
dr.30 DSM winding resistance
dr.31 DSM winding inductance

5.1.3 F5-SERVO Following parameters are not available with the control F5-SERVO, so they do not
Control need to be considered in the parameter description:
cs.19 abs. torque ref pn.20 stall level
cs.20 torque limit mot. pn.21 stall acc/dec time
cs.22 torque limit gen. pn.26 speed search condition
dr.0 DASM rated current pn.27 speed search mode
dr.1 DASM rated speed pn.28 DC braking mode
dr.2 DASM rated voltage pn.29 DC brake input selection
dr.3 DASM rated power pn.30 DC braking time
dr.4 DASM rated cos(phi) pn.31 DC braking max. voltage
dr.5 DASM rated frequency pn.32 DC braking start freq.
dr.6 DASM stator resistance pn.48 power off restart level
dr.7 DASM sigma-inductance pn.51 power off KP DC volt.
dr.11 motorprotection mode pn.57 power off KI DC volt.
dr.12 motorprot. rated current pn.67 q.stop max.torq.corn.sp
dr.14 DASM rated torque ru.59 rotor adaption factor
dr.16 DASM max torque corn. sp uf.0 rated frequency
dr.17 DASM speed for max torq. uf.1 boost
dr.18 DASM field weak. speed uf.2 add. frequency
dr.19 flux adaption faktor uf.3 add. voltage
dr.20 field weak. curve uf.4 delta boost
dr.21 no load voltage uf.5 delta boost time
ds.7 KI rotor adaption uf.6 energy saving mode
ds.11 KP flux uf.7 energy saving factor
ds.12 KI flux uf.8 energy saving input sel.
fr.8 motor set classification uf.10 max. voltage mode
pn.19 stall mode uf.18 deadtime comp. mode

5.1.4 F5-A-SERVO Following parameters are not available with the control F5-A-SERVO, so they do not
need to be considered in the parameter description:
Control
an.10 AN2 interface selection an.50 ANOUT4 offset X
an.11 AN2 noise filter an.51 ANOUT4 offset Y
an.12 AN2 save mode an.52 ANOUT4 period
an.13 AN2 save trig. inp. sel. di.19 F functions
an.14 AN2 zero clamp di.20 R functions
an.15 AN2 gain di.21 RST functions
an.16 AN2 offset X do.28 inv. flags for R2
an.17 AN2 offset Y do.36 flag select. for R2
an.18 AN2 lower limit ec.7 enc.1 trigger
an.19 AN2 upper limit ec.12 absolute pos. enc.2
an.20 AN3 interface selection ec.17 enc.2 trigger
an.21 AN3 noise filter ec.21 SSI multiturn res.
an.22 AN3 save mode ec.22 SSI clock frq. sel.
an.23 AN3 save trig. inp. sel. ec.23 SSI data code
an.24 AN3 zero clamp ec.25 nominal tacho speed
an.25 AN3 gain ec.27 operation mode output
an.26 AN3 offset X ec.32 abs. position ch2
an.27 AN3 offset Y ec.34 system offset ch2
an.28 AN3 lower limit ec.36 enc.1 encoder type
an.29 AN3 upper limit ec.37 enc.1 encoder status
an.36 ANOUT2 function ec.38 enc.1 encoder r/w
an.37 ANOUT2 value in.31 KEB-Hiperface
an.38 ANOUT2 gain pn.19 stall mode
an.39 ANOUT2 offset X ru.29 AN2 pre amplifier disp.
an.40 ANOUT2 offset Y ru.30 AN2 post amplifier disp.
an.41 ANOUT3 function ru.31 AN3 pre amplifier disp.
an.42 ANOUT3 value ru.32 AN3 post amplifier disp.
an.43 ANOUT3 gain ru.35 ANOUT2 pre ampl. disp.
an.44 ANOUT3 offset X ru.36 ANOUT2 post ampl. disp.
an.45 ANOUT3 offset Y ru.46 motor temperature
an.46 ANOUT3 period sy.56 start display address
an.47 ANOUT4 function uf.18 deadtime comp. mode
an.48 ANOUT4 value
an.49 ANOUT4 gain

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

5.1.5 Parameter Listing

Legend
Parameter: Parameter group, number and name
Adr.: Parameter address
Control: shows on in which control the appropriate parameter is present
B => F5-Basic; g => F5-General ; G => F5-General >= D-housing;
M => F5-Multi, S => F5-Servo; A => F5-Servo at A-housing
Properties: R => read only; P => programmable; E => Enter parameter; V => variable resolution (dep. on ud.2)
min.: Min. value (normalized); the non-normalized value results on division by the step range
max.: Max. value (normalized); the non-normalized value results on division by the step range
Step: Step range
default: Default value (normalized); the non-normalized value results on division by the step range
[?]: Unit of measure
See on page: Additional informations for this parameter on page ... (not chapter)
Parameter Adr. Control Properties min. max. Step default [?] See on page
an 0 AN1 interface selection 0A00 B g G M S A - - E - 0 2 1 0 - 6.2.4
5
an 1 AN1 noise filter 0A01 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4 1 0 - 6.2.5
an 2 AN1 save mode 0A02 B g G M S A - - E - 0 3 1 0 - 6.2.5
an 3 AN1 save trig. inp. sel. 0A03 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.2.5
an 4 AN1 zero clamp 0A04 B g G M S A - - - - -10,0 10,0 0,1 0,2 % 6.2.6
an 5 AN1 gain 0A05 B g G M S A - P - - -20,00 20,00 0,01 1,00 - 6.2.7
an 6 AN1 offset X 0A06 B g G M S A - P - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.7
an 7 AN1 offset Y 0A07 B g G M S A - P - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.7
an 8 AN1 lower limit 0A08 B g G M S A - P - - -400,0 400,0 0,1 -400,0 % 6.2.8
an 9 AN1 upper limit 0A09 B g G M S A - P - - -400,0 400,0 0,1 400,0 % 6.2.8
an10 AN2 interface selection 0A0A - g G M S - - - E - 0 2 1 0 - 6.2.4
an11 AN2 noise filter 0A0B - g G M S - - - E - 0 4 1 0 - 6.2.5
an12 AN2 save mode 0A0C - g G M S - - - E - 0 3 1 0 - 6.2.5
an13 AN2 save trig. inp. sel. 0A0D - g G M S - - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.2.5
an14 AN2 zero clamp 0A0E - g G M S - - - - - -10,0 10,0 0,1 0,2 % 6.2.6
an15 AN2 gain 0A0F - g G M S - - P - - -20,00 20,00 0,01 1,00 - 6.2.7
an16 AN2 offset X 0A10 - g G M S - - P - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.7
an17 AN2 offset Y 0A11 - g G M S - - P - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.7
an18 AN2 lower limit 0A12 - - - M S - - P - - -400,0 400,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.8
an19 AN2 upper limit 0A13 - g G M S - - P - - -400,0 400,0 0,1 400,0 % 6.2.8
an20 AN3 interface selection 0A14 - - G M S - - - E - 0 1 1 0 - 6.2.4
an21 AN3 noise filter 0A15 - - G M S - - - E - 0 4 1 0 - 6.2.5
an22 AN3 save mode 0A16 - - G M S - - - E - 0 3 1 0 - 6.2.5
an23 AN3 save trig. inp. sel. 0A17 - - G M S - - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.2.5
an24 AN3 zero clamp 0A18 - - G M S - - - - - -10,0 10,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.6
an25 AN3 gain 0A19 - - G M S - - P - - -20,00 20,00 0,01 1,00 - 6.2.7
an26 AN3 offset X 0A1A - - G M S - - P - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.7
an27 AN3 offset Y 0A1B - - G M S - - P - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.7
an28 AN3 lower limit 0A1C - - G M S - - P - - -400,0 400,0 0,1 -400,0 % 6.2.8
an29 AN3 upper limit 0A1D - - G M S - - P - - -400,0 400,0 0,1 400,0 % 6.2.8
an30 sel.REF inp./AUX-funct. 0A1E - - G M S A - P E - 0 65535 1 2112 - 6.2.9
an31 ANOUT1 function 0A1F B g G M S A - P E - 0 20 1 2 - 6.2.11
an32 ANOUT1 value 0A20 B g G M S A - P - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.13
an33 ANOUT1 gain 0A21 B g G M S A - P - - -20,00 20,00 0,01 1,00 - 6.2.12
an34 ANOUT1 offset X 0A22 B g G M S A - P - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.12
an35 ANOUT1 offset Y 0A23 B g G M S A - P - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.12
an36 ANOUT2 function 0A24 - g G M S - - P E - 0 20 1 6 - 6.2.11
an37 ANOUT2 value 0A25 - g G M S - - P - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.13
an38 ANOUT2 gain 0A26 - g G M S - - P - - -20,00 20,00 0,01 1,00 - 6.2.12
an39 ANOUT2 offset X 0A27 - g G M S - - P - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.12
an40 ANOUT2 offset Y 0A28 - g G M S - - P - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.12
an41 ANOUT3 function 0A29 B g G M S - - - E - 0 20 1 12 - 6.2.11
an42 ANOUT3 value 0A2A B g G M S - - - - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.13
an43 ANOUT3 gain 0A2B B g G M S - - - - - -20,00 20,00 0,01 1,00 - 6.2.12
an44 ANOUT3 offset X 0A2C B g G M S - - - - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.12
an45 ANOUT3 offset Y 0A2D B g G M S - - - - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.12
an46 ANOUT3 period 0A2E B g G M S - - - E - 0 240 1 0 s 6.2.13
an47 ANOUT4 function 0A2F - - G M S - - - E - 0 20 1 12 - 6.2.11
an48 ANOUT4 value 0A30 - - G M S - - - - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.13
an49 ANOUT4 gain 0A31 - - G M S - - - - - -20,00 20,00 0,01 1,00 - 6.2.12
an50 ANOUT4 offset X 0A32 - - G M S - - - - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.12
an51 ANOUT4 offset Y 0A33 - - G M S - - - - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.2.12
an52 ANOUT4 period 0A34 - - G M S - - - E - 0 240 1 0 s 6.2.13
an53 analog para setting mode 0A35 - - G M S A - - E - 0 1 1 0 - 6.9.34
an54 an. para setting dest. 0A36 - - G M S A - - E - -1 7FFFH 1 -1 hex 6.9.34

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Parameter Adr. Control Properties min. max. Step default [?] see on Page
an 55 an. para setting offset 0A37 - - G M S A - - - - -2^31 2^31-1 1 0 - 6.9.34
an 56 an. para set. max. value 0A38 - - G M S A - - - - -2^31 2^31-1 1 0 - 6.9.34
cn 0 PID reference source 07 00 B g G M S A - P - - 0 4 1 0 - 6.12.5
cn 1 PID abs. reference 07 01 B g G M S A - P - - -400,0 400,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.12.5
cn 2 PID act. value src. 07 02 B g G M S A - P - - 0 7 1 0 - 6.12.6
cn 3 PID abs. act. value 07 03 B g G M S A - - - - -400,0 400,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.12.6
cn 4 PID kp 07 04 B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 250,00 0,01 0,00 - 6.12.3
cn 5 PID ki 07 05 B g G M S A - P - - 0,000 30,000 0,001 0,000 - 6.12.3
cn 6 PID kd 07 06 B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 250,00 0,01 0,00 - 6.12.3
cn 7 PID pos. limit 07 07 B g G M S A - P - - -400,0 400,0 0,1 400,0 % 6.12.3
cn 8 PID neg. limit 07 08 B g G M S A - P - - -400,0 400,0 0,1 -400,0 % 6.12.3
cn 9 PID fading time 07 09 B g G M S A - P - - -0,01 300,00 0,01 0,00 s 6.12.3
cn 10 PID reset condition 07 0A B g G M S A - P - - 0 2 1 0 - 6.12.4
cn 11 PID reset inp. sel. 07 0B B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.12.4, 6.3.8
cn 12 I reset inp. sel. 07 0C B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.12.4, 6.3.8
cn 13 fade in reset inp. sel. 07 0D B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.12.4, 6.3.8
cn 14 PID out freq at 100% 07 0E B g G - - A - P - V -400 400 0,0125 0 Hz 6.12.4
cs 0 speed control config. 0F 00 - - - M - - - P - - 0 5 1 0 - 6.6.11
cs 0 speed control config. 0F 00 - - - - S A - P - - 4 5 1 0 - 6.6.11
cs 1 act. source 0F 01 - - - M S A - P - - 0 1 1 0 - 6.6.14; 6.11.3, 6.11.13, 6.9.20
cs 4 speed ctrl. freq. limit 0F 04 B g G - - A - P - V 0 200 0,0125 25 Hz
cs 6 KP speed 0F 06 - - - M S - - P - - 0 32767 1 300 - 6.6.14
cs 6 KP speed 0F 06 B g G - - A - P - - 0 32767 1 50 - 6.6.14
cs 7 KP speed gain 0F 07 - - - M S A - P - - 0 32767 1 0 - 6.6.14
cs 8 KP speed limit 0F 08 - - - M S A - P - - 0 32767 1 0 - 6.6.14
cs 9 KI speed 0F 09 B g G - - A - P - - 0 32767 1 500 - 6.6.14
cs 9 KI speed 0F 09 - - - M S - - P - - 0 32767 1 100 - 6.6.14
cs 10 KI offset 0F 0A - - - M S A - P - - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.6.14
cs 11 max speed for max KI 0F 0B - - - M S A - P - - 0 16000 1 10 rpm 6.6.14
cs 12 min speed for cs.09 0F 0C - - - M S A - P - - 0 16000 1 500 rpm 6.6.14
cs 15 torque reference source 0F 0F - - - M S A - P E - 0 5 1 2 - 6.6.7, 6.6.15
cs 16 torque acc. time 0F 10 - - - M S A - P - - 0 60000 1 0 ms 6.6.15
cs 18 torque ref. setting % 0F 12 - - - M S A - P - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 100,0 % 6.6.15
cs 19 abs. torque ref 0F 13 - - - M - A - P - - -10000,00 10000,00 0,01 LTK Nm 6.6.15
cs 20 torque limit mot. 0F 14 - - - M - A - P - - -0,01:off 10000,00 0,01 -0,01:off Nm 6.6.7
cs 22 torque limit gen. 0F 16 - - - M - A - P - - -0,01:off 10000,00 0,01 -0,01:off Nm 6.6.7
cs 24 stand still pos. ctrl 0F 18 - - - M S A - P - - 0 32767 1 0 - 6.6.14
di 0 PNP / NPN selection 0B00 - g G M S A - - E - 0 SHR 1 0 - 6.3.3
di 1 select signal source 0B01 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.3.4
di 2 digital input setting 0B02 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.3.4
di 3 digital noise filter 0B03 B g G M S A - - E - 0 127 1 0 ms 6.3.5
di 4 input logic 0B04 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.3.5
di 5 input trigger 0B05 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.3.5
di 6 select strobe source 0B06 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.3.6
di 7 strobe mode 0B07 B g G M S A - - E - 0 2 1 0 - 6.3.7
di 8 input strobe dependence 0B08 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.3.6
di 9 reset input selection 0B09 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 3 - 6.3.8
di 10 reset input slope sel. 0B0A B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 3 - 6.3.8
di 11 I1 functions 0B0B B g G M S A - - E - 0 H’ 3FFFFFFF 1 1 hex 6.3.9
di 12 I2 functions 0B0C B g G M S A - - E - 0 H’ 3FFFFFFF 1 2 hex 6.3.9
di 13 I3 functions 0B0D B g G M S A - - E - 0 H’ 3FFFFFFF 1 8192 hex 6.3.9
di 14 I4 functions 0B0E - - - M S A - - E - 0 H’ 3FFFFFFF 1 0 hex 6.3.9
di 15 IA functions 0B0F B g G M S A - - E - 0 H’ 3FFFFFFF 1 0 hex 6.3.9
di 16 IB functions 0B10 B g G M S A - - E - 0 H’ 3FFFFFFF 1 0 hex 6.3.9
di 17 IC functions 0B11 B g G M S A - - E - 0 H’ 3FFFFFFF 1 0 hex 6.3.9
di 18 ID functions 0B12 B g G M S A - - E - 0 H’ 3FFFFFFF 1 0 hex 6.3.9
di 19 F functions 0B13 B g G M S - - - E - 0 H’ 3FFFFFFF 1 32 hex 6.3.9
di 20 R functions 0B14 B g G M S - - - E - 0 H’ 3FFFFFFF 1 64 hex 6.3.9
di 21 RST functions 0B15 B g G M S - - - E - 0 H’ 3FFFFFFF 1 128 hex 6.3.9
di 22 ST functions 0B16 B g G M S A - - E - 0 H’ 3FFFFFFF 1 128 hex 6.3.9
do 0 condition 0 0C00 B g G M S A - P E - 0 68 1 20 - 6.3.13
do 1 condition 1 0C01 B g G M S A - P E - 0 68 1 3 - 6.3.13
do 2 condition 2 0C02 B g G M S A - P E - 0 68 1 4 - 6.3.13
do 3 condition 3 0C03 - - - M S A - P E - 0 68 1 2 - 6.3.13
do 4 condition 4 0C04 B g G M S A - P E - 0 68 1 0 - 6.3.13
do 5 condition 5 0C05 B g G M S A - P E - 0 68 1 0 - 6.3.13
do 6 condition 6 0C06 B g G M S A - P E - 0 68 1 0 - 6.3.13
do 7 condition 7 0C07 B g G M S A - P E - 0 68 1 0 - 6.3.13
do 8 inv. cond. for flag 0 0C08 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.16
do 9 inv. cond. for flag 1 0C09 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.16
do 10 inv. cond. for flag 2 0C0A B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.16
do 11 inv. cond. for flag 3 0C0B B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.16
do 12 inv. cond. for flag 4 0C0C B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.16
do 13 inv. cond. for flag 5 0C0D B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.16
do 14 inv. cond. for flag 6 0C0E B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.16
do 15 inv. cond. for flag 7 0C0F B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.16
do 16 cond. select. for flag 0 0C10 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 1 - 6.3.16

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Parameter Adr. Control Properties min. max. Step default [?] see on Page

do17 cond. select. for flag 1 0C11 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 2 - 6.3.16

do18 cond. select. for flag 2 0C12 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 4 - 6.3.16
do19 cond. select. for flag 3 0C13 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 8 - 6.3.16
do20 cond. select. for flag 4 0C14 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 16 - 6.3.16
do21 cond. select. for flag 5 0C15 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 32 - 6.3.16
do22 cond. select. for flag 6 0C16 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 64 - 6.3.16
do23 cond. select. for flag 7 0C17 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 128 - 6.3.16
do24 AND conn. for flags 0C18 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.16
do25 inv. flags for O1 0C19 - g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.17
do26 inv. flags for O2 0C1A - g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.17
do27 inv. flags for R1 0C1B B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.17
do28 inv. flags for R2 0C1C B g G M S - - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.17
do29 inv. flags for OA 0C1D B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.17
do30 inv. flags for OB 0C1E B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.17
do31 inv. flags for OC 0C1F B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.17
do32 inv. flags for OD 0C20 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.17
do33 flag select. for O1 0C21 - g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 1 - 6.3.17
do34 flag select. forO2 0C22 - g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 2 - 6.3.17
do35 flag select. for R1 0C23 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 4 - 6.3.17
do36 flag select. for R2 0C24 B g G M S - - P E - 0 255 1 8 - 6.3.17
do37 flag select. for OA 0C25 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 16 - 6.3.17
do38 flag select. for OB 0C26 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 32 - 6.3.17 5
do39 flag select. for OC 0C27 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 64 - 6.3.17
do40 flag select. for OD 0C28 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 128 - 6.3.17
do41 AND conn. for outputs 0C29 B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.17
do42 inverted outputs 0C2A B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.3.18
do43 cond. 0 filter time 0C2B - - G M S A - P - - 0 1000 1 0 ms 6.3.12
do44 cond. 1 filter time 0C2C - - G M S A - P - - 0 1000 1 0 ms 6.3.12
dr 0 DASM rated current 06 00 B g G M - A - P - - 0,0 710 0,1 LTK A 6.6.3
dr 1 DASM rated speed 06 01 B g G M - A - P - - 0 64000 1 LTK rpm 6.6.3
dr 2 DASM rated voltage 06 02 B g G M - A - P - - 120 500 1 LTK V 6.6.3
dr 3 DASM rated power 06 03 - - G M - A - P - - 0,35 400,00 0,01 LTK kW 6.6.3
dr 4 DASM rated cos(phi) 06 04 B g G M - A - P - - 0,50 1,00 0,01 LTK - 6.6.3
dr 5 DASM rated frequency 06 05 B g G M - A - P - - 0,0 1600,0 0,1 LTK Hz 6.6.3
dr 6 DASM stator resistance 06 06 B g G M - A - P - - 0,000 50,000 0,001 LTK Ohm 6.6.4
dr 7 DASM sigma-inductance 06 07 - - - M - A - P - - 0,01 500,00 0,01 LTK mH 6.6.5
dr 9 breakdown factor 06 09 B g G - - A - P - - 0,5 4,0 0,1 2,5 -
dr 11 motorprotection mode 06 0B B g G M - A - P - - 0 1 1 1 - 6.7.16
dr 12 motorprot. rated current 06 0C B g G M - A - P - - 0,0 710,0 0,1 LTK A 6.7.16
dr 14 DASM rated torque 06 0E - - - M - A R P - - 0,01 10000,00 0,01 Motordaten Nm 6.6.8
dr 15 max torque FU 06 0F - - - M - - R P - - 0,01 10000,00 0,01 Motordaten Nm 6.6.8
dr 15 max torque FU 06 0F - - - - S A R - - - 0,01 10000,00 0,01 Motordaten Nm 6.6.8
dr 16 DASM max torque corn. sp 06 10 - - - M - A - P - - 0,01 10000,00 0,01 Adaption Nm 6.6.8
dr 17 DASM speed for max torq. 06 11 - - - M - A - P - - 1 32000 1 Adaption rpm 6.6.8
dr 18 DASM field weak. speed 06 12 - - - M - A - P - - 0 32000 1 Adaption rpm 6.6.8
dr 19 flux adaption faktor 06 13 - - - M - A - P - - 25 250 1 Adaption % 6.6.8
dr 20 field weak. curve 06 14 - - - M - A - P - - 0,01 2,00 0,01 Adaption - 6.6.8
dr 21 no load voltage 06 15 - - - M - A - P - - 0,0 100,0 0,1 75,0 % 6.6.12
dr 23 DSM rated current 06 17 - - - - S A - - - - 0,0 710,0 0,1 LTK A 6.6.9
dr 24 DSM rated speed 06 18 - - - - S A - - - - 0 32000 1 LTK rpm 6.6.9
dr 25 DSM rated frequency 06 19 - - - - S A - - - - 0,0 1600,0 0,1 LTK Hz 6.6.9
dr 26 DSM EMK voltage const. 06 1A - - - - S A - - - - 0 1000 1 LTK V 6.6.9, 6.6.12
dr 27 DSM rated torque 06 1B - - - - S A - - - - 0,1 6553,5 0,1 LTK Nm 6.6.9
dr 28 DSM curr. f. zero speed 06 1C - - - - S A - - - - 0,0 700,0 0,1 LTK A 6.6.9
dr 30 DSM winding resistance 06 1E - - - - S A - - - - 0,000 50,000 0,001 LTK Ohm 6.6.9
dr 31 DSM winding inductance 06 1F - - - - S A - - - - 0,01 500,00 0,01 LTK mH 6.6.9
dr 32 DSM rated power 06 20 - - - - S A R - - - 0,01 6553,5 0,01 LTK kW 6.6.9
dr 33 DSM max. torque 06 21 - - - - S A - - - - 0,1 6553,5 0,1 LTK Nm 6.6.9
ds 0 KP current 11 00 - - - M - - - P - - 0 32767 1 1500 - 6.6.12
ds 0 KP current 11 00 - - - - S A - - - - 0 32767 1 Adaption - 6.6.12
ds 1 KI current 11 01 - - - - S A - - - - 0 32767 1 Adaption - 6.6.12
ds 1 KI current 11 01 - - - M - - - P - - 0 32767 1 1500 - 6.6.12
ds 4 flux/rotor adaption mode 11 04 - - - M S A - P E - 0 63 1 0 - 6.6.13
ds 7 KI rotor adaption 11 07 - - - M - - - P - - 0 32767 1 1000 - 6.6.13
ds 8 KP umax 11 08 - - - M S A - P - - 0 32767 1 0 - 6.6.13
ds 9 KI umax 11 09 - - - M S A - P - - 0 32767 1 320 - 6.6.13
ds11 KP flux 11 0B - - - M - - - P - - 0 32767 1 1000 - 6.6.13
ds12 KI flux 11 0C - - - M - - - P - - 0 32767 1 300 - 6.6.13
ds13 magn. current limit 11 0D - - - M S A - P - - 0 LTK 0,1 0 A 6.6.13
ec 0 encoder 1 interface 10 00 - - G M S A - - X - -127 127 1 GBK - 6.10.10
ec 1 encoder 1 (inc/r) 10 01 - - G M S A - - - - GBK GBK 1 GBK inc 6.10.10
ec 2 absolute pos. enc.1 10 02 - - - - S A - - - - 0 65535 1 57057 - 6.10.12
ec 3 time 1 for speed calc. 10 03 - - G M S A - - - - 0 9 1 3 - 6.10.10
ec 4 gear 1 numerator 10 04 - - G M S A - - - - -10000 10000 1 1000 - 6.10.11
ec 5 gear 1 determinator 10 05 - - G M S A - - - - 1 10000 1 1000 - 6.10.11
ec 6 enc.1 rotation 10 06 - - G M S A - - - - 0 19 1 0 - 6.10.11
ec 7 enc.1 trigger 10 07 - - G M S - - - - - GBK GBK 1 GBK - 6.10.11

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Parameter Adr. Control Properties min. max. Step default [?] see on Page

ec 10 encoder 2 interface 10 0A - - G M S A - - X - -127 127 1 GBK - 6.10.6, 6.10.10

ec 11 encoder 2 (inc/r) 10 0B - - G M S A - - - - GBK GBK 1 GBK inc 6.10.10
ec 12 absolute pos. enc.2 10 0C - - - - S - - - - - 0 65535 1 0 - 6.10.12
ec 13 time 2 for speed calc. 10 0D - - G M S A - - - - 0 9 1 3 - 6.10.10
ec 14 gear 2 numerator 10 0E - - G M S A - - - - -10000 10000 1 1000 - 6.10.11
ec 15 gear 2 determinator 10 0F - - G M S A - - - - 1 10000 1 1000 - 6.10.11
ec 16 enc.2 rotation 10 10 - - G M S A - - - - 0 19 1 0 - 6.10.11
ec 17 enc.2 trigger 10 11 - - G M S - - - - - GBK GBK 1 GBK - 6.10.11
ec 20 enc operating mode 10 14 - - G M S A - - - - 0 15 1 0 - 6.10.7
ec 21 SSI multiturn res. 10 15 - - G M S - - - - - 0 13 1 12 - 6.10.13
ec 22 SSI clock frq. sel. 10 16 - - G M S - - - - - 0 1 1 0 - 6.10.13
ec 23 SSI data code 10 17 - - G M S - - - - - 0 1 1 1 - 6.10.13
ec 25 nominal tacho speed 10 19 - - G M S - - - - - 1 16000 1 1500 rpm 6.10.13
ec 27 operation mode output 10 1A - - G M S - - - E - 0 47 1 0 - 6.10.12
ec 31 abs. position ch1 10 1F - - G M S A - - - - -2^31 2^31-1 1 0 inc 6.10.13
ec 32 abs. position ch2 10 20 - - G M S - - - - - -2^31 2^31-1 1 0 inc 6.10.13
ec 33 system offset ch1 10 21 - - - M S A - - E - -2^31 2^31-1 1 0 inc 6.10.13
ec 34 system offset ch2 10 22 - - - M S - - - E - -2^31 2^31-1 1 0 inc 6.10.13
ec 36 enc.1 encoder type 10 24 - - G M S - - - - - 0 255 1 0 - 6.10.13
ec 37 enc.1 encoder status 10 25 - - G M S - - - - - 0 255 1 0 - 6.10.13
ec 38 enc.1 encoder r/w 10 26 - - G M S - - - E - 0 2 1 0 - 6.10.13
fr 1 copy parameter set 09 01 B g G M S A - P E - -4 7 1 0 - 6.8.4
fr 2 parameter set source 09 02 B g G M S A - - E - 0 5 1 0 - 6.8.5
fr 3 parameter set lock 09 03 B g G M S A - - E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.8.8
fr 4 parameter set setting 09 04 B g G M S A - - E - 0 7 1 0 - 6.8.5
fr 5 set activation delay 09 05 B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 2,55 0,01 0,00 s 6.8.8, 6.9.31
fr 6 set deactivation delay 09 06 B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 2,55 0,01 0,00 s 6.8.8, 6.9.31
fr 7 paraset input sel. 09 07 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.8.6, 6.3.8
fr 8 motor set classification 09 08 B g G M - A - P - - 0 7 1 0 - 6.7.14
fr 9 bus parameter set 09 09 B g G M S A - - - - -1 7 1 0 - 6.8.4
fr 10 load mot.dependent para. 09 0A - - - M - - - P E - 1 2 1 1 - 6.6.6
fr 10 load mot.dependent para. 09 0A - - - - S A - - E - 1 2 1 1 - 6.6.6
fr 11 reset set input sel. 09 0B B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.8.7, 6.3.8
in 0 inverter type 0E00 B g G M S A R - - - LTK LTK 1 LTK hex 6.1.19
in 1 rated inverter current 0E01 B g G M S A R - - - LTK LTK 0,1 LTK A 6.1.19
in 3 max. carrier frequency 0E03 B g G M S A R - - - LTK LTK 1 LTK - 6.1.20
in 4 rated carrier frequency 0E04 B g G M S A R - - - LTK LTK 1 LTK - 6.1.20
in 5 interface type 0E05 - - - - - A R - - - GBK GBK 1 GBK hex
in 6 software version 0E06 B g G M S A R - - - SW SW 0,01 SW - 6.1.20
in 7 software date 0E07 B g G M S A R - - - SW SW 0,1 SW - 6.1.20
in 10 serial no. (date) 0E0A B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 - 6.1.21
in 11 serial no. (count) 0E0B B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 - 6.1.21
in 12 serial no. (AB-no. high) 0E0C B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 - 6.1.21
in 13 serial no. (AB-no. low) 0E0D B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 - 6.1.21
in 14 customer no. high 0E0E B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 - 6.1.21
in 15 customer no. low 0E0F B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 - 6.1.21
in 16 QS no. 0E10 B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 - 6.1.21
in 17 temp.- mode 0E11 - - G M S A R - - - LTK LTK 1 LTK - 6.1.21
in 22 user parameter 1 0E16 B g G M S A - - - - 0 65535 1 0 - 6.1.21
in 23 user parameter 2 0E17 B g G M S A - - - - 0 65535 1 0 - 6.1.21
in 24 last error 0E18 B g G M S A R - E - 0 255 - 0 - 6.1.21
in 25 error diagnosis 0E19 B g G M S A R P - - 0 65535 1 0 hex 6.1.22
in 26 E.OC error counter 0E1A B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 - 6.1.22
in 27 E.OL error counter 0E1B B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 - 6.1.22
in 28 E.OP error counter 0E1C B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 - 6.1.22
in 29 E.OH error counter 0E1D B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 - 6.1.22
in 30 E.OHI error counter 0E1E B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 - 6.1.22
in 31 KEB-Hiperface 0E1F - - - M S - R - - - 0 65535 1 LTK - 6.1.22
le 0 comparison level 0 0D00 - - - M S A - P - - -10737418,24 10737418,23 0,01 0,00 - 6.3.15, 6.9.13
le 1 comparison level 1 0D01 - - - M S A - P - - -10737418,24 10737418,23 0,01 0,00 - 6.3.15, 6.9.13
le 2 comparison level 2 0D02 - - - M S A - P - - -10737418,24 10737418,23 0,01 100,00 - 6.3.15, 6.9.13
le 3 comparison level 3 0D03 - - - M S A - P - - -10737418,24 10737418,23 0,01 4,00 - 6.3.15, 6.9.13
le 4 comparison level 4 0D04 - - - M S A - P - - -10737418,24 10737418,23 0,01 0,00 - 6.3.15, 6.9.13
le 5 comparison level 5 0D05 - - - M S A - P - - -10737418,24 10737418,23 0,01 0,00 - 6.3.15, 6.9.13
le 6 comparison level 6 0D06 - - - M S A - P - - -10737418,24 10737418,23 0,01 0,00 - 6.3.15, 6.9.13
le 7 comparison level 7 0D07 - - - M S A - P - - -10737418,24 10737418,23 0,01 0,00 - 6.3.15, 6.9.13
le 8 hysteresis 0 0D08 B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 300,00 0,01 0,00 - 6.3.15
le 9 hysteresis 1 0D09 B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 300,00 0,01 0,00 - 6.3.15
le 10 hysteresis 2 0D0A B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 300,00 0,01 5,00 - 6.3.15
le 11 hysteresis 3 0D0B B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 300,00 0,01 0,50 - 6.3.15
le 12 hysteresis 4 0D0C B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 300,00 0,01 0,00 - 6.3.15
le 13 hysteresis 5 0D0D B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 300,00 0,01 0,00 - 6.3.15
le 14 hysteresis 6 0D0E B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 300,00 0,01 0,00 - 6.3.15
le 15 hysteresis 7 0D0F B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 300,00 0,01 0,00 - 6.3.15
le 16 freq/speed hysteresis 0D10 - - - M S A - - - V 0 200 0,125 15 rpm 6.3.15
le 17 timer 1 start inp. sel. 0D11 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.3.8, 6.9.12
le 18 timer 1 start condition 0D12 B g G M S A - - E - 0 7 1 0 - 6.3.8, 6.9.12

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Parameter Adr. Control Properties min. max. Step default [?] see on Page
le 19 timer 1 reset inp. sel. 0D13 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.3.8, 6.9.12
le 20 timer 1 reset condition 0D14 B g G M S A - - E - 0 31 1 16 - 6.9.13
le 21 timer 1 mode 0D15 B g G M S A - - - - 0 31 1 0 - 6.9.11
le 22 timer 2 start inp. sel. 0D16 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.3.8, 6.9.12
le 23 timer 2 start condition 0D17 B g G M S A - - E - 0 7 1 0 - 6.3.8, 6.9.12
le 24 timer 2 reset inp. sel. 0D18 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.3.8, 6.9.12
le 25 timer 2 reset condition 0D19 B g G M S A - - E - 0 31 1 16 - 6.9.13
le 26 timer 2 mode 0D1A B g G M S A - - - - 0 31 1 0 - 6.9.11
op 0 reference source 03 00 - - G M S A - P E - 0 9 1 0 - 6.4.4, 6.9.9
op 1 rotation source 03 01 - - - M S A - P E - 0 9 1 7 - 6.4.6, 6.9.9
op 2 rotation setting 03 02 B g G M S A - P E - 0 2 1 0 - 6.4.6
op 3 reference setting 03 03 - - - M S A - P - V -4000 4000 0,125 0 rpm 6.4.4
op 5 reference setting % 03 05 B g G M S A - P - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.4.4
op 6 min. reference forward 03 06 - - - M S A - P - V 0 4000 0,125 0 rpm 6.4.11
op 7 min. reference reverse 03 07 - - - M S A - P - V -0,125 4000 0,125 -0,125 rpm 6.4.11
op10 max. reference forward 03 0A - - - M S A - P - V 0 4000 0,125 0 rpm 6.4.11
op11 max. reference reverse 03 0B - - - M S A - P - V -0,125 4000 0,125 -0,125 rpm 6.4.11
op14 abs. max. reference for 03 0E - - - M S A - P - V 0 4000 0,125 4000 rpm 6.4.11
op15 abs. max. reference rev 03 0F - - - M S A - P - V -0,125 4000 0,125 -0,125 rpm 6.4.11
op18 step value rot. source 03 12 - - - M S A - P E - 0 9 1 7 - 6.4.9
op19 step value input sel. 1 03 13 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 16 - 6.4.9, 6.3.8
op20 step value input sel. 2 03 14 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 32 - 6.4.9, 6.3.8 5
op21 step value 1 03 15 - - - M S A - P - V -4000 4000 0,125 100 rpm 6.4.9
op22 step value 2 03 16 - - - M S A - P - V -4000 4000 0,125 -100 rpm 6.4.9
op23 step value 3 03 17 - - - M S A - P - V -4000 4000 0,125 0 rpm 6.4.9
op27 acc dec mode 03 1B B g G M S A - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.4.16
op28 acc. time forward 03 1C B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 300,00 0,01 5,00 s 6.4.13
op29 acc. time reverse 03 1D B g G M S A - P - - -0,01 300,00 0,01 -0,01 s 6.4.13
op30 dec. time forward 03 1E B g G M S A - P - - -0,01 300,00 0,01 5,00 s 6.4.13
op31 dec. time reverse 03 1F B g G M S A - P - - -0,01 300,00 0,01 -0,01 s 6.4.13
op32 s-curve time acc. for. 03 20 B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 5,00 0,01 0,00 s 6.4.14
op33 s-curve time acc. rev. 03 21 B g G M S A - P - - -0,01 5,00 0,01 -0,01 s 6.4.14
op34 s-curve time dec. for. 03 22 B g G M S A - P - - -0,01 5,00 0,01 -0,01 s 6.4.14
op35 s-curve time dec. rev. 03 23 B g G M S A - P - - -0,01 5,00 0,01 -0,01 s 6.4.14
op36 min. output freq. for 03 24 B g G - - A - P - V 0 400 0,0125 0 Hz
op37 min. output freq. rev 03 25 B g G - - A - P - V -0,0125 400 0,0125 -0,0125 Hz
op40 max. output val. for. 03 28 - - - M S A - P - V 0 4000 0,125 4000 rpm 6.4.15, 6.7.5
op41 max. output val. rev. 03 29 - - - M S A - P - V -0,125 4000 0,125 -0,125 rpm 6.4.15, 6.7.5
op44 ext. funct. mode/src 03 2C - - G M S A - P E - 0 63 1 0 - 6.9.27, 6.9.29
op45 ext. funct. dig. source 03 2D - - G M S A - P - - 0,00 100,00 0,01 0,00 % 6.9.27, 6.9.29
op46 ext. funct. acc/dec time 03 2E - - G M S A - P - - 0,00 20,00 0,01 10,00 s 6.9.27, 6.9.30
op47 sweep-gen. acc. time 03 2F - - G M S A - P - - 0,00 20,00 0,01 10,00 s 6.9.27
op48 sweep-gen. dec. time 03 30 - - G M S A - P - - 0,00 20,00 0,01 10,00 s 6.9.27
op49 diam. corr. dmin/dmax 03 31 - - G M S A - P - - 0,010 0,990 0,001 0,500 - 6.9.30
op50 motorpoti function 03 32 B g G M S A - - E - 0 3 1 0 - 6.9.8
op52 motorpoti value 03 34 B g G M S A - P - - -100,00 100,00 0,01 0,00 % 6.9.9
op53 motorpoti min. value 03 35 B g G M S A - - - - -100,00 100,00 0,01 0,00 % 6.9.8
op54 motorpoti max. value 03 36 B g G M S A - - - - -100,00 100,00 0,01 100,00 % 6.9.8
op55 motorpoti reset value 03 37 B g G M S A - - - - -100,00 100,00 0,01 0,00 % 6.9.7
op56 mot.poti inc. input sel. 03 38 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.3.8, 6.9.8
op57 mot.poti dec. input sel. 03 39 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.9.8, 6.3.8
op58 mot.poti reset inp. sel. 03 3A B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.9.8, 6.3.8
op59 motorpoti inc/dec time 03 3B B g G M S A - - - - 0,00 50000,00 0,01 66,00 s 6.9.8
op60 dir. forward input sel. 03 3C B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 4 - 6.3.8, 6.4.7
op61 dir. reverse input sel. 03 3D B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 8 - 6.3.8, 6.4.7
op62 acc/dec time factor 03 3E B g G M S A - - E - 0 4 1 0 - 6.4.13
pn 0 auto retry UP 04 00 B g G M S A - - - - 0 1 1 1 - 6.7.7
pn 1 auto retry OP 04 01 B g G M S A - - - - 0 1 1 0 - 6.7.7
pn 2 auto retry OC 04 02 B g G M S A - - - - 0 1 1 0 - 6.7.7
pn 3 E. EF stopping mode 04 03 B g G M S A - - - - 0 6 1 0 - 6.7.10
pn 4 ext. fault input select 04 04 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 64 - 6.7.9, 6.3.8
pn 5 E.buS stopping mode 04 05 B g G M S A - - - - 0 6 1 6 - 6.7.10, 11.2.3
pn 6 watchdog time 04 06 B g G M S A - - E - 0,00:off 10,00 0,01 0,00:off s 6.7.10, 11.2.3
pn 7 proh. rot. stopping mode 04 07 - - - M S A - - - - 0 6 1 6 - 6.7.11, 6.11.8
pn 8 warning OL stop. mode 04 08 B g G M S A - - - - 0 6 1 6 - 6.7.11, 6.3.15
pn 9 OL warning level 04 09 B g G M S A - - - - 0 100 1 80 % 6.7.10
pn10 warning OH stop. mode 04 0A B g G M S A - - - - 0 6 1 6 - 6.7.11, 6.3.15
pn11 OH warning level 04 0B B g G M S A - - - - 0 90 1 70 °C 6.7.11
pn12 warning dOH stop. mode 04 0C - - - M S A - - - - 0 7 1 6 - 6.7.11, 6.3.15, 6.7.18
pn13 E.dOH delay time 04 0D - - - M S A - - - - 0 120 1 0 s 6.7.11, 6.7.18
pn14 warning OH2 stop. mode 04 0E B g G M S A - - - - 0 6 1 6 - 6.7.12, 6.7.17, 6.3.15
pn15 OH2 warning level 04 0F - - - - S A - - - - 0 100 1 100 % 6.7.12, 6.7.17
pn16 warning OHI stop. mode 04 10 B g G M S A - - - - 0 7 1 7 - 6.7.12, 6.3.16
pn17 E.OHI delay time 04 11 B g G M S A - - - - 0 120 1 0 s 6.7.12
pn18 E.Set stopping mode 04 12 B g G M S A - - - - 0 6 1 0 - 6.7.12
pn19 stall mode 04 13 - - G M - - - P E - 0 255 1 0 - 6.7.5
pn19 stall mode 04 13 B g - - - A - P E - 0 127 1 0 - 6.7.5

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Parameter Adr. Control Properties min. max. Step default [?] see on Page

pn 20 stall level 04 14 B g G M - A - P - - 0 200 1 200:off % 6.7.6

pn 21 stall acc/dec time 04 15 B g G M - A - P - - 0 300,00 0,01 2,00 s 6.7.6
pn 22 LAD stop function 04 16 B g G M S A - P E - 0 7 1 1/0 - 6.7.3
pn 23 LAD stop input selection 04 17 B g G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.7.3, 6.3.8
pn 24 LAD load level 04 18 B g G M S A - P - - 0 200 1 140 % 6.7.3
pn 25 LD voltage 04 19 B g G M S A - P - - 200 800 1 375 / 720 V 6.7.3
pn 26 speed search condition 04 1A B g G M - A - P E - 0 15 1 8 - 6.7.7
pn 27 speed search mode 04 1B B g G M - A - - E - 0 127 1 0/88 - 6.7.7
pn 28 DC braking mode 04 1C B g G M - A - P E - 0 9 1 7 - 6.9.4
pn 29 DC brake input selection 04 1D B g G M - A - - E - 0 4095 1 128 - 6.9.4, 6.3.8
pn 30 DC braking time 04 1E B g G M - A - P - - 0,00 100,00 0,01 10,00 s 6.9.3
pn 31 DC braking max. voltage 04 1F B g G M - A - P - - 0,0 25,5 0,1 25,5 % 6.9.3
pn 32 DC braking start freq. 04 20 - - - M - A - P - V 0 4000 0,125 120 rpm 6.9.3
pn 34 brake control mode 04 22 B g G M S A - P E - 0 4 1 0 - 6.9.16
pn 35 premagnetizing time 04 23 B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 100,00 0,01 0,25 s 6.9.15
pn 36 brake release time 04 24 B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 100,00 0,01 0,25 s 6.9.15
pn 37 brake ctrl. start ref. 04 25 - - - M S A - P - V -600 600 0,125 0 rpm 6.9.17
pn 39 brake delay time 04 27 B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 100,00 0,01 0,25 s 6.9.15
pn 40 brake closing time 04 28 B g G M S A - P - - 0,00 100,00 0,01 0,25 s 6.9.15
pn 41 brake ctrl. stop ref. 04 29 B g G M S A - P - V -600 600 0,125 0 rpm 6.9.17
pn 41 brake ctrl. stop ref. 04 29 B g G M S A - P - V -20 20 0,0125 0 Hz 6.9.17
pn 43 min. load brake ctrl. 04 2B B g G M S A - P - - 0 100 1 0 % 6.9.16
pn 44 power off mode 04 2C B g G M S A - - E - 0 511 1 0 - 6.9.19, 6.9.20, 6.9.23
pn 45 power off start voltage 04 2D B g G M S A - - - - 200 800 1 290 / 500 V 6.9.20, 6.9.21
pn 46 power off auto st. level 04 2E B g G M S A - - - - 50 90 1 80 % 6.9.20, 6.9.21
pn 47 power off brake torque 04 2F B g G - - A - - - - 0,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.9.21
pn 48 power off restart level 04 30 - - - M - A - - - V 0 4000 0,125 0 rpm 6.9.22
pn 50 power off ref. DC volt. 04 32 B g G - - A - - - - 200 800 1 290 / 500 V 6.9.21
pn 51 power off KP DC volt. 04 33 B g G M - A - - - - 0 32767 1 128 - 6.9.22
pn 52 power off restart delay 04 34 B g G M S A - - - - 0,00 100,00 0,01 0,00 s 6.9.23
pn 53 power off KP act.curr. 04 35 B g G - - A - - - - 0 32767 1 50 - 6.9.22
pn 54 power off KI act.curr. 04 36 B g G - - A - - - - 0 32767 1 50 - 6.9.22
pn 55 power off KD act.curr. 04 37 B g G - - A - - - - 0 32767 1 0 - 6.9.22
pn 56 power off jump factor 04 38 B g G - - A - - - - 0 800 1 100 % 6.9.20
pn 57 power off KI DC volt. 04 39 - - G M - A - - - - 0 32767 1 5 - 6.9.22
pn 58 quick stop mode 04 3A B g G - - A - - E - 0 3 1 0 - 6.7.13
pn 59 quick stop level 04 3B B g G - - A - - - - 0 200 1 200 % 6.7.13
pn 60 quick stop acc/dec time 04 3C B g G M S A - - - - 0 300,00 0,01 2,00 s 6.7.13
pn 61 quick stop torque limit 04 3D - - - M S A - P - - 0 10000,00 0,01 Adapt. Nm 6.7.13
pn 62 dOH warning level 04 3E - - G M S A - - - - 0 200 1 100 °C 6.7.11
pn 63 positioning delay 04 3F B g G - - A - P - - -0,02 327,67 0,01 -0,01 s 6.9.31
pn 64 set GTR7 input selection 04 40 - - G M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.7.19, 6.3.8
pn 65 special functions 04 41 - - G M S A - - - - 0 7 1 0 - 6.7.20, 6.7.19, 6.7.9
pn 66 soft. limit stopping mode 04 42 - - - M S A - - - - 0 6 1 5 - 6.7.12
pn 67 q.stop max.torq.corn.sp 04 43 - - - M - A - P - - 0 10000,00 0,01 Adapt. Nm 6.7.13
ps 0 pos/syn mode 13 00 - - - M S A - P E - 0 191 1 0 - 6.11.3, 6.11.12
ps 1 act.master source 13 01 - - - M S A - P - - 0 1 1 1 - 6.11.3, 6.11.13
ps 2 pos/syn input select 13 02 - - - M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.11.3, 6.3.8
ps 3 shift. slave input sel. 13 03 - - - M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.11.4, 6.3.8
ps 4 shifting slave 13 04 - - - M S A - - - - -2^30 2^30-1 1 0 inc 6.11.4
ps 5 start offset 13 05 - - - M S A - P - - -2^30 2^30-1 1 0 inc 6.11.4
ps 6 KP pos/syn 13 06 - - - M S A - P - - 0 32767 1 100 - 6.11.5
ps 9 pos/syn-lage limit 13 09 - - - M S A - P - V 0 4000 0,125 250 rpm 6.11.5
ps 10 shift. slave inv. input sel. 13 03 - - - M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.11.4
ps 14 mode of position ref. 13 0E - - - M S A - - E - 0 511 1 0 - 6.11.6
ps 15 limit switch left 13 0F - - - M S A - - - - -2^30 2^30-1 1 0 inc 6.11.8
ps 16 limit switch right 13 10 - - - M S A - - - - -2^30 2^30-1 1 0 inc 6.11.8
ps 17 reference point 13 11 - - - M S A - - - - -2^30 2^30-1 1 0 inc 6.11.8
ps 18 reference switch inp.sel 13 12 - - - M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.11.8
ps 19 start reference inp.sel 13 13 - - - M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.11.8
ps 20 reference acc/dec time 13 14 - - - M S A - - - - 0 300,00 0,01 0,5 s 6.11.8
ps 21 reference speed 13 15 - - - M S A - - E V 0 4000 0,125 100 rpm 6.11.8
ps 23 index selection 13 17 - - - M S A - - E - 0 15 1 0 - 6.11.14
ps 24 index position 13 18 - - - M S A - - E - 0 -2^30 1 2^30-1 inc 6.11.14
ps 25 index speed 13 19 - - - M S A - - E V 0 4000 1 0 rpm 6.11.14
ps 26 next index 13 1A - - - M S A - - E - -1 15 1 0 - 6.11.14
ps 27 index mode 13 1B - - - M S A - - E - 0 15 1 0 - 6.11.15
ps 28 start index new profil 13 1C - - - M S A - - E - 0 15 1 0 - 6.11.15
ps 29 start posi inp. sel. 13 1D - - - M S A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.11.14
ps 30 target window 13 1E - - - M S A - - - - 0 2^15-1 1 0 inc 6.11.15
ps 31 max. speed setting % 13 1F - - - M S A - - - - 0 1000 0,1 1000 % 6.11.15
ps 32 position norm counter 13 20 - - - M S A - - E - 100 65535 1 4096 -
ps 33 position norm divider 13 21 - - - - - A - - E - 100 16777215 1 4096 -
ru 0 inverter state 02 00 B g G M S A R - - - 0 255 1 0 - 6.1.6
ru 1 set value display 02 01 - - - M S A R - - V -4000 4000 0,125 0 rpm 6.1.6, 6.9.3
ru 2 ramp output display 02 02 - - - M S A R - - V -4000 4000 0,125 0 rpm 6.1.6
ru 3 actual frequency display 02 03 B g G M S A R - - V -400 400 0,0125 0 Hz 6.1.6

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Parameter Adr. Control Properties min. max. Step default [?] see on Page

ru 4 encoder 1 frequency 02 04 - - G - - A R - - V -400 400 0,0125 0 Hz

ru 5 encoder 2 frequency 02 05 - - G - - A R - - V -400 400 0,0125 0 Hz
ru 6 calculated act. freq. 02 06 - - G - - A R - - V -400 400 0,0125 0 Hz
ru 7 actual value display 02 07 - - - M S A R - - V -4000 4000 0,125 0 rpm 6.1.7
ru 9 encoder 1 speed 02 09 - - - M S A R - - V -4000 4000 0,125 0 rpm 6.1.7
ru 10 encoder 2 speed 02 0A - - - M S A R - - V -4000 4000 0,125 0 rpm 6.1.7
ru 11 set torque display 02 0B - - - M S A R - - - -10000,00 10000,00 0,01 0 Nm 6.1.7
ru 12 actual torque display 02 0C - - - M S A R - - - -10000,00 10000,00 0,01 0 Nm 6.1.7
ru 13 actual utilization 02 0D B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 % 6.11.6, 6.1.8
ru 14 peak utilization 02 0E B g G M S A - - - - 0 65535 1 0 % 6.1.8
ru 15 apparent current 02 0F B g G M S A R - - - 0 6553,5 0,1 0 A 6.1.8
ru 16 peak apparent current 02 10 B g G M S A - - - - 0 6553,5 0,1 0 A 6.1.8
ru 17 active current 02 11 B g G M S A R - - - -3276,7 3276,7 0,1 0 A 6.12.6, 6.1.9
ru 18 actual DC voltage 02 12 B g G M S A R - - - 0 1000 1 0 V 6.12.6, 6.1.9
ru 19 peak DC voltage 02 13 B g G M S A - - - - 0 1000 1 0 V 6.1.9
ru 20 output voltage 02 14 B g G M S A R - - - 0 778 1 0 V 6.1.9
ru 21 input terminal state 02 15 B g G M S A R - - - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.1.10, 6.3.5
ru 22 internal input state 02 16 B g G M S A R - - - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.1.10, 6.3.8
ru 23 output condition state 02 17 B g G M S A R - - - 0 255 1 0 - 6.1.11
ru 24 state of output flags 02 18 B g G M S A R - - - 0 255 1 0 - 6.1.11
ru 25 output terminal state 02 19 B g G M S A R - - - 0 255 1 0 - 6.1.12, 6.3.18
ru 26 active parameter set 02 1A B g G M S A R - - - 0 7 1 0 - 6.1.12 5
ru 27 AN1 pre amplifier disp. 02 1B B g G M S A R - - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0 % 6.1.12, 6.2.3, 6.4.4
ru 28 AN1 post amplifier disp. 02 1C B g G M S A R - - - -400,0 400,0 0,1 0 % 6.1.12, 6.2.3, 6.4.4
ru 29 AN2 pre amplifier disp. 02 1D - g G M S - R - - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0 % 6.1.13, 6.2.3, 6.4.4
ru 30 AN2 post amplifier disp. 02 1E - g G M S - R - - - -400,0 400,0 0,1 0 % 6.1.13, 6.2.3, 6.4.4
ru 31 AN3 pre amplifier disp. 02 1F - - G M S - R - - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0 % 6.1.13, 6.2.3, 6.4.4
ru 32 AN3 post amplifier disp. 02 20 - - G M S - R - - - -400,0 400,0 0,1 0 % 6.1.13, 6.2.3, 6.4.4
ru 33 ANOUT1 pre ampl. disp. 02 21 B g G M S A R - - - -400,0 400,0 0,1 0 % 6.1.14, 6.2.12
ru 34 ANOUT1 post ampl. disp. 02 22 B g G M S A R - - - -115,0 115,0 0,1 0 % 6.1.14, 6.2.12
ru 35 ANOUT2 pre ampl. disp. 02 23 - g G M S - R - - - -400,0 400,0 0,1 0 % 6.1.14, 6.2.12
ru 36 ANOUT2 post ampl. disp. 02 24 - - G M S - R - - - -115,0 115,0 0,1 0 % 6.1.14, 6.2.12
ru 37 motorpoti actual value 02 25 B g G M S A R - - - -100,00 100,00 0,01 0 % 6.1.14, 6.9.8
ru 38 power module temperature 02 26 B g G M S A R - - - 0 150 1 0 °C 6.1.15
ru 39 OL counter display 02 27 B g G M S A R - - - 0 100 1 0 % 6.1.15
ru 40 power on counter 02 28 B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 h 6.1.15
ru 41 modulation on counter 02 29 B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 h 6.1.15
ru 42 modulation grade 02 2A B g G M S A R - - - 0 110 1 0 % 6.1.15
ru 43 timer 1 display 02 2B B g G M S A - - - - 0 655,35 0,01 0 - 6.1.15, 6.9.12
ru 44 timer 2 display 02 2C B g G M S A - - - - 0 655,35 0,01 0 - 6.1.16, 6.9.12
ru 45 act. carrier frequency 02 2D B g G M S A R - - - 0 4 1 0 - 6.1.16
ru 46 motor temperature 02 2E B g G M S - R - - - 0 255 1 0 °C 6.1.16
ru 47 act.torque limit mot. 02 2F - - - M S A R - - - -10000,00 10000,00 0,01 0 Nm 6.1.16, 6.6.7
ru 48 act.torque limit gen. 02 30 - - - M S A R - - - -10000,00 10000,00 0,01 0 Nm 6.1.16, 6.6.7
ru 49 actual ref. torque 02 31 - - - M S A R - - - -1000000 10000,00 0,01 0 Nm 6.1.17, 6.6.15
ru 52 ext. PID out disp. 02 34 B g G M S A R - - - -100,0 100,0 0,1 0 % 6.1.17, 6.4.4
ru 53 AUX display 02 35 B g G M S A R - - - -400,0 400,0 0,1 0 % 6.1.17, 6.12.6
ru 54 actual position 02 36 - - - M S A R - - - -2^30 2^30-1 1 0 inc 6.1.17, 6.11.5
ru 56 set positon 02 38 - - - M S A R - - - -2^30 2^31-1 1 0 inc 6.1.17, 6.11.5
ru 58 angle difference 02 3A - - - M S A R - - - -2^31 2^31-1 1 0 inc 6.1.18, 6.11.5
ru 59 rotor adaption factor 02 3B - - - M - A R - - - 0 100 1 0 % 6.1.18
ru 60 akt. position index 02 3C - - - M S A R - - - 0 256 1 0 - 6.1.18
ru 61 target position 02 3D - - - M S A R - - - -2^31 2^31-1 1 0 inc 6.1.18
ru 63 profil speed 02 3F - - - M S A R - - V -4000 4000 0,125 0 rpm 6.1.18
ru 68 rated DC voltage 02 3E B g G M S A R - - - 0 1000 1 0 V
sy 2 inverter identifier 00 02 B g G M S A - - - - identifier identifier 1 identifier hex 6.1.23
sy 3 power unit code 00 03 B g G M S A - - E - 1 255 1 LTK - 6.1.23
sy 6 inverter address 00 06 B g G M S A - - E - 0 239 1 1 - 6.1.23, 11.2.3
sy 7 baud rate ext. bus 00 07 B g G M S A - - E - 0 6 1 5 - 6.1.23, 11.2.3
sy 9 HSP5 watchdog time 00 09 B g G M S A - - E - 0,00:off 10,00 0,01 0,00:off s 6.1.24, 11.2.3
sy11 baud rate int. bus 00 0B B g G M S A - - E - 3 11 1 5 - 6.1.24, 11.2.3
sy32 scope timer 00 20 B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 - 6.1.24
sy41 control word (high) 00 29 - - G M S A - - E - 0 65535 1 0 hex 6.1.24, 11.2.4
sy42 status word (high) 00 2A - - G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 hex 6.1.25, 11.2.5
sy43 control word (long) 00 2B - - G M S A - - E - -2^31 2^31 - 1 1 0 hex 6.1.25, 11.2.4
sy44 status word (long) 00 2C - - G M S A R - - - -2^31 2^31 - 1 1 0 hex 6.1.25, 11.2.5
sy50 control word (low) 00 32 B g G M S A - - E - 0 65535 1 0 hex 6.1.25, 6.4.8, 11.2.4
sy51 status word (low) 00 33 B g G M S A R - - - 0 65535 1 0 hex 6.1.25, 11.2.4
sy52 set speed value 00 34 B g G M S A - - - - -16000 16000 1 0 rpm 6.1.26, 11.2.4
sy53 actual speed value 00 35 B g G M S A R - - - -16000 16000 1 0 rpm 6.1.25, 11.2.4
sy56 start display address 00 38 - - - M S - - - E - 0 7FFFH 1 0209H hex 6.1.25
sy56 start display address 00 38 B g G - - A - - E - 0 7FFFH 1 0203H hex 6.1.25
ud 1 password 08 01 B g G M S A - - - - 0 9999 1 application - 4.2.3, 4.4.3, 6.13.3
ud 2 control type 08 02 - - G M S A - - E - 0 10 1 0 - 6.5.3
ud 9 drive-mode-control 08 09 B g G M S A - - - - 0 11 1 0 - 4.4.4
ud15 cp selector 08 0F B g G M S A - - E - 1 36 1 1 - 6.13.4
ud16 cp address 08 10 B g G M S A - - E - -1 32767 1 Tabelle hex 6.13.4

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Parameter Adr. Control Properties min. max. Step default [?] see on Page

ud 17 cp set norm 08 11 B g G M S A - - E - 1 32767 1 1 - 6.13.4

ud 18 divisor display norm 08 12 B g G M S A - P E - -32767 32767 1 1 - 6.13.6
ud 19 multiplier display norm 08 13 B g G M S A - P E - -32767 32767 1 1 - 6.13.6
ud 20 offset display norm 08 14 B g G M S A - P E - -32767 32767 1 0 - 6.13.6
ud 21 ctrl. display norm 08 15 B g G M S A - P E - 0 1791 1 0 - 6.13.6
uf 0 rated frequency 05 00 B g G M - A - P - V 0 400 0,0125 50 Hz 6.5.4
uf 1 boost 05 01 B g G M - A - P - - 0,0 25,5 0,1 2,0 % 6.5.4
uf 2 add. frequency 05 02 B g G M - A - P - V -0,0125 400 0,0125 0:off Hz 6.5.4
uf 3 add. voltage 05 03 B g G M - A - P - - 0,0 100,0 0,1 0,0 % 6.5.4
uf 4 delta boost 05 04 B g G M - A - P - - 0,0 25,5 0,1 0,0 % 6.5.4
uf 5 delta boost time 05 05 B g G M - A - P - - 0,00 10,00 0,01 0,00 s 6.5.4
uf 6 energy saving mode 05 06 B g G M - A - P - - 0 7 1 0 - 6.9.5
uf 7 energy saving factor 05 07 B g G M - A - P - - 0,0 130,0 0,1 70,0 % 6.9.5
uf 8 energy saving input sel. 05 08 B g G M - A - - E - 0 4095 1 0 - 6.9.5, 6.3.8
uf 9 voltage stabilisation 05 09 B g G M - - - P E - 1 650:off 1 650:off V 6.5.5
uf 9 voltage stabilisation 05 09 - - - - S A - - E - 1 650:off 1 650:off V 6.5.5
uf 10 max. voltage mode 05 0A - - G M - A - P - - 0 3 1 0 - 6.5.6
uf 11 carrier frequency 05 0B B g G M S A - P E - 0 LTK 1 LTK - 6.5.6
uf 12 base block time 05 0C B g G M S A R - - - LTK LTK 0,01 LTK s 6.7.9
uf 13 base block voltage level 05 0D B g G M S A R - - - LTK LTK 1 LTK % 6.7.9
uf 15 hardw. curr. lim. mode 05 0F - - G M S A - - - - 0 2 1 1 - 6.7.3
uf 16 autoboost configuation 05 10 B g G - - A - P - - 0 3 1 0 -
uf 17 autoboost gain 05 11 B g G - - A - P - - 0,00 2,50 0,01 1,20 -
uf 18 deadtime comp. mode 05 12 B g G M - - - - - - 0 1 1 1 - 6.7.9
uf 19 volt.stab.PT1-timeconst. 05 13 - - G - - A - - - - 0 10 1 0 - 6.5.5

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
5 1 12 18.02.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Operating and Unit Data Functional Desription

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware
6.1.1 Summary of ru-Parameter ....... 3
6.1 Operating and Unit Data
6.1.2 Summary of In-Parameter ....... 4
4. Operation 6.2 Analog In- and Outputs 6.1.3 Summary of Sy-Parameter ..... 4
6.1.4 Explanation to Parameter
6.3 Digital In- and Outputs Description ............................. 5
6.4 Setpoint- and Ramp 6.1.5 Description of ru-Parameter .... 6
5. Parameter Adjustment 6.1.6 Description of In-Parameter .. 21
6.1.7 Description of Sy-Parameter . 25
6.5 Voltage-/Frequency
Characteristic Adjustment
6. Functions 6.6 Motor Data and Controller
6.7 Protective Functions
6.8 Parameter Sets
7. Start-up
6.9 Special Functions
6.10 Encoder Interface
8. Special Operation 6.11 Posi-, Synchronous Control
and Contouring Mode
6.12 Technology Controller
9. Error Assistance 6.13 CP-Parameter Definition

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 1 2 21.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Operating and Unit Data Functional Desription

6. Functional Description
6.1 Operating and The parameter groups „ru“, „In“ and „Sy“ are described in this chapter. They serve for
the operational monitoring, error analysis and evaluation as well as for the unit
Unit Data identification.

6.1.1 Summary of The ru- (run) parameter group represents the multimeter of the inverter. Speeds, currents,
ru-Parameter voltages etc. are displayed, which allow a conclusion on the operating condition of the
drive. This can be especially helpful for the start-up of a plant or with regard to trouble
shooting. Following parameters are available:

ru. 0 inverter state ru. 36 ANOUT2 post ampl. disp.

ru. 1 set value display ru. 37 motorpoti actual value
ru. 2 ramp output display ru. 38 power module temperature
ru. 3 actual frequency display ru. 39 OL counter display
ru. 7 actual value display ru. 40 power on counter
ru. 9 encoder 1 speed ru. 41 modulation on counter
ru. 10 encoder 2 speed
6
ru. 42 modulation grade
ru. 11 set torque display ru. 43 timer 1 display
ru. 12 actual torque display ru. 44 timer 2 display
ru. 13 actual utilization ru. 45 act. carrier frequency
ru. 14 peak utilization ru. 46 motor temperature
ru. 15 apparent current ru. 47 act.torque limit mot.
ru. 16 peak apparent current ru. 48 act.torque limit gen.
ru. 17 active current ru. 49 actual ref. torque
ru. 18 actual DC voltage ru. 52 ext. PID out disp.
ru. 19 peak DC voltage ru. 53 AUX display
ru. 20 output voltage ru. 54 actual position
ru. 21 input terminal state ru. 56 set positon
ru. 22 internal input state ru. 58 angular difference
ru. 23 output condition state ru. 59 rotor adaption factor
ru. 24 state of output flags ru. 60 Actual position index
ru. 25 output terminal state ru. 61 target position
ru. 26 active parameter set ru. 63 profil speed
ru. 27 AN1 pre amplifier disp. ru. 68 rated DC voltage
ru. 28 AN1 post amplifier disp. ru. 69 distance ref.-zeropoint
ru. 29 AN2 pre amplifier disp. ru. 71 teach/scan position
ru. 30 AN2 post amplifier disp. ru. 73 relative set torque
ru. 31 AN3 pre amplifier disp. ru. 74 relative active torque
ru. 32 AN3 post amplifier disp. ru. 78 relative active value display
ru. 33 ANOUT1 pre ampl. disp. ru. 79 absolute speed value (EMK)
ru. 34 ANOUT1 post ampl. disp. ru. 80 digital output state
ru. 35 ANOUT2 pre ampl. disp. ru. 81 active power

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

6.1.2 Summary of In- The In- (Information) parameter group includes data and information about the
Parameter identification of the hardware and software as well as to the type and number of errors
that occurred. Following parameters are available:

in. 0 inverter type

in. 1 rated inverter current
in. 3 max. carrier frequency
in. 4 rated carrier frequency
in. 6 software version
in. 7 software date
in. 10 serial no. (date)
in. 11 serial no. (count)
in. 12 serial no. (AB-no. high)
in. 13 serial no. (AB-no. low)
in. 14 customer no. high
in. 15 customer no. low
in. 16 QS no.
in. 17 temp.- mode
in. 22 user parameter 1
in. 23 user parameter 2
in. 24 last error
in. 25 error diagnosis
in. 26 E.OC error counter
in. 27 E.OL error counter
in. 28 E.OP error counter
in. 29 E.OH error counter
in. 30 E.OHI error counter
in. 31 KEB-Hiperface
in. 32 Interface software date

6.1.3 Summary of Sy- As the name already says the Sy- (system) parameter group contains system-specific
Parameter parameters. Following parameters are available:

Sy. 2 inverter identifier

Sy. 3 power unit code
Sy. 6 inverter address
Sy. 7 baud rate ext. bus
Sy. 8 Bus synchron time
Sy. 9 HSP5 watchdog time
Sy. 11 baud rate int. bus
Sy. 32 scope timer
Sy. 41 control word high
Sy. 42 status word high
Sy. 43 control word long
Sy. 44 status word long
Sy. 50 control word low
Sy. 51 status word low
Sy. 52 set speed value
Sy. 53 actual speed value
Sy. 56 start display address

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 1 4 21.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Operating and Unit Data Functional Desription

6.1.4 Explanation to Parameter Description

The parameters described in the following section receive a symbol line with following
details for a better survey:

Parameter group, number and name

Free for user adjustments

Resolution and value
range depend on ud.2

ru. 1 Set value display

Adr. min !ud.2! max !ud.2! default
6
0201h -400 400 0,0125 Hz -

Value range Unit

Lower limit Upper limit Resolution, Default value
increments

Enter parameter
! active after „Enter“
" active immediately

Parameter
! set-programmable
" not programmable

Parameter
! writable
" readable-only

Parameter address

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

6.1.5 Description of ru-Parameter

ru. 0 Inverter state

Adr. min max default

0200h 0 255 1 - 0
In parameter „inverter status“ the actual operating condition of the frequency inverter is displayed. In the case of an
error the current error message is displayed, even if the display has already been reset with ENTER (error-LED on the
operator is still blinking). Status messages and information about the cause and removal are to be found in Chapter 9
„Error Diagnosis“.

ru. 1 Set value display

Adr. min !ud.2! max !ud.2! default

0201h -4000 4000 0,125 rpm -

Display of Set value display. For check reasons the setpoint frequency is also displayed if the control release or the
direction of rotation are not switched. If no direction of rotation is preadjusted then the setpoint frequency for clockwise
rotation (forward) is indicated.

A counter-clockwise rotating field (reverse) is represented by a negative sign. Precondition is the in-phase connection
of the motor.

counter-clockwise clowckwise
rotation rotation
(reverse) (forward)

ru. 2 Ramp output display

Adr. min
!ud.2!
max !ud.2! default

0202h -4000 4000 0,125 rpm -

The displayed speed corresponds to the rotary field speed output at the ramp output. The representation is the same as
at ru.1.

ru. 3 Actual frequency display

Adr. min !ud.2! max !ud.2! default

0203h -400 400 0,0125 Hz -

The indicated actual frequency corresponds to the rotary field frequency given out at the inverter output. The representation
is the same as at ru.1.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 1 6 21.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Operating and Unit Data Functional Desription

ru. 7 Actual value display

Adr. min !ud.2! max !ud.2! default

0207h -4000 4000 0,125 rpm -

The displayed actual speed corresponds to the adjusted encoder input 1 or 2 by cS.1.

ru. 9 Encoder 1 speed

Adr. min !ud.2! max !ud.2! default

0209h -4000 4000 0,125 rpm -

The displayed speed corresponds to the actual speed measured at the encoder input 1.

ru.10 Encoder 2 speed

Adr. min !ud.2! max !ud.2! default

020Ah -4000 4000 0,125 rpm -

The displayed speed corresponds to the actual speed measured at the encoder input 2.

ru.11 Set torque display

Adr. min max !ud.2! default

020Bh -10000 10000 0,01 Nm -

The displayed value corresponds to the current set torque .

ru.12 Actual torque display

Adr. min max !ud.2! default

020Ch -10000 10000 0,01 Nm -

The displayed value corresponds to the current actual torque.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

ru.13 Actual utilization

Adr. min max default

020Dh 0 65535 1 % -
Display of the current utilization referred to the rated current of the inverter. Only positive values are indicated, thus it is
not possible to differentiate between a motoric or generatoric operation.

ru.14 Peak utilization

Adr. min max default

020Eh 0 65535 1 % -
ru.14 allows the detection of short-time peak utilizations during an operating cycle. For that the highest detected value
of ru.13 is stored in ru.14. The peak value memory is cleared by pressing the keys UP, DOWN or ENTER or by bus by
writing any chosen value to the address of ru.14. The disconnection of the inverter also results in a clearing of the
memory.

ru.15 Apparent current

Adr. min max default

020Fh 0 6553,5 0,1 A -

Display of actual apparent curent.

ru.16 Peak apparent current

Adr. min max default

0210h 0 6553,5 0,1 A -

ru.16 allows the detection of short-time peak currents during an operating cycle. For that the highest detected value of
ru.15 is stored in ru.16. The peak value memory is cleared by pressing the keys UP, DOWN or ENTER or by bus by
writing any chosen value to the address of ru.16. The disconnection of the inverter also results in a clearing of the
memory.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 1 8 21.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Operating and Unit Data Functional Desription

ru.17 Active current

Adr. min max default

0211h - 3276,7 3276,7 0,1 A -

Display of the torque-forming active current (stator losses already deducted). Negative current corresponds to generatoric
operation, positive current corresponds to motoric operation. The more precise the input of the motor data , the more
precise the indication of the active current. The maximum values depend on the size of the inverter.

ru.18 Actual DC voltage

Adr. min max default

0212h 0 1000 1 V -
Display of actual DC-link voltage in volt. Typical values:
Normal operation: 230V-class 300-330V over volt. (E.OP): approx. 400V under volt. (E.UP): approx. 216V 6
400V-class 530-620V approx. 800V approx. 240V

ru.19 Peak DC voltage

Adr. min max default

0213h 0 1000 1 V -
ru.19 allows the detection of short-time peak DC voltage during an operating cycle. For that the highest detected value
of ru.18 is stored in ru.19. The peak value memory is cleared by pressing the keys UP, DOWN or ENTER or by bus by
writing any chosen value to the address of ru.19. The disconnection of the inverter also results in a clearing of the
memory.

ru.20 Output voltage

Adr. min max default

0214h 0 778 1 V -
Display of actual output voltage.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

ru.21 Input terminal state

Adr. min max default

0215h 0 4095 1 - -
Display of the current set digital inputs. The logic levels on the input terminals or on the internal inputs are indicated
regardless whether the input is inverted or the internal acceptance is effected through edge-triggering or Strobe (also
see Chapt. 6.3 „Digital inputs“). According to following table a specific decimal value is given out for each digital input.
If several inputs are controlled, the sum of the decimal values is indicated.

Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal

0 1 ST (prog. input „control release / reset“) X2A.16
1 2 RST (prog. input „reset“) X2A.17
2 4 F (prog. input „forward“) X2A.14
3 8 R (prog. input „reverse“) X2A.15
4 16 I1 (prog. input 1) X2A.10
5 32 I2 (prog. input 2) X2A.11
6 64 I3 (prog. input 3) X2A.12
7 128 I4 (prog. input 4) X2A.13
8 256 IA (internal input A) none
9 512 IB (internal input B) none
10 1024 IC (internal input C) none
11 2048 ID (internal input D) none

ru.22 Internal input state

Adr. min max default

0216h 0 4095 1 - -
Display of the currently set external and internal digital inputs. The input is considered as set when it is available as
active signal for further processing (i.e. acceptance by strobe, edge triggering or logic operation). According to the table
(ru.21) a certain decimal value is given out for each digital input. If several inputs are set then the sum of their decimal
values is displayed (see Chapter 6.3 „Digital Inputs“).

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 1 10 21.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Operating and Unit Data Functional Desription

ru.23 Output condition state

Adr. min max default

0217h 0 255 1 - -
With parameters do.0…do.7 switching conditions can be selected which serve as basis for the setting of the outputs.
This parameter indicates which of the selected switching conditions are met, before they are linked by the programmable
logic or inverted (see Chapter 6.3 „Digital Outputs). According to following table a certain decimal value is given out for
the parameters do.0…do.7. If several of the switching conditions selected with these parameters are met, then the sum
of the decimal values is displayed.

Bit -No. Decimal value Output

0 1 switching condition 0 (do.0)
1 2 switching condition 1 (do.1)
2 4 switching condition 2 (do.2)
3 8 switching condition 3 (do.3)
4 16 switching condition 4 (do.4)
5 32 switching condition 5 (do.5)
6
6 64 switching condition 6 (do.6)
7 128 switching condition 7 (do.7)

ru.24 State of output flags

Adr. min max default

0217h 0 255 1 - -
Display of the links after logic step 1. The selected switching conditions are linked in logic step 1 (do.8...24) and
indicated here (see Chapt. 6.3 „Digital outputs“). According to following table a specific decimal value is given out for
each linkage. If several links are set, the sum of the decimal values is indicated.

Bit -No. Decimal value Output

0 1 flag 0
1 2 flag 1
2 4 flag 2
3 8 flag 3
4 16 flag 4
5 32 flag 5
6 64 flag 6
7 128 flag 7

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

ru.25 Output terminal state

Adr. min max default

0218h 0 255 1 - -
Display of the currently set external and internal digital outputs. According to following table a certain decimal value is
given out for each digital output. If several inputs are set then the sum of their decimal values is displayed.

Bit -No. Decimal value Output Terminal

0 1 Out 1 (transistor output 1) X2A.18
1 2 Out 2 (transistor output 2) X2A.19
2 4 Out 3 (relais FLA,FLB,FLC) X2A.24...26
3 8 Out 4 (relais RLA,RLB,RLC) X2A.27...29
4 16 Out A (internal output A) none
5 32 Out B (internal output B) none
6 64 Out C (internal output C) none
7 128 Out D (internal output D) none

ru.26 Active parameter set

Adr. min max default

021Ah 0 7 1 - -
The KEB COMBIVERT can fall back on 8 internal parameter sets (0-7). Through corresponding programming the inverter
can independently change parameter sets and is thus able to drive different operating modes. This parameter shows the
parameter set, with which the inverter is currently running. Independent of it another parameter set can be edited by bus
(also see chapter 6.8).

ru.27 AN1 pre amplifier display

Adr. min max default

021Bh -100 100 0,1 % -

This parameter indicates the value of the analog signal AN1 in percent on the differential voltage input (terminal X2A.1 /
X2A.2) before signal amplification. In dependence on an.10 the indicated value 0...±100 % corresponds to: 0...±10 V;
0...±20 mA or 4...±20 mA (also see Chapt. 6.2 „Analog inputs“).

ru.28 AN1 post amplifier display

Adr. min max default

021Ch -400 400 0,1 % -

This parameter shows the value of the analog signal AN1 in percent after passing the characteristic amplifier. The range
of indication is limited to ±400 % (also see Chapt. 6.2 „Analog inputs“).

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 1 12 21.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Operating and Unit Data Functional Desription

ru.29 AN2 pre amplifier display

Adr. min max default

021Dh -100 100 0,1 % -

This parameter shows the value of analog signal AN2 in percent on the differential voltage input (terminal X2A.3 /
X2A.4) before signal amplification. In dependence on an.10 the indicated value of 0...±100 % corresponds to: 0...±10 V;
0...±20 mA or 4...20 mA (also see Chapt. 6.2 „Analog inputs“).

ru.30 AN2 post amplifier display

Adr. min max default

021Eh -400 400 0,1 % -

This parameter shows the value of the analog signal AN2 in percent after passing the characteristic amplifier. The range
of indication is limited to ±400 % (also see Chapt. 6.2 „Analog inputs“).
6

ru.31 AN3 pre amplifier display

Adr. min max default

021Fh -100 100 0,1 % -

This parameter shows the value of analog signal in percent on the optional input AN3 before signal amplification. In
dependence on an.10 the indicated value of 0...±100 % corresponds to: 0...±10 V; 0...±20 mA or 4...±20 mA (also see
Chapt. 6.2 „Analog inputs“).

ru.32 AN3 post amplifier display

Adr. min max default

0220h -400 400 0,1 % -

This parameter shows the value of the analog signal in percent on the optional input AN3 after passing the characteristic
amplifier. The range of indication is limited to ±400 % (also see Chapt. 6.2 „Analog inputs“).

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

ru.33 ANOUT1 pre ampl. display

Adr. min max default

0221h -400 400 0,1 % -

This parameter shows the value of the analog signal ANOUT1 in percent before passing the characteristic amplifier
(also see Chapt. 6.2. „Analog outputs“).

ru.34 ANOUT1 post ampl. display

Adr. min max default

0222h -115 115 0,1 % -

This parameter shows the value of the signal given out on analog output ANOUT1 (terminal X2A.5) in percent. A value
of 0...±115 % correponds to an output signal of 0...±11,5 V (also see Chapt. 6.2 „Analog outputs“).

ru.35 ANOUT2 pre ampl. display

Adr. min max default

0223h -400 400 0,1 % -

This parameter shows the value of the analog signal ANOUT1 in percent before passing the characteristic amplifier
(also see Chapt. 6.2. „Analog outputs“).

ru.36 ANOUT2 post ampl. display

Adr. min max default

0224h -115 115 0,1 % -

This parameter shows the value of the signal given out on analog output ANOUT2 (terminal X2A.6) in percent. A value
of 0...±115 % correponds to an output signal of 0...±11,5 V (also see Chapt. 6.2 „Analog outputs“).

ru.37 Motorpoti actual value

Adr. min max default

2025h -100 100 0,01 % -

The motorpoti-function in the KEB COMBIVERT imitates a mechanical, motor operated potentiometer. The control
occurs via 2 programmable inputs („poti up“ and „poti down“). The display is limited by oP.53/54. The adjustment of the
motorpoti is done with the parameters oP.50...oP.59 (also see Chapt. 6.9.3 „Motorpoti“). By way of the bus the motorpoti
can be set to any chosen value between -100...100%. In addition to the inputs the motorpoti can be operated with the
keys „UP“ and „DOWN“. Then the rate of change is not constant.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 1 14 21.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Operating and Unit Data Functional Desription

ru.38 Power module temperature

Adr. min max default

0226h 0 150 1 °C -
ru.38 shows the actual power module temperature of the inverter.

ru.39 OL counter display

Adr. min max default

0227h 0 100 1 % -
To prevent „E.OL“ errors caused by too high loads (load reduction), the internal counter content of the OL-counter can be
made visible herewith. At 100 % the inverter switches off with the error „E.OL“. The error can be reset only after a cooling
time (blinking display „E.nOL“).

ru.40 Power on counter

6
Adr. min max default

0228h 0 65535 1 h -
The operating hours meter 1 displays the time the inverter was switched on. The indicated value includes all operating
phases. On attaining the maximum value (approx. 7.5 years) the display remains on the maximum value.

ru.41 Modulation on counter

Adr. min max default

0229h 0 65535 1 h -
The operating hours meter 2 displays the time the inverter was active (motor controlled). On attaining the maximum
value (approx. 7.5 years) the display remains on the maximum value.

ru.42 Modulation grade

Adr. min max default

022Ah 0 110 1 % -
The modulation grade shows the output voltage in percent. 100 % correspond to the input voltage (no-load). At a value
of > 100 % the inverter works with overmodulation.

ru.43 Timer 1 display

Adr. min max default

022Bh 0 655,35 0,01 - -

The count of the free-programmable timer 1 is indicated. The display is done either in seconds or hours (see LE.21). The
counter can a adjusted to any chosen value by keyboard or bus. The programming of the counter is done with the
parameters LE.17...LE.21 (also see Chapt. 6.9.4 „Timer“).

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

ru.44 Timer 2 display

Adr. min max default

022Ch 0 655,35 0,01 - -

The count of the free-programmable timer 2 is indicated. The display shows optionally seconds, hours or edges/100
(see LE.26). The counter can be adjusted to any chosen value by keyboard or bus. The programming of the counter is
done with the parameters LE.22...LE.26 (also see Chapt. 6.9.4 „Timer“).

ru.45 Act. carrier frequency

Adr. min max default

022Dh 0 4 1 - -
Shows the actual carrier frequency of the inverter. The displayed value corresponds to following switching frequencies:
0 = 2 kHz 3 = 12 kHz
1 = 4 kHz 4 = 16 kHz
2 = 8 kHz

ru.46 Motor temperature

Adr. min max default

022Eh 0 255: off 1 °C -

Indicates the current motor temperature. Precondition for this function is aspecial power circuit. The temperature detection
is connected to the terminals T1/T2.
0: T1/T2 closed 253, 254: broken cable; short circuit; detection error
255: T1/T2 open

ru.47 Actual torque limit mot.

Adr. min max default

022Fh -10000 10000 0,01 Nm -

This parameter displays the currently adjusted set torque limit for motoric operation.

ru.48 Actual torque limit gen.

Adr. min max default

0230h -10000 10000 0,01 Nm -

This parameter displays the currently adjusted set torque limit for generatoric operation.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 1 16 21.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Operating and Unit Data Functional Desription

ru.49 Actual ref. torque

Adr. min max default

0231h -10000 10000 0,01 Nm -

This parameter displays the preadjusted setpoint torque at the input of the torque controller.

ru.52 External PID out display

Adr. min max default

0234h -100,0 100,0 0,1 % -

A universal PID-controller is intergrated in the inverter. It can be used externally as well as internally. So that the
controller is as independent as possible, the displayed manipulated variable, referring to a +/- signal, is ouput in percent.
6

ru.53 AUX display

Adr. min max default

0235h -400,0 400,0 0,1 % -

The AUX-input is adjusted with An.30. This parameter shows in percent the value of the analog singal AUX. The range of
display is limited to ±400 % (also see 6.2 „Analog inputs“).

ru.54 Actual position

Adr. min max default

0236h -2147483648 2147483647 1 Inc -

ru.54 displays the absolute actual position in increments.

ru.56 Set position

Adr. min max default

0238h -2147483648 2147483647 1 Inc -

ru.56 displays the absolute set position in increments.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

ru.58 Angular difference

Adr. min max default

023Ah -2147483648 2147483647 1 Inc -

This parameter displays the actual angular difference between master and slave.

ru.59 Rotor adaption factor

Adr. min max default

023Bh 0 100 1 % -
This parameter displays the actual factor of the rotor adaption.

ru.60 Actual position index

Adr. min max default

023Ch 0 255 1 - -
This parameter displays the actual position index of the position profile.

ru.61 Target position

Adr. min max default

023Dh -2147483648 2147483647 1 Inc -

This parameter displays the target position of the actual position index.

ru.63 Profil speed

Adr. min max default

023Fh -4000 4000 0,125 rpm -

This parameter displays the speed of the actual position index.

ru.68 Rated DC voltage

Adr. min max default

0244h 0 1000 1 V -
This parameter displays the rated dc link voltage automatically detected by the inverter. The value is detected at power-
on.

ru.68 Distance reference - zero point

Adr. min max default

0245h -2147483648 -2147483647 1 Inc -

This parameter displays the distance to the zero signal after relieving the reference switch.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 1 18 21.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Operating and Unit Data Functional Desription

ru.71 Teach / scan position

Adr. min max default

0247h -2147483648 2147483647 1 Ink -

This parameter displays the current teach position. The position remains until a new position is teached.

ru.73 relative set torque

Adr. min max default

0249h -100,0 100,0 0,1 % -

This parameter displays the adjusted setpoint torque (ru.11) at the input percent-related to the absolute torque setpoint
(cs.19).

ru.74 relative actual torque 6

Adr. min max default

024Ah -100,0 100,0 0,1 % -

This parameter displays the current actual torque (ru.12) at the input percent-related to the absolute torque setpoint
(cs.19).

ru.78 relative actual value display

Adr. min max default

024Eh -100,0 100,0 0,1 % -

This parameter displays the current actual value (ru.7) percent-related to the max. setpont clockwise rotation (oP.10).

ru.79 absolute speed value (EMF)

Adr. min max default

024Fh -4000 4000 0,125 1/min -

To protect servo motors in the field weakening range against countervoltages, an EMF-dependent speed must not be
exceeded. The calculated value is placed in front of all other limits. It is displayed in ru.78.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

ru.80 digital output state

Adr. min max default

0250h 0 255 1 - -
With do.51 the digital output signals can be assigned to the hardware outputs (see chapter 6.3). This parameter displays
the status of the output signals before the assignment according to following table. If several outputs are set, the total
sum of their decimal values is indicated.

Bit -No. Decimal value Output Terminal

0 1 O1 (Transistor output 1) X2A.18
1 2 O2 (Transistor output 2) X2A.19
2 4 R1 (Relay RLA,RLB,RLC) X2A.24...26
3 8 R2 (Relay FLA,FLB,FLC) X2A.27...29
4 16 OA (Internal output A) keine
5 32 OB (Internal output B) keine
6 64 OC (Internal output C) keine
7 128 OD (Internal output D) keine

ru.81 active power

Adr. min max default

0251h -400,00 400,00 0,01 kW 0,01

ru.81 displays the current active power of the inverter. In regenerative operation the negative values are displayed.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 1 20 21.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Operating and Unit Data Functional Desription

6.1.6 Description of In-Parameter

In. 0 Inverter type

Adr. min max default

0E00h 0h FFFFh 1 hex -

The inverter type is represented as hexadecimal number. The bits have following significance:

Bit 0-4 Unit size 05, 07, 09 ...

Bit 5 Voltage class 0 = 230 V

1 = 400 V

Bit 6 Phases 0 = 1-phase

1 = 3-phase

Bit 7 free
6
Bit 8-12 Housing 0=A 10 = K 20 = U
1=B 11 = L 21 = V
2=C 12 = M 22 = W
3=D 13 = N 23 = X
4=E 14 = O 24 = Y
5=F 15 = P 25 = Z
6=G 16 = Q
7=H 17 = R
8=I 18 = S
9=J 19 = T

Bit 13-15 Control type 0=G

1=M
2=B
3=S
4=A
Example:
hex 0 4 0 A
binary 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
decimal 0 4 0 0 10

=> 10.F5.G 230V/1ph.

In. 1 Rated inverter current

Adr. min max default

0E01h LTK 710 0,1 A -

Display of rated inverter current in A. The value is determined from the power circuit identification (LTK) and cannot be
changed.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

In. 3 Max. carrier frequency

Adr. min max default

0E03h 0 4 1 - -
Shows the max. carrier frequency of the inverter. The displayed value corresponds to following switching frequencies:
2 kHz / 4 kHz / 8 kHz / 12 kHz / 16 kHz

In. 4 Rated carrier frequency

Adr. min max default

0E04h 0 LTK 1 - LTK

Shows the rated carrier frequency of the inverter. The displayed value corresponds to following switching frequencies:
2 kHz / 4 kHz / 8 kHz / 12 kHz / 16 kHz

In. 6 Software version

Adr. min max default

0E06h 0.00 9.99 1 - -

The software version-number is encoded in this parameter.
1. and 2. digit: software version (e.g. 2.1)
3. digit: special version (0 = Standard)

In. 7 Software date

Adr. min max default

0E07h - - 0,1 - -
Display of software date. The value incorporates date, month and year, at that only the last number of the year is
indicated.
Example: Display= 2102.0
Date = 21.02.2000

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 1 22 21.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Operating and Unit Data Functional Desription

In.10 Serial no. (date) 0E0Ah

In.11 Serial no. (count) 0E0Bh
In.12 Serial no. (AB-no. high) 0E0Ch
In.13 Serial no. (AB-no. low) 0E0Dh
In.14 Customer no. high 0E0Eh
In.15 Customer no. low 0E0Fh
In.16 QS no. 0E10h
Adr. min max default

s.o. 0 65535 1 - 0
Serial number and customer number identify the inverter. The QS-number contains internal production information.

In.17 Temperature mode 6

Adr. min max default

0E11h 0 LTK 1 - -
This parameter is for service personell only.

In.22 User parameter 1

Adr. min max default

0E16h 0 65535 1 - 0
This parameter is not assigned to any function and is available to the user for free input.

In.23 User parameter 2

Adr. min max default

0E17h 0 65535 1 - 0
This parameter is not assigned to any function and is available to the user for free input.

In.24 Last error

Adr. min max default

0E18h 0 255 1 - -
In.24 shows the error that occurred last, E. UP is not stored. The error messages are described in chapter 9.1.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

In.25 Error diagnosis

Adr. min max default

0E19h 0 65535 1 - 0
Shows the 8 errors (in the sets 0...7) that occurred last. The oldest error is in set 7. Between errors of the same type a
differential time is determined and stored too.

Bit 0...11 Value 0...4094 differential ime in minutes

Value 4095 differential time > 4094 minutes

Bit 12...15 Value Error type Value Error type Value Error type
0 no erors 3 E.OP 6...15 free
1 E.OC 4 E.OH
2 E.OL 5 E.OHI

In.26 E.OC error counter 0E1Ah

In.27 E.OL error counter 0E1Bh
In.28 E.OP error counter 0E1Ch
In.29 E.OH error counter 0E1Dh
In.30 E.OHI error counter 0E1Eh
Adr. min max default

s.o. 0 65535 1 - 0
The error counters (for E.OC, E.OL, E.OP, E.OH, E.OHI) state the total number of the different error types that occurred.

In.31 KEB - Hiperface

Adr. min max default

0E1Fh 0 65535 1 - -
In.31 shows the version of the KEB - Hiperface.

In.32 Interface Softwaredatum

Adr. min max default

0E20h 0 65535 1 - -
In.32 shows the date of the interface software.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 1 24 21.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Operating and Unit Data Functional Desription

6.1.7 Description of Sy (System) - Parameter

Sy. 2 Inverter identifier

Adr. min max default

0002h 0000 9999 1 hex -

A unique number is assigned to each type of frequency inverter which identifies the hard- and software. This value is
used for example by COMBIVIS to load the correct configuration files. Sy.2 kann mit dem angezeigten Wert beschrieben
werden (z.B. zur Identifikation von Downloadlisten).

Sy. 3 Power unit code

Adr. min max default

0003h -255 255 1 P-ID -

On the basis of the power circuit identification the control recognizes the used power circuit respectively a change of the
power circuit and adjusts certain parameters accordingly. To accept a new P-Id enter positive values (see chap. 9
„E.Puch“). 6

Sy. 6 Inverter address

Adr. min max default

0006h 0 239 1 - 1
With Sy.6 the address is adjusted under which the inverter is addressed by „COMBIVIS“ or another control. The possible
values are between 0 and 239, the default value is 1. If several inverters are operated simulaneously on the bus, it is
absolutely necessary to assign different addresses, since otherwise communication problems arise because several
inverters may responded at the same time. The development info DIN 66019II protocol (C0.F5.01I-K001) contains
further information.

Sy. 7 Baud rate ext. bus

Adr. min max default

0007h 0 6 1 - 5
Following values are possible for the baudrate of the serial interface:

Parameter value Baudrate

0 1200 baud
1 2400 baud
2 4800 baud
3 (default) 9600 baud
4 19200 baud
5 38400 baud
6 55500 baud

If the value for the baudrate is changed over the serial interface, it can only be changed again by way of the keyboard
or after adapting the baudrate of the master, since no communication is possible in the case of different baudrates
between master and slave.
If problems occur during the data transmission, select a baudrate up to max. 38400 baud.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Sy. 8 Bus synchron time

Adr. min max default

0008h 0 (off) 65000 1 µs 0 (off)

The time, within which the control synchronized onto an external clock pulse (sercos), is entered in this parameter. If
no sychnronization takes place, an error or status message (E.SbuS or A.SbuS) , depending on the adjusted
behaviour, is output. The value „off“ deactivates the function.

Sy. 9 HSP5 Watchdaog time

Adr. min max default

0009h 0 (off) 10,00 0,01 s 0 (off)

The HSP5 Watchdog-function monitores the communication of the HSP5-interface (control card - operator; or control
card - PC). After expiration of an adjustable time (0,01...10 s) without incoming telegrams, the response adjusted in Pn.5
is triggered. The value „off“ deactivates the function.

Sy. 11 Baud rate int. bus

Adr. min max default

000Bh 3 11 1 - 11
With the internal baudrate the transmission rate between operator and inverter is determined. Following values are
possible:

Value Baudrate Value Baudrate Value Baudrate

3 9,6 kBaud 6 55,5 kBaud 9 *) 115,2 kBaud
4 19,2 kBaud 7 57,6 kBaud 10 125 kBaud
5 38,4 kBaud 8 100 kBaud 11 250 kBaud *) at F5-M not possible

After Power-On it is always started with 38.4 kBaud and dependent on the operator higher set.

Sy. 32 Scope timer

Adr. min max default

0020h 0 65535 1 - 0
The scope timer generates a time period of 1 ms. This can be used by external programs, e.g. Scope, to represent time
patterns. The timer counts from 0...65535 and starts again with 0 after an overflow.

Sy. 41 Control word high

Adr. min max default

0029h 0 65535 1 - 0
The control word is used for the status control of the inverter via bus. The control word long (Sy.43) consists of the two
16 bit parameters control word high (Sy.41) and Control word low (Sy.50). The status word is bit-coded. The description
of the individual bits is found in Chapter 11.2.7.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 1 26 21.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Operating and Unit Data Functional Desription

Sy. 42 Status word high

Adr. min max default

002Ah 0 65535 1 - 0
With the status word the current condition of the inverter can be readout. The status word long (Sy.44) consists of the
two 16 bit parameters status word high (Sy.42) and status word low (Sy.51). The status word is bit-coded. The description
of the individual bits is found in Chapter 11.2.7.

Sy. 43 Control word long

Adr. min max default

002Bh -2147483648 2147483647 1 - 0

The control word is used for the status control of the inverter via bus. The control word long (Sy.43) consists of the two
16 bit parameters control word high (Sy.41) and Control word low (Sy.50). The status word is bit-coded. The description
of the individual bits is found in Chapter 11.2.7.
6

Sy. 44 Status word long

Adr. min max default

002Ch -2147483648 2147483647 1 - 0

With the status word the current condition of the inverter can be readout. The status word long (Sy.44) consists of the
two 16 bit parameters status word high (Sy.42) and status word low (Sy.51). The status word is bit-coded. The description
of the individual bits is found in Chapter 11.2.7.

Sy. 50 Control word

Adr. min max default

0032h 0 65535 1 - 0
The control word is used for the status control of the inverter via bus. The control word long (Sy.43) consists of the two
16 bit parameters control word high (Sy.41) and Control word low (Sy.50). Das Steuerwort ist bitcodiert. The status word
is bit-coded. The description of the individual bits is found in Chapter 11.2.7.

Sy. 51 Status word

Adr. min max default

0033h 0 65535 1 - 0
With the status word the current condition of the inverter can be readout. The status word long (Sy.44) consists of the
two 16 bit parameters status word high (Sy.42) and status word low (Sy.51). Das Steuerwort ist bitcodiert. The status
word is bit-coded. The description of the individual bits is found in Chapter 11.2.7.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Sy. 52 Set speed value

Adr. min max default

0034h -32000 32000 1 rpm 0

Presetting of the setpoint speed in the range of ±16000 rpm. The source of direction of rotation is determined as with the
other absolute setpoint sources over oP.1. The setpoint source oP.0 must be adjusted to „5“ for setpoint setting by Sy.52.

Sy. 53 Actual speed value

Adr. min max default

0035h -32000 32000 1 rpm 0

With this parameter the current actual speed can be readout in rpm. The direction of rotation is signaled by the sign.

Sy. 56 Start display address

Adr. min max default

0038h 0 7FFFh 1 hex 0203

Sy.56 adjusts the parameter address which shall be represented on switching on the operator. Only valid addresses are
accepted.
If this parameters is available in the CP-Mode, the setting becomes effective there. Otherwise CP.0 is indicated as start
parameter.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 1 28 21.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Functional Description

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

6.1 Operating and Applicance

Date 6.2.1 Summary Description
4. Operation Analog Inputs ......................... 3
6.2 Analog In- and Outputs
6.2.2 Interface Selection .................. 4
6.3 Digital In- and Outputs 6.2.3 Interference Suppression Filter 5
6.4 Set Value and Ramp 6.2.4 Save mode ............................. 5
5. Parameter 6.2.5 Input selection ........................ 5
Adjustment
6.2.6 Zero point hysteresis .............. 6
6.5 Voltage-/Frequency 6.2.7 Amplifier of the Input
Characteristic (U/f) Characteristic ......................... 7
6. Functions 6.2.8 Lower and Upper Limit ............ 8
Adjustment
6.2.9 Selection Set Point-/
6.6 Motor Data Adjustment Auxiliary Input ........................ 9
6.7 Protective Functions 6.2.10 Summary Description
7. Start-up Analog Outputs ..................... 10
6.8 Parameter Sets
6.2.11 Output Signals ...................... 11
6.9 Special Functions 6.2.12 Analog Output / Functions .... 11
6.10 Encoder Interface 6.2.13 Analog Output / Display ........ 11
8. Special Operation 6.2.14 Amplifier of the Output
6.11 SMM, Posi, Synchron
Characteristic ....................... 11
6.12 Technology Control 6.2.15 Period ANOUT3 .................... 13
6.13 CP-Parameter Definition 6.2.16 Digital Settings ..................... 13
9. Error Assistance 6.2.17 Used Parameters .................. 14

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 2 2 23.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Analog In- and Outputs Functional Description

6.2 Analog In- and Outputs

6.2.1 Summary By selecting an input interface (An.0 / 10) input AN1, e.g. AN2 can be adjusted to
Description Analog the applied input signal. By An.20 the third analog input can be switched additionally
to AN1. Subsequently the analog inputs are smoothed in an electronic filter (An.1 /
Inputs
11 / 21) by averaging. With An.2 / 12 / 22 a save mode can be adjusted and activated
with a programmable input (An.3 / 13 / 23). To avoid voltage fluctuations and ripple
Observe the different functional voltages around the zero point the analog signal can be faded out around the zero
range of the hard- and software point up to ±10 % (An.4 / 14 / 24). In the characteristics amplifier the input signals
of the different control cards can be influenced in X and Y direction as well as in the rise (An.5...7 / 15...17 /
(see chapter 3).
25...27). At the output of the characteristic amplifier the signal can be limited to a
minimum and a maximum value (An.8, 9 / 18, 19 / 28, 29). At the output of the block
it can be defined with An.30 which analog signal serves as reference value and
which one serves as auxiliary value. The ru-parameters are used for the indication
of the analog signal before and after the amplification. The internal values are limited
to ±400%.

Fig. 6.2.1 Principle of the analog inputs

Analog inputs 6
An.5
An.0 An.6 An.8
0...±100% ru.27 An.4 An.7 An.9 ru.28 An.30
+AN1 (X2A.1) An.2 400%
±10V An.1 REF
0...±20mA An.3 -400%
-AN1 (X2A.2) 4...20mA
An.15
An.10 An.16 An.18
0...±100% ru.29 An.14 An.17 An.19 ru.30
+AN2 (X2A.3) An.12 400%
±10V An.11 AUX
0...±20mA An.13 -400%
-AN2 (X2A.4) 4...20mA
An.25
An.26 An.28
ru.31 An.24 An.27 An.29 ru.32

+AN3 (optionally) An.21 An.22

An.23
-AN3 (optionally) An.20

An. 0 AN1 Interface selection An. 19 AN2 Upper limit

An. 1 AN1 Interference suppression filter An. 20 AN3 Interface selection
An. 2 AN1 Save mode An. 21 AN3 Interference suppression filter
An. 3 AN1 Input selection An. 22 AN3 Save mode
An. 4 AN1 Zero point hysteresis An. 23 AN3 Input selection
An. 5 AN1 Amplification An. 24 AN3 Zero point hysteresis
An. 6 AN1 Offset X An. 25 AN3 Amplification
An. 7 AN1 Offset Y An. 26 AN3 Offset X
An. 8 AN1 Lower limit An. 27 AN3 Offset Y
An. 9 AN1 Upper limit An. 28 AN3 Lower limit
An. 10 AN2 Interface selection An. 29 AN3 Upper limit
An. 11 AN2 Interference suppression filter An. 30 Selection REF-input / AUX-function
An. 12 AN2 Save mode ru. 27 AN1 Display before amplification
An. 13 AN2 Input selection ru. 28 AN1 Display after amplification
An. 14 AN2 Zero point hysteresis ru. 29 AN2 Display before amplification
An. 15 AN2 Amplification ru. 30 AN2 Display after amplification
An. 16 AN2 Offset X ru. 31 AN3 Display before amplification
An. 17 AN2 Offset Y ru. 32 AN3 Display after amplification
An. 18 AN2 Lower limit

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

6.2.2 Interface Selection Depending on the selected interface (An.0/An.10) the analog inputs AN1 and AN2
(An.0; An.10) can process following input signals:

An.0 / An.10 = 0 0...±10 V (default)

=1 0...±20 mA
=2 4...20 mA

Fig. 6.2.2.a Connection as differential voltage inputs 0...±10V DC

Ri = 55 kOhm
X2A. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PE

1)
+ - + -
SPS SPS
0...±10 VDC

1) Connect equipotential bonding conductor only, if a potential difference of > 30V

exists between the controls. The internal resistance is reduced to 30 kOhm.

Fig. 6.2.2.b Control with potentiometer and internal reference voltage

X2A. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PE

0...10V DC
Ri=30kΩ
(An.0 / An.10 = 0)

The output CRF Kl. X2A.7 may

be loaded with maximal 6mA!

R = 3...10 kW

Fig. 6.2.2.c Control with current signal

X2A. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PE

An.0 / An.10 = 1 or 2
+ +
0...±20 mADC
4...20 mADC
Ri = 250 Ω

Interface Selection With An.20 it is determined from where the 3. analog setpoint signal is received.
(An.20) Following values can be defined:

Value Function
0 Analog value from the optional analog input (default)
1 Analog value via the terminals of AN1

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 2 4 23.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Analog In- and Outputs Functional Description

6.2.3 Interference The interference suppression filters shall suppress disturbances and ripples of the
Suppression input signals. If the interference suppression filter is switched off the analog inputs are
queried every 1 ms (control card BASIC 2 ms) and the recorded value is then transfer-
Filter (An.1; red. With the interference suppression filters the inputs can now be queried 2-, 4-, 8- or
An.11; An.21) 16-times. From these values an average value is determined which is then transferred.

An.1 / 11 / 21 Function
0 no averaging (default)
1 averaging over 2 values
2 averaging over 4 values
3 averaging over 8 values
4 averaging over 16 values

6.2.4 Save Mode (An.2; Coming from the input filter the save mode can be switched on with An.2 / An.12 /
An.22. If now the programmable digital input (value 1) is set the analog signal is
An.12; An.22)
processed directly and written parallel into the nonvolatile memory. As soon as the
digital input is disconnected (value 0), the inverter continous to run with value stored
in the memory. Moreover, with An.2 / An.12 / An.22 it can be determined whether the 6
memory contents are saved or deleted upon switch off. The parameter is bit-coded,
the sum of the decimal values must be entered.

Bit Dez. Meaning

0 0 Direct mode (default)
1 Save mode
1 0 Do not delete memory contents at switch off (default)
2 Delete memory contents at switch off

Bild 6.2.4 Save mode

An.2/12/22 Bit 0
0: Direct mode
1: Save mode

from 0 0 to the
1 1
input filter characteristic
1 nonvolatile
amplifier
0 memory

Input selectiion An.3/13/23 An2/12/22 Bit 1

Input inactive: Value is not saved 1: delete
Input active: Value is saved 0: do not delete

6.2.5 Input Selection With An.3 / 13 / 23 the digital inputs for storing are selected according to the table on
(An.3; An.13; the next page (also see Chapter 6.3.11 „Assignment of inputs“). In order to save an
analog value, the save mode (An.2 / 12 / 22 = 1) must be switched on under An2 / 12
An.23) / 22 and the selected input must be activated.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Input selection table Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal

0 1 ST (prog. input „control release/Reset“) X2A.16
1 2 RST (prog. input „Reset“) X2A.17
2 4 F (prog. input „forward“) X2A.14
3 8 R (prog. input „reverse“) X2A.15
4 16 I1 (prog. input 1) X2A.10
5 32 I2 (prog. input 2) X2A.11
6 64 I3 (prog. input 3) X2A.12
7 128 I4 (prog. input 4) X2A.13
8 256 IA (internal input A) none
9 512 IB (internal input B) none
10 1024 IC (internal input C) none
11 2048 ID (internal input D) none

6.2.6 Zero Point Hyste- Through capacitive as well as inductive coupling on the input lines or voltage fluctuations
resis (An.4; of the signal source, the motor connected to the inverter can still drift (tremble) during
standstill in spite of the analog input filter. It is the task of the zero point hysteresis to
An.14; An.24) suppress this.
With the parameters An.4 / 14 / 24 the respective analog signals can be faded out
within a range of 0...10% . The adjusted value is applicable for both directions of
rotation.
If a negative percent value is adjusted the hysteresis acts in addition to the zero point
around the current setpoint. Setpoint changes are accepted only if they are larger than
the adjusted hysteresis.

Fig. 6.2.6 Zero point hysteresis

for the further signal processing

10%

-10% from interference

10% suppression filter

-10% fade-out range

Value range Input Parameter Value range Resolution Default value

AN1 An.4 0...±10% 0,1% 0,2%
AN2 An.14 0...±10% 0,1% 0,2%
AN3 An.24 0...±10% 0,1% 0,2%

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 2 6 23.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Analog In- and Outputs Functional Description

6.2.7 Amplifier of the With these parameters the input signals can be adapted in X and Y direction as well
Input Characterstic as in the rise to the requirements. In the case of factory setting no zero point offset is
adjusted, the rise (gain) is 1, i.e. the input value corresponds to the output value of
(An.5...7; An.15...17;
this step (see Fig. 6.2.7.a) The output value is calculated according to following formula:
An.25...27)

Out = Amplification • ( In - Offset X) + Offset Y

Fig. 6.2.7.a Factory setting: no Offset, Gain 1

Output value (Out)

100%

Input value (In)

-100% 100%

-100%
6

Input AN1 AN2 AN3 Value range Resolution Default value

Amplification An.5 An.15 An.25 -20,00...20,00 0,01 1,00
Offset X An.6 An.16 An.26 -100,0%...100,0% 0,1% 0,0%
Offset Y An.7 An.17 An.27 -100,0%...100,0% 0,1% 0,0%

By means of some examples, we want to show the possibilities of this function.

According to Fig. 6.2.7.b
1. adjustment of the X-Offset for input AN1 to 50 (%)
2. adjustment of the amplificaiton to 2

Fig. 6.2.7.b X-Offset (An.6)=50%; amplification (An.5)=2.00

1. 100% 2. 100%
With these settings the entire speed
range can be driven with 0...10 V
An.5 via input AN1.
An.6
-100% 50% 100% -100% 100%
(rotation direction = ±analog)
0% In corresponds to-100% Out
50% In corresponds to 0% Out
-100% -100% 100% In corresponds to 100% Out

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

According to Fig. 6.2.7.c

1. adjustment of the X-Offset for input AN1 to 75 (%)
2. adjustment of the Y-Offset for input AN1 to 100 (%)
3. adjustment of the amplificaiton to -1

Fig. 6.2.7.c X-Offset (An.6)=75%; Y-Offset (An.7)= 100%; amplification.

(An.5)= -1.00

An.7=100% An.7=100% 100%

An.5

An.6=75%
-100% 100% -100% 100% -100% 100%

-100% -100% -100%

6.2.8 Lower and Upper These parameters serve for the limiting of the analog signals after the amplifier stage.
Limit (An.8; An.9; All parameters are adjustable in the range of -400...400 %. Since no mutual locking
exists, it is to be ensured, that the lower limit is adjusted smaller than the upper limit
An.18; An.19;
(exception F5-M: if lower limit > upper limit then the output value is the lower limit).
An.28; An.29)
An.8 AN1 lower limit
An.9 AN1 upper limit
An.18 AN2 lower limit
An.19 AN2 upper limit
An.28 AN3 lower limit
An.29 AN3 upper limit
Fig. 6.2.8 Limiting of the analog signal

400%
An.9 / An.19 / An.29

-400%
400%

An.8 / An.18 / An.28

-400%

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 2 8 23.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Analog In- and Outputs Functional Description

6.2.9 Selection Set Following functions are combined in An.30:

Point-/Auxiliary
- Bit 0..2 Selection of the analog input (AN1, AN2, AN3) as REF analog
Input (An.30) - Bit 3..5 Mode of the AUX-Function
- Bit 6..10 Selection source 1 for the AUX-Function
- Bit 11..15 Selection source 2 for the AUX-Function

For possible expansions not all values are defined in the bit groups. Not defined values
have the same function as value 0. The sum of the respective values is to be entered.

Assignment of the analog inputs:

Bit 0..2 Function

Value REF analog
0 AN1 (ru.28) (default)
1 AN2 (ru.30) x
2 AN3 (ru.32) x

Bit 3..5 Function 6

Value Mode of the AUX-Function
0 Source 1 (default)
8 Source 1 + Source 2
16 Source 1 * (100% + Source 2)
24 Source1 * Source 2
32 Source1 absolute

Bit 6..10 Function

Value Aux-input source 1
0 AN1 (ru.28)
64 AN2 (ru.30) (default) x
128 Percental setpoint value (op.5)
192 Motorpoti (ru.37)
256 Process controller output (ru.52)
320 AN3 (ru.32) x

Bit 11..15 Function

Value Aux-input source 2
0 AN1 (ru.28)
2048 AN2 (ru.30) (default) x
4096 Percental setpoint value (op.5)
6144 Motorpoti (ru.37)
8192 Process controller output (ru.52)
11240 AN3 (ru.32) x

x: not for control card BASIC

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

6.2.10 Brief Description The KEB COMBIVERT has three programmable analog outputs (ANOUT1...4). Para-
Analog Outputs meters An.31 and An.36 allow the selection of one size each which is given out at the
outputs X2A.5 / 6. The third and fourth analog output (An.41/47) is not led to the
terminal strip, it can be output as switching condition 42, e.g. 43 with the digital outputs
as PMW-signal. By means of the characteristic amplifier (An.33...35 / 38...40 / 43...45/
49...51) the analog signals can be adapted to the requirements. The ru-parameters
show the current size before and after the amplification. The period time for the PWM-
signal can be adjusted with An.46/52.

Fig. 6.2.10 Principle of analog output

An.33
An.34
An.31 An.35
0...±10V
X2A.5
ANOUT1
100% correspond to An.31/36/41/47 =
absolute actual value (100 Hz/1000 min-1) 0 ru.7 0...±100%
absolute set value (100 Hz/±1000 min ) -1 1 ru.1 ru.33 ru.34 X2A.8
actual value (±100 Hz/±1000 min-1) 2 ±ru.7 AGND
set value (±100 Hz/±1000 min-1) 3 ±ru.1
An.38
output voltage (500 V) 4 ru.20 An.39
DC voltage (1000 V) 5 ru.18 An.36 An.40
apparent current (2 * Irated) 6 ru.15 0...±10V
active current (2 * ±Irated) 7 ru.17 X2A.6
ANOUT2
digital An.32/37/42/48 8 An.xx
external PID output (±100 %) 9 ±ru.52 0...±100%
absolute ext. PID output (100 %) 10 ru.52
ru.35 ru.36 X2A.9
absolute active current (2 • Irated) 11 ru.17 AGND
Power mod. temperature (100 °C) 12 ru.38
An.43
Motor temperature (100 °C) 13 ru.46 An.44
actual torque (F5-M/S) 14 ±ru.12 An.41 An.45 An.46
absolute actual torque (F5-M/S) 15 ru.12 100%
set torque (F5-M/S) 16 ±ru.11 do.0...do.7
value „42“
absolute set torque (F5-M/S) 17 ru.11
system deviation/speed controller (±100Hz/±1000min-1) - PWM
18
speed reference variable (±100 Hz/±1000 min-1) 19 ±ru.2
An.49
absolute speed reference variable (100 Hz/1000 min-1) 20 ru.2 An.50
An.47 An.51 An.52
100%
do.0...do.7
value „43“
PWM

Observe the different functional range of the

hard- and software of the different control
cards !
The reference values of real and set values
depends on ud.2.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 2 10 23.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Analog In- and Outputs Functional Description

6.2.11 Output signals A voltage of 0...±11,5 VDC represents the selected size in the range of 0...±115 %
with a resolution of ±10 Bit at the output. 100% correspond to the bracket values
specified in Fig. 6.2.10. In order to be able to balance load-dependent voltage drops,
the limitation at the output of the characteristic amplifiers is ±115 %.

Fig. 6.2.11 Analog output Uout = 0...±10V

+ -
Imax = 5mA
Ri < 100W
ANOUT1 (X2A.5) / AGND
ANOUT2 (X2A.6) (X2A.8 / X2A.9)

Process variables, that change only slowly, as for example the power module
temperature, can be output over two virtual analog outputs (ANOUT3 and 4). This is
realised through generation of a PWM-signal (pulse-width-modulation) on a digital output.
At that the period T is adjustable from 1...240 s.
Bild 6.2.11.a PWM - output signal
ANOUT 3/4
6
Input value 50 %

Input value 25 %
t
T= An.46/52

6.2.12 Analog Output / These parameters define the function which controls the respective output. Following
Functions adjustments are possible:
(An.31/An.36/ An.xx Function Scaling factor 0...100 %
An.41)
0 absolute actual value 0...100 Hz/1000 min-1 2)
1 absolute set value 0...100 Hz/1000 min-1 2)
2 actual value ru.7 0...±100 Hz/±1000 min-1 2)
3 set value ru.1 0...±100 Hz/±1000 min-1 2)
4 output voltage ru.20 0...500 V
5 DC voltage ru.18 0...1000 V
6 apparent current ru.15 0...2 • Irated 1)
7 active current ru.17 0...2 • ±Irated 1)
8 digital An.32/An.37/An.42 0...100 %
9 external PID output ru.52 0...±100 %
10 absolute ext. PID output ru.52 0...100 %
11 absolute active current ru.17 0...2 • Irated 1)
12 power mod. temperature ru.38 0...100°C
13 Motor temperature ru.46 0...100°C
14 actual torque (F5-M/S) 0...± 3 • rated torque
15 absolute actual torque (F5-M/S) 0...3 • rated torque
16 set torque (F5-M/S) 0...± 3 • rated torque
17 absolute set torque (F5-M/S) 0...3 • rated torque
18 system deviation/speed controller 0...±100 Hz/±1000 min-1 2)
19 speed reference variable ru.2 0...±100 Hz/±1000 min-1 2)
20 absolute speed reference variable ru.2 0...100 Hz/1000 min-1 2)
1)
dependent of inverter rated current (In.1) 2) dependent of ud.2

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

6.2.13 Analog Output / Following parameters are used for the indication of the analog outputs, before and
Display after the characteristic amplification:

ru.33 ANOUT1 pre ampl. display 0...±400 %

ru.34 ANOUT1 post ampl. display 0...±115 %

ru.35 ANOUT2 pre ampl. display 0...±400 %

ru.36 ANOUT2 post ampl. display 0...±115 %

At the outputs ANOUT 3 and 4 there is no display provided.

6.2.14 Gain of Output After selecting the signal to be given out it can be adapted to the requirements by
Characteristic means of characteristic amplifier in X/Y-direction or gain. With factory setting no zero
point offset is adjusted, the gain is 1, i.e. 100% of the variable to be given out correspond
(An.33...35 / to 10V at the analog output (see Fig. 6.2.14.a).
An.38...40 /
Function ANOUT1 -2 -3 -4 Value range Resolution Default
An.43...45)
Gain An.33 An.38 An.43 An.49 ±20,00 0,01 1,00
X-Offset An.34 An.39 An.44 An.50 ±100,0% 0,1% 0,0%
Y-Offset An.35 An.40 An.45 An.51 ±100,0% 0,1% 0,0%

Fig. 6.2.14.a Factory setting: no Offset, Gain 1

output voltage
100% 10V displayable range

-100% An.33
An.34 variable to be indicated
100%

-100%
An.35

Inverting the analog output An example for using the characteristic amplifier is shown in Fig. 6.2.14.b:
1. adjustment of the X-Offset (An.34) to 100 (%)
2. adjustment of the amplification (An.33) to -1.00
Fig. 6.2.14.b Inverting the analog output
An.35
100% 10V These settings result in an inverting of
the analog signal.

An.33
An.34
0% correspond to 10V at the output
-100% 100% 100% correspond to 0V at the output

-100%

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 2 12 23.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Analog In- and Outputs Functional Description

Analog output as switch An example for using the analog output as 0/10V-switch is shown in Fig. 6.2.14.c:
1. adjustment of the amplification (An.33) to 20.00
2. adjustment of the X-Offset (An.34) to the desired switching level

Fig. 6.2.14.c Analog output as switch

100% 10V

Because of the high amplification the

An.34 An.33 analog output switches in a relative small
switching window.
-100% 100%

-100%

Computation of the amplification Since the analog output always works firmly onto the values defined under 6.2.10, one
can adjust the characteristic with the aid of the amplification so that the complete
range of 0...±10V is utilized.
6
defined value
––––––––––– = Amplification (An.33 / 38 / 43 / 49)
desired value
Example output frequency

100Hz
––––– = 1,47
68Hz

6.2.15 Period ANOUT3 The amount of the selected process variable (An.41/47) is converted into a percentage.
(An.46) The output of the characteristic amplifier (An.43...45 / An.49...51) is limited to values
from 0...100 %. The multiplication of the base value with the cycle duration (An.46 /
52) results in the ON period of the digital output (selection in do.0..7 value „42/43“).
The period can be adjusted in a range from 1...240 s.

With these parameters analog values can be adjusted in percent for the respective
6.2.16 ANOUT 1...4
input. For that purpose the value „8 digital setting“ must be adjusted as process vari-
Digital Settings able. The setting is done within the range ±100 %.
(An.32/37/42/48)

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

6.2.17 Used Parameters

R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

ru.1 0201h - - - -400 Hz 400 Hz 0,0125 Hz - resolution and value range see ud.2

ru.2 0202h - - - -400 Hz 400 Hz 0,0125 Hz - resolution and value range see ud.2

ru.7 0207h - - - -400 Hz 400 Hz 0,0125 Hz - resolution and value range see ud.2

ru.15 020Fh - - - 0A 6553,5 A 0,1 A - -

ru.17 0211h - - - -3276,7 A 3276,7 A 0,1 A - -

ru.18 0212h - - - 0V 1000 V 1V - -

ru.20 0214h - - - 0V 778 V 1V - -

ru.27 021Bh - - - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % - -

ru.28 021Ch - - - -400,0 % 400,0 % 0,1 % - -

ru.29 021Dh - - - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % - -

ru.30 021Eh - - - -400,0 % 400,0 % 0,1 % - -

ru.31 021Fh - - - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % - -

ru.32 0220h - - - -400,0 % 400,0 % 0,1 % - -

ru.33 0221h - - - -400,0 % 400,0 % 0,1 % - -

ru.34 0222h - - - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % - -

ru.35 0223h - - - -400,0 % 400,0 % 0,1 % - -

ru.36 0224h - - - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % - -

ru.38 0226h - - - 0 °C 150 °C 1 °C - -

ru.46 022Fh - - - 0 °C 255 °C 1 °C - 0; 253...255 see desciption

ru.52 0234h - - - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % - -

An.0 0A00h ✔ - ✔ 0 2 1 0 -

An.1 0A01h ✔ - ✔ 0 4 1 0 -

An.2 0A02h ✔ - ✔ 0 3 1 0 -

An.3 0A03h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

An.4 0A04h ✔ - - -10,0 % 10,0 % 0,1 % 0,2 % -

An.5 0A05h ✔ ✔ - -20,00 20,00 0,01 1,00 -

An.6 0A06h ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.7 0A07h ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.8 0A08h ✔ ✔ - -400,0 % 400,0 % 0,1 % -400,0 % -

An.9 0A09h ✔ ✔ - -400,0 % 400,0 % 0,1 % 400,0 % -

An.10 0A0Ah ✔ - ✔ 0 2 1 0 -

An.11 0A0Bh ✔ - ✔ 0 4 1 0 -

An.12 0A12h ✔ - ✔ 0 3 1 0 -

An.13 0A13h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 2 14 23.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Analog In- and Outputs Functional Description

R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

An.14 0A0Eh ✔ - - 0,0 % 10,0 % 0,1 % 0,2 % -

An.15 0A0Fh ✔ ✔ - -20,00 20,00 0,01 1,00 -

An.16 0A10h ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.17 0A11h ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.18 0A12h ✔ ✔ - -400,0 % 400,0 % 0,1 % -400,0 % -

An.19 0A13h ✔ ✔ - -400,0 % 400,0 % 0,1 % 400,0 % -

An.20 0A14h ✔ - ✔ 0 1 1 0 -

An.21 0A15h ✔ - ✔ 0 4 1 0 -

An.22 0A16h ✔ - ✔ 0 3 1 0 -

An.23 0A17h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

An.24 0A18h ✔ - - -10,0 % 10,0 % 0,1 % 0,2 % -

An.25 0A19h ✔ ✔ - -20,00 20,00 0,01 1,00 - 6

An.26 0A1Ah ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.27 0A1Bh ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.28 0A1Ch ✔ ✔ - -400,0 % 400,0 % 0,1 % -400,0 % -

An.29 0A1Dh ✔ ✔ - -400,0 % 400,0 % 0,1 % 400,0 % -

An.30 0A1Eh ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 12287 1 2112 -

An.31 0A1Fh ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 12 1 2 -

An.32 0A20h ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.33 0A21h ✔ ✔ - -20,00 20,00 0,01 1,00 -

An.34 0A22h ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.35 0A23h ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.36 0A24h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 12 1 6 -

An.37 0A25h ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.38 0A26h ✔ ✔ - -20,00 20,00 0,01 1,00 -

An.39 0A27h ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.40 0A28h ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.41 0A29h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 12 1 12 -

An.42 0A2Ah ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.43 0A2Bh ✔ ✔ - -20,00 20,00 0,01 1,00 -

An.44 0A2Ch ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.45 0A2Dh ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.46 0A2Eh ✔ ✔ ✔ 1s 240 s 1s 1s -

An.47 0A2Fh ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 20 1 12 -

An.48 0A30h ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

An.49 0A31h ✔ ✔ - -20,00 20,00 0,01 1,00 -

An.50 0A32h ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.51 0A33h ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

An.52 0A34h ✔ ✔ ✔ 1s 240 s 1s 1s -

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware
6.1 Operating and Applicance
Date 6.3.1 Summary Description
4. Operation Digital Inputs .......................... 3
6.2 Analog In- and Outputs
6.3.2 Input Signals .......................... 3
6.3 Digital In- and Outputs 6.3.3 Setting of Digital Inputs by
Software ................................. 4
5. Parameter 6.4 Set Value and Ramp 6.3.4 Terminal Status ....................... 5
Adjustment 6.3.5 Digital Filter ............................ 5
6.5 Voltage-/Frequency 6.3.6 Inversion of Inputs .................. 5
Characteristic (U/f) 6.3.7 Edge-triggering ....................... 5
6. Functions Adjustment 6.3.8 Strobe-dependent Inputs ......... 6
6.3.9 Inputs Status .......................... 8
6.6 Motor Data Adjustment 6.3.10 Reset/Input Selection and
Edge Evaluation ..................... 8
7. Start-up 6.7 Protective Functions
6.3.11 Assignment of the Inputs ........ 8
6.8 Parameter Sets 6.3.12 Summary Description
Digital Outputs ...................... 11
6.9 Special Functions 6.3.13 Output Signals ...................... 12
8. Special Operation 6.10 Encoder Interface 6.3.14 Output filter ........................... 12
6.3.15 Switching Conditions ............ 13
6.11 SMM, Posi, Synchron, CTM 6.3.16 Inverting of Switching
Conditions for Flags .............. 16
9. Error Assistance 6.12 Technology Control
6.3.17 Selection of Switching
6.13 CP-Parameter Definition Conditions for Flags .............. 16
6.3.18 Linking the Switching
Conditions for Flags .............. 16
10. Project Planning 6.3.19 Inverting of Flags ................. 17
6.3.20 Selection of Flags ................. 17
6.3.21 Linking the Flags .................. 17
6.3.22 Inversion of Outputs ............. 18
11. Networks 6.3.23 Output Terminal Status ......... 18
6.3.24 Hardware output allocation ... 18
6.3.25 Example ............................... 19
6.3.26 Used Parameters .................. 20
12. Annex

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

1
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 28.01.03 6 3 1
Functional Description Digital In- and Outputs

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 3 2 28.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Digital In- and Outputs Functional Description

6.3 Digital In- and Outputs

6.3.1 Summary The KEB COMBIVERT has 8 external digital inputs and 4 internal inputs (IA...ID).
Description Digital All inputs can be assigned to one or several functions.
Coming from the terminal strip it can be defined with parameter di.0 (not at F5-B),
Inputs
whether external inputs shall be controlled in PNP or NPN (not at safety relais)
Observe the different functional wiring. Parameter ru.21 shows the currently controlled input. Each input can optionally
range of the hard- and software (di.1) be set via terminal strip or by means of software with di.2. A digital filter (di.3)
of the different control cards reduces the interference susceptibility of the inputs. The inputs can be inverted
(see chapter 3). with di.4 and with di.5 one can switch to edge-triggering. With the parameters di. 6...di. 8
a Strobe-mode can be activated. The input status (ru.22) shows the inputs that are
actually set for processing. The function(s), that a programmed input carries out, is
defined by means of the input selection of the corresponding function or by di.11...22.
For safety reasons the control release (ST) must generally be switched by means of
hardware. Edge-triggering, inversion and strobe signal can be adjusted but have no
influence.
Fig. 6.3.1 Principle of digital inputs

di.0 ru.21 ru.22

Terminal strip 8 PNP/ Terminal Input status
X2A.10...17 NPN status
Internal inputs 4
IA...ID
di.1 di.3 di.4 di.5 di.8
Digital- 12 1 12 Assignment
filter of the inputs
12
12
di.2
Define 1 Strobe
Select Strobe
inputs mode
input
digital
di.6 di.7

6.3.2 Input Signals PNP / Fig. 6.3.2.a Digital inputs with PNP control (di.0 = 0)
NPN (di.0) 24V 24V
I1 I2 I3 I4 F R ST RST out in GND
X2A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 PE
Internal supply

Uin= 18...26V DC ±0%

I1 I2 I3 I4 F R ST RST 24V 24V GND
smoothed out in
Ri = 2,1 kΩ X2A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 PE

External supply +
24...30 VDC

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

3
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 28.01.03 6 3 3
Functional Description Digital In- and Outputs

Fig. 6.3.2.b Digital inputs with NPN control (di.0 = 1)

I1 I2 I3 I4 F R ST RST 24V 24V GND

out in
X2A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 PE
Internal voltage supply

Uin= 18...26V DC ±0%

smoothed I1 I2 I3 I4 F R STRST 24V 24V GND
out in
Ri = 2,1kΩ
X2A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 PE

External voltage supply +

18...26 VDC

6.3.3 Setting of Digital With the aid of parameter di.1 and di.2 the digital input can be set without external
Inputs by Software wiring.
(di.1, di.2)
Fig. 6.3.3 Digital inputs controlled by Software (di.1/di.2)
Sy.50 Bit0 = 1 di.1

ST 1 ST
The control release must & &
generally be switched by means Terminal strip
of hardware even if one switches
I4 128 I4
by software (see Fig. 6.3.3 AND-
IA 256
operation wtih di.2 and Sy.50)! IA
IB 512 IB
Internal Inputs
IC 1024 IC
ID 2048 ID

1 128 256 512 1024 2048

di.2

As shown in Fig. 6.3.3, it can be selected with di.1, whether the inputs shall be
switched from the terminal strip (default) or by way of parameter di.2. Both parameters
are bit-coded, i.e. according to following table, the appropriate value for the input is
to be entered. In the case of several inputs the sum is to be formed. (Exception:
Control release must always be bridged at the terminal strip).

Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal

0 1 ST (Prog. input „Control release/Reset“) X2A.16
1 2 RST (Prog. input „Reset“) X2A.17
2 4 F (Prog. input „Forward“) X2A.14
3 8 R (Prog. input „Reverse“) X2A.15
4 16 I1 (Prog. input 1) X2A.10
5 32 I2 (Prog. input 2) X2A.11
6 64 I3 (Prog. input 3) X2A.12
7 128 I4 (Prog. input 4) X2A.13
8 256 IA (Internal input A) none
9 512 IB (Internal input B) none
10 1024 IC (Internal input C) none
11 2048 ID (Internal input D) none
Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis
© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 3 4 28.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Digital In- and Outputs Functional Description

6.3.4 Terminal Status The terminal status shows the logic level on the input terminals. It is unimportant,
(ru.21) whether the inputs are internally active or not. If a terminal is controlled, then the
appropriate decimal value according to the table below is output. If several terminals
are active, then the sum of the decimal values is output.
Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal
0 1 ST (Prog. input „Control release/Reset“) X2A.16
1 2 RST (Prog. input „Reset“) X2A.17
2 4 F (Prog. input „Forward“) X2A.14
3 8 R (Prog. input „Reverse“) X2A.15
4 16 I1 (Prog. input 1) X2A.10
5 32 I2 (Prog. input 2) X2A.11
6 64 I3 (Prog. input 3) X2A.12
7 128 I4 (Prog. input 4) X2A.13
8 256 IA (Internal input A) none
9 512 IB (Internal input B) none
10 1024 IC (Internal input C) none
11 2048 ID (Internal input D) none
Example: ST, F and IB are controlled ➭ indicated value = 1+4+512 = 517
The digital filter reduces the susceptibility to interferences on the digital inputs. With 6
6.3.5 Digital Filter (di.3)
di.3 a response time is adjusted. For the duration of the adjusted time the conditions
of all inputs must remain constant, so that a transfer occurs. The transfer takes place
at the positive edge of the scanning grid (see Fig. 6.3.7).

Parameter Setting range Response time

di.3 0...127 (adjusted value +1) x program run time
Program run time: 1 ms at F5-General; 2 ms at F5-Basic

6.3.6 Inversion of In- With parameter di.4 it can be adjusted, whether a signal is 1- or 0-active (inverted).
puts (di.4) The parameter is bit-coded, i.e. according to the table below, the appropriate value for
the input is to be entered. If several inputs shall be inverted, then the sum is to be
formed. (Exception: An inversion of the control release remains without function).

6.3.7 Edge-triggering As a standard the inverter is controlled with static signals, i.e. an input is set for as
(di.5) long as a signal is applied. However, practice has shown that a signal may be available
for a limited time only, but the input shall still remain set. In that case the input or
several inputs can be adjusted to edge-triggering. Then a rising edge with a pulse
duration that is longer than the response time of the digital filter is sufficient for switch-
on. Switch-off is effected with the next rising edge.

Control release (ST) can be Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal
set to edge-triggering, but 0 1 ST (Prog. input „Control release/Reset“) X2A.16
remains without affect on the 1 2 RST (Prog. input „Reset“) X2A.17
function, since it is a pure 2 4 F (Prog. input „Forward“) X2A.14
static signal. 3 8 R (Prog. input „Reverse“) X2A.15
4 16 I1 (Prog. input 1) X2A.10
5 32 I2 (Prog. input 2) X2A.11
6 64 I3 (Prog. input 3) X2A.12
7 128 I4 (Prog. input 4) X2A.13
8 256 IA (Internal input A) none
9 512 IB (Internal input B) none
10 1024 IC (Internal input C) none
11 2048 ID (Internal input D) none

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

5
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 28.01.03 6 3 5
Functional Description Digital In- and Outputs

Fig. 6.3.7 Example of a signal flow diagram for input I1 (di.3=1; di.4=16; di.5=16)

Signal at
terminals
t
1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 2.
Scanning grid
(acceptance
at rising t1
edge)

Inverted signal

Input status at
edge-triggering
t
t1: 1 ms at F5-General; 2 ms at F5-Basic

6.3.8 Strobe- A Strobe signal is used mainly for triggering the input signals. For example, two inputs
dependent Inputs shall be used for the parameter set selection. But the signals for the control do not
arrive exactly even, so for a short time it would be switched into an unintended set.
(di.6, di.7, di.8) With active Strobe (scanning signal) the current input signals of the Strobe-dependent
inputs are accepted and kept until the next scanning.

Which inputs are switched by With di.8 any input can be selected as Strobe-dependent input. With the control release
Strobe? di.8 has no function since this is a static input.

From where comes the Strobe With parameter di.6 the Strobe input is set. If several inputs are adjusted as Strobe
signal? they are linked in OR-operation. At the next rising edge of the clock signal, the
Strobe signal is triggered.

di.8 Strobe-dependent inputs Bit -No. Decimal value Function di.6 / di.8 / ru.22 / di.9 / di.10 Terminal
di.6 Selection strobe signal 0 1* ST (Prog. input „Control release/Reset“) X2A.16
1 2 RST (Prog. input „Reset“) X2A.17
2 4 F (Prog. input „Forward“) X2A.14
3 8 R (Prog. input „reverse“) X2A.15
4 16 I1 (Prog. input 1) X2A.10
5 32 I2 (Prog. input 2) X2A.11
6 64 I3 (Prog. input 3) X2A.12
7 128 I4 (Prog. input 4) X2A.13
8 256 IA (Internal input A) none
9 512 IB (Internal input B) none
10 1024 IC (Internal input C) none
11 2048 ID (Internal input D) none

* No function at di.8, as the control release works static.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 3 6 28.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Digital In- and Outputs Functional Description

Edge-active or static Strobe? As a standard the Strobe is edge-active, i.e. the input conditions on the Strobe input
are accepted with rising edge and maintained until the next edge. For some applications
it is sensible to use the Strobe in a manner of a gate function. In that case the Strobe
signal is static, i.e. the input signals are accepted for as long as the Strobe signal is
set (or for as long as the gate is open).
di.7 Strobe-mode Parameter Setting range Function
di.7 0 edge-active Strobe (default)
1 static strobe - frooze if strobe is not active
2 static strobe - only active at active strobe

Fig. 6.3.8.a Edge-active Strobe (di.7=0)

Scanning grid 1ms
(acceptance upon
rising edge) t

Strobe input
t
Resulting 6
Strobe signal t
Signal at
terminals t

Input status
t

Fig. 6.3.8.b Static Strobe Mode 1 (di.7=1)

Signal at
terminals t

Strobe input t

Input status
t

Fig. 6.3.8.c Static Strobe Mode 2 (di.7=2)

Signal at
terminals t

Strobe input t
Input status
t

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

7
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 28.01.03 6 3 7
Functional Description Digital In- and Outputs

6.3.9 Input Status The internal input status shows the logic condition of the digital inputs which are
(ru.22) internally set for processing. It is unimportant, whether the external terminals are
active or not. If an input is set, the appropriate decimal value according to the table
under 6.3.8 is output. If several inputs are set, then the sum of the decimal values is
output.

6.3.10 Reset/Input With di.9 the reset input is defined according to the table under 6.3.8. If the reset input
Selection and shall react to an edge, one or several of the reset inputs defined with di.9 can be
Edge Evaluation switched to edge evaluation with di.10.
(di.9 / di.10)

6.3.11 Assignment of There are two different procedures for the assignment of inputs. Both variants are
the Inputs locked against each other to give the user maximum flexibility.
List of parameters, that can be assigned with inputs:

An. 3 AN1 save trigger / input selection oP.57 Motorpoti decrease / input selection
An.13 AN2 save trigger / input selection oP.58 Motorpoti Reset / input selection
An.23 AN3 save trigger / input selection oP.60 1) Rotation forward (Run) / input selection
cn.11 PID reset / input selection oP.61 1) Rotation reverse (Stop) / input selection
cn.12 I reset / input selection Pn. 4 External fault / input selection
cn.13 Fade in reset / input selection Pn.23 Ramp stop / input selection
di. 9 Reset / input selection Pn.29 DC-braking / input selection
Fr. 7 Parameter set / input selection Pn.64 set GTR7 input selection
Fr.11 Reset set / input selection PS.2 pos/sync input select
LE.17 Timer 1 Start / input selection PS.3 shift. slave input selection
LE.19 Timer 1 Reset / input selection PS.10 shift slave invers input selection
LE.22 Timer 2 Start / input selection PS.18 reference switch input selection
LE.24 Timer 2 Reset / input selection PS.19 start reference input selection
oP.19 Fixed value / input selection 1 PS.29 start posi input selection
oP.20 Fixed value / input selection 2 uF. 8 Energy-saving function / input selection
oP.56 Motorpoti increase / input selection

1)
By selecting the source of rotation (oP.1) the adjustment can be changed from forward/
reverse to Run/Stop.

Additional functions Parameters can be allocated with one additional function each. The parameters are
firmly assigned to the prefixed inputs and are activated by setting bit 31.

di.24 I1 prog. function di.30 IC prog.function

di.25 I2 prog. function di.31 ID prog.function
di.26 I3 prog.function di.32 FOR prog.function
di.27 I4 prog.function di.33 REV prog.function
di.28 IA prog.function di.34 RST prog.function
di.29 IB prog.function di.35 ST prog.function
Value Function
0 PS.11 Reset Master/Slave Difference / input selection
1 PS.13 Set reference point / input selection
2 PS.36 Teach position / input selection

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 3 8 28.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Digital In- and Outputs Functional Description

• Input-related assignment
A parameter is assigned to each input (di.11...22) which adjusts the desired
function(s).
The appropriate function is determined by the input of the decimal value. If several
functions should be selected, then the sum of the decimal values must be entered.

Fig. 6.3.11a Input-related assignment

Input Parameter Function

20 oP.19 1
1
2 oP.20 2
22 oP.56 4
3
2 oP.57 8
4
32 2 oP.58 16
I1 di.11
25 oP.60 32
32 2 6
oP.61 64 6
I2 di.12 7
2 di. 9 128
8
32 2 Pn.23 256
I3 di.13
29 Pn.29 512
10
32 2 uF. 8 1.024
I4 di.14 11
2 Fr. 7 2.048
32 212 Fr.11 4.096
IA di.15 13
2 Pn. 4 8.192
14
32 2 An. 3 16.384
IB di.16 15
2 An.13 32.768
32 216 An.23 65.536
IC di.17 17
2 LE.17 131.072
18
32 2 LE.19 262.144
ID di.18
219 LE.22 524.288
20
32 2 LE.24 1.048.576
F di.19 21
2 cn.11 2.097.152
22
32 2 cn.12 4.194.304
R di.20
223 cn.13 8.388.608
24
32 2 PS.2 16.777.216
RST di.21 * 225 PS.3 33.554.432
32 * 226 PS.18 67.108.864
ST di.22
* 227 PS.19 134.217.728
* 228 Pn.64 268.435.456
229 PS.29 536.870.912
* 2 30
PS.10 1.073.741.824
* 231 di.24...35 1.073.741.824
* no function at F5-G/B

The input ST is assigned by hardware means with the function „control release“.
Further functions can be adjusted only „additionally“.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

9
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 28.01.03 6 3 9
Functional Description Digital In- and Outputs

• Function-related assignment
A parameter is assigned to each function which adjusts the desired input(s).
The appropriate input is determined by the input of the decimal value. If several
inputs should be selected, then the sum of the decimal values must be entered.

Fig. 6.3.11b Function-related assignment

Function Input
12
oP.19
12
oP.20
12 20 F 1
oP.56
12
oP.57
12 21 R 2
oP.58
12
oP.60
12 22 RST 4
oP.61
12
Pn. 4
12 23 ST 8
Pn.23
12
Pn.29
12 24 I1 16
Pn.64
12
uF. 8
12 25 I2 32
cn.11
12
cn.12
12 26 I3 64
cn.13
12
Fr. 7
12 27 I4 128
Fr.11
12
An. 3
12 28 IA 256
An.13
12
An.23
12 29 IB 512
di. 9
12
* di. 24...35
12 210 IC 1024
LE.17
12
LE.19
12 211 ID 2048
LE.22
12
LE.24
12
* PS.2
12
* PS.3
12
* PS.10
12
* PS.18
12
* PS.19
12
* PS.29
* no function at F5-G/C/B

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 3 10 28.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Digital In- and Outputs Functional Description

6.3.12 Summary Description - Digital Outputs

Fig. 6.3.12 Principle of digital outputs

Condition 0...7 Flag 0...7 Outputs

do.24 do.41 do.42 do.51

do.8 do.25 Bit 0-1

do.16 20=1
do.33 20=1
1 1 8 1 1 8 0 O1=O1
1
1 & 1 & 1 O1=O2
8 2 8 2 1 Transistor output
... 8 >1 ... 8 >1 2 O1=R1 (O1)
1 128 1 128 3 O1=R2 X2A.18
0 4
do.9 do.17 do.26do.34 Bit 2-3
1 75 do.43 do.0
21=2 21=2
1 von75 1 1 1 1 8 0 O2=O1
z-1 8
& &
2
2 8 1 2 8 1 2 1 4 O2=O2 Transistor output
... 8 ... 8 >1 8 O2=R1 (O2)
3
>1
1 128 1 128 12 O2=R2 X2A.19
4 75 do.44 do.1
4
z-1 1 von 75 do.10 do.27 Bit 4-5
do.18 do.35 22=4
5 1 22=4 1
1 1 8 0 R1=O1
8
& & 4 6
8 1 2 8 1 2 1 16 R1=O2 Relay output (R1)
6 8 32 R1=R1 X2A.24...26
do.2 ... 8 >1 ... >1
75 1 48 R1=R2
7 1 von 75
1 128 128

8 do.11 do.28 4
do.19 do.36 23=8
Bit 6-7
1 23=8 1
9 1 8 1 8 8
0 R2=O1
75 do.3 8 1 2 & 8 1 2 & 64 R2=O2 Relay output (R2)
10 1
1 von 75 ... 8 ... 8 >1 128 R2=R1 X2A.27...29
>1
11 1 128 1 128 192 R2=R2
8
12
do.12 do.29
do.4 do.20 do.37 24=16
13 75 1 24=16 1
1 von 75 1 8 1 8 16
8 1 2 & 8 1 2 &
14 1 Internal output OA
... 8 >1 ... 8 >1
15 1 128 1 128
16
do.5
75
1 von 75 do.13 do.30
17
do.21 25=32
do.38 25=32
1 1 8 1 1 8 32
8 1 2 & 8 1 2 &
18 1 Internal output OB
do.6 ... 8 >1 ... 8 >1
19 75 1 128 1 128
1 von 75
20
do.14 do.31
21 do.22 do.39 26=64
1 26=64 1
1 8 1 8 64
do.7 & &
22 75 8 1 2 8 1 2 1 Internal output OC
1 von 75 ... 8 ... 8 >1
23 >1
1 128 1 128

75 do.15 do.32
do.23 27=128
do.40 27=128
1 1 8 1 1 8 128
1 2 & 1 2 &
8 8 1 Internal output OD
... 8 >1 ... 8 >1
1 128 1 128

8 8

ru.23 Output ru.24 Status ru.80 digital ru.25 Output

condition status of output flags output state terminal Status

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

11
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 28.01.03 6 3 11
Functional Description Digital In- and Outputs

Description For the switching of the digital outputs one can choose up to 8 conditions from the 69
different conditions. These are entered in do.0...do.7. Switching condition 0 and 1 can
be filtered by do.43 and do.44. Parameter ru.23 shows, if one or several of these
conditions are met. For each channel it can now be selected which of the 8 conditions
shall apply to it (do.16...do.23). Each condition can still be inverted before selection
(do.8...do.15). As a standard all conditions (if several are selected) are OR-operated,
i.e. if one of the selected conditions is fulfilled, the channel is set. With do.24 this can
be changed to AND-operation, i.e. all conditions selected for this channel must be
fulfilled before it is set. Parameter ru.24 shows the channels which are set in this
stage. do.33...40 form a second logic step with which a selection of the channels from
logic step 1 can be made. Every individual condition can be inverted with do..25...32.
do.41 adjusts the manner of the linkage (AND/OR). Parameter do.42 is used for inverting
one or several outputs.With do.51 the output signals are assigned to the terminals.
ru.80 serves for the display of the status prior to allocation, thereafter ru.25. The internal
outputs OA...OD are directly connected with the internal inputs IA...ID.

6.3.13 Output Signals Fig. 6.3.12 Connection of digital outputs

+24V / 50mA
The total current of
X2A.18...20 is limited to
50mA. In case of inductive load
at the relay outputs or at the R1 R2
transistor output a protective
O1 O2 Uout 0V RLA RLB RLC FLA FLB FLC
wiring is to be provided (free- X2A 18 19 20 23 X2A 24 25 26 X2A 27 28 29
wheeling diode)!
max. 30V / 1A DC max. 30V / 1A DC

6.3.14 Output filter With do.43 a filter can be set for switching condition 0, with do.44 for switching condition
(do.43, do.44) 1. The change of a switching condition must be applied for the filter time, then it
becomes active at the output of the filter. If the change of a switching condition is
cancelled during the filter time, the filter time is reset and restarted at the next change.
The filter time is adjustable within the range of 0 (off)...1000 ms.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 3 12 28.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Digital In- and Outputs Functional Description

6.3.15 Switching Conditions (do.0...do.7)

From the following switching conditions one can select up to 8 for further processing.
The values are then entered in the parameters do.0...do.7.

ValueFunction
0 Off
1 Always active
2 Run signal; also at DC-braking
3 Ready for operation; if no fault exists (ru.0 <> error)
4 Fault relay trips, when the inverter is switched off with an error
5 Fault relay, as at 2, but not for errors which are reset automatically with activated „Auto-restart-function“
6 Warning or error signal is given, when the inverter fulfills an abnormal-stopping condition (ru.0).
7 Overload-prewarning! ru.39 is an overload counter, counting in steps of 1%. On reaching 100 % the inverter
switches off. Upon exceeding the level of Pn.9 (default 80%) the overload warning is given. The performance in
case of a warning can be adjusted with Pn.8 (response to OL-warning)
8 Overheating-prewarning (OH)! Depending on the power circuit the inverter switches off between 60...95°C power
module temperature. The prewarning is output, when the level OH-warning (Pn.11) is reached (default 70°C). The
behaviour in case of an warning can be adjusted with Pn.10 (response to OH-warning). 6
9 PTC-prewarning (dOH), on tripping of the motor-PTC connected to the terminals T1/T2. After expiration of an
adjustable switch-off time Pn.13 (0...120s) the inverter switches off. the behaviour in case of an error can be
adjusted with Pn.12 (response to dOH-warning).
10 Motor protection prewarning (OH2), if the motor protection triggering time defined according to VDE has expired.
The response to the warning can be adjusted with Pn.14 (response to motor protective function)(see Chapter 6.7
„Motor protective function“).
11 Interior temperature-prewarning (OHI) is output, when the interior temperature of the inverter exceeds the level
OHI-warning (Pn.17). The behaviour in case of an error can be adjusted with Pn.16 (response to OHI-warning).
Not at Pn.16 = 7
12 Cable breakage at 4...20mA setpoint adjustment at AN1; Trips, if the setpoint current drops below 2mA (An.0 =
2).
13 Cable breakage at 4...20mA setpoint adjustment at AN2; Trips, if the setpoint current drops below 2mA (An.10 =
2).
14 Max. constant current (Stall) exceeded (Pn.17). See chapter 6.7 „Constant current limit“.
15 Ramp stop function active (LA-/LD-Stop), current (Pn.22) or voltage (Pn.23) exceeded during acceleration/
deceleration. See chapter 6.7 „Ramp stop“.
16 DC-braking active; see chapter 6.9 „DC-brake“
17 Power-Off function active (see chapter 6.9 „Power-Off“), in case of an error or SSF the condition is not fulfilled
18 Brake control is set, when the brake shall be released (see chapter 6.9 „Brake control“)
19 Speed control difference > level
20 Actual value = setpoint at constant run; not at ru.0 = noP, LS, Error or SSF.
21 Inverter is in the acceleration phase, at ru.0 = FAcc, rAcc and LAS (acceleration stop)
22 Inverter is in the deceleration phase, at ru.0 = Fdec, rdec and LDS (deceleration stop)
23 Actual direction of rotation = set direction of rotation
24 Utilization (ru.13) > level
25 Active current (ru.17) > level
26 DC-link voltage > level
27 Actual value (ru.7) > level
28 Setpoint value (ru.1) > level
29 Ref. point run completed (only F5-M/S)
30 Actual torque > level (only F5-M/S)
31 AN1 on output of characteristic amplifier > level; without sign evaluation
32 AN2 on output of characteristic amplifier > level; without sign evaluation

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

13
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 28.01.03 6 3 13
Functional Description Digital In- and Outputs

33 AN3 on output of characteristic amplifier > level; without sign evaluation

34 AN1 on output of characteristic amplifier > level; with sign evaluation
35 AN2 on output of characteristic amplifier > level; with sign evaluation
36 AN3 on output of characteristic amplifier > level; with sign evaluation
37 Timer 1 > level
38 Timer 2 > level
39 Angle difference > level (only F5-M/S)
40 Hardware current limit active
41 Modulation on-signal
42 Output of analog signal ANOUT3 as PWM-signal. The period is adjusted with An.46.
43 Output of analog signal ANOUT4 as PWM-signal. The period is adjusted with An.52.
44 Inverter state (ru.0) = Level
45 Power module temperatur (ru.38) > Level
46 Motor temperatur (ru.46) > Level
47 Ramp output value (ru.2) > Level
48 Apparent current (ru.15) > Level
49 Clockwise rotation (not at noP, LS, abnormal stopping, error)
50 Counter clockwise (not at noP, LS, abnormal stopping, error)
51 Warning E.OL2
52 Current control at the limit (only F5-M/S)
53 Speed control at the limit
54 Target window reached (Posi module at F5-M/S)
55 Current position > Level (Posi module at F5-M/S)
56 Positioning active (Posi module at F5-M/S)
57 Position inaccessible (Posi module at F5-M/S)
58 Profile processing active (Posi module at F5-M/S)
59 AND-operation of the selected inputs. The condition is active, if all selected inputs are active. The selection is
done with the switching levels (LE.0...7) according to following table:
Input ST RST F R I1 I2 I3 I4 IA IB IC ID
Value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048

The sum of the inputs to be queried is entered in the switching levels.

Example:
If the inputs I3 and I4 are active, the condition do.4 shall be set.
Adjust switching condition 4 (do.4) to „59“. Adjust switching level 4 (LE.4) to „192“ („64“ for I3 + „128“ for I4).
60 OR-operation of the selected inputs. The condition is active, if at least one of the selected inputs is active.
Adjustment as at value „59“.
61 NAND-operation of the selected inputs. The condition is active, if at least one of the selected inputs is inactive.
Adjustment as at value „59“.
62 NOR-operation of the selected inputs. The condition is active, if all of the selected inputs are inactive.
Adjustment as at value „59
63 Absolute value ANOUT1 > Level
64 Absolute value ANOUT2 > Level
65 ANOUT1 > Level
66 ANOUT2 > Level
67 Active relative position > Level. The output is set, if the distance covered after the starting position is larger than
the adjusted level. That means, the function works relative to the starting position. If the positioning is
completed, the output is reset (Posi module at F5-M/S).
68 Active position to the target > Level. The output is set, if the distance to be covered to the target is larger than
the adjusted level. If the positioning is completed, the output is reset (Posi module at F5-M/S).
69 Absolute control difference of the external PI controller > Level
70 Driver voltage activ (driver relay)

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 3 14 28.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Digital In- and Outputs Functional Description

71 Drive runs synchronously; is set, if after the activation of the synchronous run the drive is synchronized (F5-M/S).
72 Actual position index = Level (Posi modul at F5-M/S)
73 Absolute active power > Level
74 Active power > Level
75 Absolute (actuel position – scan position) > Level (Posi modul at F5-M/S)

Level 0...7 These parameters defines the level of the switching conditions. Level 0 (LE.0) applies
LE.0...LE.7 for switching condition 0; LE.1 for switching condition 1 ... and so forth.

Setting range: -30000,00...30000,00

Step: 0,01
Default: see parameter table

Bei der Vorgabe in Inkrementen entspricht ein Inkrement gleich 0,01.

Hysteresis 0...7 The hysteresis, in reference to the adjusted values, defines the parameters
LE. 8...LE.15 LE. 8...LE.15. Hysteresis 0 (LE.8) applies for comparison level 0; LE.9 for comparison 6
level 1 ... and so forth.

Default:
Frequency: 0,5 Hz
Voltage: 1V
Analog values: 0,5 %
Current: 0,5 A
Temperature: 1 °C

Frequency hysteresis LE.16 LE.16 defines the hysteresis for the status constant-run and tripping frequencies for
the DC-brake.

Response to warning signals These parameters determine the behaviour of the inverter in case of warning signals.
Pn.8, Pn.10, Pn.12, Pn.14, To learn more about the adjustment possibilities as well as the performance of the
Pn.16 appropriate drive please refer to Chapter 6.7 „Protective functions“.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

15
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 28.01.03 6 3 15
Functional Description Digital In- and Outputs

6.3.16 Inverting of Switching Fig. 6.3.15 Inversion and selection of switching conditions
Conditions for Flags
do.8...do.15 do.16...do.23
(do.8...do.15) 1
do.0 1 1
do.1 1 2 2
do.2 1 4 4
do.3 1 8 8 8
do.4 1 16 16 do.24
do.5 1 32 32
do.6 1 64 64
do.7 1 128 128

With the parameters do.8...do.15 each of the 8 switching conditions (do.0...do.7)

can be inverted for each flag separately. Through this function it is possible to set
any chosen switching condition as Non-condition. The parameter is bit-coded.
According to Fig. 6.3.15 the weighting of the switching conditions to be inverted
must be entered in do.8...do.15. If several conditions shall be inverted, the sum is
to be formed.
Example: Output X2A.19 shall be set when the inverter is not accelerating. In this case we
assign the switching condition 21 (inverter accelerates) for example to do.1 (enter
value 21). We invert the switching condition with do.9, so enter value 2.

6.3.17 Selection of The parameters do.16...do.23 serve for the selection of the 8 defined switching
Switching conditions. The selection is done for each chanel separately, where one can choose
between no one and up to all 8 switching conditions. According to Fig. 6.3.15 the
Conditions for Flags weighting of the selected switching conditions is to be entered into do.16...do.23 . If
(do.16...do.23) several conditons are selected, the sum is to be formed.

6.3.18 Linking the After the switching conditons are selected for each output, it can now be determined,
how these are linked. As a default all conditions are OR-operated, i.e. if one of the
Switching
selected conditions is met, the output switches. Another possibility is the AND-
Conditions for Flags operation which can be adjusted with do.24. AND-operation means that all selected
(do.24) conditions must be fulfilled before the output switches.
Parameter do.24 is bit-coded. The table under 6.3.17 shows the assignment.

Fig. 6.3.17 Linking the switching conditions in logic step 1

do.24
8
do.16 & 1 Bit 0
Flag 0
>1 0
8
do.17 & 1 Bit 1
Flag 1
>1 0

8
do.23 & 1 Bit 7
Flag 7
>1 0

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 3 16 28.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Digital In- and Outputs Functional Description

6.3.19 Inverting of Flags Fig. 6.3.18 Inversion and selection of switching conditions from step 1
(do.25...do.32)
do.25...do.32 do.33...do.40
1 1 1
Bit 0
Bit 1 1 2 2
Bit 2 1 4 4
Bit 3 1 8 8 8
do.24 Bit 4 1 16 16 do.41
Bit 5 1 32 32
Bit 6 1 64 64
Bit 7 1 128 128

With the parameters do.25...do.32 each of the 8 flags (bit 0...7) from logic step 1
can be inverted separately. Through this function it is possible to set any chosen
flag as Non-flag. The parameter is bit-coded. According to Fig. 6.3.18 the weighting
of the switching conditions to be inverted must be entered in do.25...do.32. If several
flags shall be inverted, the sum is to be formed.
6
6.3.20 Selection of Flags In the second logic step a selection of the flags of the first logic step can be made.
(do.33...do.40) The selection is done for each output separately, where one can choose between
no one and up to all 8 flags. According to Fig. 6.3.18 the weighting of the selected
flags is to be entered into do.33...do.40. If several flags shall be selected, the sum
is to be formed.

6.3.21 Linking the Flags After the switching conditions are selected for each output, it can now be determined,
(do.41) how these are linked. As a default all conditions are OR-operated, i.e. if one of the
selected conditions is met, the output switches. Another possibility is the AND-
operation, which is adjusted with do.41. AND-operation means, that all selected
condtions must be fulfilled before the output switches.
Parameter do.41 is bit-coded. The table under 6.3.20 shows the assignment.

Fig. 6.3.19 Linking the switching conditions in logic step 2

do.41
8
do.33 & 1 Bit 0
O1 Terminal Name Function Decimal values do.41
>1 0 X2A.18 O1 Transistor output 1
do.34
8 X2A.19 O2 Transistor output 2
& 1 Bit 1
O2 X2A.24...26 R1 Relay output 4
>1 0 X2A.27...29 R2 Relay output 8
- OA Internal output 16
- OB Internal output 32
8
do.40 & 1 Bit 7 - OC Internal output 64
OD - OD Internal output 128
>1 0

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

17
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 28.01.03 6 3 17
Functional Description Digital In- and Outputs

6.3.22 Inversion of Out- As shown in Fig. 6.3.21, with parameter do.42 the outputs can be once again inverted
puts (do.42) after the linking. The parameter is bit-coded, i.e. according to following table the value
belonging to this output must be entered. If several outputs shall be inverted the sum
is to be formed

Fig. 6.3.21 Inverting the outputs

do.42 Terminal Name Function
1 1 X2A.18 O1 Transistor output
Bit 0
Bit 1 1 2 X2A.19 O2 Transistor output
Bit 2 1 4 X2A.24...26 R1 Relay output
Bit 3 1 8 X2A.27...29 R2 Relay output
do.41 16
Bit 4 1 - OA Internal output
Bit 5 1 32 - OB Internal output
Bit 6 1 64 - OC Internal output
Bit 7 1 128 - OD Internal output

6.3.23 Output Terminal Parameter ru.25 indicates the logic condition of the digital outputs after the allocation
Status (ru.25) by do.51. Parameter ru.80 indicates the logic condition before the allocation. It is
irrelevant whether the output is set due to conditions or by inverting. If an output is set
the appropriate decimal value, according to the table below, is output. If several outputs
are set, then the sum of the decimal values is output.

Terminal Name Function Decimal values ru.25

X2A.18 O1 Transistor output 1
X2A.19 O2 Transistor output 2
X2A.24...26 R1 Relay output 4
X2A.27...29 R2 Relay output 8
- OA Internal output 16
- OB Internal output 32
- OC Internal output 64
- OD Internal output 128

6.3.24 Hardware output With do.51 the output signals are assigned to the output terminals O1, O2, R1 and R2.
allocation (do.51) The assignment is done according to following table:

Bit Value Signal Output Default

0+10 O1 x
1 O2 O1 (terminal X2A.18)
2 R1
3 R2
2+3 0 O1
4 O2 O2 (terminal X2A.19) x
8 R1
16 R2
4+5 0 O1
16 O2 R1 (terminal X2A.24...26)
32 R1 x
48 R2
6+7 0 O1
16 O2 R2 (terminal X2A.27...29)
32 R1
48 R2 x
Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis
© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 3 18 28.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Digital In- and Outputs Functional Description

6.3.25 Programming For a better understanding, the correlations are explained on the basis of a little more
Example complex example. Following conditions are required:

• Condition 1: Output X2A.19 switches, if the inverter accelerates

• Condition 2: Relais X2A.24...26 switches, if the inverter load is > 100 %
• Condition 3: Relais X2A.27...29 switches, if the actual frequency is > 4 Hz
• Output X2A.18 switches, if the conditions 2 and 3 are realized, but the inverter
does not accelerate.

Solution proposal:

Set switching conditions, First set the switching conditions and levels.
levels and hysteresis Set do.0 to „21“ (inverter accelerates)
Set do.1 to „24“ (inverter utilization > level); set LE.1 to „100“ (load level for do.1
100 %); set LE.9 to „5“ (5 % hysteresis for level 1; not required but reasonable for
optimal switching performance)
Set do.2 to „27“ (actual frequency > level); set LE.2 to „4“ (frequency level for do.2=4 Hz);
set LE.10 to „0.5“ (0.5 Hz hysteresis for level 3; not required but reasonable for opti-
mal switching performance)

Set switching conditions Set do.16 to „1“ (evaluate switching condition of do.0)
6
of stage 1 Set do.17 to „2“ (evaluate switching condition of do.1)
Set do.18 to „4“ (evaluate switching condition of do.2)
Set do.8, do.9 and do.10 to „0“ (no inverting)
The setting of do.24 is independent for this example, as only one condition each is set
at do.16...18.

Set flags Output O1 (terminal X2A.18)

Set do.33 to „7“ (evaluate flags 1...3)
Set do.25 to „1“ (flag 1 is inverted, it means that the condition is fulfilled if the inverter
does not accelerate.
Set do.41 to „1“ (the conditions selected with do.33 become AND-operated)

Output O2 (terminal X2A.19)

Set do.34 to „1“ (evaluate flag 1)
Set do.26 to „0“ (no inverting)
The setting of do.41 is independent for this example, as only one condition is set at
do.34.

Relay output R1 (terminal X2A.24...26)

Set do.35 to „2“ (evaluate flag 2)
Set do.27 to „0“ (no inverting)
The setting of do.41 is independent for this example, as only one condition is set at
do.35.

Relay output R2 (terminal X2A.27...29)

Set do.36 to „4“ (evaluate flag 3)
Set do.28 to „0“ (no inverting)
The setting of do.41 is independent for this example, as only one condition is set at
do.36.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

19
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 28.01.03 6 3 19
Functional Description Digital In- and Outputs

6.3.26 Used Parameters

R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

di.0 0B00h ✔ - ✔ 0 1 1 0 0: PNP 1:NPN (without safety relay)

di.1 0B01h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

di.2 0B02h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

di.3 0B03h ✔ - ✔ 0 127 1 0 -

di.4 0B04h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

di.5 0B05h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

di.6 0B06h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

di.7 0B07h ✔ - ✔ 0 2 1 0 -

di.8 0B08h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

di.9 0B09h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 3 ST+RST

di.10 0B0Ah ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 3 ST+RST

di.11 0B0Bh ✔ - ✔ 0 231 - 1 1 1 -

di.12 0B0Ch ✔ - ✔ 0 231 - 1 1 2 -

di.13 0B0Dh ✔ - ✔ 0 231 - 1 1 8192 -

di.14 0B0Eh ✔ - ✔ 0 231 - 1 1 512 -

di.15 0B0Fh ✔ - ✔ 0 231 - 1 1 0 -

di.16 0B10h ✔ - ✔ 0 231 - 1 1 0 -

di.17 0B11h ✔ - ✔ 0 231 - 1 1 0 -

di.18 0B12h ✔ - ✔ 0 231 - 1 1 0 -

di.19 0B13h ✔ - ✔ 0 231 - 1 1 32 -

di.20 0B14h ✔ - ✔ 0 231 - 1 1 64 -

di.21 0B15h ✔ - ✔ 0 231 - 1 1 128 -

di.22 0B16h ✔ - ✔ 0 231 - 1 1 128 -

di.24 0B18h ✔ - ✔ 0 2 1 0 -

di.25 0B19h ✔ - ✔ 0 2 1 0 -

di.26 0B1Ah ✔ - ✔ 0 2 1 0 -

di.27 0B1Bh ✔ - ✔ 0 2 1 0 -

di.28 0B1Ch ✔ - ✔ 0 2 1 0 -

di.29 0B1Dh ✔ - ✔ 0 2 1 0 -

di.30 0B1Eh ✔ - ✔ 0 2 1 0 -

di.31 0B1Fh ✔ - ✔ 0 2 1 0 -

di.32 0B20h ✔ - ✔ 0 2 1 0 -

di.33 0B21h ✔ - ✔ 0 2 1 0 -

di.34 0B22h ✔ - ✔ 0 2 1 0 -

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 3 20 28.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Digital In- and Outputs Functional Description

R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

di.35 0B23h ✔ - ✔ 0 2 1 0 -

do.0 0C00h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 75 1 27 -

do.1 0C01h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 75 1 3 -

do.2 0C02h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 75 1 4 -

do.3 0C03h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 75 1 27 -

do.4 0C04h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 75 1 0 -

do.5 0C05h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 75 1 0 -

do.6 0C06h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 75 1 0 -

do.7 0C07h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 75 1 0 -

do.8 0C08h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.9 0C09h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.10 0C0Ah ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

6
do.11 0C0Bh ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.12 0C0Ch ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.13 0C0Dh ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.14 0C0Eh ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.15 0C0Fh ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.16 0C10h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 1 -

do.17 0C11h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 2 -

do.18 0C12h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 4 -

do.19 0C13h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 8 -

do.20 0C14h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 16 -

do.21 0C15h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 32 -

do.22 0C16h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 64 -

do.23 0C17h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 128 -

do.24 0C18h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.25 0C19h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.26 0C1Ah ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.27 0C1Bh ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.28 0C1Ch ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.29 0C1Dh ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.30 0C1Eh ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.31 0C1Fh ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.32 0C20h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.33 0C21h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 1 -

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

21
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 28.01.03 6 3 21
Functional Description Digital In- and Outputs

R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

do.34 0C22h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 2 -

do.35 0C23h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 4 -

do.36 0C24h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 8 -

do.37 0C25h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 16 -

do.38 0C26h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 32 -

do.39 0C27h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 64 -

do.40 0C28h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 128 -

do.41 0C29h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.42 0C2Ah ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

do.43 0C2Bh ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 ms 1000 ms 1 ms 0 ms -

do.44 0C2Ch ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 ms 1000 ms 1 ms 0 ms -

LE. 0 0D00h ✔ ✔ - -30000,00 30000,00 00,1 0,00 -

LE. 1 0D01h ✔ ✔ - -30000,00 30000,00 00,1 0,00 -

LE. 2 0D02h ✔ ✔ - -30000,00 30000,00 00,1 100,00 -

LE. 3 0D03h ✔ ✔ - -30000,00 30000,00 00,1 4,00 -

LE. 4 0D04h ✔ ✔ - -30000,00 30000,00 00,1 0,00 -

LE. 5 0D05h ✔ ✔ - -30000,00 30000,00 00,1 0,00 -

LE. 6 0D06h ✔ ✔ - -30000,00 30000,00 00,1 0,00 -

LE. 7 0D07h ✔ ✔ - -30000,00 30000,00 00,1 0,00 -

LE. 8 0D08h ✔ ✔ - 0,00 300,00 0,01 0,00 -

LE. 9 0D09h ✔ ✔ - 0,00 300,00 0,01 0,00 -

LE.10 0D0Ah ✔ ✔ - 0,00 300,00 0,01 5,00 -

LE.11 0D0Bh ✔ ✔ - 0,00 300,00 0,01 0,50 -

LE.12 0D0Ch ✔ ✔ - 0,00 300,00 0,01 0,00 -

LE.13 0D0Dh ✔ ✔ - 0,00 300,00 0,01 0,00 -

LE.14 0D0Eh ✔ ✔ - 0,00 300,00 0,01 0,00 -

LE.15 0D0Fh ✔ ✔ - 0,00 300,00 0,01 0,00 -

LE.16 0D10h ✔ - - 0 Hz 20 Hz 0,0125 Hz 0,8 Hz dependent on ud.2

LE.17 0D11h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

LE.19 0D13h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

LE.22 0D16h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

LE.24 0D18h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

ru.21 0215h - - - 0 4095 1 - -

ru.22 0216h - - - 0 4095 1 - -

ru.23 0217h - - - 0 255 1 - -

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 3 22 28.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Digital In- and Outputs Functional Description

R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

ru.24 0218h - - - 0 255 1 - -

ru.25 0219h - - - 0 255 1 - -

oP.19 0313h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 16 I1

oP.20 0314h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 32 I2

oP.56 0337h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

oP.57 0338h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

oP.58 0339h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

oP.60 033Bh ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 4 F

oP.61 033Ch ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 8 R

Pn. 4 0404h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 64 I3

Pn.23 0417h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

Pn.29 041Dh ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 128 Default 0 at F5-M/S

6
Pn.64 0440h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

uF. 8 0508h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

Fr. 7 0907h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

Fr.11 090Bh ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

An. 3 0A03h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

An.13 0A0Dh ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

An.23 0A17h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

cn.11 070Bh ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

cn.12 070Ch ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

cn.13 070Dh ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

23
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 28.01.03 6 3 23
Functional Description Digital In- and Outputs

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 3 24 28.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Setpoint- and Ramp Adjustment Functional Desription

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

6.1 Operating and Unit Data

4. Operation 6.2 Analog In- and Outputs

6.3 Digital In- and Outputs
6.4 Setpoint- and Ramp 6.4.1 Brief Description ..................... 3
5. Parameter Adjustment 6.4.2 Reference source ................... 4
6.4.3 Rotation source ...................... 6
6.5 Voltage-/Frequency 6.4.4 Fixed values ........................... 9
Characteristic Adjustment 6.4.5 Setpoint Limits ..................... 11
6. Functions 6.6 Motor Data and Controller 6.4.6 Setpoint Calculation .............. 12
6.4.7 Ramp Generator ................... 13
6.7 Protective Functions 6.4.8 Limiter
6.4.9 Ramp with constant Time ..... 15
6.8 Parameter Sets
7. Start-up 6.4.10 Used Parameters .................. 18
6.9 Special Functions
6.10 Encoder Interface
8. Special Operation 6.11 Positioning and
Synchronous Control
6.12 Technology Controller
9. Error Assistance 6.13 CP-Parameter Definition

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 4 2 17.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Setpoint- and Ramp Adjustment Functional Desription

6.4 Setpoint-, Rotation- and Ramp Adjustment

6.4.1 Brief Description The setpoint values of the KEB COMBIVERT F5 can be preadjusted analog as well
as digital. The AUX-function adds or multiplies an analog setpoint to/with other setpoint
settings.
The setpoint and rotation selection links the different setpoint sources with the possible
sources of rotation direction. The signal thus obtained is used for further setpoint
calculation.
Only after interrogation of the absolute setpoint limits, all the data that is required for
the ramp calculation is available.

Fig. 6.4.1 Principle of set value and ramp adjustment

Setpoint Rotation Fixed

selection selection values
6
Setpoint limits

Setpoint computation
Display set speed /
-speed before ramp

Ramp generator
Display actual speed
after ramp

Limiter

Control processor
Display actual frequency
(F5-M controlled)

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Fig. 6.4.2 Setpoint selection

Analog setpoint Digital setpoint Other setpoints

Terminal strip
AN1 AN2 Keyboard / Bus System Output ext. AN1
Kl. X2A.1 / Kl. X2A.3 / parameter PID-controller
absolute in % direct
X2A.2 X2A.4 Motorpoti
oP. 3 oP. 5 SY.52 ru.52

ru.27 ru.31 ru.29 see Chap. 6.7 Speed Speed

Motorpoti measurement 1 measurement 2
see Chap. 6.2
Analog input ru.37 ru.4 ru.9 ru.5 ru.10
ru.28 ru.32 ru.30

ru.53

AUX
REF

3 4 5 6
2 7
oP. 0
1 8
0 9
Setpoint
selection

Setpoint limits

6.4.2 Reference source oP.0 With oP.0 it is determined how the setpoint is adjusted.

Analog setpoint The analog setpoints are adjusted via AN1, AN2 or AN3 (optional). Chapter 6.2
„Analog In- and Outputs“ describes the analog signal processing. The indication
of the setpoints can occur either before or after the signal processing (ru.27...32,
53).

Digital setpoint With parameter oP.3 „Absolute digital setpoint adjustment“ a setpointspeed of
-4000... 4000 rpm can be adjusted.
With parameter oP.5 „Digital setpoint adjustment in percent“ a setpoint of
0 %...±100 % of the minimal speed (oP.6 / oP.7) and the maximal speed (oP.10
/ oP.11) can be adjusted.

Motorpoti function With the motorpoti function a setpoint of -100%...0...100% between the limits
adjusted in the parameters oP.6 / oP.7 and oP.10 / oP.11 can be adjusted via
digital inputs (see 6.9.3 „Motorpoti function“).

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 4 4 17.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Setpoint- and Ramp Adjustment Functional Desription

System parameters Adjustment of absolute setpoint speed in rpm (SY.52) via the system parameters.

Output external PID-controller Adjustment of the setpoint value from the output of the technology controller (see
6.12).

Speed measurement Adjustment of the setpoint value via one of the two speed measurements (see
6.10).

Direct analog setpoint adjustment The cycle time of the software is 1 ms. During this time the analog input/output
(AN1 direct) status is updated once. Additionally the inverter requires a processing time of 1...
3 ms before the new setpoint value is calculated. If the inverter is used as secondary
final control element of a superior control, this time can impair the dynamics of the
entire closed-loop control system.
In such cases the analog setpoint value can be processed directly to the control
processor (direct setpoint adjustment). Thus a sampling time of 250 µs is possible.
To enable this fast response to an analog setpoint value, some restrictions must
be accepted:

• The setpoint limitations oP. 6 / oP. 7 / oP. 11 do not have any function; the speed
6
setpoint is only limited by oP. 14.
• The calculation formula of the analog setpoint value changes. The parameters
oP.6 / oP. 7 are without influence on the setpoint calculation.

nset = (analog vlue/10V * 100% - An. 6) * An. 5 * oP.10

• The acceleration / deceleration and S-curve time have no effect; it is operated

internally without ramps.
• The parameters An.1...4 and An. 7...9 are without any function.
• The maximal filter time for the analog inputs is 2 ms.
• The stop position controller cannot be activated.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

6.4.3 Rotation Source The selection of rotation direction determines the manner in which the rotation direction
oP.1 is adjusted. One can choose between following possibilities:

Fig. 6.4.3 Rotation selection with oP.1

Digital Terminal strip Terminal strip Setpoint- Control word

oP.2 forward/reverse Run/Stop dependent SY.50
0-lim. abs. 0-lim. abs. 0-lim. abs. LS no LS 0-lim. abs.

4 5
3 6
2 7
Rotation
1 selection 8
0 9
oP. 1

Setpoint limits

0-limited or absolute Concerning the adjustment of direction of rotation it is differentiated between two
evaluations:
0-limited - negative setpoints are set to zero, i.e. only positive setpoints are driven
in accordance with the selected rotation direction
absolute - no sign of the setpoint is evaluated and it is always driven with the amount
in accordance with the selected rotation direction
6.4.3.a Absolute and 0-limited

0-limited absolute
Setpoint Setpoint

Setpoint Setpoint
adjustment adjustment

Digital rotation adjustment (oP.2) oP.2 Display Setpoint rotation

0 LS Standstill (Low Speed)
1 F Forward (Forward)
2 r Reverse (Reverse)

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 4 6 17.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Setpoint- and Ramp Adjustment Functional Desription

Rotation adjustment via terminal The rotation selection via terminal strip allows the adjustment of the direction of
strip rotation via switch or from a primary control.

Input selection With parameter oP.60 one input is determined for rotation direction forward (or run/
Rotation direction F (Run/Stop) oP.60 stop) and with oP.61 one input for rotation direction reverse (or forward/reverse).
Rotation direction R (forward/ The values in brackets are valid with oP.1 = „4“ or „5“.
reverse) oP.61
Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal
0 1 ST (Prog. input „Control release/Reset“) X2A.16
1 2 RST (Prog. input „Reset“) X2A.17
2 4 F (Prog. input „Forward“) X2A.14
3 8 R (Prog. input „Reverse“) X2A.15
4 16 I1 (Prog. input 1) X2A.10
5 32 I2 (Prog. input 2) X2A.11
6 64 I3 (Prog. input 3) X2A.12
7 128 I4 (Prog. input 4) X2A.13
8 256 IA (Internal input A) none
9 512 IB (Internal input B) none
10 1024 IC (Internal input C) none
11 2048 ID (Internal input D) none 6

oP.1 = „2“ or „3“ In the case of rotation selection forward/reverse (oP.1= „2“ or „3“) the inputs
determined with oP.60 and oP.61 work as follows:

Forward Revers Input X2A.14 X2A.15

F R Function
0 0 LS
0 1 Reverse
F R
1 0 Forward
1 1 Forward

oP.1 = „4“ or „5“ In the case of rotation selection run/stop and forward/reverse (oP.1= „4“ or „5“) the
inputs determined with oP.60 and oP.61 work as follows:
X2A.14 X2A.15
Revers Forward Input
F/R Run/Stop Function
0 0 LS
0 1 Forward Run/Stop F/R
1 0 LS
1 1 Reverse

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Rotation direction dependent on The direction of rotation can be defined with the preadjusted setpoint signal. In the
the sign of the setpoint case of analog signals through adjustment of positive or negative voltages. In the
case of digital signals through adjustment of positive values (without sign) or nega-
tive values (negative sign in the display). Following settings are possible:

Evaluation with LS In this case a direction of rotation must be adjusted via a digital input, digitally via
(switch-off of modulation) oP.2 or via control word SY.50 in order for the inverter to modulate. It is unimportant
which direction of rotation is adjusted, as the direction of rotation is dependent on
the setpoint.

no rotation direction set -> LS (Modulation disabled)

oP.1 = 6 positive value (also 0) -> rotation direction forward
negative value -> rotation direction revers

Evaluation without LS In this case the inverter always modulates. No direction of rotation needs to be
adjusted.

oP.1 = 7 positive value (also 0) -> rotation direction forward

negative value -> rotaiton direction reverse

Rotation direction dependent on The control word is used for the status control of the inverter via bus. In order for
the control word SY.50 the inverter to react to the control word, the respective control process must be
enabled (oP.1=8 or 9; fr.2=5). When adjusting the direction of rotation via the control
word, the setpoint can be evaluated 0-limited (oP.1 = 8) or absolute (oP.1 = 9).

Control word Sy.50 Bit Function Description

0 Control release 0 = control release not enabled; 1= control release
enabled (AND-operation with di.1 bit 0 and di.2 bit 0); in
addition control release must set at terminal ST
(hardware)
1 Reset Triggers reset when changing from 0 => 1
2 Run / Stop 0 = setpoint rotation Stop; 1 = setpoint rotation Run
(source of setpoint direction op.1 = 8 or 9)
3 For / Rev 0 = setpoint rotation forward; 1 = setpoint rotation reverse
(source of setpoint rotation op.1 = 8 or 9)
4-6 Current set Source of set selection fr.2 = 5
7 Free
8 Fast stop 0 = fast stop not activated; 1 = fast stop activated
( OR-operation with further sources for fast stop)
9-15 Free

If Run/Stop shall be preset via the control word, oP.2 must be set to
„0“ , The terminals F/R must not be wired (OR-operation of terminal
oP.2 and Sy.50).

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 4 8 17.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Setpoint- and Ramp Adjustment Functional Desription

6.4.4 Fixed values The KEB COMBIVERT supports up to 3 fixed values for each parameter set,
(oP.18...23) which can be selected via two digital inputs. With oP.19 and oP.20 the inputs required
for the selection are defined (also see „Digital inputs“ Chapt. 6.3.10). The rotation
direction source for fixed value mode is defined with oP.18. The adjustment is
independent of oP.1 and is valid exclusively for the fixed values. The adjustment of
a fixed value has priority over the „normal“ setpoint adjustment.

Fig. 6.4.4 Fixed values

Digital Terminal strip Terminal strip Setpoint- DRIVECOM

oP.2 For / Rev Run / Stop dependent SY.50
Input Input 0-lim. abs. 0-lim. abs. 0-lim. abs. LS no LS 0-lim. abs.
Fixed value 1 Fixed value 2

6
4 5
3 6
oP.19 Input selection oP.20 Input selection 2 7
Fixed value 1 Fixed value 2
1 8
0...4095 0...4095
(according to table) (according to table) 0 9
oP. 18

Fixed value
rotation direction source
Fixed value 1 Fixed value 2
oP.21: oP.22:
-4000...4000 rpm -4000...4000 rpm
Fixed value 3
oP.23: -4000...4000 rpm

Setpoint limits

Selection of fixed value Fig. 6.4.4.a Selection of fixed values

Input fixed value 1

Input fixed value 2

Setpoint

f3
Fixed values f1...f3 f2
f1
t

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Fixed-value rotation direction With oP.18 it is defined how the direction of rotation is determined in case of active
source (oP.18) fixed value. The function and the value range correspond to oP.1.

oP.18 Rotation direction source for fixed values

0 digital via oP.2; setpoint 0-limited
1 digital via oP.2; setpoint absolute
2 terminal strip F/R; setpoint 0-limited
3 terminal strip F/R; setpoint absolute
4 terminal strip Run/Stop; setpoint 0-limited
5 terminal strip Run/Stop; setpoint absolute
6 setpoint-dependent with LS-recognition
7 setpoint-dependent without LS-recognition
8 control word SY.50; 0-limited
9 control word SY.50; 0-absolute

Fixed value input selection 1 and 2 Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal
(oP.19; oP.20)
0 1 ST (Prog. input „Control release/Reset“) X2A.16
1 2 RST (Prog. input „Reset“) X2A.17
2 4 F (Prog. input „Forward“) X2A.14
3 8 R (Prog. input „Reverse“) X2A.15
4 16 I1 (Prog. input 1) X2A.10
5 32 I2 (Prog. input 2) X2A.11
6 64 I3 (Prog. input 3) X2A.12
7 128 I4 (Prog. input 4) X2A.13
8 256 IA (Internal input A) none
9 512 IB (Internal input B) none
10 1024 IC (Internal input C) none
11 2048 ID (Internal input D) none

Fixed value 1...3 The three fixed values oP.21...23 are set-programmable and can be adjusted in the
(oP.21, oP.22, oP.23) range of -4000...4000 rpm.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 4 10 17.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Setpoint- and Ramp Adjustment Functional Desription

6.4.5 Setpoint Limits Following limit values can be preadjusted:

Fig. 6.4.5 Setpoint limits

4000
Absolute maximal
oP.14
value forward
oP.10 Maximal value
forward

Minimal value
-100 oP.6 forward
Setpoint[%] Setpoint[%]
Minimal value oP.7*1 (oP.6) +100
reverse

Maximal value
reverse oP.11*1 (oP.10)
Absolute maximal oP.15*1 (oP.14)
value reverse 6
-4000

*1 If the value „For“ is adjusted in these parameters (limit values rotation direction
reverse), then the adjusted values for rotation direction forward (oP.6, oP.10
and oP.14) are valid.

Minimal- / Maximal value In case of setpoint adjustment in percent the minimal and maximal values form the
(oP.6, oP.7, oP.10, oP.11) characteristic for the setpoint calculation (0% = minimal value; 100% = maximal
value). In case of absolute setpoint adjustment the minimal and maximal values
limit the setpoint. Separate limits can be adjusted for both directions of rotation. If
the value „For“ is adjusted for rotation direction „Reverse“, then the values for
„Forward“ are valid.

Setting range: oP.6 = 0...4000 rpm Standard = 0 rpm

oP.10 = 0...4000 rpm Standard = 2100 rpm
oP.7 = For, 0...4000 rpm Standard = For
oP.11 = For, 0...4000 rpm Standard = For

Absolute maximal value After the minimal and maximal values the setpoint is limited through the absolute
(oP.14, oP.15) maximal value and subsequently transferred to the ramp generator. Since the ana-
log setpoint is always calculated onto the maximal values (oP.10, oP.11), it is
possible, to adjust the characteristic of the analog setpoint with the same gain for
both directions of rotations (see Fig. 6.4.5.a) in spite of different maximal output
speeds. If the value „For“ is adjusted in oP.15, then the absolute maximal speed of
oP.14 is valid for both directions of rotation.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Fig. 6.4.5.a Setpoint limits

+n [rpm]

(oP. 10) Maximal value

forward

(oP.14) Absolute maximal

value forward

Setpoint [%] Setpoint[%]

-100% +100%

Maximal value
(oP.11)
reverse

-n [rpm]

6.4.6 Setpoint Calculation The unit differentiates between two setpoint adjustments:
• the setpoint adjustment in percent
With the adjusted setpoint limits the speed range 0%...100% is defined. In
this case the adjustment 0% corresponds to the minimal speed and 100%
to the maximal speed. The speed after the setpoint limiting is calculated
according to following formula:
oP.10-oP.6
positive setpoint = oP.6 + (setpoint adjustment [%] x )
100%

oP.11-oP.7
negative setpoint = oP.7 + (setpoint adjustment [%] x )
100%

• the absolute setpoint adjustment, i.e. the setpoint is directly adjusted as

speed and limited through the corresponding minimal and maximal values
as well as through the absolute maximal value.

The setpoint sources are assigned as follows:

Setpoint adjustment in percent Absolute setpoint adjustment

Terminal strip (analog setpoint) Keyboard/Bus absolute
Keyboard/Bus in % Set speed value SY.52
Motorpoti Speed measurement
Technology controller

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 4 12 17.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Setpoint- and Ramp Adjustment Functional Desription

6.4.7 Ramp generator The ramp generator assigns an adjustable time to a speed change, during this time
the change stall take place. The acceleration time (for pos. speed changes) and
deceleration time (for neg. speed changes) can be adjusted separately for both directions
of rotation. To enable jerk-free acceleration and deceleration, so-called S-curves can
be adjusted in addition to it.
The ramp times refer to 1000 rpm (at ud.3=0) and change in proportion to the mode.
The times to be adjusted are calculated as follows:

desired ramp time speed change (∆n)

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– = –––––––––––––––––––
ramp time to be adjusted (oP.28...oP.31) 1000 rpm (dep. on ud.2)
Fig. 6.4.7 Acceleration and deceleration times
oP.28 Acceleration time forward
+n [rpm] oP.29 *1 Acceleration time reverse
oP.30 * 2 Deceleration time forward
1000 oP.31 *1 Deceleration reverse
Rotation direction Rotation direction

∆n Frequency change
∆ t Acceleration time for ∆ n
clockwise

500
6
∆ n ∆n oP.29 *1 oP.31 *1

∆ t ∆ t ∆ t ∆ t
0
counter-clockwise

oP.28 oP.30

∆ n ∆ n

800

1000

-n [rpm] *1 If the value „For“ is adjusted in these parameters (acceleration and deceleration times for rotation
direction reverse), then the values for rotation direction forward (oP.28 und oP.30) are valid.
*2 If the value „Acc“ is adjusted in this parameter, then the value for acceleration (oP.28) is valid.

Time factor acceleration/ The time factor extends the standard ramp time (oP.28...31) by the adjusted value.
deceleration (oP.62) The S-curve time do not change.

Value Ramp time

0 adjusted value x 1
1 adjusted value x 2
2 adjusted value x 4
3 adjusted value x 8
4 adjusted value x 16

Calculation of the 1000 rpm x real ramp time

acceleration and oP.28...oP.31 = –––––––––––––––––––––
deceleration times: ∆n

Example A drive shall accelerate from 100 rpm to 1000 rpm in 5s.

5s x 1000 rpm
oP.28 =————————–––––––– = 4,5 s
1000 rpm -100 rpm

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

S-curve time For some applications it is of advantage if the drive starts and stops nearly jerk-
free. This function is achieved by straightening the acceleration and deceleration
ramps. The straightening time, also called S-curve time, can be preadjusted with
the parameters oP.32...oP.35. But S-curves are excecuted only with the adjustment
„Ramp with constant rise“.

Fig. 6.4.6.a S-curve time oP.28 Acceleration time forward

oP.29 *1 Acceleration time reverse
oP.30 * 2 Deceleration time forward
oP.31 *1 Deceleration time reverse
oP.32 S-curve time acceleration forward
oP.33 *1 S-curve time acceleration reverse
+n [rpm]
oP.34 *3 S-curve time deceleration forward
oP.35 *1 S-curve time deceleration reverse
1000
Rotation direction Rotation direction
forward

oP.29 oP.31

oP.33 oP.33 oP.35 oP.35

t [s]
0
oP.32 oP.32 oP.34 oP.34
reverse

oP.28 oP.30

-1000

-n [rpm]

*1 If the value „For“ is adjusted in these parameters (for rotation direction reverse), then the values adjusted in the parameters
for rotation direction forward are valid.
*2 If the value „Acc“ is adjusted in this parameter, then the value for acceleration (oP.28) is valid.
*3 If the value „Acc“ is adjusted in this parameter, then the value adjusted in parameter oP.32 is valid for all S-curve times.
Value „0“ switches the corresponding S-curve off.

In order to drive defined ramps with activated S-curve time, the preadjusted
acceleration and deceleration times (oP.28...oP.31) must be larger than the
S-curve time (oP.32...oP.34) belonging to it.

Example for acceleration with At the beginning and the end of the acceleration ramp a parabolic curve is driven
rotation direction forward for the time adjusted in parameter oP.32. As a result the adjusted ramp time is
extended by oP.32.

Total acceleration time = oP.28 + oP.32

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 4 14 17.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Setpoint- and Ramp Adjustment Functional Desription

6.4.8 Limiter The setpoint value to the ramp generator can be changed for example by slip
(oP.40 / oP.41) compensation. Before the setpoint value triggers the modulator, it is again
limited. The limiter defines the maximum output frequency and can be
programmed differently in all sets.

Output limit forward (oP.40) If the frequency rises above the adjusted value, the error „E.OS“ is triggered. At
Output limit reverse (oP.41) oP.41 = „=For“ the value applies to clockwise rotation oP.40.

Setting range oP.40: 0...4000 min-1 Default: 4000 min-1

Setting range oP.41:=For; 0...4000 min-1 Default: =For

6.4.9 Ramp with constant At the ramp with constant time the acceleration and deceleration times adjusted
time with oP.28...oP.31 always equal the real ramp times, independent of the set value.
In this operating mode S-curves are not possible. For acceleration the actual set
value is always used as reference value, for deceleration the last set values is
always used.

Here a little example for the use of ramps with constant time:
6

Two conveyor belts run with different speeds. Both of them receive the Stop-
command at the same time. The belts reduce the speed in proportion to the adjusted
time and come to a standstill simultaneously.

Fig. 6.4.9.a Forward acceleration with constant ramp time

nf_soll
_soll
nf_ist
_ist

t_rampe t_rampe t_rampe t_rampe t_rampe t

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Fig. 6.4.9.b Forward deceleration with constant ramp time

nf_soll
_soll
nf_ist
_ist

t_rampe t_rampe t_rampe t_rampe t_rampe t

Ramp mode (oP.27) The different ramp functions can be adjusted separately for every frequency change
(acceleration forward, deceleration forward and so on). The selection is made with
oP.27 and is adjustable separately in each set.The function is activated after
pressing „ENTER“. In case of several selections the sum of the values must be
entered:

Ramp Bit-No Value Mode Reference speed

0 const. ascent 1000 rpm (dep. on ud.2)
Acc. 0+1 1 const. time actual set value
forward 2 * const. time last set value at constant run
3 reserved
0 const. ascent 1000 rpm (dep. on ud.2)
Dec. 2+3 4 * const. time actual set value
Vorward 8 const. time last set value at constant run
12 reserved
0 const. ascent 1000 rpm (dep. on ud.2)
Acc. 4+5 16 const. time actual set value
Reverse 32 * const. time last set value at constant run
48 reserved
0 const. ascent 1000 rpm (dep. on ud.2)
Dec. 6+7 64 * const. time actual set value
Reverse 128 const. time last set value at constant run
192 reserved

* Do not adjust these values - they are only sensible, if acceleration respectively
deceleration do not occur from/to standstill.

If the mode constant time is activated for a ramp, then the s-curve function is
deactivated for this ramp. The ascent is limited to minimum 1000 rpm (dep. on
ud.2) / 4800 s.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 4 16 17.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Setpoint- and Ramp Adjustment Functional Desription

Fig. 6.4.9.c Graph with ramp modes

n_soll
f_soll

n_2
f_2

1000 rpm
100 Hz

delta_n_2
delta_f_2
variabel
variabel
delta_t delta_n
delta_f
konstant
konstant
delta_n
delta_f delta_t
konstant
konstant
delta_t
n_1
f_1

delta_n
delta_f t_2
konstant
konstant
delta_t
delta_n_1
delta_f_1
variabel
variabel delta_t

t_1 t_rampe
t
6

Calculations The speed change per raster scan delta_t (step size delta_n) for the mode constant
ascent is calculated from the ramp time t_ramp and the reference speed (1000
rpm) as follows:
1000 rpm
delta_n= —————————
t_rampe / delta_t
For different set values the real ramp time is calculated according to following
formula:
n_soll
t = t_rampe * ———
1000 rpm
The actual step size for the mode constant time is calculated from the step size
delta_n and the actual set value n_set as follows:
n_soll
delta_n(variable) = delta_n * ————
1000 rpm

For a simplification of the internal calculations 1024 min-1 (resp. 2048 min-1 or
4096 min-1 dependent on ud.2) are used as reference speed.
n_set
delta_n(variable) = delta_n *—————
1024 rpm-1

This results in an error of -2.4 % for the real ramp time. If a specific real ramp time
shall be adjusted, the desired value is to be divided by 1.024. Example:

desired ramp time = 10 s

adjsuted ramp time = 10 s / 1.024 = 9.77 s

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

6.4.9 Used Parameters

R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

oP.0 0300h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 9 1 0 -

oP.1 0301h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 9 1 7 -

oP.2 0302h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 2 1 0 -

oP.3 0303h ✔ ✔ - -4000 rpm 4000 rpm 0,125 rpm 0 rpm dep. on ud.2

oP.5 0305h ✔ ✔ - -100 % 100 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

oP.6 0306h ✔ ✔ - 0 rpm 4000 rpm 0,125 rpm 0 rpm dep. on ud.2

oP.7 0307h ✔ ✔ - -0,125 rpm 4000 rpm 0,125 rpm -0,125 rpm -0,125 rpm: =For (dep. on ud.2)

oP.10 030Ah ✔ ✔ - 0 rpm 4000 rpm 0,125 rpm 2100 rpm dep. on ud.2

oP.11 030Bh ✔ ✔ - -0,125 rpm 4000 rpm 0,125rpm -0,125 rpm -0,125 rpm: =For (dep. on ud.2)

oP.14 030Eh ✔ ✔ - 0 rpm 4000 rpm 0,125 rpm 4000 rpm dep. on ud.2
oP.15 030Fh ✔ ✔ - -0,125 rpm 4000 rpm 0,125rpm -0,125 rpm -0,125 rpm: =For (dep. on ud.2)

oP.18 0312h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 9 1 7 -

oP.19 0313h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 16 -

oP.20 0314h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 32 -

oP.21 0315h ✔ ✔ - -4000 rpm 4000 rpm 0,125 rpm 100 rpm dep. on ud.2

oP.22 0316h ✔ ✔ - -4000 rpm 4000 rpm 0,125 rpm -100 rpm dep. on ud.2

oP.23 0317h ✔ ✔ - -4000 rpm 4000 rpm 0,125 rpm 0 rpm dep. on ud.2

oP.27 031Bh ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

oP.28 031Ch ✔ ✔ - 0,00 s 300,00 s 0,01 s 5,00 s -

oP.29 031Dh ✔ ✔ - -0,01 s 300,00 s 0,01 s -0,01 s -0,01 s: =For

oP.30 031Eh ✔ ✔ - -0,01 s 300,00 s 0,01 s 5,00 s -0,01 s: =Acc

oP.31 031Fh ✔ ✔ - -0,01 s 300,00 s 0,01 s -0,01 s -0,01 s: =For

oP.32 0320h ✔ ✔ - 0,00 s 5,00 s 0,01 s 0,00 s 0,00 s: off

oP.33 0321h ✔ ✔ - -0,01 s 5,00 s 0,01 s -0,01 s -0,01 s: =For; 0,00 s: off

oP.34 0322h ✔ ✔ - -0,01 s 5,00 s 0,01 s -0,01 s -0,01 s: =Acc; 0,00 s: off

oP.35 0323h ✔ ✔ - -0,01 s 5,00 s 0,01 s -0,01 s -0,01 s: =For; 0,00 s: off

oP.40 0328h ✔ ✔ - 0 rpm 4000 rpm 0,125 rpm 4000 rpm dep. on ud.2

oP.41 0329h ✔ ✔ - -0,125 rpm 4000 rpm 0,125rpm 0,01 rpm -0,125 s: =For; dep. on ud.2

oP.60 033Ch ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 4 -

oP.61 033Dh ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 8 -

SY.52 0034h ✔ - - -16000 rpm 16000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm -

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 4 18 17.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Functional Description

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware
6.1 Operating and Applicance
Date
4. Operation
6.2 Analog In- and Outputs
6.3 Digital In- and Outputs

5. Parameter 6.4 Set Value and Ramp

Adjustment
6.5 Voltage-/Frequency 6.5.1 Control type and Max.
Characteristic (U/f) Frequency Mode ..................... 3
6. Functions Adjustment 6.5.2 Rated frequency and Boost .... 4
6.5.3 Additional Rated Point ............ 4
6.6 Motor Data Adjustment
6.5.4 Delta Boost ............................. 4
6.7 Protective Functions 6.5.5 Voltage Stabilization ............... 5
7. Start-up
6.5.6 Maximal Voltage Mode ............ 6
6.8 Parameter Sets 6.5.7 Switching Frequency ............... 6
6.9 Special Functions 6.5.8 Used Parameters .................... 7
8. Special Operation 6.10 Encoder Interface
6.11 SMM, Posi, Synchron, CTM

9. Error Assistance 6.12 Technology Control

6.13 CP-Parameter Definition

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 5 2 28.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
U/f-Characteristic Adjustment Functional Description

6.5 Voltage-/ In the following chapter all parameters for the adjustment of the voltage/frequency
characteristic as well as the appropriate adjustments like modulation, voltage rise
Frequency (Boost) and switching frequency are described. Except for the switching frequency
Characteristic these adjustments apply only to F5-B, F5-G and F5-M in controlled operation (CS.0=off).
Adjustment

6.5.1 Control Type This parameter depends in the value range on the used control. The values 0...2 apply
(ud.2) and Max to open loop systems (F5-B and F5-G), the values 4...6 to closed loop systems (F5-
M) and the values 7...10 to servos (F5-S). For these units a separate instruction
Frequency Mode manual is available, for that reason we do not go into details here.
(only F5-B)
This parameter defines the maximal possible output frequency/speed, the resolution
and the reference values for the ramp times, the analog outputs and the dc brake.
Changes effect all frequency/speed dependent parameters. The parameter can only
be written with opened control release. After a change the initialization is passed
through, so that no Power-On-Reset is necessary.

ud.2 Control typ Maximal frequency Resolution 6

0 F5-C/G/B 400 Hz 0,0125 Hz
1 F5-G/B 800 Hz 0,025 Hz
The switching frequency 2 F5-G/B 1600 Hz 0,05 Hz
(uF.11) must be adjusted at
3 F5-G 50 Hz 1,56 mHz
least 10times higher than the
maximal possible output 4 F5-M 4000 min-1 0,125 min-1
frequency! 5 F5-M 8000 min-1 0,25 min-1
6 F5-M 16000 min-1 0,5 min-1
7 F5-M 500 min-1 0,0156 min-1
8 F5-S 4000 min-1 0,125 min-1
9 F5-S 8000 min-1 0,25 min-1
10 F5-S 16000 min-1 0,5 min-1
11 F5-S 500 min-1 0,0156 min-1

For every frequency mode COMBIVIS uses an own Config-File. In the case of a mode
changeover all parameter information are read from the inverter and a new Config-File
is generated should it not already exist.

High-Torque-Modus Für Anwendungen mit maximalem Drehmoment bei geringer Ausgangsfrequenz ist
ein neuer Modus eingeführt worden.
Besondere Merkmale im High-Torque-Modus:
• Momentenvorgabe in Schritten von 1 Nm; die Anzeige erfolgt weiterhin in 0,01 Nm
• Vorgabe der Nenndrehzahl /-frequenz in 0,125 min-1 / 0,0125 Hz.
• die EMK-Konstante für Synchronmotoren kann bis 32 kV / 1000 min-1 vorgegeben
werden, d.h. Nenndrehzahlen des Motors bis 12,5 min-1.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

6.5.2 Rated frequency The voltage/frequency characteristic (U/f) is adjusted with the rated frequency (uF.0)
(uF.0) and Boost and the Boost (uF.1). The rated frequency adjusts the frequency at which 100 %
modulation depth (~input voltage) are achieved. The boost adjusts the output voltage
(uF.1) to 0 Hz. Depending on uF.10 the modulation limit can be further increased in this stage
up to 200 % (see Fig. 6.5.2).
Fig. 6.5.2 Rated frequency and Boost
200%
uF.10=2 / 3
110% uF.10=1
100%
uF.0 = 0.0000...400.00 Hz; Default = 50 Hz
uF.1 = 0.0...25.5 %; Default = PU-Id
uF.10=0

uF.1

uF.0

6.5.3 Additional Rated To adapt the U/f-characteristic to special conditions an additional point of support can
Point (uF.2/uF.3) be specified with uF.2 and uF.3. uF.2 defines the frequency and uF.3 the voltage. At
uF.2 = 0 Hz the adjustment is ignored.

Bild 6.5.3 Additional Rated Point

100%

uF.3
uF.2 = -0,0125 = parabolic characteristic
0,0...400 Hz; Default = 0,0 Hz
uF.3 = 0,0...100,0 %; Default = 0,0 %

uF.1
fout
uF.2 uF.0

6.5.4 Delta Boost (uF.4/ The Delta-Boost is a time-limited Boost used to overcome large breakaway torques.
uF.5) The Delta-Boost acts adding to the Boost; but the sum is limited to 25.5 %.

Fig. 6.5.4 Delta Boost UA

100%

uF.4 = 0.0...25.5 %; Default = 0 %

uF.5 = 0.00...10.00 s; Default = 0 s
uF.4

uF.1
t
uF.5

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 5 4 28.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
U/f-Characteristic Adjustment Functional Description

6.5.5 Voltage Due to fluctuations of the mains voltage or the load the DC-link voltage and with it the
Stabilization directly dependent output voltage can change. In the case of enabled voltage
stabilization the fluctuations of the output voltage are compensated. That means 100%
(uF.9) output voltage correspond to the value adjusted in uF.9, but maximally 110 % · (DC-
link voltage / √2 ). Furthermore, this function makes it possible to adapt motors with
a smaller rated current to the inverter.

Fig. 6.5.5.a Voltage stabilization UN/UA

UA bei UN = 250V unstabilized
uF.9 = 1...649 V 250 V
650 = off (default) UA bei UN = 250V stabilized
uF.9 = 230VV
CP.17=230

UA bei UN = 190V stablized

190 V
UA bei UN = 190V unstablized

UN = Mains voltage
Example: uF.9 = 230V UA = Output voltage
no Boost is adjusted f
CP.16=50 Hz
uF.0 = 50Hz
6

Fig. 6.5.5.b Example: Acceleration with load

with voltage stabilization without voltage stabilization
Motor voltage
Motor speed

Motor voltage

Load
Load

Motord speed

Voltage stabilization With uF.19 the time constant of a PT1-element is defined. The PT1-element serves for
PT1-time constant the smoothing of the DC-link voltage. The initial value of the PT1-element is used as
(uF.19) actual value for the voltage stabilization.
(only for F5-G >= D-housing)
uF.19 PT1-time constant
0 Function off
1 2 ms
2 4 ms
3 8 ms
4 16 ms
5 32 ms
6 64 ms
7 128 ms
8 256 ms
9 512 ms
10 1024 ms

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Fig. 6.5.5.c Example: Deceleration of a centrifugal-load drive from 80Hz

with voltage stabilization without voltage stabilization

Actual frequency Actual frequency

DC-link voltage DC-link voltage

Motor voltage Motor voltage

Load Load

6.5.6 Maximal voltage By changing the maximal voltage mode more torque can be releasedfree above the
mode (uF.10) rated frequency through overmodulation (110% voltage). Raising the U/f-characteristic
has an influence at activated energy saving function or at voltage stabilization.

uF.10 Modulation Description

0 100 % U/f / 100% voltage without overmodulation; all limitations 100% of
modulation factor
1 110 % U/f / 110% voltage with overmodulation; all limitations 110% of
modulation factor
2 200 % U/f / 100% voltage limitations between voltage-forming functions
200%; limitation before modulator 100% of
modulation factor
3 200 % U/f / 110% voltage limitations between voltage-forming functions
200%; limitation before modulator 110% of
modulation factor

6.5.7 Switching The switching frequency with which the power modules are clocked, can be changed
Frequency (uF.11) depending on the application. The maximal possible switching frequency as well as
the factory setting are determined by the employed power circuit.
uF.11Switching frequency
Combivis Display/Plaintext Frequency At switching frequencies
0 2 2 kHz above 4 kHz absolutely
1 4 4 kHz consider the max. motor line
2 8 8 kHz length specified in chapter
3 12 12 kHz 2.1.6 and 2.1.7.
4 16 16 kHz
The current switching frequency is indicated in the parameter ru.45, the max. switching
frequency in In.3 and the switching carrier frequency in In.4.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 5 6 28.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
U/f-Characteristic Adjustment Functional Description

Influences and effects of the switching frequency are listed below:

small switching frequency high switching frequency

- less inverter heating - less noise development
- less discharge current - improved sine-wave simulation
- fewer switching losses - less motor losses
- fewer radio interferences
- improved concentricity at small
speeds

6.5.8 Used Parameters

R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

6
ud.2 0802h ✔ - - 0 11 1 0/4/8 default value dep. on ud.2

uF.0 0500h ✔ ✔ - 0 Hz 400 Hz 0,0125 Hz 50,0 Hz depending on ud.2

uF.1 0501h ✔ ✔ - 0,0 % 25,5 % 0,1 % 2,0 % -

uF.2 0502h ✔ ✔ - -0,0125 Hz 400 Hz 0,0125 Hz 0,0 Hz dep. on ud.2; -0,0125 = parabolic

uF.3 0503h ✔ ✔ - 0,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

uF.4 0504h ✔ ✔ - 0,0 % 25,5 % 0,1 % 0,0 % -

uF.5 0505h ✔ ✔ - 0,00 s 10,00 s 0,01 s 0,00 s -

uF.9 0509h ✔ ✔ - 1V 649 V; 650: off 1V 650:off -

uF.10 050Ah ✔ ✔ - 0 3 1 0 -
uF.11 050Bh ✔ ✔ - 0 PU-Id 1 PU-Id PU-Id: Power unit Identification

uF.19 0513h ✔ - - 0 10 1 0 -

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 5 8 28.01.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Motor Data and Controller Functional Desription

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

6.1 Operating and Unit Data

4. Operation 6.2 Analog In- and Outputs

6.3 Digital In- and Outputs
6.4 Setpoint- and Ramp
5. Parameter Adjustment
6.5 Voltage-/Frequency
Characteristic Adjustment 6.6.1 Motor Name Plate ................... 3
6.6.2 Motor Data DASM ................... 3
6. Functions 6.6 Motor Data and Controller 6.6.3 Motor Adaption ....................... 6
6.6.4 Torque Limitation .................... 7
6.7 Protective Functions
6.6.5 Flux Lowering Calculation ....... 8
6.8 Parameter Sets 6.6.6 Motor Data DSM ..................... 9
7. Start-up 6.6.7 Motor Data Parameter ........... 10
6.9 Special Functions 6.6.8 Controller Structure ............... 11
6.10 Encoder Interface 6.6.9 Current Control
(Torque Control) .................... 12
8. Special Operation 6.11 Posi-/Synchronous Control 6.6.10 Flux / Rotor Adaption ............ 13
and Contouring Mode 6.6.11 Speed Control ....................... 14
6.6.12 Torque Control ...................... 15
6.12 Technology Controller
6.6.13 Used Parameters .................. 16
9. Error Assistance 6.13 CP-Parameter Definition

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 6 2 10.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Motor Data and Controller Functional Desription

6.6 Motor Data and The adjustment of the correct motor data is important for many inverter functions,
since calculations are derived from it, which the inverter requires to achieve the
Controller best possible results in the control of Boost and slip compensation.

6.6.1 Motor Name Plate

Fig. 6.6.1 Example of a motor name plate

KEB Antriebstechnik
GmbH & Co. KG Made in
ANTRIEBSTECHNIK Schneeberg Germany

DK 160 L 4 F I /TW150
dr.3 96/1632804/ 001
3 -Mot IP 55 IM B 3 W.KI. F 40 °C 127 kg 6
dr.2 VDE 053 0
dr.5 15,0 KW
50 Hz 230/400 V /Y
dr.4 cos ϕ 0,86 49,5/28,5 A dr.0
1455 1/min IGR 05B 2500 Imp
dr.1 5V D0/RS 6xTTL
U FL 230/400 V
3 ~Mot 50 Hz M Br Nm I Sp max mm

6.6.2 Motor Data DASM Following parameters can be taken directly from the name plate of the three-phase
asynchronous motor (DASM) and entered:

Motor data from name plate - dr.0 DASM rated current 0,0...710,0 A (Star-/Delta-connection)
(dr.0...dr.5) - dr.1 DASM rated speed 0...64000 rpm
- dr.2 DASM rated voltage 120...500 V (Star-/Delta-connection)
- dr.3 DASM rated power 0,35...400,00 kW
- dr.4 DASM power factor cos(phi) 0,50...1,00
- dr.5 DASM rated frequency 0,0...400 Hz

Parameter dr.0 and dr.2 must always be adjusted in accordance with the used connection
(star or delta). For the above motor name plate it means that it is 230 V / 49,5A for
delta connection and 400 V / 28,5 A for star connection. It doesn’t matter that for
example the rated output voltage of the inverter is larger (e.g. „87Hz-chracteristic“).

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Motor stator resistance (dr.6) The adjustment of the motor stator resistance has an influence that is not unimportant
on the control characteristics of the drive. Temperature differences between cold and
warm motors entail resistance changes of up to 40%. Depending on the operating
characteristics a value between the cold resistance R20 (for applications with many
down times e.g. lifts) and max. 80 % of the warm resistance (for applications in
continuous operation) should be adjusted.

With the ohmmeter The motor stator resistance is measured, indenpendent of the motor wiring (∆ / Y),
between 2 phases of the motor feed cable. To obtain a more exact result all 3 values
(U/V, U/W and V/W) can be measured and the average value be formed.
In this way the ohmic line resistance is registered simultaneously (important in the
case of long incoming lines). If the measured resistance should be larger than the
maximal value, the maximal value is to be adjusted.

Fig. 6.6.2 Measuring the motor stator resistance

Ohm

U
Use suitable V
measuring W
devices PE

With data sheet If the motor stator resistance is taken from a data sheet, then there is usually R120 -
equivalent resistance (phase value) specified. Depending on the used connection the
following value must be adjusted in dr.6:
Star connection: dr.6 = 2 • R120 to 2,24 • R120
Delta connection: dr.6 = 0,666 • R120 to 0,75 • R120
If only the warm resistance RW is specified:
Star connection: dr.6 = 1,4 • R1W to 1,6 • R1W
Delta connection: dr.6 = 0,46 • R1W to 0,53 • R1W

Automatic determination of The KEB COMBIVERT supports an automatic determination of the motor stator
the motor stator resistance resistance. For that proceed as follows:
• input motor data of the identification plate into the parameter set which is to programm.
• select and activate the parameter set which is to programm.
• Execute the measurement deoendent on the operational case in cold status
respectively let the motor warm up in no-load operation for approx. 10 min.
• Switch control release
• Preset no direction of rotation (inverter must be in status „LS“)
- if necessary oP.1 must be adjusted to value „6“ -
• Write maximal value „50000“ to parameter dr.6
During the determination the display indicates „cdd“. Upon successful determination
the motor stator resistance is entered in dr.6. If an error occurs during the determination
then the error signal „E.cdd“ is output. The detection can be carried out for each
parameter set separately. Thus a parameter set can be programmed for example as
„Warm-up set“ for particularly critical applications.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 6 4 10.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Motor Data and Controller Functional Desription

Fig. 6.6.3 Equivalent circuit diagram of a motor in phase quantities

R1 X1σ X2σ’ R2’

Xh RFe

Leakage Inductance (dr.7) In accordance with the following formula the leakage inductance σLS in a range of
0,00...500,00 mH is entered in parameter dr.7. In case the data is not specified in
the data sheet the motor manufacturers give further information.
6

σLS = 1 ((X + Xh) -

Xh²
)
σ
ω
1σ
(X2σσ’+ Xh)
or

σLS = (L + L ) - (Lh²)2 ≈ L1σσ + L2σσ ’

σ
1σ h (L2σσ’+ Lh)

If the leakage inductance is taken from a data sheet, then there is usually the
phase value for σLS specified. Depending on the used connection the following
value must be entered in dr.7:

Star connection: dr.7 = 2 x σLS

Delta connection: dr.7 = 2/3 x σLS

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

6.6.3 Motor Adaption After entering the name plate specifications of a new motor parameter Fr.10 should
(Fr.10) be activated once (inverter must be in status noP). This creates a default setting
for a number of control parameters which is sufficient for many applications. This
adjustment depends on inverter identification data (like e.g. rated inverter current)
and motor identification data (like e.g. motor rating and rated motor current).

Parameters which are changed through the activation of Fr.10:

• dr.16 Max. torque field weak speed
• dr.17 Speed for maximum torque
• dr.18 Field weak speed
• dr.19 Flux adaption factor
• dr.20 Field weak curve
• dS.0 KP current
• dS.1 KI current
• CS.19/CS.20/CS.22/Pn.61 Torque limits
On the basis of these settings a fine adustment can be carried out, e.g. an increase
of the torque limits or a change of the field weakening speed.

Control of the Over the entire speed range the modulation grade ru.42 should not exceed approx.
optimized settings 90...95 % (depending on the expected system fluctuations and temperature
changes). However, the output voltage at the rated point should not be too low (e.g.
modulation factor at rated speed and rated load < 70 %), since such a setting
would result in a motor current that is too high.

Vorgehensweise:
1. Open control release (status noP)
2. Enter motor name plate data in the corresponding parameters (dr.0...12).
3. Adjust Fr.10 = 1 or Fr.10 = 2 ⇒the corresponding dr/dS parameters are
loaded with the default-parameters.
4. If necessary, carry out a fine adjustment on the basis of these settings.

Wert Bedeutung
1 Pre-adjustment of the motor-dependent control-parameters
The adjusted voltage stabilization value or the voltage class of the
inverter is taken as input voltage.

2 Pre-adjustment of the motor-dependent control-parameters

The DC-link voltage /√2 measured at switch on is taken as input
voltage.

The pre-adjustments made at value 1 or 2 refer to the same parameters.

For Fr.10=2 the inverter measures automatically the input voltage which is required
as reference value for the calculation. This is especially important for the CP-
mode, since the value for the voltage stabilization cannot be adjusted, consequently
an adaption to e.g. 460V-systems would not be possible.
The adaption does not take place automatically at every switch on, it is done only
once at the tripping of Fr.10 because otherwise possible fine adjustment would be
overwritten.
This means: If the parameterizing of an inverter is done e.g. at a system input
voltage of 400 V, while the drive operates later on a 460 V system, then either
parameter Fr.10 = 2 must be written again or the inverter must already be
parameterized on the 400V-system by means of dS.10 = 460V and Fr.10 = 1 for
the 460 V system.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 6 6 10.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Motor Data and Controller Functional Desription

6.6.4 Torque Limitation The parameters cS.20 and cS.22 define the torque limits.The value „oFF“ deaktivates
the particular limit. In this case the motoric value is valid. If this value is switched
off too, the preadjusted torque limit in cS.20 is valid for all operating ranges. If
cS.20 is also switched off the value of cS.19 works as limit (especially for CP-
mode).

Torque limit forward motoric Fig. 6.6.4 Torque limits

(cS.20)
Torque limit reverse motoric Torque
(cS.21)
Torque limit forward generatoric cS.21 cS.20
(cS.22)
Torque limit reverse generatoric
(cS.23)

Controller
manipulated
variable
6

cS.22 cS.23

Adjustable limits
The torque limits can be modified for special applications in the operation. For that
a source is defined with the parameter cS.15. The defined limits cS.20/cS.22 are
changed with the adjusted torque setpoint source cS.15.

Torque reference source (cS.15) Value Source

0 REF 0...100 %
1 AUX 0...100 %
2 Direct setting with cS.19/20/22 (default)
3 Adjustment in percent with cS.18 0...100 %
4 Motorpoti 0...100 %
5 External PID output 0...100 %

The torque limits ru.47 / 48 are calculated as follows:

eingestellter Prozentwert
ru.47 = Mmot = cS.20 x
100%
eingestellter Prozentwert
ru.48 = Mgen = cS.22 x
100%

The maximum torque is limited by 2 further factors:

• If the KEB COMBIVERT is dimensioned too small to operate the current
that is necessary for the required torque, then the maximum torque is limited
automatically.
• From the motor parameters a speed-dependent torque characteristic is
calculated.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

DASM rated torque (dr.14) The motor torque which has been calculated from the motor parameters is displayed
max. torque (dr.15) in dr.14. Parameter dr.15 indicates the maximum torque which is achieved in the
DASM max. torque at field weak base speed range. It depends on the hardware current limitation - 5% and cannot
speed (dr.16) be altered.
DASM speed f. max. torque (dr.17)
DASM field weak speed (dr.18)
Fig. 6.5.4.b Torque limitation
Torque

Limiting line of motor torque

Max. torque (dr.15)

DASM max. torque at field

weakening speed (dr.16)

Torque limitation (CS.20...22)

Available torque at the drive

Speed
DASM field weakening
DASM speed f. max. speed (dr.18)
torque (dr.17)

6.6.5 Flux Lowering In the base speed range the maximum torque is mainly limited by the hardware
Calculation current limits of the inverter. For a stable operation the control requires voltage
reserves in order to balance currents at any time, therefore the torque that can be
reached in the higher speed range is limited by the output voltage. The limit
characteristic is adjusted correctly when a voltage reserve of approx. 5…10 % of
the rated voltage is available at every operating point.

DASM field weakening speed In this parameter the speed is adjusted at which the field weakening operation
(dr.18) starts.
Flux adaption factor (dr.19) With the parameters dr.19, dr.20 the flux characteristic can be adapted to the
motor.
Field weakening curve (dr.20) In this parameter the field weakening characteristic is adjusted. The value of 1
means that the flux is lowered after an 1/n function.

Fig. 6.5.5 Flux lowering

Flux adaption factor Field weakening curve (dr.20)

(dr.21)

dr.20 < 1

dr.20 = 1

dr.20 > 1

set value ( ru .1 ) + slip

1 2
field weakening speed (dr.18)

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 6 8 10.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Motor Data and Controller Functional Desription

Fig. 6.6.6 Example for servo name plate

dr.27 dr.24
dr.25
dr.23

6.6.6 Motor Data DSM Following parameters can be taken directly from the name plate of the three-phase
synchronous motor (DSM) and entered:

Motor data from name plate - dr.23 DSM rated current 1,0...710,0 A
- dr.24 DSM rated speed 0...32000 rpm
- dr.25 DSM rated frequency 10...1600,0 Hz
- dr.27 DSM rated torque 0,1...6553,5 Nm

Motor data from data sheets Following data can be taken from the data sheets of the motor or, if necessary,
request it from the manufacturer: :

- dr.26 DSM EMK voltage constant 0...1000 V/1000 rpm

- dr.28 DSM current for zero speed 0,0...700,0 A
- dr.30 DSM stator resistance 0,000...50,000 Ohm
- dr.31 DSM inductance 0,01...500,00 mH

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

6.6.7 Motor Data Parameter

R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

dr.0 0600h ✔ ✔ - 0A 710,0 A 0,1 A LTK*) only F5-M

dr.1 0601h ✔ ✔ - 0 rpm 64000 rpm 1 rpm LTK*) only F5-M

dr.2 0602h ✔ ✔ - 120 V 500 V 1V LTK*) only F5-M

dr.3 0603h ✔ ✔ - 0,35 kW 400,00 kW 0,01 kW LTK*) only F5-M

dr.4 0604h ✔ ✔ - 0,50 1,00 0,01 LTK*) only F5-M

dr.5 0605h ✔ ✔ - 0,0 Hz 1600,0 Hz 0,1 Hz LTK*) only F5-M

dr.6 0606h ✔ ✔ - 0,000 Ohm 50,000 Ohm 0,001 Ohm LTK*) only F5-M

dr.7 0607h ✔ ✔ - 0,01 mH 500,00 mH 0,01 mH LTK*) only F5-M

dr.14 060Eh - ✔ - 0,01 Nm 10000 Nm 0,01 Nm Motor data only F5-M

dr.15 060Fh - ✔ - 0,01 Nm 10000 Nm 0,01 Nm LTK+Mot. data programmable at F5-M

dr.16 0610h ✔ ✔ - 0,01 Nm 10000 Nm 0,01 Nm Adaption only F5-M

dr.17 0611h ✔ ✔ - 1 rpm 32000 rpm 1 rpm Adaption only F5-M

dr.18 0612h ✔ ✔ - 0 rpm 32000 rpm 1 rpm Adaption only F5-M

dr.19 0613h ✔ ✔ - 25 % 250 % 1% Adaption only F5-M

dr.20 0614h ✔ ✔ - 0,01 2,00 0,01 Adaption only F5-M

dr.21 0615h ✔ ✔ - 0% 100 % 0,1 % 75 % nur F5-M

dr.23 0617h ✔ - - 0,0 A 710,0 A 0,1 A LTK*) only F5-S

dr.24 0618h ✔ - - 0 rpm 32000 rpm 1 rpm LTK*) only F5-S

dr.25 0619h ✔ - - 0,0 Hz 1600,0 Hz 0,1 Hz LTK*) only F5-S

dr.26 061Ah ✔ - - 0 1000 1 LTK*) only F5-S

dr.27 061Bh ✔ - - 0,1 Nm 6553,5 Nm 0,1 Nm LTK*) only F5-S

dr.28 061Ch ✔ - - 0,0 A 700,0 A 0,1 A LTK*) only F5-S

dr30 061Eh ✔ - - 0,000 Ohm 50,000 Ohm 0,001 Ohm LTK*) only F5-S

dr31 061Fh ✔ - - 0,01 mH 500,00 mH 0,01 mH LTK*) only F5-S

cS.20 0F14h ✔ ✔ - 0,01 Nm 10000 Nm 0,01 Nm -0,01 Nm only F5-M

cS.22 0F16h ✔ ✔ - -0,01 Nm 10000 Nm 0,01 Nm -0,01 Nm only F5-M

Fr.10 090Ah ✔ ✔ ✔ 1 2 1 1

*) dependent on power circuit

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 6 10 10.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Motor Data and Controller Functional Desription

6.6.8 Controller
Structure

Fig. 6.6.8 Controller structure

Current control

nset + Isqset + Isq-controller

Speed controller (PI-controler)
+
nactual - Isqactual - Usq
U
+ ASM
Voltage Trans- V Power 3~
precontrol formation circuit
W
Isd-controller Usd PG
(PI-controler)

r
Flux lowering Flux
calculation correction

6
Umax
Isdactual

Transformation
Isdset angular

r
Flux controller
q
Transformation
Fset Factual
Flux calculation d

Speed Speed Rotor position

calculation

Speed control configuration This parameter activates the speed or the torque control.
(cS.0)

Bit Value Description

0,1,2 0...3 Controller off

4 Speed control
5 Torque control

At F5-S it can be switched only between speed and torque control. A controlled
operation is not possible.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Restrictions for controlled The controlled operation is suited only as emergency operation for set-up or in
operation case of a faulty encoder.

Inverter operates according to adjusted current/frequency charancteristic (Chapt.

6.5).

Increased oscillating torque compared to controlled operation.

ru. 9 continues to indicate the actual speed measured by encoder 1.

Actual torque is internally set to zero, i.e. ru.12 always display the value 0. If
outputs are programmed to torque-dependent switching or if a torque signal is
given out over an analog output then the outputs behave like they do at actual
torque = 0.

dr.1 and dr.5 serve for the calculation of the pole pair number, for that reason they
must be adjusted correctly even in controlled operation.

All torque limits are without effect.

Speed and flux controller are not active.

No reference point run possible.

6.6.9 Current Control The current control consists of two standard PI-controllers.
(Torque Control) • Active current controller (torque controller) with
speed-dependent precontrol
• Magnetizing current controller

KP current (dS.0) The basic setting of the controller is done automatically through the motor adaption
KI current (dS.1) Fr.10 (see Chapter 6.6.3).
If in the individual case a fine adjustment should be necessary the proportional
gain factor can be adjusted with dS.0. The integral factor is adjusted with dS.1. The
values apply for the active current controller as well as for the magnetizing controller.

No load voltage (dr.21) The precontrol of the active current controller can be changed with dr.21 at F5-M
DSM - EMK voltage constant and with dr.26 at F5-S.
(dr.26)

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 6 12 10.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Motor Data and Controller Functional Desription

6.6.10 Flux / Rotor Adapti- The motor name plate data are only valid for one operating status (generally at
on operating temperature). With the aid of the rotor adaption the operational performance
of motors > 4kW for the respective operating state (cold...warm... max. temperature)
can be optimized . This function should not be activated (because the system can
oscillate) for smaller motors or applications which do not reach the torque limit.
Prior to the activation the name plate data as well as the motor stator resistance
and leakage inductance must be entered. This function takes effect only with 300
rpm and approx. 10% of the rated inverter current. The function must always be
checked for the appropriate motor type, since with individual types a deterioration
of the drive characteristics can occur through the rotor adaption.

KI rotor adaption (dS.7) The adaption in a range of 0 (off) to 32767 can be adjusted with dS.7 (starting
value approx. 1000). This adjustment should be checked for correctness in several
operating ranges.

Flux / rotor adaption Mode (dS.4) Bit Value Function

0-1 0 Rotor adaption off

1 Starting value 100 % default 6
2 Starting value 70 % default
3 Starting value 50 % default

2 0 not stored
1 Stored; by entering the motor data (dr-parameter) or d2.4 and
after Power-On the adaption factor (ru.59=adaption factor/
default*starting value bit 1) is loaded onto his starting value. During
the set change the current internal adaption factor is stored into
all appropriate motor sets and the last internal adaption factor
becomes valid in the new motor set.

3-4 0 Umax controller off

1 Umax controller on; sensible in the field weakening range,
particularly at activated rotor adaption, in order to limit the voltage
in the field weakening range to 100 %.

5-6 0 Flux controller off

1 Flux controller on; sensible for short acceleration times and
setpoint speed values within the field weakening range.

KP Umax (dS.8) dS.8 and dS. 9 serve for the adaption of the proportional and integral factor of the
KI Umax (dS.9) maximum voltage controller.

KP flux (dS.11) The flux controller is designed as PI-controller. The factors are adjusted with dS.11
KI flux (dS.12) and dS.12, dS.13 contains the limitation. For most applications it is not necessary
Magn. current limit (dS.13) to activate the flux controller. Only in the case of short acceleration times and
setpoint speed values within the field weakening range the drive performance can
be optimized by activating the flux controller.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

6.6.11 Speed Control The speed controller consists of a PI-controller, at which the P-factor is system-
deviation-dependent (see picture A) and the I-factor is speed-dependent (see
pictur B).
Actual source (cS.1) Selection of the source of actual speed value. Following possibilities are selectable:

0 encoder channel 1
1 encoder channel 2

KP speed (cS.6) The proportional factor of the speed controller is adjusted in these parameters. In
KP speed gain (cS.7) addition to the standard KP-value a system-deviation-dependent proportional gain
KP speed limit (cS.8) can be adjusted with cS.7 and cS.8. With it the dynamic performance can be
improved and overshootings can be dampened.
cS.7 defines to what extent the control deviation affects the proportional factor.
cS.8 limits the proportional factor.
Exception: If the standard KP-value (cS.6) is larger than the limit value cS.8, then
the proportional factor is = cS.6.

Fig. 6.6.11 Mode of functioning of the speed controller

Picture A Picture B

KP factor KI factor

cS.8 cS.9 +cS.10

cS.7

cS.6 cS.9

Xd(n) act. speed

cS.11 cS.12

KI speed (cS.9) These parameters define the integral factor of the speed controller. To achieve a
KI offset (cS.10) better speed rigidity at small speeds and in standstill the KI-factor can be varied in
Max. speed for max. KI (cS.11) dependence on the speed (cS.11, cS.12).
Min. speed for cS.9 (cS.12) • cS.9 forms the base value
• the maximum KI-value is cS.9 + cS.10
• the two corner speeds cS.11 and cS.12 define in which speed range the
KI-value is changed

Stand still position control To improve the standstill rigiditiy of the drive a standstill position control can be
(cS.24) adjusted. The position control becomes active when actual and setpoint speed
have reached the value 0 rpm . The position control is deactivated as soon as the
setpoint speed has reached a value of <> 0 rpm or when the control release is not
given.
The setpoint position, onto which the drive controls, is the position value at which
the condition actual and setpoint speed=0 rpm exists for the first time (at given
control release).
At Posi-/Synchron running (PS.0 ≠ 0) the position controller cannot be activated.
The proportional factor of the position controller is adjusted in cS.24. A value of 0
deactivates the controller.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 6 14 10.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Motor Data and Controller Functional Desription

6.6.12 Torque Control With the torque control it is regulated onto two controlled variables – torque and
speed. Parameter cS.0 must be adjusted to value „5“ in order to activate the torque
control (see Chapter 6.6.8). The torque control is available only at switched off
Posi-/Synchronous module (PS.0 = 0). If the actual torque becomes larger in torque-
controlled operation than the setpoint speed, the automatic control switches
automatically into the speed-controlled operation.

6.6.12 Torque control at cS.0 = „5“

cS.15
0...100 % REF 0
0...100 % AUX 1
100 % absolute 2
0...100 % percental (cS.18) 3
0...100 % Motorpoti 4
ru.49
0...100 % ext. PID 5 cS.16

cS.19
1
abs.
0 abs. 6

1 -> 0 at n_ist > n_set

0 -> 1 if speed controller within the limitation
Speed control with
sign from ru.49

Torque reference source (cS.15) Parameter cS.15 determines the torque setpoint source. Following possibilities are
selectable:

Value Source
0 Analog adjustment via REF-input (see Chapt. 6.2)
1 Analog adjustment via AUX-input (see Chapt. 6.2)
2 Digital absolute (cS.19)
3 Digital precental (cS.18)
4 Motorpoti
5 External PID-output (technology controller)

Absolute torque reference The absolute torque setpoint value is adjusted with cS.19. The value can be changed
(cS.19) by the torque setpoint source defined with cS.15 in accordance to the formula
specified below. cS.19 is limited to dr.15 (max. torque FI) and dr.33 (three-phase
a.c.motor max. torque) (dr.15 > dr.33 > cS.19).

Reference torque (ru.49) The setpoint torque at the torque control (ru.49) is calculated as follows:

adjsuted percentage
ru.49 = M = cS.19 x
100%

Torque reference setting % With cS.18 the percentage setpoint value with reference to cS.19 can be directly
(cS.18) preadjusted.

Torque acceleration time (cS.16) With cS.16 the ramp time for the torque control is determined within the range of
0...60000 ms.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

6.6.13 Used Parameters

R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

cS.0 0F00h ✔ ✔ - 0 (F5-S: 4) 5 1 0 (F5-S: 4) -

cS.1 0F01h ✔ ✔ - 0 1 1 0 -

cS.6 0F06h ✔ ✔ - 0 32767 1 300 -

cS.7 0F07h ✔ ✔ - 0 32767 1 0 -

cS.8 0F08h ✔ ✔ - 0 32767 1 0 -

cS.9 0F09h ✔ ✔ - 0 32767 1 100 -

cS.10 0F0Ah ✔ ✔ - 0 4095 1 0 -

cS.11 0F0Bh ✔ ✔ - 0 rpm 16000 rpm 1 rpm 10 rpm -

cS.12 0F0Ch ✔ ✔ - 0 rpm 16000 rpm 1 rpm 500 rpm -

cS.15 0F0Fh ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 5 1 2 -

cS.16 0F10h ✔ ✔ - 0 ms 60000 ms 1 ms 0: oFF -

cS.18 0F12h ✔ ✔ - -100,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 100,0 % -

cS.19 0F13h ✔ ✔ - -10000 Nm 10000 Nm 0,01 Nm Adaption -

cS.20 0F14h ✔ ✔ - -0,01 10000 Nm 0,01 Nm -0,01 at -0,01 cS.19 also acts as a limit

cS.22 0F16h ✔ - - -0,01 10000 Nm 0,01 Nm -0,01 at -0,01 cS.19 also acts as a limit

cS.24 0F18h ✔ - - 0 32767 1 0 0: off

ru.47 022Fh - - - -10000 Nm 10000 Nm 0,01 Nm - -

ru.48 023Fh - - - -10000 Nm 10000 Nm 0,01 Nm - -

ru.49 024Fh - - - -10000 Nm 10000 Nm 0,01 Nm - -

dS.0 1100h ✔ - - 0 32767 1 1500 -

dS.1 1101h ✔ - - 0 32767 1 1500 -

dS.4 1104h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 63 1 0 only F5-M

dS.7 1107h ✔ ✔ - 0 32767 1 1000 only F5-M

dS.8 1108h ✔ ✔ - 0 32767 1 0 only F5-M

dS.9 1109h ✔ ✔ - 0 32767 1 320 only F5-M

dS.11 110Bh ✔ ✔ - 0 32767 1 1000 only F5-M

dS.12 110Ch ✔ ✔ - 0 32767 1 300 only F5-M

dS.13 110Dh ✔ ✔ - 0A LTK 0,1 A LTK only F5-M

dr.21 0615h ✔ ✔ - 0,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 75,0 % only F5-M

dr.26 061Ah ✔ ✔ - 0 1000 1 LTK only F5-S

dr.33 0621h ✔ - - 0,1 Nm 6553,5 Nm 0,1 Nm dr.15 nur F5-S

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis © KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002

6 6 16 10.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Functional Description

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware
6.1 Operating and Applicance
Date
4. Operation
6.2 Analog In- and Outputs
6.3 Digital In- and Outputs

5. Parameter 6.4 Set Value and Ramp

Adjustment
6.5 Voltage-/Frequency
Characteristic (U/f)
6. Functions Adjustment
6.6 Motor Data Adjustment
6.7.1 Ramp Stop and Hardware
7. Start-up 6.7 Protective Functions Current Limit ........................... 3
6.8 Parameter Sets 6.7.2 Maximal Constant Current ..... 5
6.7.3 Automatic Restart and Speed
6.9 Special Functions Search .................................... 7
8. Special Operation 6.7.4 Dead Time Compensation ...... 9
6.10 Encoder Interface 6.7.5 Base-Block Time and Voltage
6.11 SMM, Posi, Synchron, CTM Level ....................................... 9
6.7.6 Response to Errors or Warning
9. Error Assistance 6.12 Technology Control Signals ................................... 9
6.13 CP-Parameter Definition 6.7.7 Fast Stop .............................. 13
6.7.8 Motor Protection Mode ......... 15
6.7.9 GTR7-Control ........................ 19
10. Project Planning 6.7.10 Special Functions ................. 20

11. Networks

12. Annex

Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 05.02.03 6 7 1
Functional Description Protective Functions

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 7 2 05.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Protective Functions Functional Description

6.7 Protective The protective functions protect the inverter against switch off caused by overcurrent,
overvoltage as well as thermal overheating. Furthermore, you can restart the drive
Functions after an error automatically (Keep-On-Running).
6.7.1 Ramp Stop and The ramp stop function essentially fulfills two tasks. It prevents
Hardware Current • overcurrent errors (E.OC) during the acceleration phase,
Limit • overvoltage and overcurrent errors (E.OC/E.OP) during the deceleration phase,
by stopping the ramp on exceeding adjustable levels. Moreover, the ramp stop function
can be activated by a digital input. Beyond that a hadware current limit is integrated
which intervenes independent of the software and is thus much faster.
Although these functions can be activated in controlled operation, this is to be avoided,
since the KEB COMBIVERT regulates here at the torque limits.

Fig. 6.7.1.a Survey ramp stop function

see „Digital outputs“
Ramp stop
do.0...do.7 value „15“
Pn.23 Input selection
Ramp stop

0...4095 (Default 0)
Pn.22 Ramp stop/Activation
also see
LD-Stop (I) LD-Stop (U) LA-Stop „Digital inputs) 6
0 off off off
1 off off on
2 off on off
3 off on on
4 on off off
5 on off on
6 on on off
7 on on on

Pn.25 Deceleration stop / DC-voltage Pn.24 Max. Ramp current

200…800 V 0…200 %

LA-Stop The function protects the frequency inverter against switch off caused by overcurrent
during the acceleration phase. The current level is adjustable with Pn.24 in the range
of 0…200 %. The protective function can be deactivated with Pn.22.
LD-Stop During deceleration energy is refed into the frequency inverter, which causes a rise
of the DC-link voltage.
If too much energy is refed the inverter can trip to error OP or OC. If the LD-Stop
function is activated with Pn.22, the DEC-ramp is regulated according to the adjusted
DC-link voltage (Pn.25) or the DC-link current (Pn.24), so that errors are avoided to a
large extent.
An activation of LD-Stop(I) - functionality leads to the deceleration stop, if the setpoint
is reduced or if the protective function Maximum Constant Current (stall-function) should
cause a reduction of the frequency. Consequently inverters „get stuck“ at high speeds
concerning applications like e.g. pumps / fans and overload errors can occur.
Since the error E.OP occurs far more often during deceleration and the avoidance of
such errors is covered by the function LD(U), LD(I) should be activated only if it is
absolutely necessary (overcurrent error during deceleration).

Name: Basis Datum Kapitel Abschnitt Seite

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 3
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 05.02.03 6 7 3
Functional Description Protective Functions

Hardware current limit (uF.15) The hardware current limit is an additional, fast protection to prevent faults caused by
overcurrent. Upon exceeding the max. short-time current limit (see Power Circuit
Instruction Manual) the hardware current limit becomes active. The following settings
are possible with uF.15:
0 off; Hardware current limit disabled
1 Single phase mode; Hardware current limit enabled; works both in motoric
and generatoric operation
2 Zero vektor mode; Hardware current limit enabled; works only motoric, but at
activated function it makes available more torque. Generatoric operation
switches to Mode 1.
The hardware current limit limits the current at the limit and triggers no error. This can lead to torque
breakdowns at the motor shaft, which is especially important during the operation „lifting and lowering“
since the drive can sag because of missing torque without the brake engaging.

Fig. 6.7.1.b Example for ramp stop function

Acceleration stop

max. ramp current

Pn.24

Actual frequency (ru.3) A

Inverter status (ru.0) C

Actual utilization (ru.13) B

Actual frequency (ru.3)

max. DC-voltage Pn.25

DC-link voltage (ru.18)

Inverter status (ru.0)

Deceleration stop (U)

Used Parameters
R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

Pn.22 0416h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 7 1 1 bit-coded

Pn.23 0417h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

Pn.24 0418h ✔ ✔ - 0% 200 % 1% 140 % % referring to inverter rated current

Pn.25 0419h ✔ ✔ - 200 V 800 V 1V 375/720 V depending on voltage class

uF.15 050Fh ✔ - - 0 2 1 1 -

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 7 4 05.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Protective Functions Functional Description

6.7.2 Current Limit The Stall-function protects the frequency inverter against overload. Upon reaching the
Constant Run maximal constant current the utilization is reduced by increasing/decreasing the output
frequency. When falling below the maximal constant current the inverter accelerates/
(Stall-Function) decelerates again with the normal ramp time. These adjustments apply only to F5-B,
F5-G and F5-M in controlled operation (CS.0=off). The basic mode of operation is
determined with Pn.19:

Pn.19 Stall mode Binäry dec. Description

Bit 0/1 Final value to which deceleration/acceleration takes place. Both
limits are always adjusted as the control direction may be inverted
during generatoric operation.
decelerates to accelerates to
xxxxxx00 0 oP.6/oP.7 oP.10/oP.11
xxxxxx01 1 oP.36/oP.37 oP.10/oP.11
xxxxxx10 2 oP.6/oP.7 oP.40/oP.41
xxxxxx11 3 oP.36/oP.37 oP.40/oP.41

Bit 2 With this bit one adjusts whether the control direction inverts itself
during generatoric operation.
xxxxx0xx 0 Control direction independent on active current 6
xxxxx1xx 4 Control direction is inverted in the case of negative active current
(generatoric operation)

Bit 3 This bit determines the control mode.

xxxx0xxx 0 The frequency is increased/decreased by way of the ramp
generator. The ramp time is preset by Pn.21.
xxxx1xxx 8 The frequency is increased/decreased by a setpoint/actual-value
differential controller. The time constant of the controller is preset
by Pn.21, the setpoint is preset by Pn.20.

Bit 4 Determines when the stall controller should intervene,

xx0xxxxx 0 Stall-controller only active during constant running factual=fset
(status ru.0: fcon or rcon)
xx1xxxxx 16 Stall-controller generally on

Bit 5 Determines which actual value serves for the control

x0xxxxxx 0 Apparent current (default)
x1xxxxxx 32 Active current; this setting in combination with Bit3 = „1“ is
necessary for generatoric operation (at F5-B = value 0)

Bit 6 Determines the torque/speed characteristic of the Stall-function.

0xxxxxxx 0 Positive characteristic, e.g. for fans, the frequency must be

reduced so that the utilization decreases.
1xxxxxxx 64 Negative characteristic, e.g. for drilling machines, the frequency
must be increased so that the utilization decreases.

Bit 7 Current limitation calculation above the rated point

0xxxxxxx 0 No current limitation calculation
1xxxxxxx 128 Current limitation calculation above the rated point. Above the
rated point (uf.0) the Stall-level (Pn.20) is lowered according to
following formula:
Rated point (uf.0) ²
Current limit = Pn.20 • ( ———————
Actual freq. (ru.3)
)
Name: Basis Datum Kapitel Abschnitt Seite
© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 5
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 05.02.03 6 7 5
Functional Description Protective Functions

Pn.20 Stall level The max. constant current represents the setpoint for the control. The adjusted value
refers to the inverter rated current (In.1).
Setting range: 0...199 %; 200 = off (default)

Pn.21 Stall Acc/Dec time Depending on the setting of Pn.19 (bit 3) the ramp time or the time constant of the
differential controller is adjusted here. The adjusted ramp times refer to 100 Hz /
1000 min-1 (depending on ud.2).
Setting range: 0...300.00 s (2.00 s default)

Fig. 6.7.2 Functioning of Stall-function with standard setting

adjusted constant
current limit
Actual frequency (ru.3)

Inverter status (ru.0)

Actual utilization (ru.13)

Used Parameters
R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

Pn.19 0413h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 255 1 0 bit-coded

Pn.20 0414h ✔ ✔ - 0% 199 % (200 = oFF) 1% oFF % referring to inverter rated current

Pn.21 0415h ✔ ✔ - 0.00 s 300.00 s 0.01s 2.00 s -

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 7 6 05.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Protective Functions Functional Description

6.7.3 Automatic Restart With automatic restart the inverter can reset errors automatically. The function can
and Speed Search be activated in a separate manner according to error with the Pn-parameters.

Because of the independent starting of the machine safety measures must be

provided for operating personnel and machine.

The function speed search permits the connection of the frequency inverter onto a
running out motor. After the function has been activated by the selected starting
conditions (Pn.26), it searches for the actual motor speed and adapts the output
frequency and voltage accordingly. If the synchronization point is found the inverter
accelerates the drive with the adjusted ACC-ramp to the setpoint. In regulated operation
the ramp output value is set to the measured actual value.

Fig. 6.7.3.a Principle of speed search

Pn.26 Starting conditions
Terminal strip X2A
1 Control release
Power on 2 Power on
Terminal strip X2A 4 Reset
8 Auto-Reset 6
Pn.0 Automatic restart UP
0 = off 1 = on

Pn.1 Automatic restart OP Pn.27 Speed search mode (dep. ud.2)

0 = off 1 = on Value Frequency lowering by
0 50 Hz/s / 375 rpm
Pn.2 Automatic restart OC 1 70 Hz/s / 525 rpm
0 = off 1 = on 2 100 Hz/s / 750 rpm
3 150 Hz/s / 1125 rpm
Pn.3, 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 66 4 200 Hz/s / 1500 rpm
5 280 Hz/s / 2100 rpm
X X at value „3“
6 400 Hz/s / 3000 rpm
7 560 Hz/s / 4200 rpm
Add up the decimal values of the 3 Voltage rise by
blocks and enter it into Pn.27. (e.g. 0 0.025 %
8 0.12 %
100Hz/s = 2;
16 0.24 %
0.12 % = 8, 130 % = 32, setpoint = 0
24 0.485 %
Pn.27 = 2 + 8 + 32 + 0 = 42) Utilization level up to
0 80 %
Conditions at the start of speed search Function 32 130 %
Search reference value
0 Set value
≥ old setpoint secure 64 Measured actual value
actual setpoint ≥ act. motor speed secure
< act. motor speed critical

actual rotation direction = old rotation direct. secure

Speed search
≠ old rotation direct. critical

Speed Search / Mode Pn.27 The speed search mode determines the frequency and voltage jumps as well as the
maximum utilization with which the function works. Higher values let the function
work faster, lower values make the function „softer“.

Name: Basis Datum Kapitel Abschnitt Seite

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 7
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 05.02.03 6 7 7
Functional Description Protective Functions

Fig. 6.7.3.b Speed search with „soft“ adjusted function

Speed search Ramp

Actual speed
Motor speed

Utilization
Output voltage

Error Reset

Fig. 6.7.3.c Speed search with „fast“ adjusted function

Actual speed
Motor speed

Utilization
Output voltage

Used Parameters
R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

Pn.0 0400h ✔ - - 0 1 1 1 -

Pn.1 0401h ✔ - - 0 1 1 0 -

Pn.2 0402h ✔ - - 0 1 1 0 -

Pn.26 041Ah ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 15 1 8 bit-coded

Pn.27 041Bh ✔ - ✔ 0 127 1 0 bit-coded

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 7 8 05.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Protective Functions Functional Description

6.7.4 Dead Time The dead time compensation optimizes the switch-off times of the power module
Compensation uF.18 semiconductors. The parameter is intended for service purposes only and should not
be changed.

uF.18 Dead time compensation/Mode

0 off
1 on (default)

6.7.5 Base-Block Time On switching off the modulation (e.g. on opening the control release or triggering the
(uF.12) and DC-brake) the motor induces a voltage which acts contrary to its cause. The Base-
Block time (uF.12 in s) protects the power modules against destruction by blocking
Voltage Level the power modules in this stage. The duration of the Base-Block time depends on the
(uF.13) power stage. During the Base-Block time the display indicates „bbl“. Below the indicated
Base-Block voltage level uF.13 no Base-Block time occurs. The current modulation
grade is indicated in ru.42.

6.7.6 Response to The following errors or warning signals must not lead automatically to the disconnection
Errors or Warning of the inverter. The behaviour can be adjusted by parameters:
6
Signals Pn.4 Input selection external error => Pn.3 Response to external fault
Pn.6 Watchdog time => Pn.5 Response to error watchdog
=> Pn.7 Response to limit switch
=> Pn.18 Response to set-warning
=> Pn.66 Response to soft limit switch

At the following signals one can react to the interference additionally by setting a
switching condition:

Pn.9 Level OL-warning => Pn.8 Response to OL-warning

Pn.11 Level OH-warning => Pn.10 Response to OH-warning
Pn.13 Clearing time E.dOH => Pn.12 Response to dOH-warning
Motor protective circuit-breaker (6.7.8) => Pn.14 Response to OH2-warning
Pn.17 Level OHI-warning => Pn.16 Response to OHI-warning

Input selection In order to trigger an error in the inverter with an external signal, one or several inputs
external fault (Pn.4) can be selected for it with Pn.4.

Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal

0 1 ST (Prog. input „Control release/Reset“) X2A.16
With Pn.65 Bit 1 it can be 1 2 RST (Prog. input „Reset“) X2A.17
defined, whether with the 2 4 F (Prog. input „Forward“) X2A.14
inputs selected here E.EF (with 3 8 R (Prog. Input „Reverse“) X2A.15
response from Pn.3) or E.UP 4 16 I1 (Prog. Input 1) X2A.10
(response from 6.7.3) is 5 32 I2 (Prog. Input 2) X2A.11
triggered. 6 64 I3 (Prog. input 3) X2A.12
7 128 I4 (Prog. input 4) X2A.13
8 256 IA (Internal input A) none
9 512 IB (Internal input B) none
10 1024 IC (Internal input C) none
11 2048 ID (Internal input D) none
In case of several inputs the sum of their decimal values must be entered.

Name: Basis Datum Kapitel Abschnitt Seite

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 9
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 05.02.03 6 7 9
Functional Description Protective Functions

Response to E.EF (Pn.3) With Pn.3 it is defined how the inverter reacts when an external error (E.EF; A.EF) is
triggered. Following reactions can be selected:

Pn.3 Response Description

0 Error; restart after Reset Error message E.xx
Immediate switch off of modulation. Correct the error
for the restart and activate reset.
The prewarning changes to an error. The drive
remains in the error state until a reset signal is
recognized.
1 Fast stop; modulation off; Status message A.xx
restart after Reset Fast stop - switch off of modulation after reaching
0Hz. Correct the error for the restart and activate
reset. The drive remains in condition fast stop until
a reset signal is recognized.
2 Fast stop; holding torque; Status message A.xx
restart after Reset Fast stop - holding torque on reaching 0 Hz. Correct
the error for the restart and activate reset. The drive
remains in condition fast stop until a reset signal is
recognized.
3 Modulation off; automatic Status message A.xx
restart Immediate switch off of modulation; the drive returns
automatically to normal operation, as soon as the
fault no longer exists.
4 Fast stop; modulation off; Status message A.xx
automatic restart Fast stop - switch off of modulation after reaching
0Hz. The drive returns automatically to normal
operation, as soon as the fault no longer exists.
5 Fast stop; holding torque; Status message A.xx
automatic restart Fast stop - Holding torque on reaching 0 Hz. The
drive returns automatically to normal operation, as
soon as the fault no longer exists.
6 Protective function off; no no status message
reaction No effect on the drive. Fault is being ignored.

Watchdog-time (Pn.6) The Watchdog-time monitores communication on the external bus between operator
and e.g. PC. The response upon exceeding the adjusted time is defined with Pn.5.
The time is adjustable in the range of 0 (no reaction); 0.01...10.00 s.

Response to E.buS (Pn.5) The possible reactions correspond to the reactions of Pn.3 (see above). Depending
on the selected setting a status message E.buS or A.buS is output or fault is being
ignored.

Level OL-warning (Pn.9) If the 100%-utilization of the inverter is exceeded by 5 %, the internal overload counter
starts to count forward. If the utilization falls below 100 %, the counter counts backward.
The current counter content can be read in parameter ru.39. Upon reaching 100 %
the inverter switches off with error message „E.OL“ and the counter counts backward.
When it has reached 0 % the status changes to E.nOL. The error can now be reset.
With Pn.9 a level between 0...100 % can be adjusted, at which the condition OL-
warning is fulfilled. The response to the warning signal is defined with Pn.8.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 7 10 05.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Protective Functions Functional Description

Response to OL-warning Depending on the selected setting a status message E.OL or A.OL is output or the
(Pn.8) fault is being ignored.
Pn.8 Response Description
0...5 see Pn.3 see Pn.3
6 warning signal only No effect on the drive. Error is being ignored. Switching
at dig. output condition do.0...7 Value „7“ is set.

Limit switch error response This parameter adjusts the response if one of inputs programmed as limit switch is
(Pn.7) triggered. The possible reactions correspond to the reactions of Pn.3 (see left page).
(only F5-M/S) Depending on the selected setting and the rotation direction an error/status message
E.Prr/A.Prr or E.PrF/A.PrF is output.
Level OH-warning (Pn.11) The overtemperature detection protects the power module against overload. The
temperature, at which the inverter switches off with error message „E.OH“ depends
on the power circuit (usually 90°C). After a cooling phase the status changes from
E.OH to E.nOH and can then be reset.
With Pn.11 a level between 0° C up to 90 °C is adjustable, at which the condition OH-
warning is fulfilled. The response to the warning signal is defined with Pn.10.
Response to OH-warning Pn.10 Response Description
(Pn.10) 0...5 see Pn.3 see Pn.3 6
6 warning signal only No effect on the drive. Error is being ignored. Switching
at dig. output condition do.0...7 Value „8“ is set.

Disconnecting time E.dOH The motor temperature detection protects the motor against thermal overload. A
(Pn.13) temperature sensor integrated into the motor winding is connected to the terminals
T1/T2 of the inverter power circuit. Upon exceeding a resistance of 1650 Ohm (e.g. a
motor temperature > Level Pn.62) the disconnecting time adjusted with Pn.13 is started,
the switching condition dOH-warning is set and the adjusted response to the warning
signal is carried out. After the expiration of the disconnecting time (Pn.13) the error
E.dOH is triggered.

Response to dOH-warning Depending on the selected setting a error / status message E.dOH or A.dOH is output
(Pn.12) and the selected response is activated. If overheat no longer exists, the message
E.ndOH (or A.ndOH) is output. Only then the error can be reset or the automatic
restart can be carried out.
Pn.12 Response Description
0...5 see Pn.3 see Pn.3
6 warning signal only Switching condition Value „9“ is set.No effect on the
at dig. output drive until the disconnecting time (Pn.13).
7 warning signal Function disabled; terminals are not queried. Switching
disabled condition Value „9“ is not set. Switching condition „46“
(default) motor temperature is set.

Level dOH-warning (Pn.62) A special power circuit is necessary for this function. The motor overtemperature
level defines a temperature in the range of 0...200 °C. On exceeding the adjusted
temperature the turn-off time (Pn.13) starts, the switching condition „46“ is set and the
response according to Pn.12 is executed. After expiration of the turn-off time the
inverter switches off with the error message E.dOH. The current temperature is indicated
in ru.46.
At a standard power circuit the switching conditions „9“ and „46“ are set at Pn.12 =
0...6. At Pn.12 = 7 only the switching condition „46“ is set. In the motor temperature
display ru.46 only T1-T2 closed or T1-T2 open is displayed.

Name: Basis Datum Kapitel Abschnitt Seite

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 11
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 05.02.03 6 7 11
Functional Description Protective Functions

Level OH2-warning (Pn.15) An electronic motor protective circuit-breaker is integrated in servo F5-S (see Chapt.
6.7.8). A level of 0...100 % of the tripping time is adjustable with Pn.15. On reaching
(only for F5-S) the adjusted level, the switching condition „OH2-warning“ is set (also see „Digital
outputs“). The response to the warning signal is defined with Pn.14.

Response to OH2-warning An electronic motor protective circuit-breaker is integrated in KEB COMBIVERT (see
(Pn.14) Chapt. 6.7.8). When the tripping times, defined according to VDE 0660, are exceeded
the switching condition OH2-warning is set (also see „Digital outputs“).
Pn.14 Response Description
0...5 see Pn.3 see Pn.3
6 warning signal only No effect on the drive. Error is being ignored. Switching
at dig. output condition do.0...7 Value „10“ is set.

OHI delay time (Pn.17) The interior temperature monitoring protects the inverter against malfunctions caused
by too high temperature in the interior of the inverter. Upon exceeding a unit-specific
temperature the interior fan is activated. If after approx. 10 minutes the temperature is
still too high, the switch off time adjusted with Pn.17 is started, the switching condition
„11“ OHI-warning is set and the adjusted response to the warning message is executed.
After expiration of the switch-off time (0...120 s) the error E.OHI is triggered (also see
„Digital Outputs“).

OHI stopping mode (Pn.16) The response to the warning signal is defined with Pn.16. Depending on the selected
setting an error/status message E.OHI or A.OHI is ouput. After a cooling phase the
inverter status changes from E.OHI to E.nOHI or in case of warning from A.OHI to
A.nOHI and can then be reset.

Pn.16 Response Description

0...5 as at Pn.3 as at Pn.3
The prewarning changes into an error. The drive remains
in the error status until a reset signal is detected.
6 warning signal only No effect on the drive. Error is being ignored. Switching
at dig. output condition do.0...7 Value „11“ is set.

7 warning signal Function disabled; interior temperature is not

disabled evaluated.

E.Set stopping mode (Pn.18) This parameter determines the response to a set selection error. The possible
reactions correspond to the reactions of Pn3. Depending on the selected setting an
error/status message E.Set or A.Set is output.

Software limit switch error This parameter determines the response to a software limit switch error. The possible
response (Pn.66) reactions correspond to the reactions of Pn3. Depending on the selected setting and
the rotation direction an error/status message E.SLF/A.SLF or E.SLr/A.SLr is output.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 7 12 05.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Protective Functions Functional Description

6.7.7 Quick Stop The function Quick Stop is triggered through malfunctions (abnormal stopping) or by
the control word (sy.50 Bit 8). It is defined by the following parameters.
(Pn.58...60)

Quick Stop / Mode (Pn.58) The Quick Stop mode determines the basic operating mode of the function.

Pn.58 Description
Bit 0 Control mode
0 Control via ramp generator (default)
1 Control via differential controller
Bit 1 Actual value for differential controller
0 Apparent current (default)
2 Active current
Bit 2 Behavious at standstill after activation by control word (sy.50)
0 Modulation off
4 Holding torque

Quick Stop / Level (Pn.59) The Fast Stop level determines the setpoint value for the differential control. The 6
(F5-G) adjustable value of 10...200% refers to a rated inverter current (In.1).

Quick Stop / Ramp time Depending on the adjustment of the control mode in Pn.58 the ramp time or the time
(Pn.60) constant of the differential controller is adjusted here within the range of 0...300.00 s
(default 2.00 s). The ramp time refers to 100 Hz / 1000 rpm (depending on ud.2).

Quick Stop / Torque limit Adjustment of the torque limit during fast stop in the range of 0...10000 Nm. Pn.61 is
(Pn.61) (F5-M/S) limited to dr.15 (max. torque FI) and dr.33 (three-phase motor) (dr.15 > dr.33 > cS.19).

Setting of the max. torque at field weakening speed (dr.18) during quick stop in the
Quick stop / max. torque at range 0...10000,00 Nm (also see chap. 6.6.4).
corner speed (Pn.67) (F5-M/S)

Regulation by ramp generator

Function description F5-G Quick stop with time delay stop (LD(U)-Stop) onto the minimum output value (op.36 /
op.37). At abnormal stopping with holding torque the modulation remains switched
on, otherwise it is switched off (also at quick stop by control word sy.50 Bit 8).

Regulation by differential controller

Quick stop with time delay stop (LD(U)-Stop) onto the minimum output value (op.36 /
op.37) with variable step size (see below). At abnormal stopping with holding torque
the modulation remains switched on, otherwise it is switched off.
The differential controller changes the adjusted step size (from pn.60), if the actual
value is larger than the setpoint value:

100 Hz
Adjusted step size = ————–
ramp time

Setpoint value - Actual value

Step size = adjusted step size * (1 + —————————————— )
Inverter rated current

Name: Basis Datum Kapitel Abschnitt Seite

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 13
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 05.02.03 6 7 13
Functional Description Protective Functions

Function description F5-M/S At quick stop the motor is decelerated with the adjusted ramp time (pn.60) with LD(U)-
Stop or at the torque limit (pn.61) to 0 rpm .
In case of abnormal stopping with holding torque the modulation remains active,
otherwise it is switched off (also at quick stop via control word sy. 50 bit 8).

Used Parameters
R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

Pn.3 0403h ✔ - - 0 6 1 0 -

Pn.4 0404h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 64 64 => I3

Pn.5 0405h ✔ - - 0 6 1 6 -

Pn.6 0406h ✔ - - 0: oFF 10,00 s 0,01 s 0: oFF -

Pn.7 0407h ✔ - - 0 6 1 6 -

Pn.8 0408h ✔ - - 0 6 1 6 -

Pn.9 0409h ✔ - - 0% 100 % 1% 80 % -

Pn.10 040Ah ✔ - - 0 6 1 6 -

Pn.11 040Bh ✔ - - 0 °C 90 °C 1 °C 70 °C -

Pn.12 040Ch ✔ - - 0 7 1 6 -
Pn.13 040Dh ✔ - - 0 120 s 1s 10 s -

Pn.14 040Eh ✔ - - 0 6 1 6 -

Pn.15 040Fh ✔ - - 0% 100 % 1% 100 % only for F5-S

Pn.16 0410h ✔ - - 0 7 1 7 -

Pn.17 0411h ✔ - - 0s 120 s 1s 0s -

Pn.18 0412h ✔ - - 0 6 1 0 -

Pn.58 043Ah ✔ - ✔ 0 3 1 0 only for F5-G

Pn.59 043bh ✔ - - 0% 200 % 1% 200 % only for F5-G

Pn.60 043Ch ✔ - - 0,00 s 300,00 s 0,01 s 2,00 s -

Pn.61 043Dh ✔ - - 0,00 Nm 10000,00 Nm 0,01 Nm Adaption -

Pn.62 043Eh ✔ - - 0 °C 200 °C 1 °C 100 °C -

Pn.66 0442h ✔ - - 0 6 1 6 -

Pn.67 0443h ✔ ✔ - 0 Nm 10000,00 Nm 0,01 Nm Adapt. -

Pn.68 0444h ✔ - - 0,00 s 100,00 s 0,01 s 0,00 s -

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 7 14 05.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Protective Functions Functional Description

6.7.8 Motor Protection The motor protective function protects the connected motor against thermal
Mode desctruction caused by high currents. The function corresponds largely to mechanical
motor protective components, additionally the influence of the motor speed on the
Description for F5-B, F5-G cooling of the motor is taken into consideration. The load of the motor is calculated
and F5-M from the measured apparent current (ru.15) and the adjusted rated motor current
(dr.12).
For motors with separately driven fan or at rated frequency of a self-ventilated motor
following tripping times (VDE 0660, Part 104) apply:

1,2 • In ⇒ 2 hours
1,5 • In ⇒ 2 minutes
2 • In ⇒ 1 minute
8 • In ⇒ 5 seconds

Fig. 6.7.8.a Motor protection mode

fr.8
Parameter set selection Motor set assignemet dr.11 Electronic motor protection
ru.15 Apparent current
see Chapt. 6.8 0 Counter 0 0 Separate cooling
1 Counter 1 1 Self-cooling 6
dr.12 Motor protect. rated current 2 Counter 2
0.1…460.0 A 3 Counter 3
Pn.14 Motor protect. function response
4 Counter 4
0...6 (see Chapt. 6.7.6)
5 Counter 5
6 Counter 6
7 Counter 7

Motor set assignment fr.8 If several motors are operated on one inverter, each motor can be individually protected
by selecting different counters (0...7).

Example:- a different counter is assigned to each motor

1. Motor 2. Motor 3. Motor

⇓ ⇓ ⇓
Counter 0 Counter 1 Counter 2

- this counter is now adjusted in all parameter sets of the corresponding

motor

Counter 0 = Value „0“ Counter 1 = Value „1“ Counter 2 = Value „2“

⇓ ⇓ ⇓ ⇓ ⇓ ⇓
Set 1 Set 5 Set 0 Set 2 Set 6 Set 3
adjust ⇓ ⇓ ⇓
following 0.fr.8 = 0 2.fr.8 = 1 3.fr.8 = 2
values: 1.fr.8 = 0 6.fr.8 = 2
5.fr.8 = 0
The counter works only in the active set with the measured value. In all inactive sets
it is counted down. If one counter exceeds the limit, the response adjusted in Pn.14 is
triggered.

Name: Basis Datum Kapitel Abschnitt Seite

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 15
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 05.02.03 6 7 15
Functional Description Protective Functions

Motor protection mode The cooling mode of the motor is adjusted with these programmable parameters.
(dr.11)
Value Function
0 Separate cooling (default)
1 Self-cooling

Motor protection / rated This parameter specifies for each set the rated current (= 100% utilization) for the
current (dr.12) motor protective function. The motor protection-load is calculated as follows:

Inverter Apparent current(ru.15)

Motor protection-load =
Motor protection rated current (dr.12)

OH2 stopping mode (Pn.14) This parameter determines the behaviour of the drive when the motor protective
function responses. The function is described in Chapter 6.7.6.

Fig. 6.7.8.b Tripping times for F5-B, F5-G and F5-M

Tripping time
120 min f = 0 Hz f ≥ Rated motor frequency or
forced-ventilated motor

For self-ventilated motors the

tripping times decrease with the 60 min
frequency of the motor (see picture).
The motor protective function acts in-
tegrating, i.e. times with overload on
the motor are added, times with 30 min
underload are substracted. After
triggering the motor protective
function, the new tripping time is
reduced to 1/4 of the specified value,
2 min
if the motor has not been operated
for an appropriate time with
1 min
underload.
30 sec 120
5 sec
% Motor current
50 100 150 200 400 600 800

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 7 16 05.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Protective Functions Functional Description

Description for F5-S The internal overload counter counts downwards (100 % to o % in 5 s) with overload
factors < 300 %. Above 300 % it is counted upwards according to following
characteristic.
The tripping time is 200...500 ms; at overload factors above 500 % it is always 200
ms. If an error is triggered, it can be reset immediately. However, in this case the
tripping time can be very short, since the counter decrements only slowly.

Fig. 6.7.8.c Tripping time for F5-S

t [s]
0,5

0,4 Imax/In = 8
dr.34 = 0,5 s
dr.35 = 0,4 s
Imax/In = 8
dr.34 = 0,5 s
0,3 dr.35 = 0,4 s

Imax/In = 8
dr.34 = 0,5 s
Imax/In = 5 dr.35 = 0,2 s
dr.34 = 0,5 s
dr.35 = 0,2 s
0,2

6
0,1 Is/Id
3,0 4,0 5,0 6,0 7,0 8,0

Calculation of continuous n
Id = (In - Id0) * — + Id0 Id: continuous current
current nn Id0: continuous standstill current (dr.28)
In: rated motor current (dr.23)
n: actual speed
nn: rated motor speed (dr.24)

Calculation of maximum Mmax Imax: maximum current

current Imax = In * ———
Mn In: rated motor current (dr.23)
Mmax: maximum torque (dr.33, limited to
dr.15)
Mn: rated motor torque (dr.27)

Motor protective function With Pn.15 a level of 0...100 % of the final counter value can be adjusted. On reaching
level (Pn.15) the adjusted level, the switching condition „OH2-warning“ (also see „Digital Outputs“)
is set. Pn.14 determines the response to the warning level.

Motor protective function Pn.14 specifies the performance of the drive on activation of the motor protective function.
response (Pn.14) The function is descrived in Chapter 6.7.6.

Motor protective time at This parameter displays the tripping time at a ratio of apparent current to continuous
300 % Id (dr.34) current (Is/Id) of 300 % (adjustable with V2.5 and upwards).

Motor protective time at Imax This parameter displays the tripping time at apparent current = maximum current (Is =
(dr.35) Imax) (adjustable with V2.5 and upwards).

Motor protection recovery The time, that must expire after triggering an OH2-error, before the error can be reset,
time (dr.36) is adjusted in dr.36.

Name: Basis Datum Kapitel Abschnitt Seite

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 17
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 05.02.03 6 7 17
Functional Description Protective Functions

External error control The KEB COMBIVERT provides another possibilitiy to protect the motor by connecting
procedure an external temperature monitoring. Following components can be connected to
terminals T1/T2:

T1 T1
T2 T2

Thermo contact Temperature sensor (PTC)

(NC contact) 1650Ω...4kΩ tripping resistance
750Ω...1650Ω reset resistance

dOH stopping mode (Pn.12) With these two parameters the behaviour of the terminals T1/T2 is determined. The
dOH delay time (Pn.13) function is described in Chapter 6.7.6.

Used Parameters

R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

fr. 8 0908h ✔ ✔ - 0 7 1 0 not at F5-S

Pn.12 040Ch ✔ - - 0 7 1 7 -

Pn.13 040Dh ✔ - - 0 120 s 1s 0s -

Pn.14 040Eh ✔ - - 0 6 1 6 -

Pn.15 040Fh ✔ - - 0% 100 % 1% 100 % only at F5-S

dr.11 060Bh ✔ ✔ - 0 1 1 1 not at F5-S

dr.12 060Ch ✔ ✔ - 0,0 710,0A 0,1A LTK not at F5-S

dr.34 0622 ✔ - - 0,1 s 10,0 s 0,1 s 0,5 s only at F5-S

dr.35 0623 ✔ - - 0,1 s 10,0 s 0,1 s 0,2 s only at F5-S

dr.36 0624 ✔ - - 0,1 s 10,0 s 0,1 s 5,0 s only at F5-S

ru.15 020Fh - - - 0,0 A 6553,5 A 0,1 A - -

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 7 18 05.02.03 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Protective Functions Functional Description

6.7.9 GTR7-Control The GTR7 (brake transistor) serves for the control of the brake resistor.
(not at F5-B) As a standard the GTR7 is switched in dependence on the DC-link voltage, in order to
discharge fed-back energy. The switching behaviour of the GTR7 can be altered with
the parameters Pn.64 and Pn.65. In the following some applications are specified, at
which the factory setting should be modified.

Output filter Output filters, with the contained capacities and inductivities, form an oscillatory circuit
with the motor, thus the drive also operates as generator.

Synchronous motors Synchronous motors operate as generator even if the modulation is switched off. .

Especially at low-load systems voltages can be induced, which can lead to the
destruction of the inverter if no attention is paid to it.

Special functions (Pn.65 Bit 0) The energy fed into the intermediate circuit is transferred over the GTR7 to the brake
resistor. However, as a standard the GTR7 only operates if the inverter modulates.
Generally drives should always be decelerated in a controlled manner.
With parameter Pn.65 the switching behaviour of the GTR7 can be adjusted as follows:

6
Pn.65 Switching behaviour GTR7
0 not in status „LS“ (default)
1 also switches at „LS“

Input selection GTR7 (Pn.64) With Pn.64 an input can be defined for the activation of the GTR7. In this case the
GTR7 switches independent of the inverter status and the DC-link voltage as soon as
the input is active.
Exception: On opening the control release (noP) the inverter must switch off the GTR7
for safety reasons.
Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal
0 1 ST (Prog. input „Control release/Reset“) X2A.16
1 2 RST (Prog. input „Reset“) X2A.17
2 4 F (Prog. input „Forward“) X2A.14
3 8 R (Prog. Input „Reverse“) X2A.15
4 16 I1 (Prog. Input 1) X2A.10
5 32 I2 (Prog. Input 2) X2A.11
6 64 I3 (Prog. input 3) X2A.12
7 128 I4 (Prog. input 4) X2A.13
8 256 IA (Internal input A) none
9 512 IB (Internal input B) none
10 1024 IC (Internal input C) none
11 2048 ID (Internal input D) none

Parallel connnection of In a DC-interconnection of inverters the occurring braking energy can be distributed
inverters (DC- onto different inverters with brake resistor. With Pn.64 an input at the corresponding
interconnection) inverter can be defined over which the activation of the GTRs is synchronized.

Used Parameters
R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

Pn.64 0440h ✔ - - 0 4095 1 0 -

Pn.65 0441h ✔ - - 0 7 1 0 -
Name: Basis Datum Kapitel Abschnitt Seite
© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 19
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 05.02.03 6 7 19
Functional Description Protective Functions

6.7.10 Special Here functions are summarised which affect the behaviour of the inverter in certain
Functions operating cases.

(not at F5-B)

Special Functions (Pn.65) Bit Value Meaning

0 Switching behaviour GTR7 (see Chapter 6.7.9 „GTR-control“)

0 GTR7 does not switch in the status „LS“ (default)

1 GTR7 switches dependent on the level also at „LS“

1 This bit determines the error-/warning message, that is triggered at the

switching of an external error input (Pn.4).

0 Pn.4 is selection for external error-/warning message. The response to

this message (A.EF/E.EF) is defined with Pn.3.

1 Pn.4 is selection for error undervoltage (E.UP). Pn.3 has no function in

this case.

2 Status, if the power circuit is not ready (no_PU). This setting applies to
the output switching conditions do.0...7 = 4...6 and the ERROR-bit in
the status word (sy.44/sy.51 Bit 1).

0 State „no_PU“ is an Error

1 State „no_PU“ is an Error

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware
6.1 Operating and Applicance
Date
4. Operation
6.2 Analog In- and Outputs
6.3 Digital In- and Outputs

5. Parameter 6.4 Set Value and Ramp

Adjustment
6.5 Voltage-/Frequency
Characteristic (U/f)
6. Functions Adjustment
6.6 Motor Data Adjustment
6.7 Protective Functions 6.8.1 Not programmable
7. Start-up
Parameters ............................. 3
6.8 Parameter Sets 6.8.2 Security-Parameters ............... 3
6.9 Special Functions 6.8.3 System-Parameters ................ 3
6.8.4 Indirect and Direct
8. Special Operation 6.10 Encoder Interface Set Addressing ....................... 3
6.8.5 Copying of Parameter Sets via
6.11 SMM, Posi, Synchron, CTM
Keyboard ................................ 4
6.12 Technology Control 6.8.6 Copying of Parameter Sets via
9. Error Assistance
Bus ......................................... 4
6.13 CP-Parameter Definition 6.8.7 Parameter Set Selection ........ 5
6.8.8 Locking of Parameter Sets ..... 8
6.8.9 Parameter Set ON and OFF
10. Project Planning
Delay ...................................... 8
6.8.10 Used Parameters .................... 9

11. Networks

12. Annex

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

6.8 Parameter Sets The KEB COMBIVERT contains 8 parameter sets (0...7), i.e. all programmable
parameters are available 8times in the inverter and independent of each other they
can be assigned with different values. As a lot of parameters in the parameter sets
contain the same value, it would be relatively complicated to change every parameter
in each set individually. In this section it is described, how one copies whole parameter
sets, locks them, selects them and reinitializes the inverter.

6.8.1 Not Certain parameters are not programmable as their value must be the same in all sets
(e.g. Bus address or Baud rate). In order to recognize these parameters immediately,
Programmable the parameter identification is missing in the parameter set number. The same value
Parameters always applies to all not programmable parameters independent of the selected
parameter set!

6.8.1 Not programmable parameters

Sy-Parameter uF.8/12-15/18 (uF.9 bei F5-S)
ru-Parameter ud.1-17 (alle bei F5-S)
Ec-Parameter Fr.2-4/7/9/11 (Fr.10 bei F5-S)
AA-Parameter An.0-4/10-14/20-24/41-56
di-Parameter LE.16-26
In-Parameter (Ausnahme: In.25) cn.3/11-13 6
dr-Parameter (nicht bei F5-S) dS.0-1 (nur F5-S)
oP.19/20/50/53-62 PS.2-4/10-27/29-31
Pn.0-18/23/27/29/44-60/62-66

6.8.2 Security-Parame- The Security parameters contain the Baud rate, inverter address, hours-meter, control
ters type, serial-/customer number, trimming values and error diagnosis. They are not
overwritten while copying parameter sets from the default set.

6.8.2 Security-Parameters
Sy.2/3/6/7/11
ru.40/41
ud.1/2
Fr.1
In.10-16/24-31

6.8.3 System-Parame- The System parameters contain the motor and encoder data.
ters
6.8.3 System-Parameters
dr-Parameter Pn.61/67
cS.0-19-22 dS.0-1/13
Ec.1-7/11-27/36-38 Fr.10

6.8.4 Indirect and During indirect set addressing the parameter values are indicated and edited to the
Direct Set adjustment of the set indicator (Fr.9). The direct set addressing enables the display or
writing of a parameter value independent of the set indicator directly into one or
Addressing several parameter sets. The direct set programming is only possible with Bus operation.

© KEB Antriebstechnik,2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

3
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 05.02.03 6 8 3
Functional Description Parameter Sets

6.8.5 Copying of Para- Adjust target set Adjust source set

meter Sets via A✳ Fr· 1 ini_A
Keyboard (Fr.1) 0✳ Fr· 1 ini_S
▲ 1✳ Fr· 1 dEF_A ▲
DOWN DOWN
2✳ Fr· 1 Changeover to source dEF_S
➱ ➱
3✳ Fr· 1 with Funct. 0
4✳ Fr· 1 1
UP UP
▼ 5✳ Fr· 1 2 ▼
6✳ Fr· 1 3
7✳ Fr· 1 4
5
6
7

With the keys UP/DOWN and at The source set is adjusted with the keys
flashing point the target set is adju- UP/DOWN. The copying process is started
sted in addition to the parameter set with „Enter“. Copying is only possible with
number. The active (A) parameter set opened control release or error, otherwise
must not be adjusted as target set „I_oPE“ appears in the display (invalid
while copying. If the target set is > 0, operation).
only the programmable parameters After copying „PASS“ appears in the display
are overwritten! and could be erase by „ENTER“.

6.8.6 Copying of Para- In the case of indirect set addressing at Bus operation two parameters are responsible
meter Sets via for the copying of parameter sets. Fr.9 defines the target set. Fr.1 defines the source
parameter set and starts the copying process. Parameter Fr.9 is not visible via
Bus (Fr.1, Fr.9)
keyboard. In the case of direct set programming the source set (Fr.1) is copied into
the selected parameter sets. The following copying actions can be practised:

By loading the factory setting Target Set Source Set Action

all definitions defined by the 0...7 0...7 All programmable parameters (System parameters too)
mechanical engineer are of the source set are copied into the target set.
reset! This can comprise the 0 -1: dEF_S Default values are copied into all parameters of set 0
terminal assignment, set (with the exception of System and Security parameters).
changeover or operating states. 1...7 -1: dEF_S Default values are copied into all programmable
Before loading the default set it parameters of the target set (with the exception of Sy-
is to be ensured that no stem and Security parameters).
unintended operating states all -2: dEF_A Default values are copied into all parameters of all sets
occur. (with the exception of System and Security parameters).
0 -3: ini_S Default values are copied into all parameters of set 0
(with the exception of Security parameters).
1...7 -3: ini_S Default values are copied into all programmable
parameters of the target set (with the exception of
Security parameters).
all -4: ini_A Default values are copied into all parameters of all sets
(with the exception of Security parameters).

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

6.8.7 Parameter Set

Selection

Fig. 6.8.7 Principle of parameter set selection

22 21 20 765 4 3 2 1 765 4 3 2 1
digital
set selection terminal strip terminal strip Sy.50 with
Fr.4 via terminal strip
deactivated input coded input coded control word
keyboard / bus binary coded
always set 0 activ ST>RST...>ID ID>IC...>ST (only bus)

2 3
1 4
0 5 Attention! The valency at
Fr.2 Fr.2 = 2...4 is generally ID >
IC > ...>ST. The succession
Parameter set 0...7 describes at the inputs refers 6
to the priority.

Fr.3 Parameter set lock Is yes Error message

Set 0...7 (Value 0...255) selected set E.SEt
locked?

Actual Parameter set

Fr.2 Source parameter set As shown in Fig. 6.8.7, with Fr.2 it is defined whether the parameter set selection is
enabled or disabled via keyboard/Bus (Fr.4), the terminal strip or via control word
(SY.50). The selection is activated with „Enter“.

Fr.2 Function
0 Set selection deactivated; set 0 always active
1 Set selection via keyboard/Bus with Fr.4
2 Set selection binary-coded via terminal strip
3 Set selection input-coded via terminal strip
Priority: ST>RST>R>F>I1>I2>I3>I4>IA>IB>IC>ID
4 Set selection input-coded via terminal strip
Priority: ID>IC>IB>IA>I4>I3>I2>I1>R>F>RST>ST
5 Set selection via control word SY.50

Fr.4 Adjustment parameter set This parameter can be written by Bus as well as by keyboard. The desired parameter
set (0...7) is preadjusted directly as value and activated with „Enter“.

© KEB Antriebstechnik,2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

5
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 05.02.03 6 8 5
Functional Description Parameter Sets

Fr.7 Parameter set / The adjustment via terminal strip can be made binary-coded or input-coded. The
Input selection inputs are defined with parameter Fr.7.

Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal

0 1 1) ST (Prog. input „Control release/Reset“) X2A.16
1 2 RST (Prog. input „Reset“) X2A.17
2 4 F (Prog. input „Vorwärts“) X2A.14
3 8 R (Prog. input „Rückwärts“) X2A.15
4 16 I1 (Prog. input 1) X2A.10
5 32 I2 (Prog. input 2) X2A.11
6 64 I3 (Prog. input 3) X2A.12
7 128 I4 (Prog. input 4) X2A.13
8 256 IA (Internal input A) none
9 512 IB (Internal input B) none
10 1024 IC (Internal input C) none
11 2048 ID (Internal input D) none

1)
The input ST is occupied by hardware means with the function „Control release“.
Further functions can be adjusted only „additionally“.

Example For input-coded set selection (Fr.2=3) I1, I2 and F are defined for set selection. In this
case F = set1; I1 = set2 and I2 = set3 would be acticated as the valence is (I2>I1>F).
If I1 and I2 are triggered simulateously the inverter switches into set2 since the priority
is F>I1>I2 at Fr.2.

Binary-coded set selection With binary-coded set selection

- maximally 3 of the internal or external inputs may be programmed to set selection
(23=8 sets) to avoid set selection errors.
- the valence of the inputs programmed for set selection rises
(ID>IC>IB>IA>I4>I3>I2>I1>R>F>RST>ST)
Example 1: With 3 inputs (F, I1 and I4) set 0...7 shall be selected

1.) Adjust parameter Fr. 7 to value „148“

2.) Adjust Fr.2 to value „2“ (set selection binary-coded via terminal strip)
Fig. 6.8.7.b Binary-coded parameter set selection

I4 I1 F Input
I4
2² 21 20 Set
0 0 0 0
I1
0 0 1 1
0 2 0 2 F
0 2 1 3
4 0 0 4
4 0 1 5 Set 7
4 2 0 6 Set 6
4 2 1 7 Set 5
Set 4
Set 3
Set 2
Set 1
Set 0 t

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Input-coded set selection With input-coded set selection

- maximally 7 of the internal or external inputs may be programmed to set selection
(0...7 sets) to avoid set selection errors.
- the lowest of the selected inputs has priority at Fr.2 = „3“
(ST>RST>R>F>I1>I2>I3>I4>IA>IB>IC>ID)
- the highest of the selected inputs has priority at Fr.2 = „4“
(ID>IC>IB>IA>I4>I3>I2>I1>R>F>RST>ST)

Example1: With 5 inputs (I1, I2, I4, IB and ID) set 0...5 shall be selected.
1.) Adjust parameter Fr. 7 to value „2736“
2.) Adjust Fr.2 to value „3“ (set selection input-coded via terminal strip)

Fig. 6.8.7.c Input-coded parameter set selection (Fr.2=3)

ID IB I4 I2 I1 Set Set ID
Fr.2 = 3 4 6
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IB
0 0 0 0 1 1 1
0 0 0 2 0 2 2
I4
0 0 3 0 0 3 3
0 4 0 0 0 4 4
5 0 0 0 0 5 5 I2
5 0 3 0 0 3 5
5 0 3 0 1 1 5 I1

Set 5
Set 4
Set 3
Set 2
Set 1
Set 0

Reset set input selection (Fr.11) This parameter defines an input, with which one can switch independently of the
current parameter set in to parameter set 0 (see table at Fr.7). This function is only
activ at Fr.2 = 0...4.
– with static input assignment the inverter remains in set 0 as long as the input is
set.
– with edge-triggered inputs set 0 is always activated with the 1st edge. With the
2nd edge the set activated by the other inputs is selected again.

© KEB Antriebstechnik,2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

7
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 05.02.03 6 8 7
Functional Description Parameter Sets

6.8.8 Locking of Para- Parameter set, that shall not and must not be selected, can be locked with Fr.3. If one
meter Sets of the locked sets is selected, the inverter switches off with set selection error (E.SEt).

Fr.3 Parameter set lock Value Locked set Example

1 0 -
2 1 -
4 2 4
8 3 -
16 4 -
32 5 32
64 6 -
128 7 -
Set 2 and Set 5 locked Sum 36

6.8.9 Parameter Set With these parameters the time is adjusted,

ON/Off Delay
- with which the activation of a new set is delayed (Fr.5)
(Fr.5, Fr.6) - with which the deactivation of an old set is delayed (Fr.6)

In the case of set changeover the OFF time of the old set and ON time of the new set
are added up.

Fig. 6.8.9 ON and OFF-delay

Set 3
Set 2
Current set
Example Set 1
on off Set 0
1 5 6
Set Fr.5 Fr.6
Set 3 2
0 0s 0s
1 2s 0s Set 2 3
Adjusted set
2 0s 1s Set 1 4
3 2s 2s Set 0
1: ON delay for set 3 of 2s
2: OFF delay for set 3 of 2s
3: OFF delay for set 2 of 1s +
ON delay for set 1 of 2 s
4: immediate changeover as no delay is adjusted
5: OFF delay for set 2 of 1s +
ON delay for set 3 of 2s
6: OFF delay for set 3 of 2s

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

6.8.10 Used Parameters

R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

Fr.1 0901h ✔ ✔ ✔ -4 7 1 0 -

Fr.2 0902h ✔ - ✔ 0 5 1 0 -

Fr.3 0903h ✔ - ✔ 0 255 1 0 -

Fr.4 0904h ✔ - ✔ 0 7 1 0 -

Fr.5 0905h ✔ ✔ - 0 32.00 s 0.01 s 0 -

Fr.6 0906h ✔ ✔ - 0 32.00 s 0.01 s 0 -

Fr.7 0907h ✔ - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

Fr.9 0909h ✔ - - -1 7 1 0 -1: activ set (only via bus)

Fr.11 090Bh ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

© KEB Antriebstechnik,2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

9
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 05.02.03 6 8 9
Functional Description Parameter Sets

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware
6.1 Operating and Applicance
Date
4. Operation
6.2 Analog In- and Outputs
6.3 Digital In- and Outputs

5. Parameter 6.4 Set Value and Ramp

Adjustment
6.5 Voltage-/Frequency
Characteristic (U/f)
6. Functions Adjustment
6.6 Motor Data Adjustment
6.9.1 DC-Braking............................. 3
7. Start-up 6.7 Protective Functions 6.9.2 Energy Saving Function ......... 5
6.9.3 Motor Potentiometer ............... 7
6.8 Parameter Sets 6.9.4 Timer and Counter ................ 11
6.9 Special Functions 6.9.5 Brake Control ........................ 15
8. Special Operation 6.9.6 Power-Off Function ............... 19
6.10 Encoder Interface 6.9.7 Wobbel Function ................... 27
6.11 SMM, Posi, Synchron 6.9.8 Diameter Correction .............. 29
6.9.9 Positioning Function ............. 31
9. Error Assistance 6.12 Technology Control 6.9.10 Analog setting of parameter
values ................................... 34
6.13 CP-Parameter Definition

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

6.9 Special The following section should facilitate the adjustment and programming of special
functions.
Functions
6.9.1 DC-Braking During the DC-braking the motor is not decelerated over the ramp. The fast deceleration
is done with DC-voltage, that is given onto the motor winding.
(only F5-B, F5-G and Between the activation and the triggering of DC-braking a time constant called Base-
F5-M if cS.0=0) Block time (bbl) of 150…5000 ms (depending on the power circuit) is necessary. It
serves as protection of the power modules during the motor de-excitation time.
With Pn.28 one adjusts through what the DC-brake is triggered. According to the
adjusted mode one can preset with Pn.32 the frequency/speed from which the DC-
brake is triggered. Pn.30 defines the braking time. The maximum braking voltage is
adjusted with Pn.31. The brake controllers are dimensioned 1:1 of inverter to motor,
thus the maximum braking voltage must be reduced in the case of deviating
dimensioning to prevent the overheating of the motor. At large ratings the maximum
braking voltage can lead to overcurrent errors (OC). In that case reduce it with Pn31.
Pn.29 is bit-coded and defines the inputs which trigger DC-braking.

Fig. 6.9.1 Principle of DC-brake

6
Pn.28 DC-Braking/Activation
0 DC-braking not activated
Pn.30 DC-brake/ time
1 DC-braking after reaching 0Hz/rpm and
missing rotation setting; max. for the Pn.32 DC-brake Start value
adjusted DC-braking time Pn.30 (indepen-
dent of actual frequency/spped) or until Set brake time = Pn.30
the next setting of rotation direction.
2 DC-braking as soon as rotation direction Pn.30 · factual
Act.brake time=
ru.3 Actual frequency / speed is missing; braking time is dependent on reference value 1)
actual frequency / speed
3 DC-braking as soon as rotation direction Pn.30 · Pn.32
changes; braking time is dependent on Act.brake time=
actual frequency/speed reference value 1)

4 DC-braking as soon as rotation setting is

missing and the actual frequency/speed
falls below the adjusted level in Pn.32; 1) Reference value:
braking time is dependent on Pn.32
100/200/400 Hz
5 DC-braking as soon as the actual fre-
Pn.32 DC-brake/start value quency/speed falls below the adjusted 1000/2000/4000 rpm
0...400 Hz (default 4Hz) level in Pn.32; braking time is dependent depending on ud.2
onPn.32
0...4000 rpm (default 120 rpm) 6 DC-braking as soon as setpoint value
ru.1 falls below the adjusted level in Pn.32;
braking time is dependent on actual
ru.1 Setpoint display frequency/speed
7 DC-braking as soon as an input
programmed to DC-braking is active;
braking time is dependent on actual
Pn.29 Input selection/ frequency/speed; restart only after the
input is deactivated.
DC-braking
8 DC-braking as long as an input
0...4095 (default 128) programmed to DC-braking is active.
also see 6.3
„Digital inputs“
9 DC-braking after enabling the modulation
(direction of rotation + control release) for
the time adjusted in Pn.30.

Pn.31 DC-brake/max. voltage

0...25.5% (default 25,5 %)

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

DC Braking / Mode (Pn.28)

Pn.28 = 1 Pn.28 = 2 Pn.28 = 3
F
Rotation direction Rotation direction
R
f, n, U f, n, U
f, n, U

Pn.31
Pn.30 • f / 100
Pn.31 bbl Pn.30 • n /1000
Pn.31 Pn.30 • f / 100 t
Pn.30 Pn.30 • n /1000
t t
bbl

Pn.28 = 4 Pn.28 = 5 Pn.28 = 6

fset
Pn.32
Rotation direction ru.0= fdec; rdec

f, n, U f, n, U f, n, U

Pn.30•Pn.32/1000
Pn.32 Pn.32

Pn.31 Pn.31 Pn.31

Pn.30•Pn.32/100 Pn.30•Pn.32/100 Pn.30 • f / 100
Pn.30•Pn.32/1000 Pn.30•Pn.32/1000 bbl Pn.30 • n /1000
t t t
bbl bbl dLS

Pn.28 = 7 Pn.28 = 8 Pn.28 = 9

Digital input Digital input F or R

f, n, U f, n, U f, n, U

Pn.31 Pn.30 • f / 100 Pn.31 Pn.31

Pn.30 • n /1000
t t Pn.30
t
bbl dLS bbl

Input selection Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal

DC-braking (Pn.29) 0 1 ST (Prog. input „Control release/Reset“) X2A.16
1 2 RST (Prog. input „Reset“) X2A.17
2 4 F (Prog. input „Forward“) X2A.14
3 8 R (Prog. input „Reverse“) X2A.15
4 16 I1 (Prog. input1) X2A.10
5 32 I2 (Prog. input 2) X2A.11
6 64 I3 (Prog. input 3) X2A.12
7 128 I4 (Prog. input 4) X2A.13
8 256 IA (Internal input A) none
9 512 IB (Internal input B) none
10 1024 IC (Internal input C) none
11 2048 ID (Internal input D) none
Used Parameters
PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. RO min max Step default

Pn.28 041Ch - ✔ ✔ 0 9 1 7 -
Pn.29 041Dh - - ✔ 0 4095 1 64 -
Pn.30 041Eh - ✔ - 0.00 100.00 s 0.01 s 10.00 s -
Pn.31 041Fh - ✔ - 0 25.5 % 0.1 % 25.5 % -
Pn.32 0420h - ✔ - 0 400 Hz 0,0125 Hz 4 Hz F5-G/B depending on ud.2
Pn.32 0420h - ✔ - 0 4000 rpm 0,125 rpm 120 rpm F5-M depending on ud.2

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

6.9.2 Energy Saving The energy saving function allows the lowering or raising of the current output voltage.
Function In accordance with the activation conditions defined in uF.6, the voltage valid according
to the V/Hz-characteristic is changed in percent onto the energy saving level (uF.7).
(only F5-B, F5-G and However, the maximal output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage even if
F5-M if cS.0=0) the value is > 100 %. The function is used for example in cyclic executed load/no-load
applications. During the no-load phase the speed is maintained, but energy is saved
as a result of the voltage reduction.

uF.7 Energy saving factor

0.0…130.0 % (default 70 %)

uF.6 Energy saving function / Activation

Bit 0...3 Aktivierung
0 Function off
1 Generally on
uF.8 Input selection 2 When actual = setpoint frequency/speed
Energy saving function 3 Activation through programmable inputs
0...4095 (default 0) 4 Generally at rotation direction forward
also see 6.3 5 Generally at rotation direction reverse
„Digital inputs“ 6 Rotation direction forward and actual = set freq./speed
7 Rotation direction reverse and actual = set freq./speed
6
8...15 reserved
Bit 4...6 Einstellung der Spannungsrampe
Spannungsrampe bei B/C-Steuerung ca. 1 s
Spannungsrampe bei G/M/S-Steuerung ca. 1,6 s
0 Spannungsrampe
16 Spannungsrampe / 2
32 Spannungsrampe / 4
48 Spannungsrampe / 8
64 Spannungsrampe / 16

fact; nact; UA Hysteresis

fset/nset

uF.7

t
Example: uF.6 = 2, uF.7 = 50 %

Used Parameters
PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. RO min max Step default

uF.6 0506h - ✔ - 0 79 1 0 -

uF.7 0507h - ✔ - 0.0 % 130.0 % 1% 70 % -

uF.8 0508h - - ✔ 0 4095 1 128 -

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

6.9.3 Motor Potentiome- This function simulates a mechanic motor potentiometer. Over two inputs the motor
ter Function potentiometer value can be increased or decreased.

Fig. 6.9.3 Motor potentiometer function oP.50 Motor potentiometer / Function

Bit0 Bit1 Meaning
x 0 Set-programmable
x 1 Not set-programmable
0 x No motor poti reset after Power-on
1 x Reset on oP.55 after Power-on

100%
oP.54

oP.55
oP.59 oP.59
0% t
oP.59 oP.59
6

oP.53

-100%
oP.56 Input selection
Increase motor poti value

oP.57 Input selection

Decrease motor poti value

oP.58 Input selection

Reset on oP.55

oP.52 Motor poti / Value

Presetting via parameter ru.37 Display motor poti value 1 0
Aux
±100% -100...0...100 %
(oP.59 is being ignored)
An.53

Rotation direct. Setpoint

+ = forward An54 Target analog
- = reverse Parameter settings

to oP.1 value „6 u. 7“ to oP.0

value „4“ An.56
Bit Value Input Terminal An.55
0 1 ST (Prog. input „Control release/Reset“) X2A.16
1 2 RST (Prog. input „Reset“) X2A.17
2 4 F (Prog. input „forward“) X2A.14
3 8 R (Prog. input „reverse“) X2A.15
4 16 I1 (Prog. input 1) X2A.10 Parameter setting by the
5 32 I2 (Prog. input 2) X2A.11 motorpoti / aux function
6 64 I3 (Prog. input 3) X2A.12
7 128 I4 (Prog. input 4) X2A.13
8 256 IA (Internal input A) none
9 512 IB (Internal input B) none
10 1024 IC (Internal input C) none
see chapter 6.9.10
11 2048 ID (Internal input D) none

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Determine inputs (oP.56...oP58) In the first step 2 inputs must be defined with which the motor potentiometer can be
increased or decreased. For that purpose one input each according to the input table
is assigned to the parameters oP.56 and oP.57. If both inputs are triggered
sumultaneously, the potentiometer values is decreased.

Increase motor poti value Decrease motor poti value

⇓ ⇓
oP.56 oP.57

Another input (oP.58) can be used to reset the motor potentiometer to the adjusted
reset value oP.55.

Input table Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal

0 1 I7/ST (Control release) X2A.16
1 2 I8 Prog. input X2A.17
2 4 I5 Prog. input X2A.14
3 8 I6 Prog. input X2A.15
4 16 I1 Prog. input X2A.10
5 32 I2 Prog. input X2A.11
6 64 I3 Prog. input X2A.12
7 128 I4 Prog. input X2A.13
8 256 IA (Internal input A) none
9 512 IB (Internal input B) none
10 1024 IC (Internal input C) none
11 2048 ID (Internal input D) none

Motor potentiometer/Function The basic working method of the motor potentiometer is defined with oP.50. The
(oP.50) parameter is bit-coded.

Bit oP.50 Motor potentiometer / Function

1 0
x 0 Motor poti is changed in the current set (default)
x 1 Motor poti is changed only in set 0
0 x Motor poti value is maintained after Power-on (default)
1 x Motor poti value is reset to reset value oP.55 after Power-on

Motor potentiometer/Rise time With this parameter a time is defined, which the motor potentiometer needs in order to
(oP.59) run from 0...100 %. The time is adjustable between 0...50000 s.

The correcting range The correcting range is limited by the parameters oP.53 and oP.54 (see Fig. 6.9.3.).
(oP.53, oP.54)

Display of motor potentiometer This parameter shows the current value of the motor potentiometer in percent.
value (ru.37)

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Motor potentiometer value With this parameter a value in percent can be adjusted within the preset limits directly
(oP.52) by operator or bus. The ramp time (oP.59) remains unconsidered at this setting.

Source of Setpoint (oP.0) and In order to preset the setpoint by way of the motor potentiometer, oP.0 (setpoint source)
Direction of rotation (oP.1) must be set to value „4“. The source of rotation direction (oP.1) must be adjusted in
dependence on the setpoint (value „6“ or „7“).
If the motor potentiometer is used as setpoint source, the setpoint is calculated from
this with the respective limits just as with other percental setpoint sources (see Chapter
6.4. „Set Value Adjustment“).

Used Parameters
PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. RO min max Step default

ru.37 0225h - - - -100.00 % 100.00 % 0.01 % - -

oP.0 0300h - ✔ ✔ 0 9 1 0 „4“ for motor potentiometer

oP.1 0301h - ✔ ✔ 0 9 1 2 „6 and 7“ rotation direct. over setpoint 6

oP.50 0332h - - ✔ 0 3 1 0 -

oP.52 0334h - ✔ - -100,00 % 100,00 % 0,01 % 0,00 % -

oP.53 0335h - - - -100,00 % 100,00 % 0,01 % 0,00 % -

oP.54 0336h - - - -100,00 % 100,00 % 0,01 % 100,00 % -

oP.55 0337h - - - -100,00 % 100,00 % 0,01 % 0,00 % -

oP.56 0338h - - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

oP.57 0339h - - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

oP.58 033Ah - - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 -

oP.59 033Bh - - - 0,00 s 50000,00 s 0,01 s 66,00 s -

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 9 10 18.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Special Functions Functional Description

6.9.4 Timer and Two timers are incorporated in the COMBIVERT. As long as one of the adjustable
Counter starting conditions (LE.18/23) or a programmable input (LE.17/22) is set, the timer
counts until reaching the final range value. If one of the reset conditions (LE.20/25) is
fulfilled or one programmable input (LE19/24) is set, the timer jumps back to zero. The
resolution, whether the timer works in seconds or hours, is adjusted with LE.21/26.
The current timer content is displayed in ru.43/44. On reaching an adjustable comparison
level (LE.0...7), the switching condition 37/38 is set. It can be used to set an output.

Fig. 6.9.5 Timer programming

continues to count
no

Is a
I3 Timer counts up to reset condition no yes Switching cond. 37
LE.21 Timer 1 / Mode maximum value if a Timer value > level „Timer 1 > Level A“
of LE.20 or LE.19
condition of LE.18 is fulfilled LE.0...LE.7 ? is being set!
fulfilled?
or an input of LE.17 is set!
ru.43 Current counter content
yes
6
Resetting to zero

continues to count
no

Is a
I4 Timer counts up to reset condition no yes Switching cond. 38
LE.26 Timer 2 / Mode maximum value if a Timer value > level „Timer 2 > Level A“
of LE.25 or LE.24
condition of LE.23 is fulfilled LE.0...LE.7 ? is being set!
fulfilled?
or an input of LE.22 is set!
ru.44 Current counter content
yes
Resetting to zero

Timer / Mode (LE.21/26) LE.21 and LE.26 determine the clock source and the counting direction of timer 1 and
timer 2. Clock source can be the time counter in 0.01 s or h-raster or impulses from an
input. The timer runs generally as long as a starting condition is active. After a reset
the timer starts again at zero. The timer stops at the maximal value of 655.35. Following
clock sources can be selected:

Bit Value Function

0...2 Clock source
0 Time counter 0,01 s (default)
1 Time counter 0,01 hour
Input I3 => Timer 1 2 Edge counter, each edge increases/decreases the counter by 0.01
3 Edge counter, only positive edges increase/decrease the counter by 0.01
Input I4 => Timer 2 4...7 reserviert
3...5 Counting direction
0 Upward
8 The counting direction is dependent on direction of rotation (FOR=upward;
REV=downward)
16 The counting direction is dependent on direction of rotation (REV=upward;
FOR=downward)
The values from Bit 0...2 and 3...5 are to be added up.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Timer / Starting condition From the following table the conditions can be selected at which the timer is started.
(LE.18/23) The individual conditions are OR-operated.

Bit Value Timer / Starting condition

0 1 Modulation on
1 2 Modulation off
2 4 Actual freq. =setpoint freq.

In case of several starting conditions the values are to be added up.

Timer start Input selection Additionally the timer can be activated by one or several inputs. The sum of the
(LE.17/22) valences is to be entered, if the timer shall be started by different inputs. The individual
inputs are OR-operated.

Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal

Current counter content ru.43 / ru.44 displays the actual counter reading dependend of the adjusted clock
(ru.43/44) source (LE.21/26). By writing on ru.43/44 the counter can be set to a value. If the
clock source is changed during the running time the counter content is maintained but
is interpreted according to the new clock source.

Input selection / Timer Reset According to following table the inputs with which the timer is reset can be specified.
(LE.19/24) The individual inputs are OR-operated, i.e. if one of the specified inputs is triggered,
the timer jumps back to zero. If a starting and reset condition are active simultaneously,
reset has prioritiy.

Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 9 12 18.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Special Functions Functional Description

Timer Reset condition According to following table the conditions can be defined under which the timer is
(LE.20/25) reset in addition to the inputs. The individual conditions are OR-operated.

Bit -No. Decimal value Condition

0 1 Modulation on
1 2 Modulation off
2 4 Setpoint frequency = Actual frequency
3 8 Change of parameter set
4 16 Power-On-Reset

Comparison level 0...7 LE.0...LE.7 define the level for the switching conditions 37/38 („timer > level“). If the
(LE.0...LE.7) timer exceeds the adjusted value the switching condition is set. A level in the range of
-10.737.418,24 bis 10.737.418,23 can be adjusted. But only values of 0...655,34 are
sensible for the counter.

Used Parameters 6
PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. RO min max Step default

ru.43 022Bh - - - 0,00 655,35 0,01 0,00 -

ru.44 022Ch - - - 0,00 655,35 0,01 0,00 -

LE.0 0D00h - ✔ - -10737418,24 10737418,23 0,01 0 -

LE.1 0D01h - ✔ - -10737418,24 10737418,23 0,01 0 -

LE.2 0D02h - ✔ - -10737418,24 10737418,23 0,01 0 -

LE.3 0D03h - ✔ - -10737418,24 10737418,23 0,01 0 -

LE.4 0D04h - ✔ - -10737418,24 10737418,23 0,01 0 -

LE.5 0D05h - ✔ - -10737418,24 10737418,23 0,01 0 -

LE.6 0D06h - ✔ - -10737418,24 10737418,23 0,01 0 -

LE.7 0D07h - ✔ - -10737418,24 10737418,23 0,01 0 -

LE.17 0D11h - - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 bitcoded

LE.18 0D12h - - ✔ 0 7 1 0 -

LE.19 0D13h - - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 bitcoded

LE.20 0D14h - - ✔ 0 31 1 16 -

LE.21 0D15h - - - 0 31 1 0 -

LE.22 0D16h - - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 bitcoded

LE.23 0D17h - - ✔ 0 7 1 0 -

LE.24 0D18h - - ✔ 0 4095 1 0 bitcoded

LE.25 0D19h - - ✔ 0 31 1 16 -

LE.26 0D1Ah - - - 0 31 1 0 -

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 9 14 18.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Special Functions Functional Description

6.9.5 Brake Control For applications in the field of lifting and lowering the control of the holding brake can
be taken over by this function. A digital output can be programmed as control signal.
The function is set-programmable.

Mode of functioning As shown in the opposite graphic a

F1>F2
torque in the amount of the power
difference F1-F2 must be built up, so
that F1 does not slump after releasing MH = 0 MH = F1-F2
the brake. We call that holding torque. MH MH
In the case of the slip-affected three-
phase asynchronous machine a
frequency in the direction of the F=F1-F2 F=0
holding torque must be preset.
F2 F1 F2 F1

Fig. 6.9.5.b Principle of brake control

Pn.43 minimum utilization level
0...100 % (default 0 %)
6
Pn.35 Premagnetizing time Pn.36 Brake release time
0...100s (default 1s) 0...100s (default 1s)

Pn.37 Starting value

Hz or rpm

Rotation
enabled Switching condition 18
Pn.34 Brake Control „brake opened“
disabled Pn.39 Brake delay time Pn.40 Brake closing time
Off 0...100s (default 0,25s) see „digital outputs“ 0...100s (default 0,25s)
On; Display boff/bon
On; Display acc, dec, con
Pn.41 Stop value
On; Display boff/bon; phase check Hz or rpm
On; Display acc, dec, con;phase check

Brake control During the start, triggered by switching on the direction of rotation, a holding torque is
built up first. For it a premagnetizing time (Pn.35) and a starting value (Pn.37) are
preset. As a safety function the monitoring of the acceptance of the inverter can now
be adjusted. Before releasing the brake the utilization is compared with the mimimum
utilization level (Pn.43). If the utilization is less than this level or the hardware current
limit is reached, the error E. br is triggered and the brake remains engaged. If the
utilization acceptance is ensured, the signal for releasing the brake is given after the
time has elapsed. For an additional time (Pn.36: brake release time), in which the
brake is mechanically released, the holding frequency is maintained. It then accelerates
to the adjusted setpoint.

Brake release During stopping, triggered by taking away the direction of rotation, the inverter runs
first to the holding frequency (Pn.41). After the brake delay time (Pn.39) the signal for
engaging the brake is given. After expiration of the brake closing time (Pn.40), in
which the brake takes over the utilization, it is decelerated until standstill and the
inverter changes into status LS.

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

6.9.5.c Example: Setpoint direction forward; positive holding frequency

Set frequency set frequency

brake control
real frequency

Stop value
Pn.41
Starting value
Pn.37

Rotation setting
FOR

Inverter state LS boff boff boff facc fcon rdec bon bon bon LS
facc fcon fcon fcon fcon fdec

closed
Brake
opened Premagne- Brake Brake Brake
tizing time release delay release
Pn.35 time time time
Pn.36 Pn.39 Pn.40

Mode brake control The function is activated or deactivated with this parameter. In addition the status
(Pn.34) display can be changed over. If the output phase monitoring is activated, each output
phase is checked before acceleration to the starting value. If one phase is missing or
in case of wrong wiring in the inverter E.br is triggered. Pn.34 is set-programmable.

Value Function
0 Function deactivated (default)
1 Brake control active, display boff/bon
2 Brake control active, display acc/dec/con
1 Brake control active, display boff/bon, with phase monitoring
2 Brake control active, display acc/dec/con, with phase monitoring

The status display during the holding phases depends on the setting of the mode for
the brake control (see Fig. 6.9.5.c).
At - Pn.34 =1/3 the status boff (release brake) or bon (engage brake) is displayed.
- Pn.34 = 2/4 the normal ramp status is displayed.

In addition to it a digital output (switching condition 18) is to be programmed for the

control (see Chapter 6.3).

Minimal utilization level For the monitoring of the utilization acceptance through the inverter a minimal utilization
Error message E. br level can be adjusted in this parameter. When the brake shall be released during the
(Pn.43) start, the utilization may not be less than the adjusted level. Otherwise the error E.br
is triggered. Reaching the hardware current limit the error E.br is triggered too. The
monitoring is deactivated when Pn.43 is set to 0.
Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis
© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 9 16 18.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Special Functions Functional Description

Start value (Pn.37) The adjustable start/stop value stands in direct connection with the necessary holding
Stop value (Pn.41) torque. The preadjustment, according to following formula, is valid for rated motor
torques:
(no-load motor speed - rated motor speed) x rated motor frequency
Start-/Stop value=
no-load motor speed

(1500rpm - 1420rpm ) x 50Hz

Example: = 2,67 Hz
1500rpm

The direction into which the holding torque shall take effect is determined by the sign.
The parameters are set-programmable.

At using the brake control the direction of rotation (oP.1) may not be set to „7“, because
then no Low-Speed-Signal (LS) is output.

6
Used Parameters
PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. RO min max Step default

Pn.34 0422h - ✔ ✔ 0 4 1 0 -

Pn.35 0423h - ✔ - 0,00 s 100,00 s 0,01 s 0,25 s -

Pn.36 0424h - ✔ - 0,00 s 100,00 s 0,01 s 0,25 s -

Pn.37 0425h - ✔ - -20 Hz 20 Hz 0,0125 Hz 0 Hz F5-G/B depending on ud.2

0425h - ✔ - -600 rpm 600 rpm 0,125 rpm 0 Hz F5-M/S depending on ud.2
Pn.39 0427h - ✔ - 0,00 s 100,00 s 0,01 s 0,25 s -

Pn.40 0428h - ✔ - 0,00 s 100,00 s 0,01 s 0,25 s -

Pn.41 0429h - ✔ - -20 Hz 20 Hz 0,0125 Hz 0 Hz F5-G/B depending on ud.2

0429h - ✔ - -600 rpm 600 rpm 0,125 rpm 0 Hz F5-M/S depending on ud.2

Pn.43 042Bh - ✔ - 0 100 % 1% 0% -

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 9 18 18.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Special Functions Functional Description

6.9.6 Power-Off Function It is the task of the Power-Off function to ensure a controlled deceleration of the
drive until standstill in case of undervoltage (e.g. due to power failure). The kinetic
energy of the rotating drive is used to support the inverter DC-link voltage. As a result
the inverter remains in operation and can decelerate the drive in a controlled manner.
Especially in the case of parallel running drives (e.g. textile machines) the uncontrolled
running down of the motors and the consequences resulting from it (thread breakage)
can be avoided.
The parameter Power-Off-Mode (Pn.44) switches on the function and determines the
basic behaviour:

Power-Off Mode (Pn.44) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Value Function
Switch on/off of Power-Off
x x x x x x x x 0 0 off
x x x x x x x x 1 1 on
Power-Off / start voltage
x x x x x x x 0 x 0 Automatic determination of start voltage
x x x x x x x 1 x 2 Adjustment of start voltage with Pn.45
Determination of starting jump
x x x x x x 0 x x 0 From the slip 6
x x x x x x 1 x x 4 From the utilization
Behaviour of drive at min. output
x x x x 0 0 x x x 0 Status Poff, modulation on, reset required
x x x x 0 1 x x x 8 as above, but restart after network return (Pn.52)
x x x x 0 0 x x x 16 Status PLS, modulation on, reset required
x x x x 1 1 x x x 24 reserved
reserved
x x x 0 x x x x x 0 reserved
x x x 1 x x x x x 32 reserved
Selection of setpoint
x 0 0 x x x x x x 0 Current voltage
x 0 1 x x x x x x 64 DC-voltage (Pn.50)
x 1 0 x x x x x x 128 actual voltage, if actual frequency is > Pn.48
x 1 1 x x x x x x 192 Braking torque (Pn.47)
DC-link voltage stabilization during Power-Off
0 x x x x x x x x 0 Switched on
1 x x x x x x x x 256 Switched off

Switch on Power-Off The Power-Off function is switched on/off with Bit 0 of Pn.44. Parameter Pn.44 is an
(Pn.44 Bit 0) Enter-parameter.

Tripping of Power-Off The Power-Off function starts when the DC-link voltage drops below a certain value,
the start voltage. The start voltage can be set automatically or manually depending
on Pn.44 Bit 1.

Fig. 6.9.6.a Starting the Power-Off function

ru.68 Rated DC voltage display

DC-link voltage real value
Auto-DC link voltage set
value measured at Pn.44 Bit 1 starting voltage
Pn.46 Auto-start
Power-on voltage 50...90% 0 auto detect starting
(default 80%) voltage -
Starting power off if
Pn.45 starting voltage 2 setting starting voltage by + real value < set value
200...800 V Pn.45

© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page

Rated DC voltage (ru.68) Die Zwischenkreisspannung wird immer beim Einschalten des Leistungsteils oder
nach E.UP gemessen und in ru.68 angezeigt.
Start voltage (Pn.45) With manual adjustment the starting voltage can be preset with Pn.45 in the range of
200...800 volt. For a secure range the adjusted starting voltage must be at least 50 V
over the UP-threshold (UP: 400V-class=240V; 200V-class=216V DC).

Auto-Start voltage (Pn.46) With automatic starting voltage the DC-link voltage is measured at „Power-On“ and is
displayed in ru.68. The actual starting voltage is determined by Pn.46, which adjusts
the starting voltage in percent in the range of 50...90 % of the measured value. The
default setting is 80%.
If the DC-link actual voltage value drops below the starting voltage, adjusted
automatically or manually, the Power-Off function is started.

Fig. 6.9.6.b Frequency jump for generatoric operation at the 1. cycle

CS.1 Act. value source Pn.56 Jump factor

0...800%

channel 1 0: Encoder CH1

channel 2 1: Encoder CH2 Frequency jump

Pn.44 Bit 2
2: calculated actual
Starting jump
value
Slip calcullation by the active current
0: Active current Iw

Motor data
F5-B/C
Slip calculation 1: Load Is
Load

Frequency jump for First of all the drive must be brought into generatoric operation to enable the feed back
generatoric operation of energy into the intermediate circuit. This is achieved by making a frequency jump,
so that the speed of the drive is larger than the output rotating field speed of the
inverter.

Actual value source (CS.1) With the actual value source it is defined whether the Power-Off works as slip control
(at F5-B/C always (with speed detection on channel 1 or 2 value „0“ of „1“) or as active current control
active current control) (without speed detection value „2“). Normally this parameter is adusted at the setup of
the speed control (see Chapter 6.11) and should not be changed here.

Starting jump (Pn.44 Bit 2) The parameter Pn.44 Bit2 determines, whether the starting jump is calculated from the
slip (active current) or from the utilization. This setting has no effect on slip regulation.
The standard setting is from slip, but in the case of high harmonic content of the output
Enter motor data into current it can lead to false values. In that case the starting jump must be determined
dr-parameters! from the utilization. To get proper values enter motor data into
dr-parameters first.

Jump factor (Pn.56) By means of the jump factor the automatically determined starting jump can be adapted
to the respective application.
In case the jump factor is too small, the inverter trips to UP!
In case the jump factor is too high, the inverter runs into the hardware current limitation.
The control cannot work correctly, thus causing a wrong calculation of the active
current!
Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis
© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 9 20 18.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Special Functions Functional Description

Bild 6.9.6.c Power off controller

Actual
current-set
value ramp
CS.1 Ac. value source
HSR 2: Act. current set
Pn.47 Braking torque value F5-B/C
(calculated)
0,1: Slip controller
Slip limit (Encoder
interface) Pn.44 Bit 6,7 act. current/
Set value selection slip act. value

Pn.44 Bit 6,7 3: Braking torque act. Current/

DC link act. value
Set value selection (Act. current / Slip controller
fout slip controlling)
no Voltage set DC link
> 2: dep. of fout
Pn.48 value ramp controller
yes + -
- + Pn.53: KP
Pn.50 Volt. set value 1: Volt. set value < 3: DC link
Pn.54: KI
controller Pn.55: KD
Pn.44 Bit 1 Pn.51: KP
Auto. start volt. 0 Pn.57: KI
0: Starting voltage
Pn.45 Start. voltage 1

6
Power off controller In Fig. 6.9.3 the different controls (DC-link voltage, active current and slip control) as
well as the setpoint and actual value sources are represented. The parameter CS.1 is
normally defined by the encoder (see Chapter 6.11) and should not be changed here.

Starting voltage (Pn.45) The starting voltage is used as setpoint value source, if the adjustment is Pn.44 Bit 1
= „1“ and Bit 6-7 = „0“. The starting voltage can be preset wiithin the range of
200...800 volt .

Auto starting voltage (Pn.46) The Auto starting voltage is used as setpoint value source, if the adjustment is Pn.44
Bit 1 = „0“ und Bit 6-7 = „0“. With automatic starting voltage the DC-link voltage is
measured at „Power-On“ and is displayed in ru.68. The auto starting voltage is
determined by Pn.46, which adjusts the measured voltage in percent in the range of
50...90 % (default 80 %) of the measured value.

Braking torque (Pn.47) Serves for the adjustment of the braking torque in the range of 0.1...100.0 %, if the
drive must be stopped as quickly as possible in case of power failure. For this setting
to become effective, Pn.44 Bit 6 and 7 must be set to „3“. In this case the DC-link
control is disabled, i.e. it is a pure active current/slip control. The braking torque can
be preset within the range of 0,1...100,0 %. Depending on CS.1 the active current
control or the slip control works.

Setpoint DC-link voltage (Pn.50) The voltage setpoint value is used as setpoint value source, if the adjustment is Pn.44
Bit 6-7 = „1“. If Bit 6-7 are adjusted to „2“, the voltage setpoint value takes effect only
below the restart value (Pn.48), so that the drive still has enough energy for braking
when reaching the minimum output value. On reaching the restart value the starting
voltage is increased over a ramp to the voltage setpoint value.
The setpoint DC-link voltage is adjusted with Pn.50 in the range of 200...800 V. This is
the value to be regulated to. To ensure a safe operation the internal value is limited
down. The value of the DC-link voltage in normal operation plus approx. 50 V adjusts
itself as minimum value. If a braking resistor is connected, the adjusted value may
not lie above the threshold of the braking resistor, else the controller cannot work
(threshold 200V-class: 380V; 400V-class: 740V).

KP (UZK) (Pn.51) In order to better adapt the drive individually to the application, the proportional factor
KI (UZK) (Pn.57) of the DC-link voltage controller can be adjusted with Pn.51 and the integral factor
with Pn.57 (not at F5-B/C). In most cases the default setting will achieve sufficient
results. But if it comes to overshoots or if the motor looses synchronism the value
must be reduced.

Power off KP (Pn.53)

Power off KI (Pn.54) Pn.53 to Pn.55 are the control parameters of the active current control and the slip
Power off KD (Pn.55) control. The active current control is active at C2.1 = 2 (actual value = calculated
value), the slip control is active at CS.1 = 0 or 1 (actual value = measured value of
channel 1 or 2).

At the active current control (without speed control) a D-part in the control has a
positive effect. Pn.55 should have approx. 10-times the value of Pn.53.
Since the hardware current limit should not be reached with active current control, the
setpoint value is limited internally which can lead to oscillations. In that case the
setpoint value can be reduced, which leads to a prolongation of the delay.
If the voltage stabilisation is switched on (Pn.44 Bit 8 = „1“) and uf.9 = rated voltage,
the voltage is not so high and the deceleration becomes more uniform.
At the slip control (with speed detection) the D-part is unfavorable. Pn.55 should be
set on 0.

Fig. 6.9.6.d Behaviour at power recovery

no Pn.44 Bit 3...4
power recovery fout > fmin
no behaviour at power recovery
yes no
yes yes
fout > fmin fout > fmin 0 PLS
2 POFF
Fast stop 1
Pn.44 Bit 3...4
Set value
no
ja Restart
Starting voltage 0 fout > Pn.48 Pn.52 restart delay

Braking torque Pn.47 3 Linear lowering from f < Pn.48

increased voltage setpoint

(Pn.50) 1 Pn.50 increased voltage setpoint

increased voltage setpoint no

if fout < Pn.48 yes
2 fout > Pn.48

Behaviour at power recovery The following parameters effect the behaviour of the inverter if the system voltage returns
during the Power-Off-function

Restart value Dependent on the application the restart makes may only be sensible up to a certain
(Pn.48) value. This restart value is adusted in Pn.48.
Dependent on the setpoint value source (Pn.44 Bit 6-7) following conditions occur:
1. Regulation of the starting voltage (Pn.44 Bit 6-7 = 0):
If the output value is larger than the restart value, the restart is carried out upon
power recovery. The output value is kept constant during the restart delay (Pn.52).

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Afterwards it is accelerated to the current setpoint value. Below the restart value
it is delayed in case of power recovery with the fast-stop-function (DEC ramp at
F5-B/C).

2. Regulation onto the voltage setpoint, it the output value is smaller than the restart
value (Pn.44 Bit 6+7 = 2):
As long as the oputput frequency and/or the actual speed is larger than the
restart value, the inverter behaves as described under Point 1. Below the restart
value the voltage setpoint value of Pn.50 is increased and with active current
control (without speed detection) the control parameters of the active current
control are reduced linearly with the output value.

3. Regulation onto the voltage setpoint Pn.50 or braking torque Pn.47 (Pn.44 Bit 6+7 =
1 or 3):
The control parameters of the active current control (without speed detection)
are reduced below the restart value linearly with the output value.

Restart at minimum Output 6

Bit 3 and 4 of Pn.44 determine the behaviour of the drive upon attaining the minimum
value output value.
(Pn.44 Bit 3, 4) • Bit 3 = „0“ and Bit 4 = „0“; the inverter modulates independent of a set direction
of rotation with the adjusted boost and is in status „POFF“ (Caution: Motor
heating). A reset is necessary for the restart.
• Bit 3 = „1“ and Bit 4 = „0“; the inverter modulates independent of a set direction
of rotation with the adjusted boost and is in status „POFF“. After expiration of
the restart delay Pn.52 (if adjusted) the inverter restarts automatically.
• Bit 3 = „0“ and Bit 4 = „1“; the inverter switches off the modulation and is in
status „PLS“. A reset is necessary for the restart.

Restart delay (Pn.52) The restart delay is the time during which the output value is kept constant after power
recovery, if a restart is allowed. It is adjustable within the range of 0...100 s (Default
0 s). After expiration of the time it is accelerated again onto the current setpoint value.

Examples To better understand the correlation, the operating modes are explained according to
the control types in the following section.

Funcion description F5-G If the Power-Off-function is switched on (Pn.44 Bit 0 =1), it becomes active if the DC-
link voltage drops below the starting voltage value. In the first cycle the frequency jump
is given which shall put the drive into no-load running. Afterwards it is regulated onto
the DC-link voltage or only onto the active current respectively slip depending on the
setpoint value source. The changeover between active current control (without speed
detection) and slip control (with speed detection) takes place over cs.1. At cs.1 = 2
(actual value = calculated value) the active current control is active, at cs.1 = 0 or 1
the slip control is active.

Power loss ride-through Set value source

Starting voltage (Pn.44 Bit 6-7 = Mode 0) or setpoint DC-link voltage Pn.50, if output
value < restart value Pn.48 (Pn.44 Bit 6-7 = Mode 2)

In this mode the motor shall be operated almost in no-load operation and shall feed

back only the energy which the inverter requires for operation. The starting voltage is at
the same time the setpoint value for the DC-link control. The control value is the setpoint
value of the slip control.

Restart at power recovery

In mode 0 the power recovery is constantly detected and in mode 2 up to reaching the
restart threshold. An immediate restart upon power recovery is possible.
After detecting the power recovery the restart delay (Pn.52) runs down and the drive
accelerates to the current setpoint value.

Behaviour below the restart threshold

• Setpoint value = starting voltage (Pn.44 Bit 6-7 = 0):
An immediate restart is not executed below the restart threshold (Pn.48). The
drive decelerates with the fast-stop function (Pn.58..60) and then behaves
according to the adjustment in Pn.44 Bit 3-4.

• Increase voltage setpoint value (Pn.44 Bit 6-7 = 2):

In order to have more energy to slow down the flywheel masses when the minimum
output value is reached, the voltage setpoint value can be raised to the voltage
setpoint value Pn.50 (Pn.44 Bit 6-7 = 2) should it fall below the restart threshold.
In this case the control remains active with the increased setpoint value. At
small speeds the drive supplies no more energy. For operation without speed
detection the control must be very smooth in this range to prevent stalling.
Below the restart value the control parameters of the active current control are
lowered linearly with the output frequency.

Emergency stop with braking Set value source:

module Braking torque Pn.47 (Pn.44 Bit 6-7 = 3)

In this mode the drive is to be stopped as fast as possible. As the refed energy can be
very high, a braking resistor is necessary.
The DC-link voltage controller is not active. The drive decelerates with the quick-stop
function Pn.60..61 (see Chapt. 6.7.7) and behaves then in accordance with the setting
in Pn.44 Bit 3-4.

At small speeds the drive supplies no more energy. For operation without speed
detection (active current control) the control must be very smooth in this range to
prevent stalling. It is possible to adjust the restart value (Pn.48). Below the restart
value the control parameters of the active current control are lowered linearly with the
output frequency.

Emergency stop without braking Set value source:

module Increased voltage setpoint value Pn.50 (Pn.44 Bit 6-7 = 1)

In some cases one can do without a braking module with the Emergency-Stop function,
if the losses in the motor are very high at high DC-link voltage.
The voltage stabilisation should be switched off in this case. This can be done with
Pn.44 Bit 8 = 1 during Power-Off.
The DC-link voltage control is active. It is always decelerated onto the minimum output
value. Accordingly the performance results from the adjustment of Pn.44 Bit 3-4.

At small speeds the drive supplies no more energy. For operation without speed
detection the control must be very smooth in this range to prevent stalling. It is possible
to adjust the restart value (Pn.48). Below the restart value the control parameters of
Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis
© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
6 9 24 18.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5 All rights reserved
Special Functions Functional Description

the active current control are lowered linearly with the output frequency.

If Power-Off is switched on (Pn.44 Bit 0 = 1), it becomes active when the DC-link
voltage drops below the starting voltage. The behaviour depends on the adjustment of
the setpoint source (Pn.44 Bit 6-7). The behaviour setpoint source = voltage source
Functional sequence F5-M (on.44 Bit 6-7 = 1 or 2) is the same as with voltage setpoint = starting voltage (Pn.44
Bit 6-7 = 0). .

For F5-M only the parameters Pn.44..46, Pn.48, Pn.51, Pn.52 and Pn.57 are visible.
In Pn.44 the Bits 2 and 8 are ineffective.
The Power-Off function is switched off in controlled operation (cs.0 Bit 0..2 = 0..3).

Set value source:

Starting voltage (Pn.44 Bit 6-7 = 0)

Bridging of mains gaps In this mode the motor shall be operated almost in no-load operation and only recover
the energy which the inverter requires for the operation. The starting voltage is also
the setpoint value of the DC-link voltage controller. The value of manipulated variable
represents the torque limit of the speed controller.
6
In case of weak supply systems it is recommended to choose the automatic starting
voltage, as in this case the starting voltage value is adapted to slow voltage fluctuations.
In the first cycle the limit of the speed control is adjusted to the measured slip, so that
the drive is put into no-load operation.

Restart at power recovery

Only in this mode the system recovery can be constantly detected. An immediate
restart upon system recovery is possible. After detecting the system recovery the
restart delay (Pn.52) runs and the drive accelerates to the current setpoint.
An immediate restart is not executed below the restart value (Pn.48). The drive
decelerates with the quick-stop function Pn.60..61 (see Chapt. 6.7.7) and behaves
then in accordance with the setting in Pn.44 Bit 3-4.

Set value source:

Braking torque Pn.47 (Pn.44 Bit 6-7 = 3)

Emergency stop with braking In this mode the drive is to be stopped as fast as possible. As the refed energy can be
module very high, a braking resistor is necessary.
The DC-link voltage controller is not active. The drive decelerates with the quick-stop
function Pn.60..61 (see Chapt. 6.7.7) and behaves then in accordance with the setting
in Pn.44 Bit 3-4.

If Power-Off is switched on (Pn.44 Bit 0 = 1) it becomes active when the DC-link

voltage drops below the starting voltage. The drive decelerates with the quick-stop
function Pn.60..61 and behaves then in accordance with the setting in Pn.44 Bit 3-4.
Function description F5-S
For F5-S only the parameters Pn.44..46 and Pn.52 are visible. At Pn.44 only the Bits
0, 1, and 3..4 are active.

Used Parameters
R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

Pn.44 042Ch ✔ - ✔ 0 511 1 0 -

Pn.45 042Dh ✔ - - 200 V 800 V 1V 290/500 V dep. of the voltage class

Pn.46 042Eh ✔ - - 50 % 90 % 1% 80 % -

Pn.47 042Fh ✔ - - 0,0 % 100,0 % 0,1 % 0% only F5-G/B

Pn.48 0430h ✔ - - 0 Hz 400 Hz 0,0125 Hz 0 Hz only F5-G/B

0430h ✔ - - 0 min -1
4000 min -1
0,125 min -1
0 min -1
only F5-M ; dep.on ud.2

Pn.50 0432h ✔ - - 200 V 800 V 1V 290/500 V dep. of the voltage class

Pn.51 0433h ✔ - - 0 32767 1 128 (512) only F5-G; F5-M; (F5-B)

Pn.52 0434h ✔ - - 0,00 s 100,00 s 0,01 s 0,00 s -

Pn.53 0435h ✔ - - 0 32767 1 800 (50) only F5-G; (F5-B)

Pn.54 0436h ✔ - - 0 32767 1 800 (50) only F5-G; (F5-B)

Pn.55 0437h ✔ - - 0 32767 1 0 only F5-G/B

Pn.56 0438h ✔ - - 0% 800 % 1% 100 % only F5-G/B

Pn.57 0439h ✔ - - 0 32767 1 5 only F5-G; F5-M

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

6.9.7 Wobbel Function The wobbel generator enables in period and amplitude changeable sawtooth process
(not at F5-B) of the setpoint value. It is activated with the parameter oP.44 Bit 0...3 = „1“.

6.9.7 Additonal function: Wobbel generator

Ramp output value

Wobbel generator oP.44

oP.47, 48 Bit 0...3
0

1 Setpoint
oP.44
Bit 4...7 2
value
AN1 (ru.28) 0 oP.46
1 Amplitude
AN2 (ru.30)
AN3 (ru.32) 2 Diameter signal
ru.2
6
digital (oP.45) 3

oP.49
Diameter correction

Additional function/ Mode Different functions can be activated with oP.44 Bit 0...3. The value is to be added to
(oP.44 Bit 0...3) Bit 4...7.

oP.44 Bit 0...3 Function

0 no external function activated
1 Wobbel generator acitvated
2 Diameter correction (see Chapt. 6.9.8)
3...15 reserved

Additional function/ Source The input source for the functions is determined with oP.44 Bit 4...7. The value is to be
(oP.44 Bit 4...7) added to Bit 0...3.

oP.44 Bit 4...7 Function

0 Analog input AN1
16 Analog input AN2
32 Analog input AN3
48 Digital presetting with oP.45

Additional function If the value „49“ (sweep function with digital specification) is adjusted in oP.44, the
digital setting (oP.45) sweep amplitude is preset with oP.45 within the range of 0...100 %.

Additional function With oP.46 a time can be preset between 0...20 s, with which the sweep amplitude
acceleration/deceleration rises/falls. The entered value refers to a sweep amplitude of 100 %.
(oP.46)

Wobbel generator With oP.47 the acceleration time and with oP.48 the deceleration is adjusted in each
Acceleration time (oP.47) case within the range of 0...20.00 s. Together the two parameters result in the period
Deceleration time(oP.48) duration of the wobbel period.

6.9.7.b Acceleration and deceleration times of the wobbel generator

fset + [%]

fset

fset - [%]
oP.47 oP.48

Used Parameters
R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

oP.44 032Ch ✔ - ✔ 0 63 1 0 -

oP.45 032Dh ✔ - - 0,00 % 100,00 % 0,01 % 0,00 % -

oP.46 032Eh ✔ - - 0,00 s 20,00 s 0,01 s 10,00 s -

oP.47 032Fh ✔ - - 0,00 s 20,00 s 0,01 s 10,00 s -

oP.48 0330h ✔ - - 0,00 s 20,00 s 0,01 s 10,00 s -

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

6.9.8 Diameter Through the use of the diameter correction the tool path feedrate of a winding product
Correction can be kept constant at changing diameter of the reel bale.

(not at F5-B)
6.9.8 Additional function: Diameter correction

Ramp output value

Wobbel generator oP.44

oP.47, 48 Bit 0...3
0

1
oP.44 Setpoint
Bit 4...7 2 value
AN1 (ru.28) 0 oP.46
1 Amplitude
AN2 (ru.30)
AN3 (ru.32) 2 Diameter signal
ru.2 6
digital (oP.45) 3

oP.49
Diameter correction

Additional function / Mode Different functions can be activated with oP.44 Bit 0...3. The value is to be added to
(oP.44 Bit 0...3) Bit 4...7.

oP.44 Bit 0...3 Function

0 no external function activated
1 Wobbel generator (see Chapter 6.9.7)
2 Diameter correction activated
3...15 reserved

Additional function / Source The input source for the functions is determined with oP.44 Bit 4...7. The value is to be
(oP.44 Bit 4...7) added to Bit 0...3.

oP.44 Bit 4...7 Function

0 Analog input AN1
16 Analog input AN2
32 Analog input AN3
48 Digital presetting with oP.45

Additonal function If the value „50“ (diameter correction with digital specification) is adjusted in oP.44,
digital presetting (oP.45) the diameter signal can be preset with oP.45 within the range of 0...100 %.

Diameter correction dmin/dmax The diameter signal is evaluated within the range of 0% to 100%. Values < 0% are set
(oP.49) to 0%, values > 100% are limited to 100%.
The diameter signal of 0% corresponds to the minimum diameter of the reel bale
(dmin). The output speed of the ramp generator is not changed in this case. A diameter
signal of 100% corresponds to the maximum diameter of the reel bale (dmax). In order
to be able to calculate the speed change the program requires the ratio of minimum to
maximum diameter (dmin/dmax).
The ratio of minimum to maximum diameter (dmin/dmax) is preset by way of oP.49 and
can be adjusted within the range of 0.010...0.990 with a resolution of 0.001.

The corrected output frequency of the ramp generator is determined as follows:

fn_Ramp
fn_presetting = –––––––––––––––––
1+DS·(1/oP.49-1)

fn_Ramp: Output freqency/speed of ramp generator

fn_presetting: Corrected output frequency/speed
DS: Diameter signal 0 - 100% (0 to 1)
oP.49: (dmin/dmax)

Additional function The rate of change of the diameter signal can be limited by a ramp generator. By way
Acceleration/Deceleration of oP.46 the time can be preset within the range of 0.0...20 s, which is required for a
(oP.46) signal difference of 0...100%.

Used Parameters
R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

oP.44 032Ch ✔ - ✔ 0 63 1 0 -

oP.45 032Dh ✔ - - 0,00 % 100,00 % 0,01 % 0,00 % -

oP.46 032Eh ✔ - - 0,00 s 20,00 s 0,01 s 10,00 s -

oP.49 0331h ✔ ✔ - 0,010 0,990 0,001 0,500 -

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

6.9.9 Positioning The positioning function enables the approach of a position with a signal from different
Function frequencies. The positioning procedure is triggered by disabling the direction of rotation
through an external signal (e.g. through set-changeover). The positioning is executed
(only at F5-G/B) correctly only if at triggering the positioning the maximum frequency of the positioning
set is not exceeded and no s-curves are used. During the positioning procedure the
status ‘Positioning’ is displayed (value 83, display ‘POSI’).

Calculation of the frequency- In order to always travel the same distance in the case of different frequencies, the
dependent constant running drive continues to run with constant frequency after starting the positioning until the
time position is reached with the adjusted deceleration. The frequency-dependent constant
running time is calculated as follows:

t_dec
2 f_max²
t_const = ———————— •
Reference frequency
( f_actual
——— - f_actual )

t_const: frequency-dependent constant running time [sec.]

t_dec: adjusted deceleration time [sec.]
Reference frequency: 100Hz / 200Hz / 400Hz (dependent on ud.2)
f_max: maximum frequenz [Hz] 6
f_actual: actual frequency[Hz] on triggering the positioning

Positioning delay (Pn.63) With parameter Pn.63 a shifting of the stop position can be adjusted, which entails an
additional constant running time. Thus the shifting of the initiator can be omitted. The
additional constant running time is also frequency-dependent and is calculated as
follows:
Pn.63 • f_max t_delay: additional constant running time [sec.]
t_delay = —————— Pn.63: positioning / delay [sec.]
f_actual f_max: maximum frequency [Hz]
f_actual: actual frequency [Hz] on triggering the positioning

The parameter is not standardized and can be adjusted within the range of 0.01...327.67 s.
The value -1 switches off the positioning function in the appropriate set.

Pn.63 Function
-0,02 Positioning function switched on; no shifting of the stop function;
set changeover during the positioning possible
-0,01 Positioning function switched off (standard)
0,00...327,67 s Positioning function switched on; positioning delay by the adjusted
value, set changeover during the positioning not possible .

Set activation delay (Fr.5) With the set activation delay (fr.5) and the set deactivation delay (Fr.6) a waiting
Set deactivation delay (Fr.6) period after reaching the position and/or during set changeover can be adjusted.

Used Parameters
PROG. ENTER

Param. Addr. RO min max Step default

Pn.63 043Fh - ✔ ✔ -1 s 326,76 s 0,01 s -0,01 s -0,01 = off; -0,02= abort

Fr.5 0905h - ✔ - 0,00 s 32,00 s 0,01 s 0,00 s -

Fr.6 0906h - ✔ - 0,00 s 32,00 s 0,01 s 0,00 s -

Exsample 1 The drive runs a distance, positions and remains at the stop position for a time. The
new cycle starts.

Download list:

Set Parameter Value Notes

0 Ud01 Password 440
0 Fr01 Copy parameter set -2: def. cust.para all sets

0-1 oP00 Reference source 0: Analog REF

0 oP01 Rotation source 2: F/R, 0-lim. Set 0: running
1 oP01 Rotation source 0: dig., 0-lim. Set 1: positioning
1 oP02 Rotation setting 0: low speed
0-1 oP10 Max. reference forward 70,0000 Hz The max. setpoint value must be the
same in all sets.
0-1 oP28 Acc. time forward 0,01 s
0-1 oP30 Dec. time forward 0,20 s

0 Pn63 Positioning delay -1: off

1 Pn63 Positioning delay 5,00 s Shifting of the stop position

0 Fr02 Parameter set source 3: term. inp. coded ST-I1-ID

0 Fr05 Set activation delay 1,00 s Additonal break at the stop position
1 Fr05 Set activation delay 0,00 s This time must be = 0
0 Fr06 Set deactivation delay 0,00 s This time must be = 0
1 Fr06 Set deactivation delay 2,55 s Break at the stop position
0 Fr07 Para. set input selection 16: I1

0 di11 I1 Function 2048: Set selection initiator signal

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Exsample 2 The drive runs with different speed back and forth and always reverses at the same
points.

Downloadlist:

Set Parameter Value Notes

0 Ud01 Password 440
0 Fr01 Copy parameter set -2: def. cust.para all sets

0-3 oP00 Reference source 0: Analog REF

0-3 oP01 Rotation source 0: dig.(op.2), 0-lim.
0 oP02 Rotation setting 1: forward Set 0: clockwise rotation
1 oP02 Rotation setting 0: low speed Set 1: clockwise rotation positioning
2 oP02 Rotation setting 2: reverse Set 2: counterclockwise rotation
3 oP02 Rotation setting 0: low speed Set 3: counterclockwise positioning
0-3 oP10 Max. reference forward 70,0000 Hz The max. setpoint value must be the
same in all sets.
0-3 oP11 Max. reference reverse -1: = see oP.10 The max. setpoint value can be different
for the direction of rotation.
0-3 oP28 Acc. time forward 0,10 s
6
0-3 oP30 Dec. time forward 0,10 s

0 Pn63 Positioning delay -1: off

1 Pn63 Positioning delay 0,8 s Shifting of the position at clockwise
rotation
2 Pn63 Positioning delay -1: off
3 Pn63 Positioning delay 3,1 s Shifting the position at counterclockwise
rotation

0 Fr02 Parameter set source 2: terminal binary coded

0 Fr05 Set activation delay 0,00 s Additional break between counter-
clockwise and clockwise rotation
1 Fr05 Set activation delay 0,00 s This time must be = 0
2 Fr05 Set activation delay 0,00 s Additional break between clockwise and
counterclockwise rotation
3 Fr05 Set activation delay 0,00 s This time must be = 0
0 Fr06 Set deactivation delay 0,00 s This time must be = 0
1 Fr06 Set deactivation delay 1,00 s Break between clockwise and
counterclockwise rotation
2 Fr06 Set deactivation delay 0,00 s This time must be = 0
3 Fr06 Set deactivation delay 1,00 s Break between counterclockwise and
clockwise rotation
0 Fr07 Para. set input selection 272: I1+IA
0 Fr11 Reset set input selection 0: no input

0 di11 I1 Function 2048: Set sel. Initiator signal

0 di15 IA Function 2048: Set sel. Changeover between clockwise and
counterclockwise rotation

0 do04 Condition 1 0: off Initiator active: -> set 1

1 do04 Condition 1 1: on Positioning completed: -> set 2
2 do04 Condition 1 1: on Initiator active: -> set 3
3 do04 Condition 1 0: off Positioning completed: -> set 0

6.9.10 Analog setting of With this function it is possible to preset parameter values analog. The AUX-function or
parameter values the motor-poti function can be adjusted as source.

Analog parameter setting This parameter determines whether the analog parameter setting occurs via the motor-
mode (An.53) poti or the aux-function.

an.53 Function
0 AUX
1 Motor-poti function

Analog parameter setting The Bus-address of the parameter, that is to be adjusted in analog mode, is adjusted
destination (An.54) here (see Chapter 5). Following parameters can be adjusted:

uF.1 / 7
cn. 4 / 5 / 6
An.32 / 37 / 42 / 48
LE.0 / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7
cS.6 / 9
Ec.4 / 14

In case an invalid parameter address is selected, the message „IdAtA“ (or „data inva-
lid“ at COMBIVIS) is output and the setting is ignored.

Analog parameter setting Defines the parameter value, that adjusts itself at 0 % analog parameter setting. The
Offset (An.55) parameter value must be entered with the internal standardization of the target parameter.

Desired value of target parameter

Value to be adjusted = --------------------------------------------------------
Resolution of target parameter

Analog parameter setting Defines the parameter value, that adjusts itself at 100 % analog parameter setting.
max. Value (An.56) The parameter value must be entered with the internal standardization of the target
parameter.

Analog parameter setting An.57 determines the parameter set in which the selected parameter is changed. If a
set pointer (An.57) programmable parameter is adjusted as target, the adjusted set in An.57 is changed.

An.57 Function
-1 aktive set is changed
0...7 adjusted set is changed

Independent from parameter An.57 a change in set 0 is done always, if a non-

Used Parameters
programmable parameter is adjusted as target.

Parameter Adr. ro prog min max default

[?] Remarks
An.53Analog para. setting mode 0A35 - - yes 0 1 1 0 -
An.54an. para setting destination 0A36 - - yes -1: oFF 7FFFh 0001h -1: oFF -
An.55an. para setting offset 0A37 - - yes -231 231-1 1 0 -
An.56an. para set. max. value 0A38 - - yes -231 231-1 1 0 -
An.57an. para setting set pointer 0A39 - - yes -1 7 1 0 -

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware
6.1 Operating and Applicance
Date
4. Operation
6.2 Analog In- and Outputs
6.3 Digital In- and Outputs

5. Parameter 6.4 Set Value and Ramp

Adjustment
6.5 Voltage-/Frequency
Characteristic (U/f)
6. Functions Adjustment
6.6 Motor Data Adjustment

7. Start-up 6.7 Protective Functions

6.8 Parameter Sets
6.9 Special Functions
6.10.1 Designs .................................. 3
8. Special Operation 6.10 Encoder Interface 6.10.2 Encoder Interface Channel 1 . 4
6.10.3 Encoder Interface Channel 2 . 5
6.11 SMM, Posi, Sync, CTM 6.10.4 Power Supply of Encoder ....... 7
6.12 Technology Control 6.10.5 Selection of Encoder .............. 8
9. Error Assistance 6.10.6 Basic Settings ...................... 10
6.13 CP-Parameter Definition 6.10.7 Additional Parameters .......... 13
6.10.8 Used Parameters ................. 14

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

6.10 Encoder Interface The KEB COMBIVERT F5 supports two from each other separated encoder channels.
Each encoder channel can support following interface dependent on the available
hardware:
(not for B-housing)
6.10.1 Designs Encoder channel 1 (X3A)
• is a 15-pole incremental encoder input for rectangular signals

Encoder channel 2 (X3B) can support following interfaces

• 9-pole incremental encoder input for rectangular singal
• Incremental encoder output
• Incremental encoder In-/Output

Further Interfaces (describes in separate manuals)

• Synchronous serial interface (SSI)
• Tachometer input
• Initiator input
• Hiperface
• Endat
• SinCos
6

6.10.1 Encoder interfaces

No r PC
t
fo

X3B X3A
W
ar
nu
ng
:
Di it b erst als a me
e K etr rom l e ni
ze ehl ist nah

on Ìgt
de 5 m schu
Ein halt tzm

ns in
sc chu sig!

ato .!
F er aB
S lÌs

ren
tl
zu

X3B X3A

6.10.2 Encoder Fig. 6.10.2 Encoder interface channel 1 (X3A)

Interface
Channel 1 5 4 3 2 1
Only when the inverter is
(X3A) 10 9 8 7 6
switched off and the voltage
supply is disconnected may the
TTL incremental encoder input 15 14 13 12 11
plug be pulled out or plugged in!
(default at F5-M)

Pin description
Signal X3A Description

Uvar 11 Supply voltage for encoder

+5,2 V 12 Supply voltage for encoder
0V 13 Reference potential
A 8 Signal input A
_
A 3 Signal input A inverted
B 9 Signal input B
_
B 4 Signal input B inverted
N 15 Reference marking input N
_
N 14 Reference marking input N inverted
Shield Housing Shielding

Inputs The signal and reference marking inputs can be triggered with rectangular pulses.
The signal inputs must generally be connected. The reference marking singals are
only needed for the reference point approach in the positioning operation (F5-M/S.
Following specifications apply to the encoder interface 1 (X3A):

• max. operating frequency of input fG = 300 kHz

• internal terminating resistor Rt = 150 Ω
• 2…5 V high level at rectangular signals

Please contact KEB regarding encoder inputs with HTL-level.

Resolver interface Bild 6.10.2.a Resolver interface channel 1 (X3A)

(default at F5-S)
Only when the inverter is
5 4 3 2 1
switched off and the voltage
10 9 8 7 6
supply is disconnected may
15 14 13 12 11
the plug be pulled out or
plugged in!

Signal X3A KEB servo motor Description

SIN- 3 1 Sinus signal cable inverted
SIN+ 8 10 Sinus signal cable
REF- 5 5 Reference signal inverted
REF+ 10 7 Reference signal
COS- 4 2 Cosinus signal cable inverted
COS+ 9 11 Cosinus signal cable
GND 14 - Shielding of the signal cables
Shield housing housing Shielding of the hole cable

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Bild 6.10.2.b Resolver connector at the KEB servo motor

7 6
8 12
5
9 11

1 10 4
2 3

Bild 6.10.2.c Resolver cable

housing housing Aderfarbe

14 GND
SIN - 1 3 SIN - red
SIN + 10 8 SIN + blue 6
REF - 5 5 REF - yellow
REF + 7 10 REF + green
COS - 2 4 COS - pink
COS +11 9 COS + grey

6.10.3 Encoder Inteface Fig. 6.10.3 Encoder interface channel 2 (X3B)

Channel 2 (X3B)

Only when the inverter is

5 4 3 2 1
switched off and the voltage
supply is disconnected may the
9 8 7 6
plug be pulled out or plugged in!

ec.10 Definition of the Channel 2 can be equipped with different interfaces. To avoid the connection of a
interface wrong encoder, the installed interface is indicated in ec.10.

Incremental encoder input In synchronous operation the second incremental encoder serves as input of the
master drive. A second position encoder can be connected for positioning operation.

Signal X3B Description

Uvar 5 Supply voltage for encoder (see 6.10.2)

+5,2 V 4 Supply voltage for encoder (see 6.10.2)
0V 9 Reference potential
A 1 Signal input A
_
A 6 Signal input A inverted
B 2 Signal input B
_
B 7 Signal input B inverted
N 3 Reference marking input N
_
N 8 Reference marking input N inverted
Shield Housing Shielding

The signal inputs of the second encoder interface support only rectangular signals.

Following specifications apply to the endocer interface 2 (X3B):

• max. operating frequency of input fG = 300 kHz

• internal terminating resistor Rt = 150 Ω
• 2…5 V high level at rectangular signals

Incremental encoder output The incremental encoder output gives out the signals recorded at the encoder interface
1:1 in RS422-specification over the second channel (e.g. master drive in synchronous
operation).

Signal X3B Description

Uvar 5 Supply voltage for encoder (see 6.10.2)

+5,2 V 4 Supply voltage for encoder (see 6.10.2)
0V 9 Reference potential
A 1 Signal output A
_
A 6 Signal output A inverted
B 2 Signal output B
_
B 7 Signal output B inverted
N 3 Reference marking output N
_
N 8 Reference marking output N inverted
Shield Housing Shielding

Operating mode With parameter ec.20 it is defined whether the encoder channel 2 shall work as input
encoder 2 (ec.20) or output. Precondition for that is a built-in switch-selectable encoder interface
(In.5 = 7).
ec.20 Function
0 Incremental encoder input
1 Incremental encoder output

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Geberbetriebsart (Ec.20) Ec.20 defines the function of the encoder interfaces.

Ec.20 Function
Bit 0 channel 2 function
0 Incremental encoder input
1 Incremental encoder output
Bit 1 terminating resistor at channel 2
0 input with terminating resistor
2 input without terminating resistor
Bit 2 channel 1 Incremental encoder alert (encoder cable breakage)
0 alert off
4 alert on (the encoder must support alert function)
Bit 3 channel 2 Incremental encoder alert (encoder cable breakage)
0 alert off
8 alert on (the encoder must support alert function)

6.10.4 Power Supply of Fig. 6.10.4 Power supply

Encoder 6
X3A
Uvar
X2A 5,2V +5,2V
0V

0V 22
X3B
+20...30VDC 21 Uvar
+5,2V
0V

+24VDC 0V

Uvar Uvar is an unstabilized voltage that is provided by the power stage of the KEB
COMBIVERT. Dependent on the size of unit and the load, the voltage amounted to
15... 30 V DC. Uvar is loadable at X3A and X3B with altogether 170 mA. If higher
voltages / currents to supply the encoders are needed then the control must be supplied
with an external voltage.

+5,2 V The +5 V voltage is a stabilized voltage and loadable at X3A and X3B with altogether
500 mA. Since +5.2 V are generated from Uvar, the current from Uvar is reduced
according to following formula:

5,2 V x I+5V
Ivar = 170 mA - –————
Uvar

6.10.5 Selection of Precondition for a good control behaviour of the drive is not least a question of the
Encoder selection and the correct connection of the encoder. This also includes the mechanical
as well as the electrical connection.

Max. operating frequency Depending on the max. operating frequency of the encoder input, the encoder and
(max.sampling frequency) the maximum speed of the drive the line number of the encoder can be selected.

6.9.4 Speed and line number in dependence on the max. operating

frequency of the encoder inputs

10000
Speed n [rpm]

200 kHz
300 kHz

1000
1000 Line number z 10000

The max. signal frequency, which is given out by the encoder, is calculated as follows:

nmax[rpm] x z fmax: max. signal frequency

fmax [kHz] = nmax: max. speed
60000 z: encoder line number

The following condition must be met:

fmax < max. operating frequency of encoder < max. operating frequency of interface

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

6.10.5.a Input signals

TTL-voltage differential levels according

to TIA/EIA-RS422-B

0° 90° 360°

N 6
N

The two, by 90° electrically out of phase signals, A and B as well as their inverted
signals are generally evaluated. The zero track is needed for the reference point
approach in the positioning module (F5-M/S). Zero track (also reference marking
channel) gives out 1 signal per revolution.

Cable length To achieve an unobjectionable function following cable lengths should not be exceeded.
Precondition for it is that the supply voltage at the rotary encoder is within the specified
tolerances.

The encoder lines should not be longer than 50 m. If longer cables are needed,
please contact KEB.

Further information can be taken from the documentation of the respective

manufacturer.

6.10.6 Basic Setting Prior to start-up the inverter must be adapted to the encoder(s) which is/are used.

Encoder interface 1 / 2 Ec.0 displays the installed encoder interface 1; Ec.10 displays the installed encoder
(Ec.0, Ec.10) interface 2. The values correspond to following interfaces:

Value Encoder interface

0 no Interface
1 Incremental encoder input TTL
2 Incremental encoder output 5 V
3 Incremental encoder input and output direct (not divisible by Ec.27;
switchable with Ec.20)
4 Incremental encoder input and output TTL (switchable with Ec.20)
5 Initiator
6 SSI Interface
7 Resolver Interface
8 Tacho
9 Incremental encoder output TTL (from resolver over channel 2)
10 Incremental encoder output TTL
11 Hiperface
12 Incremental encoder input 24 V HTL
13 Incremental encoder input TTL with error detection
14 Sin/cos encoder input
15 Incremental encoder input 24 V HTL with error detection (push-pull)
16 ENDAT
17 Incremental encoder input 24 V HTL with error detection
18 Analog option ±10 V

In case of an invalid encoder indentification the error „E.Hyb“ is indicated and the
measured value in is displayed inverted in ec.0/ec.10.
On changing the encoder interface the error „E.HybC“ is indicated. By writing on
parameter ec.0 or ec.10 the change is confirmed and the default values for the new
interface are loaded.

Adjustment of encoder line With this parameter the encoder line number is adjusted to the connected encoder
number (Ec.1, Ec.11) within a range of 1…16383.
• ec.1 for encoder interface 1
• ec.11 for encoder interface 2

Speed sampling time This parameter defines the time over which the speed average is determined. At that
(Ec.3, Ec.13) the resolution of the speed detection is defined simultaneously.

ec.3 Sampling Speed resolution with the use of an

ec.13 time incremental encoder with 2500 pulses
0 0,5 ms 12 rpm
1 1 ms 6 rpm
2 2 ms 3 rpm
3 4 ms 1,5 rpm (Factory setting)
4 8 ms 0,75 rpm
5 16 ms 0,375 rpm
6 32 ms 0,1875 rpm
7 64 ms 0,09375 rpm
8 128 ms 0,046875 rpm
9 256 ms 0,0234375 rpm

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

When using other line numbers:

Specified speed resolution x 2500
Speed resolution =
Line number

Encoder track change With Ec.6 bit 0...1 a rotation change for encoder input 1 and with Ec.16 a rotation
(Ec.6, Ec.16) change for encoder input 2 can be executed.
With Bit 4 (value 16) a system inverting can be activated. With the system inverting it
is possible to run the motor with positive setting counter-clockwise at the shaft, without
changing the hardware.
Following adjustments are possible:

Value Function
Direction of rotation
0 no change (default)
1 inverted
2 depends on the sign of the actual frequency (initiator)
3 depends on track B (initiator terminal 4)
4-16 reserved
Encoder system
0 no change (default) 6
16 inverted

Multiple evaluation Value Evaluation of the encoder signals

(Ec.7, Ec.17) 0 Single (for initiator: evaluation of positive edges only) (20)
1 2-fold (for initiator: evaluation of positive and negative edge) (21)
2 4-fold (for incremental encoder) (22) default
3 8-fold (23)
4 16-fold (24)
5 32-fold (25)
6 64-fold (26)
...
13 8192-fold (213)

Gear factor Through the gear factors it is possible to evaluate incremental encoders, which are
(Ec.4; Ec.5, Ec.14, Ec.15) not directly mounted onto the motor shaft. The parameters Ec.4 and Ec.5 adjust the
gear factor for encoder channel 1, Ec.14 and Ec.15 for encoder channel 2. The gear
factors are defined as follows:

Motor speed
Gear factor = –––––––––––––––
Gear speed

Ec.4 gear factor numerator 1 -10000...10000

Gear factor 1 = –––––––––––––––––––––––– = –––––––––––––
Ec.5 gear factor denominator 1 1...10000

Ec.14 gear factor numerator 2 -10000...10000

Gear factor 2 = –––––––––––––––––––––––– = –––––––––––––
Ec.15 gear factor denominator 2 1...10000

As additional function it is possible to trigger one of the two numerators with the
function „Analog parameter setting“ (see Chapter 6.9.10).

Simulation mode (Ec.27) With this parameter an encoder simulation can be adjusted.

Bit Value Function

0..1 Acceptance of the values
0 from channel 1
1 from channel 2
2 from current actual value
2..3 Number of increments to be output (at Bit 0..1 = 2)
0 256
4 512
8 1024
12 2048
4...5 Divisor
0 1 (direct)
16 2
32 4

Ec.27 adjusts the mode of the simulation channel. If channel 2 is adjusted with Ec.20
to incremental encoder output, then the mode in CH2 becomes effective with Ec.27
(Ec.27 source => CH2 useless). Otherwise the adjustments refer to a third pure
simulation channel (e.g. channel 2 15-poles).

When adjusting Ec.27 Bit 0...1 = actual value, then channel 2 may not be occupied,
since the internal encoder counter is used for the generation of the zero signal.

Absolute position channel 1/ This parameter exists only at F5-S. The system position of the attached resolver
2 system is adjusted (factory setting).
(Ec.2 / Ec.12) With this parameter it is possible to adjust the controller to a not aligned motor. If the
(only F5-S) system position of the motor is unknown an automatic trimming can carried out.
Before starting with the adjustment, the direction of rotation must be checked. The
speed display (ru.9) must be positive in the case of clockwise rotation by hand. If that
is not the case, the direction of rotation can be exchanged with Ec.6 as described.

• enter motor data

• the connected motor must be able to rotate freely
• open control release
• enter Ec.2/12 = 2206
• close control release

The motor is excited now with its rated current.

If the direction of rotation of the connected motor is not correct or two motor phases
are exchanged, E.EnC is triggered.
For resolver sytems the signal SIN+ and SIN- must be exchanged.
If the system postion displayed in Ec.2/12 no longer changes the alignment is
completed.

• open control release

If motors with aligned encoder systems are used, the value determined by the
automatic alignment can be entered directly in Ec.2/12.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

In order to replace S4-systems by F5-S the following calculation must be carried out:

ec.7 ( S4) * Pole pair number

- Furthermore pay attention to the encoder cable -
- The lower 16 Bit of the result must be entered in Ec.2/12 -

6.10.7 Additional The following parameters are needed only for specific encoder interfaces and are
explained more closely in the appropriate documentation.
Parameters
SSI Multiturn resolution If an SSI-multiturn-absolute value encoder is connected, the number of the bits for
(Ec.21) the multiturn-resolution can be adjusted here (12 Bit).

SSI Clock frequency select The clock frequency of the SSI-encoder is adjusted in Ec.22. Two clock frequencies
(Ec.22) are available 0 : 312,5 kHz or 1 : 156,25 kHz. The smaller clock frequency should
only be adjusted for long cables or in case interferences occur.

SSI Data code (Ec.23) The unit supports two data formats for the SSI-encoders: 6
0 : binary coded 1 : Gray code

Nominal tacho speed (Ec.25) As reference speed the max. tachometer speed is adjusted in Ec.25.

Position channel 1 direct Position value directly from encoder channel 1 / 2 (with complete revolutions).
(Ec.29)
Position channel 2 direct
(Ec.30)

Position Channel 1 (Ec.31) Ec.31 and Ec.32 show the position values of channel 1 and 2 after the gearbox.
Position Channel 2 (Ec.32) With a HARDWARE-RESET at the absolute value encoder only the positions after
decimal point are reset. In order to display the new absolute position in parameter
ec.31/32 a RESET of ec.33/34 must take place.

System offset Channel 1 Formula : ec.33/34 = position value- reference point (ps17)
(Ec.33) ru.54 = reference point (ps.17)
System offset Channel 2
(Ec.34) By writing on this parameter the systems offset is reset.
The actual position (ru.54) is automatically recalculated, except for ps.14 bit0..1 = 3
the mode Store Position Value is selected.

Formula: actual position (ru.54) = position value - system offset (ec.33/34)

Encoder 1 Typ (Ec.36) Ec.36 indicates the type of the first encoder interface.

Encoder 1 Status (Ec.37) Ec.37 indicates the status of the Hiperface.

Encoder 1 r/w (Ec.38) Ec.38 adjusts the performance of the Hiperface.

Encoder 1 over transmission This parameter must be activated at synchronous motor with indirectly mounted
(Ec.39) encoders (e.g. over tooth belts). The gear ratio must be a multiple of the pole pair
number.

6.10.8 Used Parameters

Parameter Addr. min max default [?] Notes

Ec.0 encoder 1 interface 1000 x – x -127 127 1 GBK - GBK=encoder Id
Ec.1 encoder 1 (inc/r) 1001 x – – 1 16383 1 GBK - GBK=encoder Id
Ec.2 Absolute position 1 1002 yes – – 0 65535 1 0 - only F5-S
Ec.3 time 1 for speed calc. 1003 x – – 0 9 1 3 - -
Ec.4 gear 1 numerator 1004 x – – -10000 10000 1 1000 - -
Ec.5 gear 1 determinator 1005 x – – 1 10000 1 1000 - -
Ec.6 enc.1 rotation 1006 x – – 0 23 1 0 - -
Ec.7 enc.1 trigger 1007 x – – 0 13 1 GBK - GBK=encoder Id
Ec.10 encoder 2 interface 100A x – x -127 127 1 GBK - GBK=encoder Id
Ec.11 encoder 2 (inc/r) 100B x – – 1 16383 1 GBK - GBK=encoder Id
Ec.12 Absolute position 2 100C yes – – 0 65535 1 0 - only F5-S
Ec.13 time 2 for speed calc. 100D x – – 0 9 1 3 - -
Ec.14 gear 2 numerator 100E x – – -10000 10000 1 1000 - -
Ec.15 gear 2 determinator 100F x – – 1 10000 1 1000 - -
Ec.16 enc.2 rotation 1010 x – – 0 23 1 0 - -
Ec.17 enc.2 trigger 1011 x – – 0 13 1 2 - GBK=encoder Id
Ec.20 enc.2 operating mode 1014 x – – 0 1 1 GBK - -
Ec.21 SSI multiturn resolution 1015 x – – 0 13 12 1 - -
Ec.22 SSI clock frq. sel. 1016 x – – 0 1 0 1 - -
Ec.23 SSI data code 1017 x – – 0 1 1 1 - -
Ec.25 nominal tacho speed 1019 x – – 1 16000 1500 1 rpm -
Ec.27 operation mode output 101B x – x 0 47 1 0 - -
Ec.29 Position Encoder 1 direct 101D – – – -231 231-1 1 0 Inc -
Ec.30 Position Encoder 2 direct 101E – – – -231 231-1 1 0 Inc -
Ec.31 Absolute position channel 1 101F – – – 0 255 1 0 - -
Ec.32 Absolute position channel 2 1020 – – – 0 255 1 0 - -
Ec.33 System offset channel 1 1021 yes – yes -231 231-1 1 0 Inc only F5-M/S
Ec.34 System offset channel 2 1022 yes – yes -231 231-1 1 0 Inc only F5-M/S
Ec.36 encoder 1 typ 1024 – – – 0 255 1 0 - -
Ec.37 encoder 1 state 1025 – – – 0 255 1 0 - -
Ec.38 encoder 1 r/w 1026 – – – 0 2 1 0 - -
Ec.39 encoder 1 over transmission 1027 – – – 0 1 1 0 - -

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

6.1 Operating and Unit Datas

4. Operation 6.2 Analog In- and Outputs

6.3 Digital In- and Outputs
6.4 Setpoint- and Ramp
5. Parameter Adjustment
6.5 Voltage-/Frequency
Characteristic Adjustment
6. Functions 6.6 Motor Data and Controller
6.7 Protective Functions
6.8 Parameter Sets
7. Start-up
6.9 Special Functions
6.10 Encoder Interface
8. Special Operation 6.11 Posi-/ Synchronous Control 6.11.1 Synchronous Control ............... 3
and Contouring mode 6.11.2 Slave Correction ..................... 4
6.11.3 Position Controller ................... 5
6.12 Technology Controller 6.11.4 Position Display ...................... 5
9. Error Assistance 6.11.5 Reference Point Approach ....... 6
6.13 CP-Parameter Definition 6.11.6 Reference Point Approach
Examples ................................ 7
6.11.7 Posi Control .......................... 12
10. Project Planning 6.11.8 Position sensing .................... 17
6.11.9 Teach mode .......................... 18
6.11.10 Contouring mode (CTM) ........ 19
6.11.11 Used Parameters .................. 20
11. Networks

12. Annex

6.11 Positioning and A synchronization and a positioning module is integrated in the KEB COMBIVERT
F5-M / S. In this modes the defined inputs in PS.1, PS.13, PS.29, PS.36 and PS.37
Synchronous are scanned with a rising edge and a scan time of 250 µs.
Control
6.11.1 Synchronous The synchronous module realizes a multi-motor synchronous control. Several motors
Control can be operated angular-synchronous to a master drive (control drive). The speed
relations are individually adjustable. The control drive must not be controlled. The
synchronous module can only be activated when the inverter is equipped with a se-
cond incremental encoder input.
Posi-/Synchron mode (PS.0) With PS.0 bit 0...2 the synchronous run respectively the positioning operation is selected.

PS.0 Posi/Synchron Mode

Bit 0...2 Activation of Posi or Synchron mode
0 Off; Posi or Synchron mode switched off; position stanstill controller
(PS.6) not active. The drive runs controlled, speed- or torque-controlled
(dependent on SC.0).
1 Synchronous mode
2..4 reserved (off) 6
5 Posi mode
6 Contouring mode
7 Activation by control word
Bit 3...9 Posi mode
for Posi module only (see chapter 6.11.7)
Bit 10 Start synchronous with ramp (oP.28)
0 The synchronizing after Start Synchronous does not take place with the
ramp from oP.28. The start offset (PS.5) defines the increments of the
master, after which master and slave shall run synchronously.
1024 The synchronizing after Start Synchronous takes place according to the
ramp from oP.28. Here PS.5 is the offset from the start input to the
position of the slave. If the start input lies, for example, left to the position
of the slave, a positive offset must be preset.

Further adjustment possibilities of PS.0 for Posi-module only (see Chapter 6.11.7)

Posi-/Synchron input The synchronous control can be activated by way of a programmable input. By activating
selection (PS.2) the synchronous run the master position is set equal to the slave position. The input is
determined with PS.2:

Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal

Master source (PS.1) With PS.1 the encoder channel for master operation is determined.

PS.1 Channel
0 Encoder channel 1
1 Encoder channel 2 (default)

Actual source (cS.1) The source of actual value is determined with cS.1. If the master source is changed to
encoder channel 1, the source of actual value must be changed accordingly to channel
2.

cS.1 Channel
0 Encoder channel 1 (default)
1 Encoder channel 2
2 reserved for F5-G/B

6.11.2 Slave Correction Two parameters are available for the slave correction (angular displacment between
master and slave). The intented slave correction is adjusted in increments under
PS.4. The sign determines the direction of the correction. The actual correction can
then be triggered by a programmable input.

Shifting slave (PS.4) Setting of the slave correction in the range of -2147483648...2147483647 increments.
The correction is executed with the adjusted rampe times. During the slave correction
no changes are taken over into PS.4. The correction is completed if the internal counter
is equal PS.4.

Shifting slave input selection With PS.3 and PS.10 the inputs are defined, with which the slave correction is started.
(PS.3) PS..3 starts the correction according to the direction of rotation specified with PS.4.
Shifting slave invers input PS.10 inverts the direction of rotation.
selection (PS.10)
Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal
0 1 ST (prog. input „control release / reset“) X2A.16
1 2 RST (prog. input „reset“) X2A.17
2 4 F (prog. input „forward“) X2A.14
3 8 R (prog. input „reverse“) X2A.15
4 16 I1 (prog. input 1) X2A.10
5 32 I2 (prog. input 2) X2A.11
6 64 I3 (prog. input 3) X2A.12
7 128 I4 (prog. input 4) X2A.13
8 256 IA (internal input A) none
9 512 IB (internal input B) none
10 1024 IC (internal input C) none
11 2048 ID (internal input D) none
Before the slave correction can be started, the synchronous control must be activated
(see PS.2).

Start offset (PS.5) On activating the synchronous run the slave tries to synchronize the master at the
torque limit. This leads in dependence on the position difference to overshootings.
With PS.5 a synchronization position can be preset in increments, which the master
must cover before it runs angular-synchronous with the slave. If on activating the
synchronous run master and slave speed are within the tolerance preset in LE.16, it is
directly switched into synchronous run. When starting from actual speed = 0 rpm the
slave covers half of the increments of the master (see PS.0 Bit 10).
If synchronous is interrupted by limit switch, ST, error, the synchronizing always takes
place over the ramp times. Even if during synchronous operation the gear factor is
changed or the angular correction is started, the ramp time is active.

Fig. 6.11.2 Synchronization at activating synchronous run

CH Parameter Y-Factor
D
A ru54 Slave position 15000 Inc
B
B ru56 Master position 15000 Inc
C ru02 Ramp output display 200,000 rpm
D ru10 Encoder 2 speed 200,000 rpm

6.11.3 Position Controller 6

KP Posi / Synch (PS.6) With PS.6 the proportional component of the synchronous position controller is adjusted.
At disabled position controller (value 0) the slave runs speed-synchronous.

PS.6 Function
0 Position controller Off
1...32767 Position control with proportional component

Limit for posi/synchron Limiting of control difference at the output of the position controller. The position limit
control (PS.9) can be adjusted within a range of 0...4000 rpm. For a compatibility to earlier units the
preset value is adjusted to 250 rpm.

Gear ratio If a gear ratio is to be created between the master and the slave drive, it is done with
the parameters Ec.4/5 or Ec.14/15 (see Chapter 6.10)

6.11.4 Position Display

Slave position (ru.54) Parameter ru.54 displays the actual slave position in increments.

Master position (ru.56) Parameter ru.56 displays the actual master position in increments. Thereby the master
line number is converted onto the slave line number.

Angular difference (ru.58) The angular difference shows the difference between master and slave position in
increments.

6.11.5 Reference Point Following conditions must be met for a reference point approach:
Approach • connect the limit switches to the inputs clockwise run (F) and counter-
clockwise run (R)
• program an input as reference point approach and connect it (it can serve at
the time as limit switch)
• determine an input for starting the reference point approach

The reference point approach is started with the rising edge at the input „start
reference point approach“. The reference point approach starts with the reference
speed adjusted in PS.21. The preferred direction is determined by the sign.
The drive reverses when it runs onto a limit switch. On reaching the reference point
switch the initiator is cleared with 25 % of the reference speed. Whether the stopping
point is on the left or the right of the reference point switch is defined by PS.14 Bit
3. If PS.14 Bit 2 and Bit are activated, the drive trips to error E.EnC, if no valid zero
impulse has been detected. If Bit 4 is deactivated, the drive turns 2 revolutions
back and forth. If still no valid zero signal is being detected, the error EnC is
triggered, otherwise the drive keeps turning until zero position. If the drive finds no
zero position, the error message E.EnC can be generated with Bit 4.
After completing the reference point approach the actual position is overwritten
with the reference point PS.17 and the switching condition „reference point approach
completed“ (do.0...do.7 value „29“) is set.
The ramps must be adjusted in such a way that the drive comes to a safe stop at
the limit switches or can reverse.

Mode of position reference PS.14 Reference point drive mode

(PS.14)
Bit 0...1 Reference point drive mode
0 No reference point drive
1 The reference point drive can be started only via a digital input. The
input is defined with PS.19.
2 The reference point drive is automatically executed at the first ”Start
Posi“-command.
3 The position value is stored. If it can be ensured that the drive does
not rotate anymore after switching off the inverter, no new reference
point drive is necessary. The drive starts with the stored position
value.
Bit 2 Stop at zero signal; in this bit it is adjusted, whether the drive keeps
on running to the zero point after driving free of the reference point
switch.
0 The drive stops directly after driving free of the reference point switch.
4 The drive keeps on running to the zero point after driving free of the
reference point switch. If no zero signal is detected, an error message
is output dependent on bit 4.
Bit 3 Stop point; this setting is only taken into account if the reference point
switch does not serve at the same time as limit switch. The ramp
times must be selected so that the drive can reverse on the reference
point switch.
0 Stop on the right side of the reference point switch.
8 Stop on the left side of the reference point switch.
Bit 4 Error, if no zero signal is detected.

0 If no zero signal was detected, the drive searches for the zero signal
during two further revolutions. If still no zero signal can be detected,
the inverter signals the error ”E.EnC“.
16 If no zero signal was detected, the inverter immediately signals the
error ”E.EnC“.
Bit 5 Approach position from index 0.
0 No; after the reference point drive the drive stops at the reference
point.
32 Yes; after the reference point drive the position from index 0 is
approached. The setting ”Continue profile = yes“ of index 0 is ignored
(always no), the drive stops at the position.

Bit 6 Manual adjustment of the reference point.

0 No manual adjustment.
64 In the inching mode the drive is driven onto the reference point and
then bit 6 is set. The momentary position is taken over as reference
point. After completed standardization the bit 6 is set again to ”0" and
the output function 29 ”Reference point drive completed“ (see Chapter
6.3) is set. 6
Bit 7 This bit defines, whether the recorded position is valid. With bit 7 the
output function ”Reference point drive takes place“ can be set.
PS. 25 defines the max. speed to reach the position in index 0. Index
0 is not available for further positioning (par example Mode PS.31/25
target speed unequal 0).
0 No
128 With valid position the output function 29 ”Reference point drive
completed“ (see Chapter 6.3) is set.
Bit 8 Checking of zero signal; this function is used for checking the
reference point switch.
0 No checking
256 Yes; after driving free of the reference point switch the path to the
zero signal is checked. If the zero signal is not within a range of ¼ to
¾ revolution the error ”E.EnC“ is triggered..

Reference point setting / This parameter specifies the input, with which the current position is reset to the
Input selection (PS.13) reference point.
If this input is set during an active positioning,

1) the inverter remembers the path still to be travelled.

2) the current position is set onto the reference point position.
3) the inverter continues with the interrupted positioning.

After the positioning is completed the current position is = reference position +

residual distance. This must be especially observed, if the driving referencing (par
example for rotary indexing tables) is to be used, because the remaining distance
is not considered in the following positioning. A consecutive error occurs. This
problem can be resolved only with a special rotary table software.

Reference switch input selection With PS.18 the input for the reference point switch is determined. It can also be
(PS.18) occupied together with a limit switch (see example 1). With PS.19 the input for
Start reference point approach starting the reference point approach is defined.
input selection (PS.19)
Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal
0 1 ST (prog. input „control release / reset“) X2A.16
1 2 RST (prog. input „reset“) X2A.17
2 4 F (prog. input „forward“) X2A.14
3 8 R (prog. input „reverse“) X2A.15
4 16 I1 (prog. input 1) X2A.10
5 32 I2 (prog. input 2) X2A.11
6 64 I3 (prog. input 3) X2A.12
7 128 I4 (prog. input 4) X2A.13
8 256 IA (internal input A) none
9 512 IB (internal input B) none
10 1024 IC (internal input C) none
11 2048 ID (internal input D) none

Reference point (PS.17) With PS.17 an absolute position is adjusted in increments. After completing the
reference point approach this value is accpeted for the current position.

Referenz acc/dec time (PS.20) With PS.20 the acceleration and deceleration times of the reference point drive are
preset within the range of 0...300.00 s vorgegeben.

Reference speed (PS.21) With PS.21 the speed of the reference point drive is preset within the range of
±4000 min-1 (dependent on ud.2). The driving free of the reference switch takes
place with only a quarter of the adjusted speed. The sign determines the preferred
direction.

Hardware limit switch right The inputs for the hardware limit switch are specified in the di-parameters (default
Hardware limit switch left X2A.14 => F and X2A.15 => R). The hardware limit switches are activated with
Pn.7. If the hardware limit switches are activated but no input is defined, an error is
triggered upon selection of the direction of rotation. In order to give security against
cable breakage the limit switches are 0-active.
Only the selected direction of rotation is always evaluated. For this purpose it is
mandatory that the drive runs in the correct sense of rotation and that the limit
switches are not exchanged.

Limit switch left (PS.15) With these parameters the absolute limit positions to the right and the left are
Limit switch right (PS.16) adjusted. Prior to the start of a positioning it is checked whether the target lies
within the permissible range. The software limit switches work like „real“ limit
switches, i.e. the position is monitored in the speed-controlled operation and
synchronous mode. Only the selected direction of rotation is always evaluated.
The activation respectively the behavoiur takes place with parameter Pn.65 (response
software limit switch). The output function „Reference point drive takes place“ is set
at valid actual position and
• after completed reference point drive
• after switch on, if PS.14 Bit 0...1 is = „3“
• after manual setting of the reference position (PS.14 bit 6)
• if PS.14 Bit 7 „current position is valid“ is set

6.11.6 Reference Point One limit switch serves at the same time as reference point switch.
Approach -
Examples
Terminal X2A.14 = limit switch right (di.19 = 32)
Terminal X2A.15 = limit switch left + reference point switch (di.20 = 67108920)
Terminal X2A.10 = start reference point approach (di.11 = 134217728)
Reference speed = -100 rpm with counter-clockwise rotation (PS.21 = -100)

Pic. 6.11.6.a Reference point approach example 1

VRef= -100 rpm Limit switch right

Limit switch left +
Reference switch

Starting position 6
Position after reference point approach
(independent from PS.14 Bit 3)

clear the reference limit

switch with
Start ref.-approach 0.25* PS.21
V
turn back
of zero encoder

1
Signal at X2A.15

0 t

Example 2 With two limit switches and one reference point switch; reference point approach with
approaching the reference mark of the encoder.

• Terminal X2A.14 = Limit switch right (di.19 = 32)

• Terminal X2A.15 = Limit switch left (di.20 = 64)
• Terminal X2A.11 = Reference point switch (di.12 = 67108864)
• Terminal X2A.10 = Start Reference point approach (di.11 = 134217728)
• Reference speed = -100 rpm with counter-clockwise rotation (PS.21=-100)

If the zero impulse is not be approached (PS.14 Bit 2 = off), only the reference point
switch is cleared and the drive is then stopped.

Pic. 6.11.6.b Reference point approach example 2

Position after reference

point approach
PS.14 Bit 3 Vref = -100 rpm
left right
Limit switch left Limit switch right

Output position
X2A.15 X2A.11 X2A.14

Start Clear the reference

ref.-approach limit switch with
0.25* PS.21
turn back of
V
zero encoder

Signal an X2A.11
1

0
t

Example 3 With two limit switches and one reference point switch; approaching of the the reference
point switch against the preferred direction; reference point approach with approaching
the reference mark of the encoder.

• Terminal X2A.14 = Limit switch right (di.19 = 32)

If the zero impulse is not be aprroached (PS.14 Bit 2 = off), only the reference point
switched is cleared and the drive is then stopped.

Pic. 6.11.6.c Reference point approach example 3

Position after reference

Vref = -100 rpm point approach
PS.14 Bit 3 = right
6
Limit switch left Limit switch right

t1 t2

X2A.15 X2A.11 X2A.14

Output position
(t0)
Clear the reference
limit switch with turn back of
0.25* PS.21 zero encoder
Start
ref.-approach
v

Signal at X2A.15
1
0
t

Signal at X2A.11
0
Reaching the reference t
limit switch (t2)

Overtravelling of
reference point switch

6.11.7 Posi Control The Posi Mode incorporates following features:

• 16 positions iIndex 0...15)
• Profile sequence programmable
• absolute or relative positioning
• Hardware- and/or software limit switches

Posi-/Synchron Mode (PS.0) The Posi Mode is adjusted by parameter PS.0 and the basic behaviour is defined.

PS.0 Posi/Synchronous Mode

Bit 0...2 Activation of the Posi or Synchronous Mode
0 Off; Posi or Synchronous Mode switched off; Position standstill controller
(PS.6) not active. The drive runs controlled, speed- or torque-controlled
(depending on CS.0).
1 Synchronous Mode
2..4 reserved (off)
5 Posi Mode
6 Contouring mode
7 Activation by control word
Bit 3 Abort of positioning; this bit defines whether the active positioning can
be interrupted by a new Start-Posi-signal (PS.29).
0 Off; a new Start-Posi-signal is ignored.
8 On; with the Start-Posi-signal the current positioning is aborted and a
new profile with the starting index (PS.28) is started. In case of relative
positioning the position refers to the actual position.
Bit 4 Positioning-/target speed
0 PS.25/PS.25; the maximum positioning speed and the target speed are
preset with PS.25. The positioning speed is determined by the current
index - the target speed always by the subsequent index. The sign for
the target speed is determined from the position values. If the following
position lies in opposite direction, a target speed of 0 min-1 is preset and
after reaching it it is continued with the maximum profile speed of the
subsequent index. If the profile was processed or interrupted, the target
speed is = 0 min-1.
16 PS.31/PS.25; the maximum positioning speed is preset with PS.31
within the range 0...100 % based on oP.10. The positioning speed is
displayed in ru.63 (ru.63 = PS.31 • oP.10 [set] / 100%). The target speed
is determined by the respective index.
Bit 5 Behaviour at abort of positioning – an abort of the positioning can be
effected by opening the control release, by starting the fast stop function
or by error.
0 The current position index (ru.60) is reset onto the starting index
(PS.28), so that a new profile is started with a Start-Posi-command.
32 The interrupted positioning is continued, if the Posi Mode was not
switched off (PS.0) and input PS.2 remains set. This also applies to the
Power-Off-function.
Bit 6 If the drive cannot reach a position within the preset ramp times, the
message ”Position not reachable“ is output.
0 The drive is stopped.
64 A positioning onto the target is tried again.

128 The drive continues the positioning and attempts to approach the
next position. The message ”Position not reachable“ signals, that the
positioning was not successful. With this setting the drive profile can
be checked and, if necessary, adapted.
256 reserved
Bit 9 Start Posi at set change
0 Off
512 On; positioning is started at a set change.
Bit 10 Start synchronous with ramp (oP.28)
0 The synchronizing after Start Synchronous does not take place with
the ramp from oP.28. The start offset (PS.5) defines the number of
increments of the master, after which master and slave shall run
synchronously.
1024 The synchronizing after Start Synchronous takes place according to
the ramp from oP.28. Here PS.5 is the offset from the start input to
the position of the slave. In the case of a positive offset the start
input is thus left from the slave.

Master Source (PS.1) In the Posi Mode PS.1 defines the input for the actual position of the position
Actual Source (cS.1) controller. Parameter cS.1 defines the actual value source for the encoder feedback.

PS.1 Position feedback

0 Encoder channel 1
1 Encoder channel 2 (default)

cS.1 Encoder feedback

0 Encoder channel 1 (default)
1 Encoder channel 2
2 reserved for F5-G/B

In case the feed-back of the controller (cS.1) corresponds to the source adjusted in
parameter PS.1, the gear factor adjusted in parameters ec4/5 for channel 1
respectively ec.14/15 for channel 2 directly affects the position value. That means,
position settings refer to controller, thus in front of the gearbox.
The gear factor for the speed profile is used as pre-control for the position controller
if parameters cS.1 and PS.1 are different. That means, position settings relate to
the position values behind the gear (scaling at output). In both cases the speed
settings refer to the power controller in front of the gear.

Synchronous and positioning Sychron - Mode: cS.1 = ch1, PS.1 = ch2

Posi - Mode: cS.1 = ch1, PS.1 = ch1

A gear factor between Master and Slave drive would have to be adjusted in ch2
under parameter ec.14/15. The line number of the master is rescaled to the line
number of the slave.

Controller Controller
Motor Motor
CH 2 CH 1 CH 2 CH 1
Encoder Encoder

Position reference

Positioning to feedback cS.1 = PS.1

Controller
Motor Gearbox
CH 2 CH 1
* Encoder

Position reference

Positioning to output cS.1 =/ PS.1

Controller
Motor Gearbox
CH 2 CH 1
* *

Position reference

The speed settings refer in both cases to the controller, thus in front of the gearbox.

Positioning to output without Positioning not possible in controlled operation.

feedback • although a controlled operation could be adjusted for this constellation too,
the gear backlash would lead to inevitable oscillations.

The summing-up of the basic The position of S! and S2 in the graphic below, is dependent on the parameters
setting cS.1, PS.1, PS.0, ec.39.

Basically applies:

-speed-controlled open, but feedback always with gear factor = 1

-Posi S1,S2 open
-Posi over output S2 closed, gear factor for the speed precontrol
-Synchronous Mode S2 closed
-ec.39 =1 , S1 closed, gear factor enters into the speed detection

Position detection Evaluation

S1 ec.33

Gear factor
-
ec.29 ec.4

ec.5 ec.31

6
S2 ec.34 ru.54

Gear factor
-
ec.30 ec.14

ec.15 ec.32

Posi/Synch input select (PS.2) If the Posi Mode is selected with PS.0, the posi-module can be activated by setting
the input defined with PS.2.

Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal

Start posi input select (PS.29) With the input defined here the programmed posi profile is started with the index
defined in PS.28 (value table like PS.2).

Define the drive pofile The drive profile for COMBIVERT F5 is defined with the aid of indices. A total of 16
indices (0...15) can be specified. Each index consists of
• the position to be approached
• the speed
• the next index
• the traverse manner (absolute or relative)
• profile processed or continue profile

Index selection (PS.23) The index, to be edited, is selected with this parameter.

Index position (PS.24) In this index the position for the currently edited index is entered. The position can
be preset in the range of -230....230-1. With relative traverse manner the sign
determines the direction of rotation and/or with absolute traverse manner the position
of the reference point. The position settings always relate to the source adjusted
with PS.1.

Index speed (PS.25) Depending on PS.0 bit 4 the positioning-/target speed is entered here. The adjusted
values always refer to the controller. The setting is done in the range of ±4000 min-1
(depending on ud.2).

Next index (PS.26) This parameter defines the next index 0...15 to be processed. At the value -1 the
index from PS.28 is adopted. Depending on PS.27 bit 0 the current profile is then
processed and a new Start-Posi signal is waited for respectively the profile is
processed and it is automatically restarted from the beginning.

Index mode (PS.27) Der Parameter PS.27 legt das Verhalten des aktuellen Index fest.

PS.27 Index / Mode

Bit 0 Continue profile
0 No; if no further index is defined (PS.26 = “-1”), the profile is
processed. If a further index is defined (PS.16 = 0...15), the profile is
interrupted.
1 Yes; the profile is continued with the next index. If PS.26 is = “-1”
(starting index) the profile is restarted without interruption from the
beginning.
Bit 1 Traverse manner
0 Absolute; the value adjusted in PS.24 is an absolute value
2 Relative; the value adjusted in PS.24 is a relative value based on the
previous index. The sign determines the direction.
4 relativ to the zero position

Start index new profile (PS.28) This parameter

• defines an index (0...15), with which a new profile is started. The starting
index is also used, if the current positioning is aborted by the Start Posi“
signal and a new profile is started (PS.0 bit 3).
• is set-programmable, i.e. if at the same time the functions „set changeover“
and „Start Posi“ are assigned to a digital input, fixed positions can be directly
assigned to digital inputs.

Target windows (PS.30) This parameter defines a window as target position. On reaching it the output
function „Target windows reached“ (do.0...7 value „54“) is output. The adjustment of
this target window takes place within the range of -215...215-1 increments.

If the automatic brake control is to be used in the Posi mode, the source of rotational
direction (oP.1) must be adjusted to setpoint-dependent without LS (value 7).
The signal „Target window reached“ comes before the completion of the reference
point run, thus before the signal „Reference point run completed“ for 100 ms and is
then reset.
After the first positioning the target window is evaluated, i.e. only after the setpoint
profile has been travelled.
6
If the output function „Target window reached“ = 54 is adjusted and the brake control
is activated, the drive waits with the engagement of the brake until the target window
is reached. The actual speed must be below the hysteresis level LE.16, before the
brake engages.

The output function is evaluated, if

• reference point run was executed

• the actual position is declared valid by manual setting, storing, flying
referencing, i.e. the target position was set with the referencing .

Max. speed setting % (PS.31) This parameter represents the maximum positioning speed in percent within the
range of 0...100 % referred to oP.10/11. The presetting is activated, when PS.0 bit
4 is set.
With the aid of the „Analog parameter setting“ (see Chapter 6.9.10) PS.30 can be
changed via an analog channel.

6.11.8 Position scan With the position scanning it is possible to query the current position during an
active positioning over a digital input. If the scanned position exceeds a specified
level, the output function „75“ (amount actual scan position > level) is set. The
scanned position is displayed in parameter ru.71. Every further edge overwrites the
old scanning position.
The output function is reset by:

• adjustment of a new target position

• reaching the target position
• unreachable target position
• leaving the Posi mode

Position scan / index input sel. After scanning by PS.35 no new actual position can be teached, until the output
(PS.37) function is reset.
With PS.37 one input is specified for the position scanning.
© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page
All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S 17.02.03 6 11 17
Functional Desription Positioning and Synchronous Control

6.11.9 Teach Mode With parameter PS.35 (Teach mode) the basic functioning for teaching positions is
defined.

PS.35 Teach mode

0 the current position is written into the index the parameter ps.23 is
pointing to
1 the current position is written into the index the parameter ps.23 is
pointing to and ps.23 is counted up by 1, limitation of the maximum
numbers of indices
2 the current position is written into the index the parameter ps.28 is
pointing to. Thus teaching in the sets is also possible by the terminal
(8 position accessible).

Teach input selection (PS.36) PS.36 specifies the input for the teaching of the current position. After the acceptance
by setting the input the position is displayed in ru.71.

Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal

Teach / scan position (ru.71) This parameter displays the current teach position. The position remains until a
new position is teached.

6.11.10 Contouring Mode In the contouring mode positions are preset within a fixed time pattern. The inverter
takes over the fine interpolation and the position control.
The adjustment of the speed setpoint is done over SERCOS or by position settings
with 32 bit position setpoints. The setpoints can be preset in a pattern of min. 1
ms.

Activation of contouring mode The contouring mode is activated by parameter PS.0.

PS.0 Posi/Synchron Mode

Bit 0...2 Activation of Posi or Synchron mode
0 Off; Posi or Synchron mode switched off; position standstill controller
(PS.6) not active. The drive runs controlled, speed- or torque-
controlled (dependent on CS.0).
1 Synchron mode
2..4 reserved (off)
5 Posi mode
6 Contouring mode
7 Activation by control word
Bit 3...10 reserved for posi and synchronous module 6

Changing into the contouring mode and from the contouring mode into the positioning
mode is only possible at standstill.

When activating the synchron mode over the bus operator, the cycle time is
automatically adjusted in Sy.08. If the contouring mode was activated, the inverter
status ru.0 changes to „Posi active“.

The changeover between posi-, synchron- and contouring mode is also possible by
the control word (see chapter 11.2.7).

CTM Position (PS.34) The process data must be adjusted in such a way, that the position setpoint for the
contouring mode is written to PS.34.

Actual position (ru.54) The actual position value is displayed in ru.54.

Before the operator activates the synchron mode, operator and control card
synchronize. Now the actual position must already be written cyclically to PS.34.
After the contouring mode was activated, it must be written continously with the
constanst cycle time on PS.34.

The maximum speed in the contouring mode is limited only by the absolute maximum
speeds in oP.14 and oP.15. The torque limits are active.

Angular difference (ru.58) The contouring error in the contouring mode can be viewed in ru.58. This value can
also be monitored over a digital output with the switching condition 39 : angle >
level.

6.11.8 Used Parameters

Parameter Addr. ro prog min max default

[?]

PS 0 pos/syn mode 1300 - ja ja 0 1727 1 0 –

PS 1 act.master source 1301 - – – 0 1 1 1 –
PS 2 pos/syn input select 1302 - – ja 0 4095 1 0 –
PS 3 shift. slave input sel. 1303 - – ja 0 4095 1 0 –
PS 4 shifting slave 1304 - – – -230 230-1 1 0 inc
PS 5 position 1305 - ja – -230 230-1 1 0 inc
PS 6 KP pos/syn 1306 - ja – 0 32767 1 100 –
PS 9 Limit for posi/synch control 1309 - ja – 0 4000 0,125 250 rpm dep. on ud.2
PS10 Shift Slave inv. input selection 130A - – ja 0 4095 1 0 –
PS11 Reset m/s difference inp. sel. 130B - - ja 0 4095 1 0 -
PS13 set Ref. point input selection 130C - - ja 0 4095 1 0 -
PS14 Mode of position reference 130E - – ja 0 511 1 0 –
PS15 Limit switch right 130F - – – -230 230-1 1 -230 –
PS16 Limit switch left 1310 - – – -230 230-1 1 -230 –
PS17 Reference point 1311 - – – 230 230-1 1 0 inc
PS18 Reference switch inp.sel 1312 - – ja 0 4095 1 0 –
PS19 Reference start inp.sel 1313 - – ja 0 4095 1 0 –
PS20 Reference acc/dec time 1314 - – – 0,00 300,00 0,01 0,50 s
PS21 Reference speed 1315 - – ja -4000 4000 0,125 100 rpm dep. on ud.2
PS23 Index selection 1317 - – – -230 230-1 1 0 Ink
PS24 Index postion 1318 - – ja 0 4095 1 0 –
PS25 Index speed 1319 - – ja 0 4095 1 0 –
PS26 Next index 131A - – ja -1 15 1 -1 – -1 = Start index
PS27 Index mode 131B - – ja 0 15 1 0 –
PS28 Start index new profile 131C - ja ja 0 15 1 0 –
PS29 Start posi input select 131D - – ja 0 4095 1 0 –
PS30 Target windows 131E - – ja -32767 32767 1 1024 Ink
PS31 Max. speed setting % 131F - – – 0,0 100,0 0,1 100,0 %
PS32 Position norm counter 1320 - - ja -100 65535 1 4096 -
PS34 ctm position 1321 - - ja -230 230-1 1 0 Ink
PS35 Teach mode 1322 - - - 0 2 1 0 -
PS36 Teach input selection 1323 - - ja 0 4095 1 0 -
PS37 Pos. scan index inp. sel. 1324 - - ja 0 4095 1 0 -

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

6.1 Operating and Applicance

Date
4. Operation
6.2 Analog In- and Outputs
6.3 Digital In- and Outputs

5. Parameter 6.4 Set Value and Ramp

Adjustment
6.5 Voltage-/Frequency
Characteristic (U/f)
6. Functions
Adjustment
6.6 Motor Data Adjustment

7. Start-up 6.7 Protective Functions

6.8 Parameter Sets
6.9 Special Functions
8. Special Operation
6.10 Encoder Interface
6.11 SMM, Posi, Synchron, CTM
6.12.1 The PID-Controller .................. 3
9. Error Assistance 6.12 Technology Control
6.12.2 PID Setpoint Value .................. 5
6.13 CP-Parameter Definition 6.12.3 PID Actual Value .................... 6
6.12.4 Sample Applications ............... 7
6.12.5 Used Parameters .................. 10
10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

6.12 Technology The KEB COMBIVERT is equipped with a universally programmable technology
controller, with it pressure, temperature or dancing position controls can be set up.
Controller
6.12.1 The PID Control- The technology controller consists of a set/actual value comparator, that puts the
system deviation on a PID controller. With cn.4, 5 and 6 the P-, I- and D component is
ler
adjustable. The parameters cn.7 and cn.8 limit the maximum manipulated variable of
the controller. With the PID-controller fade-in time (cn.9) the controller amplification
can be driven up gently from 0...100%. Parameter cn.14 adjusts the frequency reach-
through ins Hz/% (only F5-G/B). Over parameter cn.11, 12 and 13 the PID-Controller,
the I-Controller and/or the controller fade-in can be reset. With cn.10 a PID-reset condition
can be adjusted.

Pic. 6.12.1 PID controller

PID controller

cn.4 PID kp ru.52

Set value calculation cn.5 PID ki cn.9 PID
oP.0
cn.6 PID kd fading time
cn.14
+ cn.7 v
% cS.0 6
- cn.8 Hz
t

cn.10 PID Reset

Actual value calculation condition

cn.11 Reset PID / cn.12 Reset I / cn.13 Fade in

input selection input selection reset / input
selection

Digital inputs

PID controller KP (cn.4) Defines the proportional amplification factor in the range of 0,00...250,00.

PID controller KI (cn.5) Defines the integral amplification factor in the range of 0,000...30,000.

PID controller KD (cn.6) Defines the differential amplification factor in the range 0,000...250,00.

PID positive limit (cn.7) The max. positive manipulated variable is determined with cn.7 in the range of
PID negative limit (cn.8) -400,0...400,0 %, the max. negative manipulated variable is determined with cn.8 in
the range of -400,0...400,0 %.

PID fade-in time (cn.9) With it the control action during the start can be increased linear or decreased linear at
the reset of the fade-in. The time refers of 100% of the controller output value. If one
input is programmed for „Reset fade-in“ (cn.13) the fade-in is counted down at active
input and counted up at inactive input.

Value range: -0,01; 0,00 ... 300 s; Resolution: 0,01 s

With the setting „-0.01“ the fade-in is calculated according to following formula:

Fade-in factor = f_setting (ru.2) / max. setpoint value (o.P10/11)

The function is only active, if the technology controller is used as process controller
(cs.0 Bit 0...2 = 1). With the adjustment as setpoint controller the fade-in time is 0.
© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002 Name: Basis Date Chapter Section Page
All rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5 17.02.03 6 12 3
Functional Description Technology Control

PID-Reset condition (cn.10) With cn.10 it is possible to set the reset conditions for the PID-Controller. Thus simple
speed regulations can be realized for both directions of rotation.

cn.10 Function
0 PID-Controller is not reset
1 PID-Controller = 0 (is continously reset)
2 PID-Controller is reset in case of modulation off

For speed regulations adjust the value „2“, with that the I-component of the controller
is reset at LS or nOP. The value „1“ serves mainly for the start-up, to reset the controller
manually.

Reset by way of digital inputs The whole controller, the I-component as well as the controller fade-in can be reset via
(cn.11...13) a digital input. When resetting the masking the fade-in time is valid. For that purpose
the decimal value of the corresponding inputs according to the table below has to be
entered.
cn.11 PID reset / input selection
cn.12 I reset / input selection
cn.13 Fade in reset / input selection

Bit -No. Decimal value Input Terminal

PID Output frequeny at 100% This block converts the percental controller output value into a frequency. The
(cn.14) adjustment of cn.14 determines which frequency is output at 100 % controller output
value. A frequency from -400.0...400.0 Hz (dep. on ud.2) can be adjusted. At cS.0 bit
(only F5-G/B)
0...1 = 1 the output value added with the ramp output frequency (ru.2) forms the
output frequency (ru.3).

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

6.12.2 PID Setpoint This section describes the PID-controller setpoint value. PID-setpoint value is
Value composed of the absolute reference value (cn.1) and an additional setpoint source
which is adjustable with cn.0. The two values are added up and transferred to the PID-
controller setpoint input.

Pic. 6.12.2 PID controller set value

cn.0 PID reference source

cn.1 PID absolute reference
-400,0...400,0 %

off 0
Analog input AN1 (ru.28) 1
+
Analog input AN2 (ru.30) 2 PID controller
+
Analog input AN3 (ru.32) 3

AUX input (ru.53) 4

PID absolute reference With cn.1 the set value of the PID-Controller is preset digitally in the range of
(cn.1) -400,0...400,0%. The parameter is set-programmable.

PID reference source Parameter cn.0 specifies the input which supplies the additional setpoint value. Following
(cn.0) possiblities are selectable:

cn.0 PID reference source

0 off (default)
1 Analog input AN1 (ru.28)
2 Analog input AN2 (ru.30)
3 Analog input AN3 (ru.32)
4 Aux input (ru.53)

If one of the analog channels is adjusted, the signals can be individually adapted to
the requirements with the analog amplifier, as described in Chapter 6.2.

6.12.3 PID Actual Value This section describes the PID-controller actual value. The actual value input is adjusted
with the PID-reference source (cn.2).

Pic. 6.12.3 PID controller actual value

cn.2 PID actual value source

Analog input An1 (ru.28) 0

Analog input An2 (ru.30) 1
Analog input An3 (ru.32) 2
Aux input (ru.53) 3 PID controller
PID absolute actual value (cn.3) 4
Active current (ru.17) 5
Utilization (ru.13) 6
DC-voltage (ru.18) 7

PID actual value source (cn.2) The actual value source (cn.2) determines from where the PID-Controller receives the
actual value signal. Following signals are available:

cn.2 Signal Function

0 AN1 Signal of the analog input 1 (see chapter 6.2)
1 AN2 Signal of the analog input 2 (see chapter 6.2)
- reserved at B control -
2 AN3 Signal of the analog input 3 (see chapter 6.2)
- reserved at B control -
3 Aux Signal of the Aux input (see chapter 6.2)
4 cn.3 PID absolute actual value is preset with cn.3 in the
range of -400,0...400,0 %
5 Active current The active current -200…200 % displayed in parameter
ru.17 is used as actual value signal (100 % = Irated)
6 Utilization The utilization 0…255 % displayed in parameter ru.13
is used as actual value signal (100 % = 100 %)
7 DC-voltage The DC-voltage 0...1000 V displayed in parameter
ru.18 is used as actual value signal (100 % = 1000 V)

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

6.12.4 Sample The following part describes some sample applications of the PID controller.
Applications

PID-Controller without precontrol (e.g. for pressure, temperature, level control)

Dig. set value

cn.1

Characteristic Ramp generator

amplifier PID controller oP-parameter
Ana. set value % +
ru.27 ru.28 ru.1
AN1 ru.2
cn.7/8 ru.52
cn.0 = 1 V Ramp output
-
cn.4...6 value
oP.0=6
cn.10
An-parameter

%
6
Actual value
ru.29 ru.30
AN2
cn.2 = 1 V

Characteristic
amplifierr

PID-Controller with precontrol (Variant 1)

Characteristic
Analog amplifier
precontrol %
ru.27 ru.28
AN1
cn.0 = 1 V
PID controller
An-parameter
Dig. set value +
+ ru.52
cn.1 An.30=8200
cn.7/8 +
-
cn.4...6 ru.1 ru.53
cn.10 oP.0=1
Characteristic Ramp generator
amplifier oP-parameter
Actual value %
ru.29 ru.30
AN2
cn.2 = 1 V
An-parameter ru.2
Ramp output value

PID-Controller with precontrol (Variant 2; dancing position control with precontrol - only for F5-G/B)

Characteristic
amplifier Ramp generator
%
Analog ru.27 ru.28 ru.1 ru.2 cS.0 = 1
precontrol AN1
cn.0 = 0 oP.0=0
V
An-parameter
PID controller
cn.14 +
Digital set + ru.52 % +
value
cn.1
Characteristic cn.7/8 Hz cS.4
amplifier
-
% cn.4...6
ru.29 ru.30 cn.10
Real value AN2
ru.2
cn.2 = 1 V
Ramp
An-parameter output value

PID-Controller with precontrol (Variant 3; e.g. for speed regulation with tacho generator - only for F5-G/B)

Characteristic
amplifier
%
Analog set ru.27 ru.28
value and AN1
precontrol cn.0 = 1 V
PID controller
An-parameter
+
+ ru.52
An.30=8200
cn.1 = 0 cn.7/8 +
-
cn.4...6 ru.1 ru.53
cn.10 oP.0=1
Characteristic
amplifier Ramp generator
%
oP-parameter
ru.29 ru.30
Real value AN2 cS.0 = 0
cn.2 = 1 V

An-parameter ru.2
Ramp
output value

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

PID-Controller on the analog output

Dig. set value

Characteristic
cn.1 amplifier
%
ru.33 ru.34
Characteristic ANOUT1
amplifier PID controller An.31=9/10
V
Ana. set value % +
ru.27 ru.28
AN1
cn.7/8 ru.52
cn.0 = 1 V
-
cn.4...6 %
cn.10 An.31=9/10 ru.35 ru.36
An-parameter ANOUT2
V
Actual value %
ru.29 ru.30 Characteristic
AN2
V
amplifier
cn.2 = 1

Characteristic
amplifier 6
PID-Controller as active current- (torque-) regulation without precontrol
Speed
pre-control
oP.0 = 6 (externer PID Ausgang ru.52)
cn.1
Characteristic
Analog current amplifier PID controller Ramp generator
set value % +
ru.27 ru.28 ru.1
AN1 ru.2
cn.7/8 ru.52
cn.0 = 1 V
-
cn.4...6
Active current An-parameter cn.10
oP.0=6
real value
ru.17
cn.2 = 5

PID-Controller as active current- (torque-) regulation without precontrol

%
ru.27 ru.28 ru.1 ru.2 cS.0 = 1
Speed
pre-control
AN1
cn.0 = 0 oP.0=0
V
Characteristic Ramp generator
amplifier

Digital current
cn.1
set value An-parameter
PID controller
cn.14 +
% +
Analog current ru.29 ru.30 ru.52 % +
set value
AN2
cn.7/8 Hz cS.4
cn.0 = 2 V -
Characteristic cn.4...6
cn.10
Active current amplifier
real value ru.17
ru.2
cn.2 = 5

6.12.5 Used Parameters

Parameter Addr. min max default

[?] Notes

cn 0 PID reference source 0700 X X – 0 4 1 0 – –

cn 1 PID abs. reference 0701 X X – -400,0 400,0 0,1 0,0 % –
cn 2 PID act. value source 0702 X X – 0 7 1 0 – –
cn 3 PID abs. act. value 0703 X – – -400,0 400,0 0,1 0,0 % –
cn 4 PID kp 0704 X X – 0,00 250,00 0,01 0,00 – –
cn 5 PID ki 0705 X X – 0,000 30,000 0,001 0,000 – –
cn 6 PID kd 0706 X X – 0,00 250,00 0,01 0,00 – –
cn 7 PID pos. limit 0707 X X – -400,0 400,0 0,1 400,0 % –
cn 8 PID neg. limit 0708 X X – -400,0 400,0 0,1 -400,0 % –
cn 9 PID fading time 0709 X X – -0,01 300,00 0,01 0,00 s -0,01 freq. dependend
cn10 PID reset condition 070A X X – 0 2 1 0 – –
cn11 PID reset inp. sel. 070B X – X 0 4095 1 0 – –
cn12 I reset inp. sel. 070C X – X 0 4095 1 0 – –
cn13 fade in reset inp. sel. 070D X – X 0 4095 1 0 – –
cn14 PID out freq at 100% 070E X X – -400,0 400,0 0,0125 0 Hz dependend on ud.2

ru13 Actual utilization 020D – – – 0 255 1 0 % –

ru17 Active current 0211 – – – -3276,7 3276,7 0,1 0 A –
ru18 Actual DC voltage 0212 – – – 0 1000 1 0 V –
ru28 AN1 post amplifier display 021C – – – -400,0 400,0 0,1 0 % –
ru30 AN2 post amplifier display 021E – – – -400,0 400,0 0,1 0 % –
ru53 AUX display 0235 – – – -400,0 400,0 0,1 0 % –

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

6.1 Operating and Applicance

Date
4. Operation
6.2 Analog In- and Outputs
6.3 Digital In- and Outputs

5. Parameter 6.4 Set Value and Ramp

Adjustment
6.5 Voltage-/Frequency
Characteristic (U/f)
6. Functions
Adjustment
6.6 Motor Data Adjustment

7. Start-up 6.7 Protective Functions

6.8 Parameter Sets
6.9 Special Functions
8. Special Operation
6.10 Encoder Interface
6.11 SMM, Posi, Synchron

9. Error Assistance 6.12 Technology Control 6.13.1 Survey .................................... 3

6.13 CP-Parameter Definition 6.13.2 Assignment of CP-Parameters 4
6.13.3 Example .................................. 5
6.13.4 Display Standardization ........... 6
10. Project Planning 6.13.5 Used Parameters .................... 8

11. Networks

12. Annex

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

6.13 CP-Parameter Once the development stage of a machine is completed, usually only a few parameters
are required for the adjustment or the control of the inverter. To make the handling
Definition easier and the user documentation more understandable as well as to increase the
safety of operation against unauthorized access, the possibility exists to create the
own user surface with the CP-parameters. For that purpose 37 parameters (CP.0...CP.36)
are available, 36 of them (CP.1...CP.36) are free for assignments.

6.13.1 Survey Fig. 6.12.1 Definition structure

Password
CP.0 / ud.1
440 330 200 100 500

Read/ Read
Application Mode Service Mode Write only
Drive Mode
ud.15 CP-Mode
Address
ud.16
1 Set/Norm ru.3 CP.1 6
ud.17

Address
ud.16
2 Set/Norm ru. 1 CP.2
ud.17

Adress
ud.16
36 Set/Norm An.4 CP.36
ud.17

With ud.15 the CP-parameter that is to be edited is determined. With ud.16 and ud.17
the CP-parameter is defined through its address and the respective set. Depending on
the adjusted password (CP.0 or ud.1)
- the adjusted parameter is directly displayed in the Service Mode
- the adjusted parameter is displayed as CP-parameter in the CP-Mode

Parameter CP.0 is not programmable and always contains the password input. If the
inverter is in the Application Mode or Service Mode ud.1 is used for the password
input.
The parameters ud.15...17 as well as Fr.1 are not permitted as CP-parameter and are
acknowledged as invalid parameter address. When entering an invalid parameter
address the parameter is set to „oFF“ (-1). The appropriate CP-parameter is not
displayed at this setting.

6.13.2 Assignment of
CP-Parameters

CP selector (ud.15) With ud.15 the CP-parameter to be programmed is adjusted in the range of 1...36. CP.0 is
not adjustable.

CP address (ud.16) ud.16 determine the parameter address (see Chapter 5) of the parameter to be displayed:

ud.16 Invalid or not exists parameter

-1: Parameter not used addresses are ignored with „Data
0...32767: Parameter address invalid“.

CP set norm (ud.17) ud.17 determine the set, the addressing and the standardization of the parameter to be
displayed. The parameter is bit-coded. The individual bits are decoded as follows:

Determination of Bit 0...7 determines the set selection for direct set programming, i.e. all selected sets
parameter set for indirect contain the same value, which is defined by the CP-parameter. If direct set programming
set addressing (bit 8, 9) is selected at least one set must be selected as otherwise an error message is
triggered in the cp mode.

Bit
7 64 35 2 1
0 Value Set
0 00 00 0 0
0 0 none -> Data invalid, if Bit 8 and 9 = 0
0 00 00 0 0
1 1 0
0 00 00 0 1
0 2 1
0 00 00 0 1
1 3 0+1
... ... ...
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 255 All

Determination of set Bit 8 and 9 determine the set addressing mode:

addressing mode
Bit
8 9 Value Function
0 0 0 Direct set addressing; the sets determined by Bit 0...7 are valid
0 1 256 Current set; the current set is displayed / edited
1 0 512 Indirect set addressing, the parameter set determined with the set pointer
Fr.9 is displayed / edited
1 1 768 free

Display standardization Bit 10...12 determine how the defined parameter value is displayed. Up to seven different
user standardizations (see further on in this chapter) can be determined with the parameters
ud.18...21.

Bit
1211 10 Value Function
0 0 0 0 Use standard standardization of the parameter
0 0 1 1024 Display standardization from set 1
0 1 0 2048 Display standardization from set 2
... ...
1 1 1 7168 Display standardization from set 7

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

6.13.3 Example As an example a user menu with the following features shall be programmed:

1. Display of current actual frequency (ru.3) in the respective set

2. Adjustment of a fixed frequency / fixed value (oP.21) in set 2
3. Adjustment of a fixed frequency /fixed value (oP.21) in set 3
4. Acceleration and deceleration time (oP.28/oP.30) for set 2 and 3
5. Energy saving factor (uF.7) shall be displayed in set 2 with display
standardization 4

1.) ud.15 = 1 ; CP.1

ud.16 = 0203h ; Parameter address for ru.3
ud.17 = 256 ; Display in the active set

2.) ud.15 = 2 ; CP.2

ud.16 = 0315h ; Parameter address for oP.21
ud.17 = 4 ; Setting in set 2

3.) ud.15 = 3 ; CP.3

ud.16 = 0315h ; Parameter address for oP.21
ud.17 = 8 ; Setting in set 3
6
4.) ud.15 = 4 ; CP.4
ud.16 = 031Ch ; Parameter address for oP.28
ud.17 = 12 ; Setting in set 2 and 3
ud.15 = 5 ; CP.5
ud.16 = 031Eh ; Parameter address for oP.30
ud.17 = 12 ; Setting in set 2 and 3

5.) ud.15 = 6 ; CP.6

ud.16 = 0507h ; Parameter address for uF.7
ud.17 = 4097 ; Setting in set 0 and display standardization 4

6.) ud.15 = 7 ; CP.7

ud.16 = -1: off ; CP.7 not displayed
ud.17 = xxx ; ud.17 no function

Adjust all other parameter sets to „off“, so that no indication occurs.

The acceptance of the values takes place only after Power-On-Reset of the operator.

6.13.4 Display The KEB COMBIVERT gives the user the possibility to define his own standardization
Standardization (e.g. km/h or bottles/min) in the CP-Mode. The parameters ud.18...20 are used for
conversion, ud.21 for specifying the method of calculation, the decimal places as well
as the units indicated in KEB COMBIVIS.

6.12.4 Definition of own standardization

ud.19 Multiplier
± 32767

Standard ud.19
CP.xx = (selected parameter + ud.20) x x Unit
ud.18

ud.20 Offset ud.18 Divisor

± 32767 ± 32767

ud.21 Display flags

0...4095

ud.19 Multiplier
± 32767

ud.19
Inverted CP.xx =
(selected parameter + ud.20) x ud.18
x Unit

ud.20 Offset ud.18 Divisor

± 32767 ± 32767

The unstandardized value is always used for the „selected parameter“ !

ud.18 Display standardization Adjusts the divisor in the range of ±32767 (default 1). The parameter is set-
Divisor programmable (not at B-control).

ud.19 Display standardization Adjusts the multiplier in the range of ±32767 (default 1). The parameter is set-
Multiplier programmable (not at B-control).

ud.20 Display standardization Adjusts the offset in the range of ±32767 (default 0). The parameter is set-programmable
Offset (not at B-control).

ud.21 Display standardization With ud.21 the calculation mode, the decimal places as well as the units indicated in
Mode KEB COMBIVIS are adjusted. The parameter is bit-coded and set-programmable (not
at B-control). It is adjustable in the range of 0...4095.

Bit 12...15 Bit 11...8 Bit 7...6 Bit 5...0 ud.21

- - - see table 1 Unit
- - see table 2 - Calculation mode
- see table 3 - - Representation
free - - - -

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Table 1 Unit Value Unit Value Unit Value Unit Value Unit
0 none 16 km/h 32 K 48 lbin
1 mm 17 1/min 33 mΩ 49 in/s
2 cm 18 Hz 34 Ω 50 ft/s
3 m 19 kHz 35 kΩ 51 ft/min
4 km 20 mV 36 INC 52 ft/s²
5 g 21 V 37 % 53 ft/s³
6 kg 22 kV 38 KWh 54 MPH
7 us 23 mW 39 mH 55 kp
8 ms 24 W 40 - 56 psi
9 s 25 kW 41 - 57 °F
10 h 26 VA 42 in 58 -
11 Nm 27 kVA 43 ft 59 -
12 kNm 28 mA 44 yd 60 -
13 m/s 29 A 45 oz 61 -
14 m/s2 30 kA 46 lb 62 -
15 m/s3 31 °C 47 lbft 63 -

Table 2 Value Function The 6

Calculation mode unstandardized
ud.19
0 (selected parameter + ud.20) x = CP.xx value is always
ud.18 used for the
ud.19 „selected
64 = CP.xx
(selected parameter + ud.20) x ud.18 parameter“ !

- free

Table 3 Value Representation

Representation 0 0 decimal places
256 1 demical place
512 2 decimal places
768 3 decimal places
1024 4 decimal places
1280 variable decimal places
1536 Hexadecimal
- free

Example The actual frequency shall be displayed in CP.1 in rpm. Display standardization from
set 4.

ud.15 = 1 ; CP.1
ud.16 = 0203h ; Actual frequency ru.3
ud.17 = 4352 ; Display in current set, display standardization from set 4

Satz 4 ud.18 = 80
; Conversion from 1/80 Hz into rpm without pole pair number
Satz 4 ud.19 = 60
Satz 4 ud.20 = 0 ; no Offset
Satz 4 ud.21 = 17 ; Unit rpm; direct calculation mode; no decimal places

6.13.5 Used Parameters

R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

ud.1 0801h ✔ - ✔ 0 9999 1 440 Application

ud.15 080Fh ✔ - ✔ 1 36 1 1 -

ud.16 0810h ✔ - ✔ -1 (off) 32767 (7FFFh) 512 (0203h) div. dep. on ud.15

ud.17 0811h ✔ - ✔ 0 8191 1 1 -

ud.18 0812h ✔ ✔ ✔ -32767 32767 1 1 not at B-control

ud.19 0813h ✔ ✔ ✔ -32767 32767 1 1 not at B-control

ud.20 0814h ✔ ✔ ✔ -32767 32767 1 0 not at B-control

ud.21 0815h ✔ ✔ ✔ 0 1791 1 0 not at B-control

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

4. Operation

5. Parameter

6. Functions

7.1.1 After uncasing the Goods ....... 3

7. Start-up 7.1 Preparatory Measures
7.1.2 Installation and Connection .... 3
7.2 Initial Start-up 7.1.3 Checklist prior to Start-up ....... 4

8. Special Operation

9. Error Assistance

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

The following chapter is intended for everybody who has no experience with the KEB
7. Start-up frequency inverters. It shall allow a correct entering into this field. But because of the
complex application possibilities we must restrict ourselves to explaining the start-up
7.1 Preparatory of standard applications.
Measures
7.1.1 After unpacking After unpacking the goods and checking them for complete delivery following measures
the Goods are to be carried out:

! Visual control for transport damage

Should any external damages to the KEB COMBIVERT be visible get in touch
with your forwardig agent and return the unit with a corresponding report to
KEB.

! Check the voltage class

Absolutely check before assembly whether the supply voltage of the KEB
COMBIVERT matches the application.

7.1.2 Installation and The EMC-conform installation of the inverter is described in the Instruction Manual
Part 1. Installation and connection instructions are found in the Instruction Manual
Connection
Part 2.

! The mounting surface of the inverter must be bright. 7

! If necessary, use contact lacquer as protection against corrosion.

! Connect the earthing strip to central point in the control cabinet.

Picture 7.1.2.a Installation and connection

EN
TE
R
F/R

ST
AR
T
ST
OP

FU
NC
.
SP
EE
D
C
O
M
B
IV
E
R
T

L1
L2
L3
+
-
PB
U
V
W

0402
9508 C-1220
5.S0
07.F

7.1.3 Checklist prior to Before switching on the inverter go through the following checklist.
Start-up
! Is the inverter firmly bolted in the control cabinet?

! Is there enough space to ensure sufficient air circulation?

! Are mains and motor cables as well as the control cables installed
separately from each other?

! Are the inverters connected to the correct supply voltage?

! Are all mass and earthing cables attached and well contacted?

! Ensure that mains and motor cables are not interchanged as that
will lead to the destruction of the inverter!

! Is the motor connected in-phase?

! Check tacho, initiator and encoder for firm attachment and correct
connection!

! Check, whether all power and control cables are firmly in place!

! Remove any tools from the control cabinet!

! Attach all covers and protective caps to ensure that all live parts
are secured against direct contact.

! When using measuring instruments or computers an isolating

transformer should be used, if not, make sure that the equipotenial
bonding between the supply lines is guaranteed!

! Open the control release of the inverter to avoid the unintended

starting of the machine.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

4. Operation

5. Parameter

6. Functions

7.1 Preparatory Measures

7.2.1 Start-up F5-MULTI .................. 3
7. Start-up 7.2 Initial Start-up 7.2.2 Start-up F5-SERVO ................ 4
7.2.3 Adjustment Assistance
Speed Controller ..................... 5
8. Special Operation

9. Error Assistance

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

7.2 Initial Start-up After all preparatory measures have been carried out the KEB COMBIVERT F5 can
be switched on.
7.2.1 Start-up For the controlled (open-loop) initial start-up of KEB COMBIVERT F5-MULTI do the
F5-MULTI following:
1. Switch off control release (term. X2A.16) ⇒ Inverter in status „noP“
2. Select controlled operation ⇒ Parameter CS.0 = 0
3. Enter motor data ⇒ Parameter dr.0...dr.5
4. Activate motor data ⇒ Parameter Fr.10 = 1 or 2
5. Enter necessary boost ⇒ Parameter uF.1
6. Enter encoder line number (inc/r) ⇒ Parameter Ec.1/11
7. Not cut-off frequency of the encoder ⇒ flimit > increments * nmax / 60 Hz
and interface e.g. encoder (inc/r): 2500
max. set speed: 3000 rpm
flimit > 125 kHz
8. Set CS.1 to encoder channel 1
9. Start controlled operation ⇒ see diagram
Picture 7.2.1 Initial start-up (controlled)
Start
Remove cause of error

Preset positive set speed

7
Activate control release
(terminal X2A.16)

Is the dir. of rotation NO

Exchange motor phases
of the motor (forward)
correct ?

YES

NO Change encoder wiring or activate

Is the sign of the actual
speed display (ru.9) encoder tracks (Ec.6)
positive ?

YES

Possible causes:
• encoder defective
Actual speed (ru.9) NO • interface defective
= set speed (ru.1) • EMC-problems
minus slip ? • cut-off frequency of the enc. is too small
• encoder line number is wrong (Ec.1/11)
YES

Initial start-up successful!

7.2.2 Start-up The speed controller must be adjusted when the KEB COMBIVERT F5-SERVO is
F5-SERVO taken into operation. By using the software COMBIVIS a setvalue jump can be recorded.
With the examples on the following page the speed controller can be adjusted.

• Install COMBIVIS on the PC and startup. Select and startup the programm SCOPE.

• parameterize SCOPE:
Operating mode: Offline
Time reference: 2ms
Trigger position: 5%
Trigger condition: Fixed speed input
Channel A: ru.01 Set speed
Channel B: ru.07 Actual speed

• Go in the operating mode of SCOPE, calibrate channels and adjust time reference
(e.g. 50ms/DIV).

• Switch control release X2A.16

• Preset fixed speed

(e.g.: 50% nominal)

• Activate a fixed speed with an programmable input, the KEB COMBIVERT executes
a setpoint step change.

• Subsequently the data are read out with the aid of SCOPE and compare recorded
step change with the examples on the following page and adjust speed controller.

• Repeat step change and record again until a satisfying initial response and an
optimal controller adjustment is found.

Rough adjustment of the speed controller without using the SCOPE:

• Increase P-part to the stability limit (system starts to oscillate) and then decrease
by 30%.

• Repeat the same procedure with the I-part

7.2.3 Adjustment After initial start-up the following adjustments must be done:
Assistance
1. Switch off control release (terminal X2A.16) ⇒Inverter in status „noP“
Speed Controller 2. Select regulated operation ⇒ Parameter cS.0
3. Adjust speed controller ⇒see adjustment tips below

Problem: Very long transient process, but stabilization Problem: Speed overshoot too high
during constant run Solution: Increase P-fraction (cS.6); eventually
Solution: Increase P-fraction (cS.6); eventually reduce reduce I-fraction (cS.9)
I-fraction (cS.9) 7

Problem: Sustained oscillation short billowy, noises, Problem: Transient too slow / remaining system
vibes deviation
Solution: Decrease P-fraction (cS.6) Solution: Increase I-fraction (cS.9)

Problem: Overshoot too long, strong speed Problem: Sustained oscillation long billowy
decreases at load change Solution: Reduce I-fraction (cS.9) and / or reduce
Solution: Increase I-fraction (cS.9) P-fraction (cS.6)

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

4. Operation

5. Parameter

6. Functions

7. Start-up

8.1.1 Parameter Description ............ 3

8. Special Operation 8.1 Temperature Control 8.1.2 Possibilities for a Temperature
Control .................................... 4
8.1.3 Connection to the Cooling
System ................................... 5
9. Error Assistance 8.1.4 Inverter Protection Function
„Overheat“ .............................. 6
8.1.5 Information about
Water Cooling ......................... 7
10. Project Planning 8.1.6 Operation Example ................. 8

11. Networks

12. Annex

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

8. Special Operations

8.1 Temperature This function serves only as temperature control for watercooled inverters. The
water cooling system can be switched on with a pneumatic or solenoid valve.To
Control avoid pressure surges, the valves for a temperature control must be inserted before
the cooling circuit. All usual valves can be used. Depending on the used valve the
switching electronics must be provided by the customer. The control occurs via the
analog outputs 3 and 4 and the flags, which are assigned to the digital outputs. Two
functions must be programmed, because the temperature ranges of the inverter
and the motor are different. Attention! Do not use relay outputl

8.1.1 Parameter
Description
Function (An.41, An.47) The respective functions are adjusted with these parameters (temperature control
of the power controller or the motor).

Period (An.46, An.52) The period determines the cycle time in which the output is switched. The period
can be adjusted in a range from 1,0...240,0 s.

Offset X (An.44, An.50) The heat sink temperature which shall be controlled is entered with Offset. The
temperature is in a range from 30 °C...50°C for inverters (heat sink temperature/
see power unit data) and in a range from 40°C ...80°C for motors. The adjustment
occurs in percentual values (1% = 1°C).

Gain (An.43, An.49) The gain determines the max.temperature. The adjustment occurs via a factor and
is calculated as follows.

Max. temperature [°C] = An.44 + (100% / An.43)

Example Adjustments for the Controller

An.41 = 12 : Power stage temperature

An.44 = 30 % Beginning of the temperature control
An.43 = 5,00 Gain for the max. temperature, see formula above
An.46 = 20 s Period (cycle time)
do.06 = 42 : ANOUT3 PWM, switching condition 6
do.22 = 64 : Selection for flag 6
do.33 = 64 : Selection and assignment of the output terminal

The switching period Tan of the output is calculated by the following formula if the
heat sink temperature is within the adjusted temperature range.

Tan =(Max. temp.-setpoint temp.)+(heat sink temp.-setpoint temp.) · Period

max. temp.-min.temp.

8.1.2 Possibilities for a There are two possibilities for a temperature control:
Temperature a.) with temperature monitoring in the motor
b.) without temperature monitoring in the motor
Control

a.) Temperature Control with In this case inverter and motor possess independent cooling circuits. Two
Temperature Monitoring in the programmable outputs of the control card are required for a control of the valve.
Motor (see the following fig.).

Outflow
KEB
COMBIVERT
Inflow
Valve
ϑ do.xx
do.xy

Valve M
Inflow
3~
Outflow Encoder
Feedback

b.) Temperature Control without In this case the motor is without temperature monitoring. The motor can be
Temperature Monitoring in the permanently supplied with coolant or the motor can be integrated in the cooling
Motor circuit of the inverter.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

8.1.3 Connection to the The connection to the coolant must be done with flexible pressure-proof tubes and
Cooling System it must be secured with clips. (note flow direction and check tightness!) The
connection to the cooling system is done via 1/2 inch secrewed glands . (Whitworth-
pipe thread of DIN ISO 228-1).

The connection to the cooling system can occur as closed or opened cooling
circuit. It is dependent on the local circumstances and it is preset by the mechanical
engineer.

closed cooling circuit In case of a closed cooling circuit the outflow coolant is cooled down by a heat
exchanger or by a re-cooling system and refeed back into the cooling cicuit.

Valve

ϑ
KEB
COMBIVERT

Pump Heat exchanger,

Re-cooling
system

Inflow Outflow

Coolant

open cooling circuit In this case new coolant is constant given in and directly given out.

Valve
Inflow
ϑ KEB
COMBIVERT

Outflow

8.1.4 Inverter Protection Dependent on the power unit and overload capacity the inverter Off-temperatures
Function are 60 ° C, 73 ° C or 90 ° C. To ensure a safe operation the coolant output temperature
must be 10 K under "Overheat"- function.
„Overheat“

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

8.1.5 Information about In continuous operation water-cooled inverters are operated with lower temperature
Water Cooling than air-cooled inverters.This has positive effects on the lifetime of the components
like fan and DC link capacitors. Also the temperature dependent switching losses
are positively effected.

Materials The machined aluminium heat sinks are sealed with sealing rings and by bonding,
dismountable (screwed) and they have a surface protection in the channels
(anodized). As standard the heat sinks are maintenance-free!

Cooling Water Quality There are no special requirements for the coolant.The VGB-cooling water instructions
must be observed for a safety operation. The coolant must be free of acid, abrasive
materials and pressure surges and it shall not be aggressive to the material.
Measures against pollution and calcination must be done externally, if neccessary
with a filter.

The main impurities and most usual procedures for eliminating them are:

Pollution of the water Process

Mechanical impurities Filtration of water via
- sieving filter
- sand filter
- cartridge filter
- precoated filter
Excessive hardness Softening of the water by ion exchange
Moderate content of mechanical Injection of stabilisers or dispersants into the
impurities and hardness formers water
Moderate content of chemical Injection of passivators and/or inhibitors into
impurities the water
Biological impurities myxobacteria Injection of biocides into the water
and algae

Temperature and Operating The temperature shall be max. 40°C. Select a long cycle time in An.46 or An.52 to
Pressure avoid moisture condensation (see chapter 8.1.1). During transport or storage below
freezing point, the water cycle should be drained completely using compressed air.
The max. operating pressure of the cooling system shall not exceed 6 bar (special
versions with higher pressures are available).

8.1.6 Operation Example Selection of a COMBIVIS parameter list:

An.41 ANOUT 3 Function 12 : Power stage temperature (ru.38)

An.44 ANOUT 3 Offset 30 %
Adjustments of the Temperature An.43 ANOUT 3 Gain 5,00
Closed-Loop Control An.46 ANOUT 3 Period 20 s
do.06 Switching Condition SB 6 42 : ANOUT3 PWM
do.22 Selection of SB for Flag 6 64 : SB6
do.33 Selection of Flag for O1 64 : M6

An.47 ANOUT 4 Function 13 : Motor Temperature (ru.46)

An.50 ANOUT 4 Offset 40 %
Adjustments of the Motor-
An.49 ANOUT 4 Gain 2,50
Temperature Closed-Loop Control
An.52 ANOUT 4 Period 20 s
do.07 Switching Condition SB 7 43 : ANOUT4 PWM
do.23 Selection SB for Flag 7 128 : SB7
do.34 Selection of Flag for O2 128 : M7

do.00 Switching Condition SB 0 3: Ready for Operation

do.16 Selection of SB for Flag 0 1: SB0
do.35 Selection of Flag for O2 1: M0

do.01 Selection of SB 1 7: Pre-Warning Overload

do.02 Selection of SB 2 8: Pre-Warning Power Stage Overheat
do.03 Selection of SB 3 9: Pre-Warning Motor Overheat
Pre-Warning Adjustments
do.04 Selection of SB 4 11: Warning internal Overheat
do.05 Selection of SB 5 0: alway switched-off
do.17 Selcetion of SB for Flag 1 62: SB1+SB2+SB3+SB4+SB5
do.28 Inverted Flag for R2 2: M1
do.36 Selection of Flag for R2 2: M1

For future informations please contact KEB.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

4. Operation

5. Parameter

6. Functions

7. Start-up

8. Special Operation

9.1.1 General ................................... 3

9. Error Assistance 9.1 Troubleshooting 9.1.2 Error Messages and their
Cause ...................................... 3

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

12. Annex

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

The following chapter shall help you to avoid errors as well as help you to determine
9. Error and remove the cause of errors on your own.
Assistance
9.1 Troubleshooting
9.1.1 General If error messages or malfunctions occur repeatedly during operation, the first thing to
do is to pinpoint the exact error. To do that go through the following checklist:

- Is the error reproducable ?

For that reset the error and try to repeat it under the same conditions. If the error can
be reproduced, the next step is to find out during which operating phase the error
occurs.

- Does the error occur during a certain operating phase (e.g. always during
acceleration)?
If so, consult the error messages and remove the causes listed there.

- Does the error occur or disappear after a certain time?

That may be an indication for thermal causes. Check, whether the inverter is used in
accordance to the ambient conditions and that no moisture condensation takes place.

9.1.2 Error Messages At KEB COMBIVERT error messages are always represented with an „E.“ and the
and their Cause appropriate error in the display. Error messages cause the immediate deactivation of
the modulation. Restart possible only after reset.
Malfunction are represented with an „A.“ and the appropriate message. Reactions to
malfunctions can vary.
Status messages have no addition. The status message shows the current operating 9
status of the inverter (e.g. forward constant run, standstill etc.).
In the following the display and their cause are described.

Display COMBIVIS Value Meaning

Status Messages
bbL base block 76 Power modules for motor de-excitation locked
bon close brake 85 Brake control, brake engaged (see chapter 6.9)
boFF open brake 86 Brake control, brake released (see chapter 6.9)
Cdd calculate drive 82 Measurement of the motor stator resistance
dcb DC brake 75 Motor is decelerated by a DC-voltage at the output.
dLS low speed / DC brake 77 Modulation is switched off after DC-braking (see chapter 6.9
„DC-Braking“).
FAcc forward acceleration 64 Acceleration with the adjusted ramps in clockwise direction
of rotation.
Fcon forward constant 66 Acceleration / deceleration phase is completed and it is
driven with constant speed / frequency in clockwise direction
of rotation.
FdEc forward deceleration 65 It is stopped with the adjusted ramp times in clockwise
direction of rotation.
HCL hardware current limit 80 The message is output if the output current reaches the
hardware current limit.

Display COMBIVIS Value Meaning

IdAtA invalid Data - The parameter address adjusted for this parameter value is
invalid.
LAS LA stop 72 This message is displayed if during acceleration the load is
limited to the adjusted load level.
LdS Ld stop 73 This message is displayed if during deceleration the load is
limited to the adjusted load level or the DC-link current to the
adjusted voltage level.
LS low speed 70 No direction of rotation pre-set, modulation is off.
nO_PU power unit not ready 13 Power circuit not ready or not identified by the control.
noP no operation 0 Control release (terminal ST) is not switched.
PA positioning active 122 This message is displayed during a positioning process.
PLS low speed / power off 84 No modulation after Power-Off
PnA position not reachable 123 The specified position cannot be reached within the pre-set
ramps. The abort of the positioning can be programmed.
POFF power off function 78 Depending on the programming of the function (see chapter
6.9 „Power-off Function“) the inverter restarts automatically
upon system recovery or after a reset.
POSI positioning 83 Positioning function active (F5-G).
rAcc reverse acceleration 67 Acceleration with the adjusted ramp times in anti-clockwise
direction of rotation.
rcon reverse constant 69 The acceleration / deceleration phase is completed and it is
driven with constant speed / frequency in anti-clockwise
direction of rotation.
rdEc reverse deceleration 68 It is stopped with the adjusted ramp times in anti-clockwise
direction of rotation.
rFP ready for positioning 121 The drive signals that it is ready to start the positioning
process.
SLL stall 71 This message is displayed if during constant operation the
load is limited to the adjusted current limit.
SrA search for ref. active 81 Search for reference point approach active.
SSF speed search 74 Speed search function active, that means that the inverter
attempts to synchronize onto a running down motor.
StOP quick stop 79 The message is output if as response to a warning signal the
quick-stop function becomes active.

Error Messages
E. br ERROR brake 56 Error: This error can occur in the case of switched on brake
control (see Chapter 6.9.5), if
• the load is below the minimum load level (Pn.43) at start up
or the absence of an engine phase was detected.
• the load is too high and the hardware current limit is
reached
E.buS ERROR bus 18 Error: Adjusted monitoring time (Watchdog) of
communication between operator and PC / operator and
inverter has been exceeded.
E.Cdd ERROR calc. drive data 60 Error: During the automatic motor stator resistance
measurement.
E.co1 ERROR counter overrun 1 54 Counter overflow encoder channel 1

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Display COMBIVIS Value Meaning

E.co2 ERROR counter overrun 2 55 Counter overflow encoder channel 2
E.dOH ERROR drive overheat 9 Error: Overtemperature of motor PTC. Error can only be reset
at E.ndOH, if PTC is again low-resistance. Causes:
• resistance at the terminals T1/T2 >1650 Ohm
• motor overloaded
• line breakage to the temperature sensor
E.dri ERROR driver relay 51 Error: Driver relay. Relay for driver voltage on power circuit
has not picked up even though control release was given.
E.EEP ERROR EEPROM defective t 21 After reset the operation is again possible (without storage in
the EEPROM)
E. EF ERROR external fault 31 Error: External error. Is triggered, if a digital input is being
programmed as external error input and trips.
E.EnC1 Error! Encoder 1 32 Cable breakage of encoder at encoder interface 1
Encoder temperature is too high
Speed is too high
Encoder signals are out of specification
Encoder has an internal error
E.EnC2 Error! Encoder 2 34 Cable breakage of encoder at encoder interface 2
Encoder temperature is too high
Speed is too high
Encoder signals are out of specification
Encoder has an internal error
E.EnCC Error! Encoder change 35 Operation of a synchronous motor with intelligent interface:
• Encoder is not connected during the start
• Encoder was changed
The error can be reset by writing on ec.0.
E.Hyb ERROR hybrid 52 Invalid encoder interface identifier
9
E.HybC ERROR hybrid changed 59 Error: Encoder interface identifier has changed, it must be
confirmed over ec.0 or ec.10.
E.iEd ERROR input error detect 53 Error at PNP/NPN switching or input failure.
E.InI ERROR initialisation MFC 57 MFC not booted.
E.LSF ERROR load shunt fault 15 Error: Load-shunt relay has not picked up, occurs for a short
time during the switch-on phase, but must automatically be
reset immediately. If the error message remains the following
causes may be applicable:
• load-shunt defective
• input voltage wrong or too low
• high losses in the supply cable
• braking resistor wrongly connected or damaged
• braking module defective
E.ndOH no ERROR drive overheat 11 Motor temperature switch or PTC at the terminals T1/T2 is
again in the normal operating range. The error can be reset
now.
E.nOH no E. over heat pow.mod. 36 Temperature of the heat sink is again in the permissible
operating range. The error can be reset now.
E.nOHI no ERROR overheat int. 7 No longer overheating in the interior E.OHI, interior
temperature has fallen by at least 3°C

Display COMBIVIS Value Meaning

E.nOL no ERROR overload 17 No more overload, OL-counter has reached 0%; after the
error E. OL a cooling phase must elapse. This message
appears upon completion of the cooling phase. The error can
be reset. The inverter must remain switched on during the
cooling phase.
E.nOL2 no ERROR overload 2 20 The cooling time has elapsed. The error can be reset.
E. OC ERROR overcurrent 4 Error: Overcurrent
Occurs, if the specified peak current is exceeded. Causes:
• acceleration ramps too short
• the load is too big at turned off acceleration stop and turned
off constant current limit
• short-circuit at the output
• ground fault
• deceleration ramp too short
• motor cable too long
• EMC
• DC brake at high ratings active (see 6.9.3)
E. OH ERROR overheat pow.mod. 8 Error: Overtemperature of power module. Error can only be
reset at E.nOH. Causes:
• insufficient air flow at the heat sink (soiled)
• ambient temperature too high
• ventilator clogged
E.OH2 ERROR motor protection 30 Electronic motor protective relay has tripped.
E.OHI ERROR overheat internal 6 Error: Overheating in the interior: error can only be reset at
E.nOHI, if the interior temperature has dropped by at least
3°C
E. OL ERROR overload (Ixt) 16 Error: Overload error can only be reset at E.nOL, if OL-
counter reaches 0% again.
Occurs, if an excessive load is applied longer than for the
permissible time (see technical data). Causes:
• poor control adjustment (overshooting)
• mechanical fault or overload in the application
• inverter not correctly dimensioned
• motor wrongly wired
• encoder damaged
E.OL2 ERROR overload 2 19 Occurs if the standstill constant current is exceeded (see
technical data and overload characteristics). The error can
only be reset if the cooling time has elapsed and E.nOL2 is
displayed.
E. OP Error! Overvoltage 1 Voltage in the DC-link circuit too high.
Occurs if the DC-link circuit voltage exceeds the permissible
value. Causes:
• poor controller adjustment (overshooting)
• input voltage too high
• interference voltages at the input
• deceleration ramp too short
• braking resistor defective or too small
E.OS ERROR over speed 58 Real speed is bigger than the max. Output speed.
E.PFC ERROR Power factor control 33 Error in the power factor control

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Display COMBIVIS Value Meaning

E.PrF ERROR prot. rot. for. 46 The drive has driven onto the right limit switch. Programmed
response “Error, restart after reset” (see chapter 6.7
“Response to errors or warning messages”).
E.Prr ERROR prot. rot. rev. 47 The drive has driven onto the left limit switch. Programmed
response “Error, restart after reset” (see chapter 6.7
“Response to errors or warning messages”).
E. Pu ERROR power unit 12 Error: General power circuit fault
E.Puci ERROR pow. unit code inv. 49 Error: During the initialization the power circuit could not be
recognized or was identified as invalid.
E.Puch ERROR power unit changed 50 Error: Power circuit identification was changed; with a valid
power circuit this error can be reset by writing to SY.3. If the
value displayed in SY.2 is written, only the power-circuit
dependent parameters are reinitialized. If any other value is
written, then the default set is loaded. On some systems
after writing Sy.3 a Power-On-Reset is necessary.
E.PUCO ERROR power unit commun. 22 Error: Parameter value could not be written to the power
circuit. Acknowledgement from PC <> OK
E.PUIN ERROR power unit invalid 14 Error: Software version for power circuit and control card are
different. Error cannot be reset (only at F5-G B-housing)
E.SbuS ERROR bus synchron 23 Sychronization over sercos-bus not possible. Programmed
response “Error, restart after reset” (see chapter 6.7
“Response to errors or warning messages”).
E.SEt ERROR set 39 It has been attempted to select a locked parameter set.
Programmed response “Error, restart after reset” (see chapter
6.7 “Response to errors or warning messages”).
E.SLF ERROR! Software limit switch forward 44 The right software limit switch lies outside the defined limits.
Programmed response “Error, restart after reset” (see chapter 9
6.7 “Response to errors or warning messages”).
E.SLr ERROR software limit switch reverse 45 The left software limit switch lies outside the defined limits.
Programmed response “Error, restart after reset” (see chapter
6.7 “Response to errors or warning messages”).
E. UP ERROR underpotential 2 Error: Undervoltage (DC-link circuit). Occurs, if DC-link
voltage falls below the permissible value. Causes:
• input voltage too low or instable
• inverter rating too small
• voltage losses through wrong cabling
• the supply voltage through generator / transformer breaks
down at very short ramps
• At F5-G housing B E.UP is also displayed if no
communication takes place between power circuit and control
card.
• Jump factor (Pn.56) too small (see 6.9.20)
• if a digital input was programmed as external error input
with error message E.UP (Pn.65).
E.UPh ERROR Phase failure 3 One phase of the input voltage is missing (ripple-detection)

Warning Messages

Display COMBIVIS Value Meaning

A.buS ABN.STOP bus 93 Warning: Watchdog for communication between operator/
control card or operator/PC has responded. The response to
this warning can be programmed (see chapter 6.7 “Response
to errors and warning messages”).
A.dOH ABN.STOP drive over heat 96 The motor temperature has exceeded an adjustable warning
level. The switch off time is started. The response to this
warning can be programmed (see chapter 6.7 “Response to
errors or warning messages”). This warning can be generated
only with a special power circuit.
A. EF ABN.STOP external fault 90 This warning is triggered via an external input. The response
to this warning can be programmed (see chapter 6.7
“Response to errors or warning messages”).
A.ndOH no A. drive overheat 91 The motor temperature is again below the adjusted warning
level. The switch off time is stopped.
A.nOH no A. overheat pow.mod. 88 The heat sink temperature is again below the adjusted
warning level.
A.nOHI no A.STOP overheat int. 92 The temperature in the interior of the inverter is again below
the warning threshold.
A.nOL no ABN.STOP overload 98 Warning: no more overload, OL counter has reached 0 %.
A.nOL2 no ABN.STOP overload 2 101 The cooling time after “Warning! Overload during standstill”
has elapsed. The warning message can be reset.
A. OH A.STOP overheat pow.mod 89 A level can be defined, when it is exceeded this warning is
output. A response to this warning can be programmed (see
chapter 6.7 “Response to errors or warning messages”).
A.OH2 ABN.STOP motor protect. 97 Warning: electronic motor protective relay has tripped. The
response to this warning can be programmed (see chapter
6.7 “Response to error or warning messages”).
A.OHI ABN.STOP overheat int. 87 The temperature in the interior of the inverter lies above the
permissible level. The switch off time was started. The
programmed response to this warning message is executed
(see chapter 6.7 “Response to errors or warning messages”).
A. OL ABN.STOP overload 99 A level between 0 and 100 % of the load counter can be
adjusted, when it is exceeded this warning is output. The
response to this warning can be programmed (see chapter
6.7 “Response to errors or warning messages”).
A.OL2 ABN.STOP overload 2 100 The warning is output when the standstill continuous current
is exceeded (see technical data and overload
characteristics). The response to this warning can be
programmed (see chapter 6.7 “Response to errors and
warning messages”). The warning message can only be reset
after the cooling time has elapsed and A.nOL2 is displayed.

A.PrF ABN.STOP prot. rot. for. 94 The drive is driven onto the right limit switch. The response
to this warning can be programmed (see chapter 6.7
“Response to errors and warning messages”).
A.Prr ABN.STOP prot. rot. rev. 95 The drive is driven onto the left limit switch. The response to
this warning can be programmed (see chapter 6.7 “Response
to errors and warning messages”).

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Display COMBIVIS Value Meaning

A.SbuS ABN.Bus synchron 103 Synchronization over sercos-bus not possible. The response
to this warning can be programmed (see chapter 6.7
“Response to errors and warning messages”).
A.SEt ABN.STOP set 102 Warning: set selection: It has been attempted to select a
locked parameter set. The response to this warning can be
programmed (see chapter 6.7 “Response to errors or warning
messages”).
A.SLF ABN.Software limit switch forward 104 The right software limit switch lies outside the defined limits.
The response to this warning can be programmed (see
chapter 6.7 “Response to errors or warning messages”).
A.SLr ABN.Software limit switch reverse 105 The left software limit switch lies outside the defined limits.
The response to this warning can be programmed (see
chapter 6.7 “Response to errors or warning messages”).

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

4. Operation

5. Parameter

6. Functions

7. Start-up

8. Special Operation

9. Error Assistance

10.1.1 Control Cabinet Design

10. Project Planning 10.1 General Design Calculation .............................. 3
10.1.2 Design of Braking Resistors .... 4
11.1.3 Cable and Fuses ..................... 6
11. Networks

12. Annex

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

The following chapter shall assist you in the planning stage of applications.
10. Project
Planning
10.1 General Design

10.1.1 Control Cabinet

Design 150
Calculation
F4 F4 30
F5 F5

100

Direction of cooling fins Minimum

distances

Warm air
outlet

KEB
COMBIVERT

Cool air inlet

Control cabinet surface Calculation of control cabinet surface: Air flow rate with fan cooling :
PV 3,1 • PV
A= [m2] V= [m3/h]
∆T • K ∆T
A = control cabinet surface [m2]
∆T = temperature differential [K]
(standard value= 20 K)
W
K = coefficient of heat transmission [
m2 • K
]

W
(standard value = 5 m2 • K )

PV = power loss (see Technical Data)

V = air flow rate of fan

For more details please refer to the catalogs of the control cabinet manufacturers.

10.1.2 Design of The KEB COMBIVERT fitted with an external braking resistor or an external braking
Braking option is suitable for a limited 4-quadrant operation. The braking energy, refed into the DC-
bus at generatoric operation, is dissipated over the braking transistor to the braking resistor.
Resistors
The braking resistor heats up during the braking process. If it is installed in a control
cabinet sufficient cooling of the control cabinet interior and sufficient distance to the
KEB COMBIVERT must be observed.

Different braking resistors are available for the KEB COMBIVERT. Please refer to the
next page for the corresponding formula and restrictions (valid range)

1. Preset desired braking time.

2. Calculate braking time without braking resistor (tBmin).

3. If the desired braking time shall be smaller than the calculated time, it is necessay
to use a braking resistor. (tB < tBmin)

4. Calculate braking torque (MB). Take the load torque into account at the calculation.

5. Calculate peak braking power (PB). The peak braking power must always be
calculated for the worst case (nmax to standstill).

6. Selection of braking resistor:

a) PR > PB
b) PN is to be selected according to the cycle time (c.d.f.).
The braking resistors may be used only for the listed unit sizes. The maximum
cyclic duration of a braking resistor shall not be exceeded.

6 % c.d.f. = maximum braking time 8s

25 % c.d.f. = maximum braking time 30 s
40 % c.d.f. = maximum braking time 48 s

For longer cyclic duration times special designed braking resistors are necessary.
The continuous output of the braking transistor must be taken into consideration.

7. Check, whether the desired braking time is attained with the braking resistor
(tBmin).

Restriction: Under consideration of the rating of the braking resistor and the
brake power of the motor, the braking torque may not exceed 1.5times of the
rating torque of the motor.
When utilizing the maximum possible braking torque the frequency inverter must
be dimensioned for the higher current.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

Braking time DEC The braking time DEC is adjusted at the frequency inverter. If it is chosen too
small the KEB COMBIVERT switches off automatically and the error message
OP or OC appears. The approximate braking time can be determined according to
following formulae.

Formula 1. Braking time without braking resistor 2. Braking torque (necessary)

(JM + JL) • (n1 - n2) (JM + JL) • (n1 - n2)

tBmin = MB = - ML
9,55 • (K • MN + ML) 9,55 • tB

Valid range: n1 > nN Condition: MB < 1.5 • MN

(Field weakening range) f < 70 Hz

3. Peak braking power 4. Braking time with braking resistor

MB • n1 (JM + JL) • (n1 - n2)

PB = tBmin * =
9,55 PR • 9,55
9,55 • ( K• MN+ ML+ )
(n1 - n2)

Condition: PB < PR Valid range: n1 > nN

PR • 9,55
Condition: < MN • (1,5 -K)
(n1 - n2)

f < 70 Hz
PB < PR

JM = mass moment of inertia motor [kgm2]

K = 0,25 for motors up to 1,5 kW JL = mass moment of inertia load [kgm2]
0,20 for motors 2,2 to 4 kW n1 = motor speed prior to deceleration [rpm]
0,15 for motors 5,5 to 11 kW n2 = motor speed after deceleration [rpm]
0,08 for motors 15 to 45 kW (standstill= 0 rpm)
0,05 for motors > 45 kW nN = rated motor speed [rpm]
MN = rated motor torque [Nm]
MB = braking torque (necessary) [Nm] 10
ML = load torque [Nm]
tB = braking time (necessary) [s]
tBmin = minimum braking time [s]
tZ = cycle time [s]
PB = peak braking power [W]
PR = peak power of braking resistor [W]

Cyclic duration factor (cdf) Cyclic duration factor for cycle time tZ < 120 s Cyclic duration factor for cycle time tZ > 120 s
tB tB
cdf = • 100 % cdf = • 100 %
tZ 120 s
f

t
tB

10.1.3 Cable and Fuses By means of this section you can check whether you can still optimize your machine
with regard to the material usage. The specifications are derived from the DIN VDE
0298 Part 4. The values apply approximately and only for the intended operation. In
border cases always proceed in accordance with the above standard. The following
table shows the current-carrying capacity of 3- and/or 5-wire PVC cables (i.e. 2 and/or
3 loaded wires) in dependence on the ambient temperature. The current is to be laid
out to the input current of the frequency inverter.

Cross section of feed cable Current in [A] at

Standard Alternatively 30°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
0,5 mm² - 7 6 6 5
0,75 mm² - 12 10 10 9
1 mm² - 15 13 13 11
1,5 mm² - 18 16 15 13
2,5 mm² - 26 23 22 18
4 mm² 2 x 1,5 mm² 34 30 29 24
6 mm² 2 x 2,5 mm² 44 38 37 31
10 mm² 2 x 4 mm² 61 53 51 43
16 mm² 2 x 6 mm² 82 71 69 58
25 mm² 2 x 10 mm² 108 94 91 77
35 mm² 2 x 16 mm² 135 117 113 96
50 mm² 2 x 16 mm² 168 146 141 119
70 mm² 2 x 25 mm² 207 180 174 147
95 mm² 2 x 35 mm² 250 218 210 178
120 mm² 2 x 50 mm² 292 254 245 207
150 mm² 2 x 50 mm² 330 287 277 234
185 mm² 2 x 70 mm² 394 343 331 280
240 mm² 2 x 95 mm² 450 392 378 320
300 mm² 2 x 95 mm² 507 441 426 360
400 mm² 2 x 150 mm² 661 575 555 469
500 mm² 2 x 185 mm² 774 673 650 550

The use of special cables or the way of laying the cables allows even higher currents
(see DIN VDE 0298 Part 4). The motor cable must correspond to the cross-section of
the mains cable.
If in the case of long lines (>30m) still maximum torque is required at the motor shaft,
the cable should be dimensioned for the next larger cross-section in order to reduce
line resistances.

Mains fuses are to be designed for the rated input current of the inverter. The current/
time-characteristic of the fuse must be slow-acting in order to avoid premature tripping
when utilizing the power reserves of the inverter.

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

4. Operation

5. Parameter

6. Functions

7. Start-up

8. Special Operation

9. Error Assistance

10. Project Planning

11.1.1 Available Hardware ................. 3

11. Networks 11.1 Network Components
11.1.2 RS232-Cable PC/Inverter ....... 3
11.1.3 HSP5-Cable ........................... 3
11.2 DRIVECOM-Parameters
11.1.4 Interface Operator .................. 4
11.1.5 Profibus Operator .................. 5
12. Annex 11.1.6 InterBus Operator .................. 6
11.1.7 CanOpen Operator ................. 7
11.1.8 Sercos Operator .................... 8

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

The KEB COMBIVERT F5 can be easily integrated into different networks. For that
11. Networks purpose the inverter is fitted with an operator that is appropriate for the respective
bus system. Following hardware components are available:

11.1 Network
– RS232-Cable PC/Operator Part No.: 00.58.025-001D
Components for operation with interface operator
11.1.1 Available Hardware
– HSP5-Adaptor PC/Control board Part No.: 00.F5.0C0-0001
for operation without operator; RS232 => TTL

– F5 Interface-Operator Part No.: 00.F5.060-2000

serial networks in RS232 or RS485-standard

– F5 Profibus-DP-Operator Part No.: 00.F5.060-3000

– F5 InterBus-Operator Part No.: 00.F5.060-4000

– InterBus-Remote bus interface connection Part-No.: 00.B0.0BK-K001

(in connection with Interface-Operator)

– F5 CanOpen-Operator Part No.: 00.F5.060-5000

– F5 Sercos-Operator Part No.: 00.F5.060-6000

11.1.2 RS232-Cable PC / The cable of 3m length is used for the direct RS232-connection between PC (9-pole
Operator SUB-D-connector) and operator.
00.58.025-001D
9-pole SUB-D coupling 9-pole SUB-D connector

2 2
3 3
5 7
Housing (PE)

PC F5-Operator
The RS232-cable is suitable exclusively for the communication between PC
11
and Operator. If the cable is plugged in directly onto the control board, it can
lead to the desctruction of the interface of the PC.

11.1.3 HSP5-Cable PC / The HSP5-cable is used for the direct connection between PC and control board.
Control Board The necessary conversion to TTL-level occurs in the cable.
00.F5.0C0-0001
9-pole SUB-D coupling 9-pole SUB-D connector
HSP5
TTL
PC

PC F5-Control board

11.1.4 Interface-Operator A potential-separated RS232/RS484 interface is integrated in the interface operator

00.F5.060-2000 (00.F5.060-2000). The telegram structure is compatible to protocol DIN 66019 and ANSI
X3.28 as well as to protocol expansion DIN 66019 II.

5 4 3 2 1

RS232/RS485
9 8 7 6

PIN Signal Meaning

1 – Reserved
2 TxD Transmission signal/RS232
3 RxD Receive signal/RS232
4 RxD-A (+) Receive signal A/RS485
5 RxD-B (-) Receive signal B/RS485
6 VP Supply voltage -Plus +5V (Imax=10mA)
7 GND Data reference potential; earth for VP
8 TxD-A (+) Transmission signal A/RS485
9 TxD-B (-) Transmission signal B/RS485

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

11.1.5 Profibus-DP- The PROFIBUS-DP-interface module realizes a passive user (Slave). This means
Operator that the PROFIBUS-DP-interface module only transmits, if it receives an enquiry for
that from the master.
00.F5.060-3000
The PROFIBUS-DP-protocol defines different operating conditions, that must be
executed first, before the actual user data can be exchanged. The responsible DP-
master must first parameterize and then configure his slaves. If these two functions
are successfully completed, the cyclic exchange of user data begins.

Fig. 11.1.5 Profibus-DP Operator

PAR (green): Parameterizing chanel

active

PDOUT (green): PDOUT-data are written to

the FI control.

PDIN (green): PDIN-data are read by the

FI control.

START E E (red): on ==> Inverter ready for

PAR ENTER FUNC.
operation
F/R SPEED
PDOUT STOP blinking ==> Inverter failure
PDIN off ==> No supply voltage

Diag: Diagnostic interface to the

Diag PC

PBS1: PROFIBUS-DP-interface
(socket-connector)

PBS2: PROFIBUS-DP-interface
(pin-connector)

ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
ANTRIEBSTECHNIK

11
PBS1 PBS2

11.1.6 InterBus Ope- The InterBus operator F5 is a slip-on operator with interbus 2-wire remote bus connection
rator for KEB COMBIVERT F5. The voltage supply occurs via the inverter, for an indepen-
dent supply it can also be fed in externally over the control terminal strip of the inverter.
00.F5.060-4000 Over the PCP channel 0, 1, 2 or 3 interbus register words can be configured for the
process data channel. Parallel to the field bus operation the operation via the integrated
display/keyboard as well as a further serial interface for diagnosis/parameterization
(COMBIVIS) is possible.

Fig. 11.1.6 InterBus Operator

BA (green)
On: Interbus runs
Blinking: Interbus was stopped by the
host
Off: Remote bus cable not available
or defective/host not in operation or
COM (green) defective
It lights in the case of communication via START
InterBus PCP or diagnostic interface ENTER FUNC. E (red)
F/R SPEED On: Ready for operation
STOP
RD (red) Blinking: Inverter failure
On: the remote bus interface (IB_out) was Off: No supply voltage
turned off by the host
RC (green)
Diag On: Remote bus ready for operation
Diagnostic interface to the PC Off: Remote bus cable not available
The diagnostic interface is connected to the or defective/host not in operation or
PC via an adaptor and a HS5P-cable. By way defective
of the PC-software COMBIVIS one has now
normal access to all inverter parameters. The
internal operator parameters like Interbus
process data length and occupation can be
read and adjusted or parameterized through
download. Alternatively a monitoring of the
InterBus PCP as well as the process data
channels can be carried out with the PC-
software HSP5-monitor.

Separately available accessory:

HSP5-cable between PC and adaptor
(Part-No: 00.F5.0C0-0001)
Adaptor D-Sub9/Western
ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
(Part-No: 00.F5.0C0-0002) ANTRIEBSTECHNIK

IB_in IB_out

1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1

6 7 8 9 9 8 7 6

IB_in IB_out
Remote bus input Remote bus output
(D-Sub 9-connector (D-Sub 9-bush)

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

11.1.7 CanOpen Opera- CAN is a Multi-Master-System. This means every nodes has access to the BUS and
tor can send telegrams. In order to prevent problems when two nodes simultaneously
access the BUS, the CAN-BUS has an arbitration phase which determines who may
00.F5.060-5000 continue to send his telegram. When there is a conflict in accessing BUS the user with
the lowest telegram number (identifier) has priority. This user then can completely
send his telegram without repeating the first part. All other nodes go into receiving
status and stop sending their telegram. The available telegram numbers in the CAN
version 2.0A are limited to 2032 identifiers (0...2031).

Fig. 11.1.7 CanOpen Operator

SDO (green): SDO-Communication

active

PDOUT(green): PDOUT-data are written to

the FI control.

PDIN(green): PDIN-data are read by the

FI control.
START E
SDO ENTER FUNC.
E (red): on => Inverter ready for
F/R SPEED
PDOUT STOP operation
PDIN blinking => Inverter in error
off => No supply voltage
Diag Diag: Diagnostic interface to the
PC

CAN f: CAN-interface
(socket-connector)

CAN m: CAN-interface
(pin-connector)

ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
11
CAN f CAN m

11.1.8 Sercos Operator The herein described unit is a plugable operator with SERCOS-interface for the frequency
00.F5.060-6000 inverter or servo KEB COMBIVERT F5. As far as possible the hard and software were
developed taking the DIN/EN 61491 into consideration. The voltage supply is made by
the inverter and as an independend external supply it can be made via the terminal
strip of the inverter. The SERCOS-interface is designed as optical fibre ring for plastic
(POF) or fibre glas cable (HCS) with F-SMA plugs. The SERCOS-service channel as
well as cyclic data transfer are available. Parallel to SERCOS-operation the operation
via integrated display/keyboard and also an additional serial interface for diagnosis /
parameterization (KEB COMBIVIS) is possible (depending on the operation mode
it may be disabled). SERCOS-operation parameters like slave address, transmitting
power etc. can be adjusted via the keyboard.

Picture11.1.8 Sercos-Operator

COM (green)
Lights up when access via the
SERCOS service channel

LWL (red)
Full brightness : no SERCOS-input
signal (LWL disconnected, previous
device switched off)
Low brightness: receive distortion of
START
the SERCOS input signal (transmitting
ENTER FUNC.
power of the previous device too high
COM F/R SPEED E or too low, incorrect baud rate)
STOP

LWL
E (red)
on => Inver ter/Servo ready for
Diag operation
blinking => Inverter/Servo in error
off => No supply voltage

Diag
Diagnostic interface to the PC

S-IN
SERCOS-input interface

S-OUT
SERCOS-output interface

ANTRIEBSTECHNIK

S-IN S-OUT

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

4. Operation

5. Parameter

6. Functions

7. Start-up

8. Special Operation

9. Error Assistance

10. Project Planning

11. Networks 11.1 Network Components

11.2.1 Adjustment of Inverter Address 3
11.2 Bus Parameters
11.2.2 Baud Rate ext. Bus ................ 3
11.2.3 Baud Rate int. Bus .................. 3
12. Annex
11.2.4 Watchdog-Time ....................... 3
11.2.5 Response to E.bus ................. 3
11.2.6 HSP5 Watchdog-Time ............. 3
11.2.7 Status and Control Word ......... 4
11.2.8 Speed Setting via Bus ............ 5
11.2.9 Used Parameters .................... 6

Chapter Section Page Date Name:Basis

11.2. Bus Parameters

11.2.1 Adjustment of The address under which the inverter is addressed by „COMBIVIS“ or another control
Inverter Address is adjusted via Sy.6. Values between 0 and 239 are possible, the default value is 1. If
several inverters are operated on the bus simultaneously, it is absolutely necessary to
(Sy.6) assign different addresses to them, since otherwise it leads to communication failures
because several inverters may answer at the same time.The description of the DIN
66019II protocol (C0.F5.01I-K001) contains further information to this. While loading
the default parameters there is no reset of Sy.6.
11.2.2 Baud Rate ext. Following values for the baud rate of the serial interface are possible:
Bus (Sy.7)
Parameter value Baud rate
0 1200 Baud
1 2400 Baud
2 4800 Baud
3 (default) 9600 Baud
4 19200 Baud
5 38400 Baud
6 55500 Baud

If the value for the baud rate is changed via the serial interface, it can be changed again
only by the keyboard or after adapting the baud rate of the master, as no communication
is possible with different baud rates of master and slave.
Should problems occur at the data transmission choose a transfer rate of maximal
38400 baud.

11.2.3 Baud Rate int. With the internal baud rate the transmission rate is defined between operator and
Bus (Sy.11) inverter. Following values are possible (dependent of the inverter):

Value Baudrate Value Baudrate Value Baudrate

3 9,6 kBaud 6 55,5 kBaud 9 115,2 kBaud
4 19,2 kBaud 7 57,6 kBaud 10 125 kBaud
5 38,4 kBaud 8 100 kBaud 11 250 kBaud

11.2.4 Watchdog-Time For a continual check it is possible to trigger an error message of the inverter at the
completion of an adjustable time (0.01...10 s) during which no telegram is received.
(Pn.6)
The function can be deactivated by adjusting the value „off“.
11
11.2.5 Response to This parameter determines the response to a Watchdog-error. Depending on the selected
E.bus (Pn.5) setting a message E.buS or A.buS is output (further information in Chapter 6.7.6).

11.2.6 HSP5 Watchdog The HSP5 Watchdog-function monitores the communication of the HSP5-interface
Time (sY.9) (control card - operator; or control card - PC). After expiration of an adjustable time
(0,01...10 s) without incoming telegrams, the response adjusted in Pn.5 is triggered.
The value „off“ deactivates the function.

11.2.7 Control and Status The control word is used for the status control of the inverter via bus. With the status
Word word the current state of the inverter is read out.

Control word low Sy.50 Some parameters must be adjusted as follows, so that the inverter can respond to
the control word.

Bit Function Description

0 Control release 0 = control release not given; 1= control release given; if
the control release is given via software, terminal ST
must be set. Moreover, all control releases are AND-
operated via software (di.1 Bit 0 and di.2 Bit 0 must be
set).
1 Reset Reset out of the change from 0 => 1
2 Run / Stop 0 = set rotation Stop; 1 = set rotation Run
(source of rotation op.1 = 8 or 9)
3 For / Rev 0 = set rotation forward; 1 = set rotation reverse
(source of set rotation op.1 = 8 or 9)
4-6 Current Set 0...7 = parameter set 0...7 (source of set selection fr.2 = 5)
7 reserved
8 Fast stop 0 = fast stop inactive; 1 = fast stop active
9 Ref. Start 1 = starts the homing procedure
10 Posi Start 1 = starts the positioning
11 reserved
12-13 Mode 1 = synchron running; 2 = positioning; 3= contouring mode
14-15 reserved

Control word high Sy.41 The control word high is bit-coded and structured as follows.

Bit Function Description

16 I1 Or-operation with di.2 Bit 4
17 I2 Or-operation with di.2 Bit 5
18 I3 Or-operation with di.2 Bit 6
19 I4 Or-operation with di.2 Bit 7
20 IA Or-operation with di.2 Bit 8
21 IB Or-operation with di.2 Bit 9
22 IC Or-operation with di.2 Bit 10
23 ID Or-operation with di.2 Bit 11
24 O1 Or-operation with ru.25 Bit 0
25 O2 Or-operation with ru.25 Bit 1
26 R1 Or-operation with ru.25 Bit 2
27 R2 Or-operation with ru.25 Bit 3
28
... free
31

Control word long Sy.43 The control word long (32 Bit) consists of Sy.51 and Sy.42.

Chapter Section Page Date Name:Basis

Status word low Sy.51 The current state of the inverter can be read out with the status word.

Bit Function Description

0 Control release 0=control release not given; 1=control release given
(AND-operated with di.1 Bit 0)
1 Error 0=no error; 1=an error occurred
2 Run / Stop 0=actual rotation Stop; 1=actual rotation Run
3 For / Rev 0=actual rotation forward; 1=actual rotation reverse
4-6 Current set Indication of current parameter set
7 Free
8 Fast stop 0 = fast stop inactive; 1 = fast stop active
9 sychronous 1 = Sercos bus synchronize reached
10 Ref mode 1 = homing procedure completed
11 Postion 1 = Position reached
reached
12-13 Mode 1 = synchron running; 2 = positioning; 3= contouring mode
14-15 reserved

Status word high Sy.42 The status word high is bit-coded and structured as follows.

Bit Function Beschreibung

16 I1 Status ru.22 Bit 4
17 I2 Status ru.22 Bit 5
18 I3 Status ru.22 Bit 6
19 I4 Status ru.22 Bit 7
20 IA Status ru.22 Bit 8
21 IB Status ru.22 Bit 9
22 IC Status ru.22 Bit 10
23 ID Status ru.22 Bit 11
24 O1 Status ru.25 Bit 0
25 O2 Status ru.25 Bit 1
26 R1 Status ru.25 Bit 2
27 R2 Status ru.25 Bit 3
28 OA Status ru.25 Bit 4
29 OB Status ru.25 Bit 5
30 OC Status ru.25 Bit 6
31 OD Status ru.25 Bit 7
11

Status word long Sy.44 The status word long (32 Bit) consists of Sy.51 and Sy.42.

11.2.8 Speed Setting via

Bus
Setpoint speed Sy.52 Preadjustment of the setpoint speed in the range of ±16000 rpm. The source of
direction of rotation is determined via oP.1, just as with the other absolute setpoint
sources. The setpoint source oP.0 must be adjusted to „5“ via Sy.52 for setpoint
setting.

Actual speed Sy.53 Via this parameter the current actual speed can be read out in rpm. The direction of
rotation is signalled by the sign.

11.2.9 Used Parameters

R/W PROG. ENTER

Param. Adr. min max Step default

Pn.5 0405h ✔ - - 0 6 1 6 -

Pn.6 0406h ✔ - - 0.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0.00 = off

Sy.6 0006h ✔ - ✔ 0 239 1 1 -

Sy.7 0007h ✔ - ✔ 0 6 1 3 -

Sy.9 0009h ✔ - - 0.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0.00 = off

Sy.11 000Bh ✔ - ✔ 3 11 1 5 -

Sy.41 0029h ✔ - ✔ 0 65536 1 0 -

Sy.42 002Ah - - - 0 65536 1 0 -

Sy.43 0032h ✔ - ✔ -2 31
2 31-1
1 0 -
Sy.44 0033h - - - -231 231-1 1 0 -

Sy.50 0032h ✔ - ✔ 0 65536 1 0 -

Sy.51 0033h - - - 0 65536 1 0 -

Sy.52 0034h ✔ - - -16000 rpm 16000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm -

Sy.53 0035h ✔ - - -16000 rpm 16000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm -

Chapter Section Page Date Name:Basis

1. Introduction

2. Summary

3. Hardware

4. Operation

5. Parameter

6. Functions

7. Start-up

8. Special Operation

9. Error Assistance

10. Project Planning

11. Networks

13.1.1 Index ....................................... 3

12. Annex 13.1 Search and Find 13.1.2 KEB - Worldwide ................... 11
13.1.3 Domestic Representations .... 13

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

12. Annex A B
Ablauf 8.1.4 Base-Block
12.1 Search and Find An. 0 6.2.4 Time 6.7.9
An. 1 6.2.5 Baud Rate 11.2.3
12.1.1 Index An. 2 6.2.5 Betriebs
An. 3 6.2.5, 6.3.8 -daten 6.1.3
An. 4 6.2.6 -stundenzähler 6.1.15
An. 5...7 6.2.7 Boost 6.5.4
An. 8 6.2.8 Braking
An. 9 6.2.8 resistors 10.1.4
An.10 6.2.4
An.11 6.2.5 C
An.12 6.2.5 CAN-Bus 11.1.3
An.13 6.2.5, 6.3.8 cn. 0 6.12.5
An.14 6.2.6 cn. 1 6.12.5
An.15...17 6.2.7 cn. 2 6.12.6
An.18 6.2.8 cn. 3 6.12.6
An.20 6.2.4 cn. 4...9 6.12.3
An.21 6.2.5 cn.10...14 6.12.4
An.22 6.2.5 cn.11...13 6.3.8
An.23 6.2.5, 6.3.8 Control
An.24 6.2.6 cabinet 10.1.3
An.25 6.2.7 units 3.1.3
An.26 6.2.7 CP-parameter 4.3.3, 6.13.3
An.27 6.2.7 assignment 6.13.4
An.28 6.2.8 CP. 0 6.13.3
An.29 6.2.8 cS. 0 6.6.11
An.30 6.2.9 cS. 1 6.6.14
An.31...45 6.2.11 cS. 6...12 6.6.14
An.32 6.2.10 cS.1 6.11.13
An.41 8.1.3 cS.15 6.6.7, 6.6.15
An.43 8.1.3 cS.16 6.6.15
An.44 8.1.3 cS.18 6.6.15
An.46 6.2.13, 8.1.3 cS.19 6.6.15
An.47 8.1.3 cS.20 6.6.7
An.49 8.1.3 cS.24 6.6.14
An.50 8.1.3 Customer Mode 4.1.3
An.52 8.1.3
An.57 6.9.34 D
Analog DASM
inputs 6.2.5 Drehzahl für Mmax 6.6.8
save mode 6.2.5 Feldschwächedrehzahl 6.6.8
Analogausgang Mmax bei dr.18 6.6.8
Anzeige 6.1.14 Nennmoment 6.6.8
Analoge 12
Delta Boost 6.5.4
Sollwerte 6.4.4 di. 0 6.3.3
Application Mode 4.1.3 di. 1 6.3.4
Ausgangs di. 2 6.3.4
-flags di. 3...5 6.3.5
Status 6.1.11 di. 6...8 6.3.6
-klemmen 6.1.12 di. 9 6.3.8
Status 6.1.12 di.11...22 6.3.9
-spannung 6.1.9 Digitale
AUX Sollwerte 6.4.4
Anzeige 6.1.17

dmin/dmax 6.9.30 conform installation 7.1.3 InterBus

do. 0...7 6.3.13 Encoder Loop 11.1.6
do. 8...24 6.3.16 power supply 6.10.7 operator 11.1.3
do.25...41 6.3.17 track change 6.10.11 Interface
do.42 6.3.18 Endstufentemperatur 6.1.15 definition 6.10.5
dr. 6 6.6.4 ENTER-parameter 4.1.4 operator 11.1.3
dr. 7 6.6.5 Error interference voltage supply 3.1.6
dr.11 6.7.15 assistance 9.1.3 Introduction 1.1.7
dr.12 6.7.15 messages 9.1.3 Istwertquelle 6.11.13
dr.14...20 6.6.8
dr.21 6.6.12 F K
dr.23...31 6.6.9 Factory setting 4.3.4 KI
Drehzahl Fehler Drehzahl 6.6.14
-regelung 6.6.14 Letzter 6.1.23 Fluß 6.6.13
Drive-Mode 4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.4.3 Filterung 8.1.7 Wirkstrom 6.6.12
dS. 0 6.6.12 Fluß KP
dS. 1 6.6.12 -regelung 6.6.13 Begrenzung 6.6.14
dS. 4 6.6.13 Fr. 1 6.8.4 Drehzahl 6.6.14
dS. 7 6.6.13 Fr. 2...4 6.8.5 Fluß 6.6.13
dS. 8 6.6.13 Fr. 3 6.8.8 Wirkstrom 6.6.12
dS. 9 6.6.13 Fr. 5 6.8.8 Kühlkörpertemperatur 6.1.15, 6.1.17
dS.11...13 6.6.13 Fr. 6 6.8.8 Kühlwasserqualität 8.1.7
DSM Fr. 7 6.3.8, 6.8.6
Nenndrehzahl 6.6.9 Fr. 8 6.7.15 L
Nennfrequenz 6.6.9 Fr. 9 6.8.4 LA-/LD-Stop 6.3.15, 6.7.3
Nennmoment 6.6.9 Fr.10 6.6.6 LE. 0...7 6.3.22
Nennstrom 6.6.9 Fr.11 6.3.8, 6.8.7 LE. 8...15 6.3.15
Function principle 2.1.3 LE.16 6.3.15
E
Fundamentals 4.1.3 LE.17 6.3.8, 6.9.12
E.OL 6.1.15 LE.18 6.9.12
Ec. 0 6.10.10 G
LE.19 6.3.8, 6.9.12
Ec. 1 6.10.10 Geber LE.20 6.9.13
Ec. 2 6.10.12 -interface 6.11.3 LE.21 6.9.11
Ec. 3 6.10.10 GTR7 6.7.19 LE.22 6.3.8, 6.9.12
Ec. 4 6.10.11 Eingangswahl 6.7.19 LE.23 6.9.12
Ec. 5 6.10.11 LE.24 6.3.8, 6.9.12
Ec. 6 6.10.11 H LE.25 6.9.13
Ec. 7 6.10.11 Hardware 3.1.3 LE.26 6.9.11
Ec.10 6.10.10 High-Torque-Modus 6.5.3 Leakage inductance 6.6.5
Ec.11 6.10.10 LED 4.4.3
Ec.12 6.10.12 I Leerlaufspannung 6.6.12
Ec.13 6.10.10 Limiter 6.4.15
In. 0 6.1.21
Ec.14 6.10.11
In. 1 6.1.21 M
Ec.15 6.10.11
In. 3...6 6.1.22
Ec.16 6.10.11 Master Quelle 6.11.13
In. 7 6.1.22
Ec.17 6.10.11 max. Moment 6.6.8
In.10...17 6.1.23
Ec.20...23 6.10.14 Max. operating frequency 6.10.8
In.22...30 6.1.23
Ec.25 6.10.14 Modulations
In.31 6.1.24
Ec.27 6.10.12 -grad 6.1.15
In.5 6.10.5
ED 10.1.4 -stundenzähler 6.1.15
Incremental encoder
Eingangs Modus 6.9.27
input 6.10.5
-klemmen Motor
output 6.10.6
Status 6.1.10 -anpassung 6.6.6
Index 6.11.16
-klemmenstatus 6.1.10 -daten
Initial Start-up 7.2.3
EMC einstellen 6.6.3
Installation and connection 7.1.3
Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis
© KEB Antriebstechnik, 2002
12 1 4 10.04.02 KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S All Rights reserved
Search and Find Annex

-nenn Reset 6.12.4 PS.23 6.11.16, 6.11.17

-drehzahl 6.6.9 Pn. 0...2 6.7.7 PS.24 6.11.16, 6.11.17
-frequenz 6.6.9 Pn. 3 6.7.10 PS.25 6.11.16
-strom 6.6.9 Pn. 4 6.3.8, 6.7.9 PS.26 6.11.16, 6.11.17
-parameteradaption Pn. 5 6.7.10, 11.2.3 PS.27 6.11.16, 6.11.17
Aktivierung 6.6.13 Pn. 6 6.7.10, 11.2.3 PS.28 6.11.17
-ständerwiderstand 6.6.4 Pn. 7 6.7.11 PT1-Zeitkonstante 6.5.5
-temperatur 6.1.16 Pn. 8 6.7.11
-typenschild 6.6.3 Pn. 9 6.7.10 Q
Motorpoti 6.4.4 Pn.10...15 6.7.11 QS-Nummer 6.1.23
-funktion 6.4.4 Pn.10...17 6.3.15
aktueller Wert 6.1.14 Pn.12 6.7.18 R
Pn.13 6.7.18 Rampen
N Pn.14 6.7.16 -generator 6.4.13
Netz-Aus Pn.16...18 6.7.12 Referenz
Regler 6.9.21 Pn.19...21 6.7.5 -geschwindigkeit 6.11.8
NPN 6.3.4 Pn.22...25 6.7.3 Reset 3.1.5
Pn.23 6.3.8 Resetting of
O Pn.26 6.7.7 error messages 4.1.5
oP. 0 6.4.4, 6.9.9 Pn.27 6.7.7 peak values 4.1.5
oP. 1 6.4.6, 6.9.9 Pn.28 6.9.4 Rotation
oP. 3 6.4.4 Pn.28...32 6.9.3 setting 4.4.4
oP. 5 6.4.4 Pn.29 6.9.4 Rotoradaption
oP. 6...15 6.4.11 Pn.34...37 6.9.15 Faktor 6.1.18
oP.10 6.4.16 Pn.39...41 6.9.15 RS232/485 11.1.3
oP.18...23 6.4.9 Pn.43 6.9.15 ru-parameter
oP.27 6.4.16 Pn.44 6.9.19 description 6.1.6
oP.40 6.4.15, 6.4.18 Pn.45 6.9.19, 6.9.20, 6.9.21 ru. 0...3 6.1.6
oP.41 6.4.15, 6.4.18 Pn.46 6.9.20, 6.9.21 ru. 9...12 6.1.7
oP.44 6.9.27 Pn.47...56 6.9.21 ru.13 6.12.6
oP.45 6.9.27 Pn.58...60 6.7.13 ru.13...16 6.1.8
oP.46 6.9.27, 6.9.30 Pn.61 6.7.13 ru.14 6.3.5
oP.47 6.9.28 Pn.62 6.7.11 ru.15 6.3.18, 6.7.15
oP.48 6.9.28 Pn.63 6.9.31 ru.17 6.12.6
oP.49 6.9.30 Pn.64 6.7.19 ru.17...20 6.1.9
oP.50 6.9.8 Pn.65 6.7.19 ru.18 6.12.6
oP.52 6.9.9 PNP / NPN 6.3.3 ru.21 6.1.10, 6.3.5
oP.53 6.9.8 Posi-/Synchronmodus 6.11.12 ru.22 6.1.10
oP.54 6.9.8 Posi/Sync Modus 6.11.3 ru.23 6.1.11
oP.56...59 6.9.8 Posi/Synch Eingangswahl 6.11.15 ru.24 6.1.11
oP.62 6.4.13 Positioniermodul 6.11.3 ru.25...28 6.1.12
Power Factor Control 2.1.5 ru.28 6.12.6
P Profibus-DP 11.1.3 ru.29...32 6.1.13
Project Planning 10.1.3 ru.30 6.12.6
Parameter 4.1.3, 5.1.3
PS. 0...2 6.11.3 ru.33...36 6.2.12 12
description 6.1.5
PS. 3...5 6.11.4 ru.33...37 6.1.14
designation 4.1.3
PS. 6 6.11.5 ru.38...43 6.1.15
groups 4.1.3
PS. 9 6.11.5 ru.43 6.9.12
non-programmable 4.1.5
PS.0 6.11.12 ru.44 6.9.12
set 4.1.3
PS.1 6.11.13 ru.44...48 6.1.16
value 4.1.3
PS.14 6.11.6 ru.49 6.6.15
Password 4.2.4
PS.17 6.11.8 ru.49...54 6.1.17, 6.1.19
levels 4.2.3
PS.19 6.11.8 ru.53 6.12.6
structure 4.2.3
PS.2 6.11.15, 6.11.16 ru.54 6.11.5
PFC. Siehe Power Factor Control
PS.21 6.11.8 ru.56 6.1.17, 6.11.5
PID

ru.58 6.1.18, 6.1.19, 6.11.5 T

ru.59 6.1.18, 6.1.19, 6.1.20
ru.68 6.1.18 Temperatur
-mode 6.1.23
S Temperaturregelung 8.1.3
Timer 6.9.11
Scheinstrom 6.1.8
Torque limit 6.7.13
Spitzenwert 6.1.8
Trouble shooting 9.1.3
Scope Timer 6.1.26
Type code 2.1.5
Selection
of a parameter 4.1.4 U
Service 4.2.3
Slave ud. 1 4.2.3
-position 6.1.17 ud. 2 6.5.3
Software ud. 9 4.4.3
-datum 6.1.22 ud.15 6.13.3
Sollmoment 6.1.7 ud.16 6.13.4
-grenze 6.1.16 ud.17 6.13.4
Sollwert 6.4.4 ud.18...21 6.13.6
Specifications 2.1.6 uF. 0...5 6.5.4
Speed uF. 9 6.5.5
key 4.4.3 uF.11 6.5.6
Sprungfaktor 6.9.20 uF.12...14 6.7.9
Stall 6.3.15 uF.18 6.7.9
Acc/Dec time 6.7.6 uF.19 6.5.5
level 6.7.6 Umrichter
Start -nennstrom 6.1.21
key 4.4.3 -typ 6.1.21
up 7.1.3 Uzk
Start-up PT1-Zeitkonstante 6.5.5
closed-loop 7.2.5 W
controlled 7.2.3
Startindex 6.11.17 Watchdog 11.2.3
Stop-key 4.4.3 Wieder
Strom -anlauf
-regelung 6.6.12 -verzögerung 6.9.23
Sy. 2 6.1.25 Winkeldifferenz 6.1.18
Sy. 3 6.1.25 Wirkstrom 6.1.9
Sy. 6 6.1.25, 11.2.3
Z
Sy. 7 6.1.25, 11.2.3
Sy.11 6.1.26, 11.2.3 Zulauf 8.1.4
Sy.32 6.1.26 Zwischenkreis
Sy.50 11.2.4 -spannung 6.1.9
Sy.50...52 6.1.27
Sy.50...53 11.2.4, 11.2.5
Sy.51 11.2.5
Sy.52 11.2.5
Sy.53 6.1.28, 11.2.5
Sy.56 6.1.26, 6.1.27, 6.1.28
Synchronlauf
KP 6.11.5
Master Quelle 6.11.4
Synchronmotore 6.7.19

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

12.1.2 KEB- Worldwide Organizacni slozka

Kostelini 32/1226 I KEB Italia S.r.l.
CZ - 370 04 Ceske Budejovice Via Newton, 2
Fon: 00420/38/7319223 I - 20019 Settimo Milanese (Milano)
A KEB-Antriebstechnik Austria GmbH Fax: 00420/38/7330697 Fon: 0039/02/33500782
H Ritzstraße 8 0039/02/33500814
SK A - 4614 Marchtrenk DK REGAL A/S Fax: 0039/02/33500790
Fon: 0043/7243/53586-0 Industrievej 4 Mail: [email protected]
Fax: 0043/7243/53586-21 DK - 4000 Roskilde I-Net: www.keb.it
Mail: [email protected] Fon: 0045/4677/7000
Fax: 0045/4675762 IL OMEGA Engineering Ltd.
AUS Australien Industrial Machinery Mail: [email protected] P.O. Box 1092
Services A.I.M.S PTY Ltd. I-Net: www.regal.dk IL - 44110 Kfar-Saba
Unit 3/45 Horne St. Fon: 00972/9/7673240
AUS - Campbellfield 3061 Victoria E ELION S.A. Fax: 00972/9/7673398
Fon: 0061/3/9359/0228 Farell 9 Mail: [email protected]
Fax: 0061/3/9359/0286 E - 08014 Barcelona I-Net: www.omegae.co.il
Mail: Fon: 0034/93/2982000
[email protected] Fax: 0034/93/4314133 IND PEASS INDUSTRIAL ENG. LTD.
I-Net: www.aimservices.com.au Mail: [email protected] Merchant Chambers, 2nd Floor
I-Net: www.elion.es 41, New Marine Lines
B KEB Antriebstechnik IND - Bombay 400020
Vertriebsbüro Belgien ET Tarek El Sehelly Fon: 0091/22/2310561 bis 566
Herenveld 2 P.o.Box 83 Fax: 0091/22/2310570
B - 9500 Geraadsbergen ET - Mehalla El Kobra Mail: [email protected]
Fon: 0032/54437860 Fon: 0020/402243839
Fax: 0032/54437898 Fax: 0020/402235753 J KEB - YAMAKYU Ltd.
Mail: [email protected] 15 - 16, 2 - Chome
F Société Francaise KEB Takanawa Minato-ku
BOL Ergovial Ltda. Z.I. de la Croix St. Nicolas J - Tokyo 108 - 0074
AV. Banzer Km 6, 5 14, rue Gustave Eiffel Fon: 0081/33/445-8515
BOL - Santa Cruz F - 94510 LA QUEUE EN BRIE Fax: 0081/33/445-8215
Fon: 00591/33/443349 Fon: 0033/1/49620101 Mail: [email protected]
Fax: 00591/33/426841 Fax: 0033/1/45767495
Mail: [email protected] Mail: [email protected] J KEB - YAMAKYU Ltd.
I-Net: www.ergovial.com.bo 711, Fukudayama, Fukuda
FIN Advancetec Oy J - Shinjo-Shi, Yamagata 996 - 0053
BR Brastronic Malminkaari 10 B Fon: 0081/233/29-2800
Comercico e Servicos Ltda PL 149 Fax: 0081/233/29-2802
Rua Constantino de Souza 184 FIN - 00701 Helsinki Mail: [email protected]
BR - CEP 04605-000 Fon: 00358/9/3505260
Campo Belo Sao Paulo Fax: 00358/9/35052660 LV Energy Line
Fon: 0055/11/55633101 Mail: [email protected] Ranka Dambis1, Riga
Fax: 0055/11/55633101 I-Net: www.advancetec.fi Lativa, LV – 1048
Fon: 00371/7317619090
CH Stamm Industrieprodukte AG GB KEB (UK) Ltd. Fax: 00371/7317619023
Hofstraße 106 6 Chieftain Business Park Mail: [email protected]
CH - 8620 Wetzikon Morris Close
Fon: 0041/1/9346010 Park Farm, Wellingborough NL Marsman Elektronica
Fax: 0041/1/9346039 GB - Northants, NN8 6 XF En Aandrijvingen BV
Mail: [email protected] Fon: 0044/1933/402220 Zeearend 16
I-Net: www.stammweb.ch Fax: 0044/1933/400724 NL - 7609 PT Almelo
Mail: [email protected] Fon: 0031/546/812121
CHN KEB China I-Net: www.keb-uk.co.uk Fax: 0031/546/810655
Karl E. Brinkmann GmbH Mail: [email protected]
Shanghai Representative Office GR ELMO L.T.D. I-Net: www.marsman-almelo.nl
Far East International Pl. B1210-1211 Power Transmission & Engineering
12
No. 299 Xianxia Road 18, Athinon NZ Renold New Zealand Limited
CHN - 200051 Shanghai, PR. China GR - 18540 Piraeus P.O. Box 19460
Fon: 0086/21/62350922 Fon: 0030/10/4120150 NZ - Avondale Auckland
0086/21/52574020 Fax: 0030/10/4176319 Fon: 0064/9/8285018
Fax: 0086/21/62350015 Mail: [email protected] Fax: 0064/9/8285019
Mail: [email protected] I-Net: www.elmo-gr.com Mail: [email protected]
I-Net: www.keb-cn.com I-Net: www.renold.co.nz

CZ KEB Antriebstechnik Austria GmbH

USA KEBCO Inc.

NZ Vectek Electronics Ltd. RSA P E C S Pneumatic Electric 1335 Mendota Heights Road
21 Carnegie Road, Onekawa Control Systems (PTY) Ltd. USA - Mendota Heights, MN 55120
NZ - Napier P.O. Box 47396 Fon: 001/651/4546162
Fon: 0064/6/8431400 8, Balance Road, Stamford Hill 4001 Fax: 001/651/4546198
Fax: 0064/6/8430398 RSA - Durban / Greyville 4023 Mail: [email protected]
Mail: [email protected] Fon: 0027/31/3033701 I-Net: www.kebco.com
I-Net: www.vectek.co.nz Fax: 0027/31/3127421
Mail: [email protected] UZ Mehatronika-TES
I-Net: Str. Druzhba Narodov, 52
P KEB Portugal www.pecs.powertransmission.co.za UZ - 700135 Tashkent
Lugar de Salgueiros–Pavilhao A Fon: 00998/71/1167316
Mouquim RUS FRUCTONADE Engineering Ltd. Fax: 00998/71/1167316
P - 4760 V. N. Famalicao ul. Vyborgskaya 22 of 62 Mail: [email protected]
Fon: 00351/252/371 318 RUS - 125130 Moskow / Russia
Fax: 00351/252/371 320 Fon: 007/095/797-8856 07/2001
Mail: [email protected] Fax: 007/095/450-0165
007/095/450-0043
PA Associated Textile Consultants (ATC) Mail: [email protected]
Private LTD
219, The Forum, G-20, Block-9 S REVA - drivteknik AB
Khayaban-e-Jami, Clifton Slussgatan 13
PA - 75600 Karachi S - 21130 Malmö
Fon: 0092-21-5821241 ... 6 Fon: 0046/4077110
Fax: 0092-21-5821559 / 5821247 Fax: 0046/4079994
Mail: [email protected] Mail: [email protected]
I-Net: www.revadrivteknik.se

RA Eurotrans S.r.l. THA INNOTECH Solution Co. Ltd.

Sarmiento 2759 518 Nec Buildung, 5th Floor
San Fernando B 1646 EDE Ratchadapisek Road
RA - Pcia. de Buenos Aires THA - Huaykwang, 10320 Bangkok
Fon: 0054/11/4744-3366 Fon: 0066/2/5414130
Fax: 0054/11/4744-3366 Fax: 0066/2/5414129
Mail: [email protected] Mail: [email protected]
I-Net: www.eurotrans.com.ar
TN H2M
RCH EMET LTDA. 13, Rue El Moutanabi
El Libano #2770, Macul TN - 2037, El Menzah 7
RCH - Santiago, Chile Fon: 00216/1/860808
Fon: 0056/2/2712147 Fax: 00216/1/861433
Fax: 0056/2/2710317 Mail: [email protected]
Mail: [email protected]
I-Net: www.emet.cl TR MEGA Mekanik Ve Elektrik Güc
Aktarma San. Ve Tic., Ltd. Sti
ROC KEB Taiwan Ltd. Acisu Sok 9/11 D4
1 F, No. 19-5, Shi Chou Rd, TR - Macka Istanbul
Tounan Town Fon: 0090/212/2596979
R.O.C. - Yin-Lin Hsian, Taiwan Fax: 0090/212/2599815
Fon: 00886/5/596 4242
Fax: 00886/5/596 4240 TR TEPEKS Elektronik Sanayi Ve
Mail: [email protected] Ticaret Ltd. Sirketj
Harman Cad. Ali Kaya Sok. No. 4
ROM ADF Industries srl POLAT Plaza B. Blok Kat 5
Bucarest Sec. 3, Str. Baraj Bicaz TR - 80640 Levent, Istanbul
Nr.2 – 4, M25 Ap 110 Fon: 0090/212/3252530
PO 74661 Fax.: 0090/212/3252535
ROM - Bucarest Mail: [email protected]
Fon: 0040/1/94347138 I-Net: www.tepeks.com
Fax: 0040/1/3403224
Mail: [email protected] UA MARKET-K
Of. 2, 62 B, Vishnevetskogo Str.
UA – 257002 Cherkassy
Fon: 00380/472/540617
Fax: 00380/472/540614
Mail: market-k@market-
k.cherkassy.ua

Chapter Section Page Date Name: Basis

12.1.3 Domestic Representations

teilweise KEB Antriebstechnik GmbH & Co. KG

Sachsen und Wildbacher Straße 5
Thüringen 08289 Schneeberg Baden-Württ. Laipple / Brinkmann GmbH
Tel.: (0 37 72) 67-0 Saarland Ziegelhau 13
Fax: (0 37 72) 6 72 81 teilweise 73099 Adelberg
E-mail: [email protected] Rheinland-Pfalz Tel.: (0 71 66) 9 10 01-0
Fax: (0 71 66) 9 10 01-26
E-mail: [email protected]
Brandenburg Schumer Ingenieurgesellschaft mbH Internet: laipple-keb.de
Mecklenburg-Vorp. Gottschallstraße 11
Sachsen-Anhalt 04157 Leipzig
teilweise Sachsen Tel.: (03 41) 9 12 95 11 Bayern Süd KEB Antriebstechnik
und Thüringen Fax: (03 41) 9 12 95 39 Vertrieb Süd
E-mail: [email protected] Büro Schwindegg
Internet: www.schumer.de Wehrstraße 3
84419 Schwindegg
Tel.: (0 80 82) 57 32 + 58 37
Hamburg KEB Antriebstechnik Fax: (0 80 82) 57 30
Schleswig-Holstein Vertrieb Nord E-mail: [email protected]
Bremen Knüll 9a Internet: www.keb.de
teilweise 21698 Bargstedt
Niedersachsen Tel.: (0 41 64) 62 33
Fax: (0 41 64) 62 55 KEB Antriebstechnik
E-mail: [email protected] Vertrieb Süd
Internet: www.keb.de Büro Nürnberg
Haidelbacher Straße 2
91227 Leinburg
NRW Ost KEB-Antriebstechnik Tel.: (0 91 20) 62 87
teilweise Vertrieb West Fax: (0 91 20) 62 75
Niedersachsen Gartenstraße 18 E-mail: [email protected]
33775 Versmold Internet: www.keb.de
Tel.: (0 54 23) 94 72-0
Fax: (0 54 23) 94 72-20
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.keb.de

NRW West Ing. Büro für rationelle Antriebe

Horst Thomalla GmbH
Vorsterstraße 448
41169 Mönchengladbach
Tel.: (0 21 61) 55 62 62
Fax: (0 21 61) 55 78 68
E-mail: [email protected]

Hessen KEB Antriebstechnik

teilweise Vertrieb Süd-West
Rheinland-Pfalz Diesterwegstraße 8 B
35745 Herborn
Tel.: (0 27 72) 92 42-0
Fax: (0 27 72) 92 42-28 12
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.keb.de

All Rights reserved KEB COMBIVERT F5-M / S 10.04.02 12 1 9
Karl E. Brinkmann GmbH
Försterweg 36 - 38 • D - 32683 Barntrup
Telefon 00 49 / 52 63 / 4 01 - 0 • Fax 00 49 / 52 63 / 4 01 - 1 16
Internet: www.keb.de • E-mail: [email protected]
KEB Antriebstechnik GmbH & Co. KG
Wildbacher Str. 5 • D - 08289 Schneeberg
Telefon 0049 / 37 72 / 67 - 0 • Telefax 0049 / 37 72 /67 - 2 81
E-mail: [email protected]
KEB Antriebstechnik Austria GmbH
Ritzstraße 8 • A - 4614 Marchtrenk
Tel.: 0043 / 7243 / 53586 - 0 • FAX: 0043 / 7243 / 53586 - 21
Kostelni 32/1226 • CZ - 370 04 Ceské Budejovice
Tel.: 00420 / 38 / 731 92 23 • FAX: 00420 / 38 / 733 06 97
E-mail: [email protected]
KEB Antriebstechnik
Herenveld 2 • B - 9500 Geraadsbergen
Tel.: 0032 / 5443 / 7860 • FAX: 0032 / 5443 / 7898
E-mail: [email protected]
KEB China
Xianxia Road 299 • CHN - 200051 Shanghai
Tel.: 0086 / 21 / 62350922 • FAX: 0086 / 21 / 62350015
Internet: www.keb-cn.com • E-mail: [email protected]
Société Française KEB
Z.I. de la Croix St. Nicolas • 14, rue Gustave Eiffel
F - 94510 LA QUEUE EN BRIE
Tél.: 0033 / 1 / 49620101 • FAX: 0033 / 1 / 45767495
E-mail: [email protected]
KEB (UK) Ltd.
6 Chieftain Buisiness Park, Morris Close
Park Farm, Wellingborough, GB - Northants, NN8 6 XF
Tel.: 0044 / 1933 / 402220 • FAX: 0044 / 1933 / 400724
Internet: www.keb-uk.co.uk • E-mail: [email protected]
KEB Italia S.r.l.
Via Newton, 2 • I - 20019 Settimo Milanese (Milano)
Tel.: 0039 / 02 / 33500782 • FAX: 0039 / 02 / 33500790
Internet: www.keb.it • E-mail: [email protected]
KEB - YAMAKYU Ltd.
15 – 16, 2 – Chome, Takanawa Minato-ku
J – Tokyo 108 -0074
Tel.: 0081 / 33 / 445-8515 • FAX: 0081 / 33 / 445-8215
E-mail: [email protected]
© KEB 00.F5.MEA-K230 06/2002

KEB Portugal
Lugar de Salgueiros – Pavilhao A, Mouquim
P - 4760 V. N. de Famalicao
Tel.: 00351 / 252 / 371 318 • FAX: 00351 / 252 / 371 320
E-mail: [email protected]
KEB Taiwan Ltd.
1F, No.19-5, Shi Chou Rd., Tounan Town
R.O.C. - Yin-Lin Hsian / Taiwan
Tel.: 00886 / 5 / 5964242 • FAX: 00886 / 5 / 5964240
E-mail: [email protected]
KEBCO Inc.
1335 Mendota Heights Road
USA - Mendota Heights, MN 55120
Tel.: 001 / 651 / 4546162 • FAX: 001 / 651 / 4546198
Internet: www.kebco.com • E-mail: [email protected]

Kcly k0c600 Manual
No ratings yet
Kcly k0c600 Manual
191 pages
Chp6 DC Motor Drives (Uncontrolled and Controlled Rectifier) - Final
No ratings yet
Chp6 DC Motor Drives (Uncontrolled and Controlled Rectifier) - Final
49 pages
HVTS-70-50 UM EN EN Rev2 8 - 13 08 20 PDF
50% (2)
HVTS-70-50 UM EN EN Rev2 8 - 13 08 20 PDF
33 pages
Lenze Parameters
100% (1)
Lenze Parameters
13 pages
Application Manual: Keb Combivert F5-A,-E,-H 4.5
No ratings yet
Application Manual: Keb Combivert F5-A,-E,-H 4.5
518 pages
Vs Controller Gs Driver p100 Operating Manual
100% (2)
Vs Controller Gs Driver p100 Operating Manual
124 pages
INVERTER ZVF11-M/S Series User's Manual INVERTER ZVF11-M/S Series User's Manual
No ratings yet
INVERTER ZVF11-M/S Series User's Manual INVERTER ZVF11-M/S Series User's Manual
40 pages
CR - Operation Manual PDF
0% (1)
CR - Operation Manual PDF
4 pages
NE200/NE300 N:) Jhiqfsgpsnbodf Wfdupsdpouspmesjwf) W
No ratings yet
NE200/NE300 N:) Jhiqfsgpsnbodf Wfdupsdpouspmesjwf) W
201 pages
GK-42 Photoelectric Correction Controller Instruction: One. Summary
0% (1)
GK-42 Photoelectric Correction Controller Instruction: One. Summary
3 pages
611U Manual PDF
No ratings yet
611U Manual PDF
976 pages
SET 600 Series User Manual
No ratings yet
SET 600 Series User Manual
189 pages
Development Information: KEB Info Specifications of The HSP5-Interface
No ratings yet
Development Information: KEB Info Specifications of The HSP5-Interface
3 pages
Delta VFD-B Manual
100% (2)
Delta VFD-B Manual
239 pages
Flow Totalizer Meter User Manual: IM05L1XF01-01C First Edition
100% (1)
Flow Totalizer Meter User Manual: IM05L1XF01-01C First Edition
75 pages
DL Manual - Com Vs Controller Gs Driver p100 Operating Manual
No ratings yet
DL Manual - Com Vs Controller Gs Driver p100 Operating Manual
124 pages
Ket-3000w1
No ratings yet
Ket-3000w1
172 pages
H5000BF Series User's Manual: 1. Preface
No ratings yet
H5000BF Series User's Manual: 1. Preface
19 pages
SET500 User Manual V2.9 Latest 041122
No ratings yet
SET500 User Manual V2.9 Latest 041122
140 pages
Siemens Simodrive 611 Universal Digital
67% (3)
Siemens Simodrive 611 Universal Digital
452 pages
VSB Manual
No ratings yet
VSB Manual
166 pages
Simphoenix E280 Vector Control - Universal Inverter Series Catalogue
100% (1)
Simphoenix E280 Vector Control - Universal Inverter Series Catalogue
12 pages
Lust Servo Converter, Operation Manual
No ratings yet
Lust Servo Converter, Operation Manual
114 pages
Eric Drive EI8001
No ratings yet
Eric Drive EI8001
53 pages
9513 Opto
No ratings yet
9513 Opto
18 pages
2 - XingTai Breif Catalogue
No ratings yet
2 - XingTai Breif Catalogue
18 pages
Panasonic Minas A5 Manual Pelny
No ratings yet
Panasonic Minas A5 Manual Pelny
394 pages
Moscon E7 Manual
No ratings yet
Moscon E7 Manual
88 pages
HH10 Series Drive
0% (1)
HH10 Series Drive
4 pages
Manual DMC 50720P
No ratings yet
Manual DMC 50720P
89 pages
FC 360 New Programming Guide
No ratings yet
FC 360 New Programming Guide
126 pages
Lenze 8200 Vector-25
No ratings yet
Lenze 8200 Vector-25
25 pages
Baumuller BUM60 Series Manual 20192693233
No ratings yet
Baumuller BUM60 Series Manual 20192693233
60 pages
KET-3000W4 S-Mini AC Drive Manual
No ratings yet
KET-3000W4 S-Mini AC Drive Manual
127 pages
Inovance It6000 Hmi Software Use Manual English 20 4 20
100% (1)
Inovance It6000 Hmi Software Use Manual English 20 4 20
345 pages
ED600
No ratings yet
ED600
16 pages
PD User Manual Inverter
No ratings yet
PD User Manual Inverter
60 pages
Delta VFD E Series User Manual
No ratings yet
Delta VFD E Series User Manual
399 pages
CS - 530-hướng - dẫn - sử - dụng - tiếng - anh 11
100% (2)
CS - 530-hướng - dẫn - sử - dụng - tiếng - anh 11
155 pages
LS (LG) Manuals 1593
No ratings yet
LS (LG) Manuals 1593
57 pages
BS Series - P3 - Servo Driver
No ratings yet
BS Series - P3 - Servo Driver
48 pages
FOR Series 15i: Servo Alarm
No ratings yet
FOR Series 15i: Servo Alarm
8 pages
Instruction Manual: FVR-E11S-7EN FVR-E11S-4EN
No ratings yet
Instruction Manual: FVR-E11S-7EN FVR-E11S-4EN
116 pages
DORNA EPS-B2 Servo User Manual
No ratings yet
DORNA EPS-B2 Servo User Manual
179 pages
Servo Controller
No ratings yet
Servo Controller
7 pages
V1.0 - 1901007 IS550 20140815 (001 194) .ZH CN - en Fusionado
No ratings yet
V1.0 - 1901007 IS550 20140815 (001 194) .ZH CN - en Fusionado
194 pages
Control Techniques Drive User Manual
No ratings yet
Control Techniques Drive User Manual
54 pages
Cadi Cd6000 VFD User Manual
0% (1)
Cadi Cd6000 VFD User Manual
118 pages
Multi-Axis Servo Operating Instructions
No ratings yet
Multi-Axis Servo Operating Instructions
237 pages
B Maxx 4000 Series
No ratings yet
B Maxx 4000 Series
76 pages
User Manual: Yf-Dz Computer Controlled Bag Making Machine
No ratings yet
User Manual: Yf-Dz Computer Controlled Bag Making Machine
9 pages
00 F 5 Meak 320
No ratings yet
00 F 5 Meak 320
388 pages
175 R0240 Rev 0106 VLT6000 VLT8000 Cascade Controller Option Instruction Manual
No ratings yet
175 R0240 Rev 0106 VLT6000 VLT8000 Cascade Controller Option Instruction Manual
354 pages
Application Manual: Keb Combivert F5-Basic / General 2.3
No ratings yet
Application Manual: Keb Combivert F5-Basic / General 2.3
334 pages
Manual Produkter Regulering Frekvensomformere Combivert F5 Serien F5 Basic Compact General
No ratings yet
Manual Produkter Regulering Frekvensomformere Combivert F5 Serien F5 Basic Compact General
354 pages
Instrukciya F5-A E H Ver.4.4 (En)
No ratings yet
Instrukciya F5-A E H Ver.4.4 (En)
552 pages
12f5a1d 3a0a F5 Servo Drive Keb Manual PDF
No ratings yet
12f5a1d 3a0a F5 Servo Drive Keb Manual PDF
512 pages
Keb
No ratings yet
Keb
96 pages
Combivert f4f
No ratings yet
Combivert f4f
300 pages
Combivert F4-C Manual
100% (1)
Combivert F4-C Manual
283 pages
KEB Manual F4C PDF
100% (1)
KEB Manual F4C PDF
282 pages
Advanced Multiplayer Game Development with Ureal Engine 5: A Comprehensive Guide to C++ Scripting
From Everand
Advanced Multiplayer Game Development with Ureal Engine 5: A Comprehensive Guide to C++ Scripting
Vladimir Kiselev
No ratings yet
Kabete Poly
No ratings yet
Kabete Poly
41 pages
Danfoss VLT 5000 Crane Operating Instructions
No ratings yet
Danfoss VLT 5000 Crane Operating Instructions
123 pages
Fact-Sheet DPS 2900B-48-12 CellD 600 en
No ratings yet
Fact-Sheet DPS 2900B-48-12 CellD 600 en
2 pages
ficha tecnica sirena estroboscopica
No ratings yet
ficha tecnica sirena estroboscopica
5 pages
TEMPARATURE CNTROOLED DC FAN Mini Project
No ratings yet
TEMPARATURE CNTROOLED DC FAN Mini Project
32 pages
Yamamoto A08-S Amplifier Kit: Horber Steige 25 72172 Sulz Germany Tel: ++49-1755382641
No ratings yet
Yamamoto A08-S Amplifier Kit: Horber Steige 25 72172 Sulz Germany Tel: ++49-1755382641
6 pages
Coils
0% (1)
Coils
20 pages
Ieee Device Numbers
No ratings yet
Ieee Device Numbers
11 pages
Training Power System Protection AREVA PDF
100% (4)
Training Power System Protection AREVA PDF
461 pages
Diodes Schottky 60V 5A 620Vrrm 620mVf 400uar VSSAF56-M36B Datasheet
No ratings yet
Diodes Schottky 60V 5A 620Vrrm 620mVf 400uar VSSAF56-M36B Datasheet
5 pages
Khan Chap-3
No ratings yet
Khan Chap-3
37 pages
Main - Power System Training Material V1.0-20071012
100% (4)
Main - Power System Training Material V1.0-20071012
26 pages
PE & A LABORATORY MANUAL 4th sem 2022 scheme 14.5.2024
No ratings yet
PE & A LABORATORY MANUAL 4th sem 2022 scheme 14.5.2024
47 pages
Guide Questions and Simulations For Report 03
No ratings yet
Guide Questions and Simulations For Report 03
5 pages
AEGPS Protect RCS EN PDF
No ratings yet
AEGPS Protect RCS EN PDF
4 pages
Lab Manual
No ratings yet
Lab Manual
44 pages
Eel Manual
No ratings yet
Eel Manual
62 pages
ZTE SDR BTS Introduction - V2.00 - 20130403
No ratings yet
ZTE SDR BTS Introduction - V2.00 - 20130403
63 pages
TechnicalSpecificationGuide Xe Lamp
No ratings yet
TechnicalSpecificationGuide Xe Lamp
123 pages
4 Steps To Convert 230V AC To 5V DC
0% (1)
4 Steps To Convert 230V AC To 5V DC
3 pages
Electromagnetic Induction 2022
No ratings yet
Electromagnetic Induction 2022
24 pages
Mitsubishi EDR15-20 - Troubleshooting
No ratings yet
Mitsubishi EDR15-20 - Troubleshooting
92 pages
5 KVA UPS Docs (HI-REL) PDF
75% (4)
5 KVA UPS Docs (HI-REL) PDF
53 pages
AE.1 Lecture 5
No ratings yet
AE.1 Lecture 5
31 pages
Electrical Short Courses Brochure
100% (1)
Electrical Short Courses Brochure
20 pages
Chapter 3 - Semiconductor Devices
No ratings yet
Chapter 3 - Semiconductor Devices
31 pages
Advanced Electric Drives Prof. S. P. Das Department of Electrical Engineering Indian Institution of Technology, Kanpur Lecture - 40
No ratings yet
Advanced Electric Drives Prof. S. P. Das Department of Electrical Engineering Indian Institution of Technology, Kanpur Lecture - 40
18 pages
Final Project - Report - 2021
No ratings yet
Final Project - Report - 2021
59 pages